PDF Siemens Saturn IIE EPABX General Description

Saturn IIE EPABX General Description Saturn IIE EPABX General Description

User Manual: PDF T E X T F I L E S

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 359

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

A30808-X5130-AllO-l-8918
Issue 1, May 1986

Siemens Practices
General Series

Issued by Office Systems Group
5500 Sroken Sound Boulevard N.W., Boca Raton, Florida 33431
Siemen.s Information

Systems,

Inc.

(305) 994-8100 e Telex: 515052
___Printed in U.S.A.

A30808-X5130-AllO-l-8918
Issue 1, May 1986

Siemens Practices
General Series

0 Siemens Information
All rights reserved.

Systems,

Inc., 1985

This material is proprietary to Siemens Information Systems, Inc. Any unauthorized
reproduction, use or disclosure of this material, or any part thereof, is strictly prohibited.
Siemens reserves the right to make changes in specifications at any time and without
notice. The information furnished by Siemens in this material is believed to be accurate
and reliable. However, no responsibility is assumed by Siemens for its use.
SATURN is a registered

trademark

of Siemens

Information

Systems,

Inc.

SATURN IIE EPABX
General Description

A30808-X5130-AllO-l-B918
Issue 1, May 1986

LIST OF FIGURES

CONTENTS
PAGE

SECTION
1.00 INTRODUCTION ...........................
Purpose ..................................
Scope.. ..................................
Siemens SATURN IIE Practices ................
Siemens Customer Support Services. ...........

l-1
l-l
l-l
l-l
l-l

2.00 SYSTEM OVERVIEW. ........
, ............
General ..................................
Features .................................
Hardware Description .......................
Software Description. .......................
System Capacities and Specifications ..........

2-1
2-1
2-l
2-3
2-7
2-7

3.00 SATURN IIE EQUIPMENT CABINET ...........
Cabinet Layout .............................
Lineflunk Unit Shelf ........................
Basic Shelf. ...............................

3-l
3-1
3-5
3-6

4.00 POWER SUPPLIES ........................
Main Power Section .........................
Power System Unit. .........................
Basic Shelf Power Supply ....................
Memory Support Module .....................
Control Logic ..............................
Ring Generator ............................
Power Supply Circuit Breakers. ................
Linemunk Unit Power Supply ..................
4a-Volt Power Supply ........................

4-l
4-l
4-l
4-l
4-l
4-3
4-3
4-3
4-3
4-3

5.00 MISCELLANEOUS
MODULE ASSEMBLIES
Floppy Disk Drive. ..........................

.....

5-l
5-l

6.00 PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS ........
, .......
Dimensions ................................
Controller/Input-Output
Processor ..............
Signal Multiplexer/Tone Generator ..............
Parallel/Serial Converter ......................
Memory Control and Attenuation ...............
Conference. ...............................
Memory ..................................
Dual-Tone Multifrequency Receiver. .............
Remote Access UniUPotis ....................
Line/Trunk Unit Control ......................
Subscriber Line Module Analog - Station ........
Subscriber Line Module Analog Off-Premises Station .......................
Subscriber Line Module Analog - 16 Lines ......
Premium Instrument Module Digital ............
Subscriber Line Module Digital ...............
Trunk Types. ..............................
Two-Wire E&M Trunk. .......................
Four-Wire E&M Trunk .......................
Central Office Trunk ........................
Direct Inward Dialing Trunk. ..................
7.00 SATURN IIE ANCILLARY EQUIPMENT
Service Terminal ............................
Attendant Console : .........................

. , ...

8.00 STATION MESSAGE DETAIL RECORDING
General. ..................................
Call Record Items ..........................
Special SMDR Messages ....................

....

6-1
6-l
6-2
6-2
6-2
6-2
6-2
6-2
6-2
6-2
6-3
6-3
6-3
6-15
6-15
6-15
6-15
6-15
6-15
6-15
6-15
, ...

7-l
7-l
7-3

, . 8-l
a-i

8-l
8-3

FIGURE

PAGE

2.00 SATURN IIE System - Basic Cabinet Only
2.01 SATURN IIE System - Including
Expansion Cabinet
.
2.02 SATURN IIE System Block Diagram
3.00 SATURN IIE Basic System - Front View .
3.01 SATURN IIE Expanded System - Front View
3.02 SATURN IIE Expanded System - Rear View
3.03 Linefiunk Unit Shelf
. .
.
.
.
3.04 Basic Shelf
....
.
.
.
4.00 Power Supplies . . .
.. ..
.
6.00 Controller/Input-Output
Processor Printed
Circuit Board
....
. .
..
..
6.01 Signal Multiplexer/Tone Generator Printed
Circuit Board
.
.
.
.. ..
6.02 Parallel/Serial Converter Printed Circuit Board .
6.03 Memory Control and Attenuation Printed
Circuit Board
6.04 Conference Printed ‘Circuit Board : : : : 1 1 : 1 1 1 : :
6.05 Memory 3 (MEMB) Printed Circuit Board
.
6.06 Memory 4 (MEM4) Printed Circuit Board
6.07 Dual-Tone Multifrequency Receiver
Printed Circuit Board
. ..
.
6.08 Remote Access Unit/Ports Printed Circuit Board
6.09 Line/Trunk Unit Control Printed Circuit Board .
6.10 Subscriber Line Module Analog - Station
Printed Circuit Board
..
. .
...
.
6.11 Subscriber Line Module Analog - Off-Premises
Printed Circuit Board . . . . .
..
. .
6.12 Subscriber Line Module Analog - 16 Lines
Printed Circuit Board .
.
...
.
6.13 Premium Instrument Module Digital
Printed Circuit Board
.
....
6.14 Subscriber Line Module Digital Printed
Circuit Board
..
.
.
6.15 Two-Wire E&M Trunk (TMBA-2) Printed
Circuit Board
.
.. .
.
6.16 Four-Wire E&M Trunk (TMBA-4) Printed
Circuit Board
.
.
.
6.17 Central Office Trunk (TMBM) Printed
Circuit Board
.
..
6.18 Direct Inward Dialing Trunk (TMIE) Printed
Circuit Board
.
, . .
7.00 Example of Administrative CMU Procedure
7.01 SATURN Attendant Console
.
..
::::
8.00 Example of SMDR Printout .
..
...
.

2-4

2-5
2-6
3-2
3-3
3-4
3-5
3-6
4-2
6-4
6-5
6-6

6-7
: 1 6-8
6-9
6-10
6-11
6-12
6-13
. 6-14
. 6-16
6-17
6-18
. 6-19
6-21
6-22
6-23
6-24

7-1
: : 7-3
8-4

LIST OF TABLES
TABLE
1.00 Mnemonics Used in This Practice
2.00 SATURN IIE Features - Alphabetica; Listing
by Major Categories .
. .
.
. ..
2.01 SATURN IIE System Capacities and Specifications
2.02 Input/Output Impedance, Leak Resistance,
and Loop Characteristics
,..
.
..
2.03 SATURN IIE Supervisory Audible Tones
..
3.00 LTU Printed Circuit Boards on LTU Shelf and
Basic Shelf
,... ..
.
.
3.01 Common Equipment Printed Circuit Boards
. .
6.00 SATURN IIE Printed Circuit Boards
.
6.01 Trunk Types Used in the SATURN IIE System
6.02 Trunk Signaling and Supervision
... ...
.

PAGE
l-l
.
. 2-1
. 2-8
. 2-13
2-13
3-6
3-7
6-l
6-20
6-20

A30808-X5130-AllO-l-B918
Issue 1, May 1986

SATURN IIE EPABX
General Description

SECTION

1.00 INTRODUCTlON

1.01 Purpose. This practice provides a general description
of the SATURN IIE digital Electronic Private Automatic Branch
Exchange (EPABX), including the hardware, software, technical characteristics,
and functional block diagram.
1.02 Scope. Section 2 of this practice provides an overview
of the SATURN IIE System, including information on the hardware and software configurations, plus data pertaining to system features and characteristics. Sections 3 through 5 provide
information on the SATURN IIE System equipment cabinets
and shelves, and their related power supplies and module
assemblies. Descriptions of the various printed circuit boards
used in the SATURN IIE System are presented in Section 6.
Section 7 presents information on a standard service terminal and the attendant console, and peripheral station equip-

Table 1.00 Mnemonics
MNEMONIC
ACC
ACD
ANA
ATT
AUD
ccs
CCSA
CIOP
CMU
co
CODEC
CONF
CPU
DCI
DEST
DID
DISA
DIT
DTMF
E&M
EPABX
EPSCS
FDD
FX
LCR
LDN
LED
LTU
LTUC
LTUPS
MCA
MDF
MMC
MEM3
MEM4
MSM
NAK
OPR
PCB
PCM
PFI
PIMD

ment. Finally, Section 8 describes Station Message Detail
Recording (SMDR). Table 1.00 defines the common mnemonics used in this practice.
1.03 Siemens SATURN HE Practices. The practices, issue
numbers and dates for the SATURN IIE EPABX are listed in the
Practices Documentation Index A30808-X5130-AlgO- * -8987.
NOTE:

Always refer to the latest issue of the applicable index to obtain the latest issue number of a practice.

1.04 Siemens
Customer
Support
Services.
Siemens
maintains a nationwide network of field service offices. Contact the Siemens regional office for any engineering
assistance which may be required.

Used in This Practice
DESCRIPTION

Access
Automatic Call Distribution
Assigned Night Answer
Attendant
Audible
Hundred Call-Seconds
Common Control Switching Arrangement
Controller/Input-Output
Processor
Customer Memory Update
Central Office
Coder/Decoder
Conference
Central Processing Unit
Data Communications
Interface
Destination
Direct Inward Dialing
Direct Inward System Access
Dedicated Incoming Trunk
Dual Tone Multifrequency
Receive and Transmit
Electronic Private Automatic Branch Exchange
Enhanced Private Switched Communications
Service
Floppy Disk Drive
Foreign Exchange
Least Cost Routing
Listed Directory Number
Light Emitting Diode
Line/Trunk Unit
LineiTrunk Unit Control
Line/Trunk Unit Power Supply
Memory Control and Attenuator
Main Distribution Frame
Meet-Me Conference
Memory 3 (256K)
Memory 4 (1 Megabyte)
Memory Support Module
Negative Acknowledgement
Operator Call Queue Answer
Printed Circuit Board
Pulse Code Modulation
Power Failure Interrupt
Premium Instrument Module Digital

A30808-X5130-AllO-l-8918
Issue 1, May 1986

SATURN IIE EPABX
General Description

Table 1.00 Mnemonics
MNEMONIC
PROM
PSC
PSU
RAM
RAUP
RCL
RGEN
RLS
RT
see
SDT
SLA16
SLMA-0
SLMA-S
SLMD
SMDR
SMXTG
SNAP
SPCL
SRC
TM BA-2
TM BA-4
TMBM
TMIE
TSU
UNA
WATS
ZUNA

1-2 (2 pages)

Used in This Practice
DESCRIPTION

Programmable
Read Only Memory
Parallel/Serial Converter
Power System Unit
Random Access Memory
Remote Access Unit/Ports
Recall Queue Answer
Ring Generator
Release Individual Party
Route
Specialized Common Carrier
Siemens Digital Telephone
Subscriber Line Module Analog - 16 Lines
Subscriber Line Module Analog - Off-Premises
Subscriber Line Module Analog - Station
Subscriber Line Module Digital
Station Message Detail Recording
Signal Multiplexerflone
Generator
Special Night Answer Position
Special
Source
Two-Wire E&M Trunk
Four-Wire E&M Trunk
Central Office Trunk
Direct Inward Dialing Trunk
Time Switching Unit
Universal Night Answer
Wide Area Telephone Service
Zoned Universal Night Answer

(Continued)

SATURN IIE EPABX
General Description

A30808-X5130-AllO-1-8918
Issue 1, May 1986

SECTION 2.00 SYSTEM OVERVIEW
2.01 General. The SATURN IIE System is a state-of-the-art,
digital, stored-program EPABX that uses Pulse Code Modulation (PCM)/time division switching techniques. The system
is capable of supporting up to 992 ports (lines and trunks).
Analog-to-digital
and digital-to-analog conversion is provided by a codec per port. The system provides extensive business features previously found only in the largest private
telephone systems, plus a number of new innovative features.
The system can handle conventional telephones (rotary or
tone dialing) and can also be equipped with Siemens Digital
Telephones (SDTs).
2.02 Features.
The SATURN IIE System is softwarecontrolled; therefore, it can be programmed by the customer
to allow for features desired in a particular application. This
flexibility allows the system to be arranged to operate with
attendant completion of incoming calls, Direct Inward Dialing (DID), Dedicated Incoming Trunks (DITs), or any combination thereof. The features are assignable as: system-level;
station-, trunk-, or attendant console-related; and maintenance.
As the requirements of the customer change, the various features may be assigned and/or reassigned among the users.
When additional features become available, each system may
be enhanced via easy-to-use Customer Memory Update
(CMU) procedures and/or new load program disks. Refer to
the Siemens practice, SATURN IIE EPABX Feature Descriptions, for a comprehensive description of all features. A summary of these features is listed in Table 2.00.
Table 2.00 SATURN IIE Features
Alphabetical
Listing by Major Categories
SYSTEM

FEATURES

ACD Recorded Announcement
Service
Additional Input/Output Devices
Alarm Indication - Major
Alarm Indication - Minor
Alternate Routing
Assigned Night Answer
Automatic On-Line Diagnostic Testing and
Reporting
Brownout Protection
Code Call Access
Convection Cooling
Customer Memory Updating
CCSA Access
Central Office (City) Trunk Access
Daytime Trunk Control
Dedicated Incoming Trunks
Dictation Access
Digital Pad Switching
Direct Inward Dialing
Direct Inward System Access
Direct Inward System Access - Shared
Direct Outward Dialing
DID Flexible Station Numbering
DTMF System Outpulsing
DTMF-to-Dial-Pulse
Conversion
Eight-Digit Toll Code Restriction
End-to-End DTMF Signaling
EPSCS Access
External Extension Numbering

SATURN IIE Features
by Major Categories
(Continued)
SYSTEM

FEATURES

(Continued)

Fifteen-Digit Toll Code Restriction
Flexible Intercept Facilities
Flexible System Numbering Plan
FX Trunk Access
High Traffic Capacity
Incoming Class-of-Service
Blocking
Least Cost Routing
Least Cost Routing with Provisions for
Specialized Common Carrier
Line Lockout - Attendant Intercept
Line Lockout - Automatic
Low Power Consumption
Manual On-Line Diagnostic Testing
Memory Support
Multiple Listed Directory Number
Music on Hold - Line or Trunk Access
Music on Hold - Paging
Music on Hold - System
Night Service Automatic Switching
Off-Premises Station
Power Failure Restart - Floppy Disk
Recall to ANA
Remote Alarm Identification
Remote Customer Memory Updating
Remote On-Line Diagnostic Testing
Remote Traffic and Feature Usage Measurement
Special Night Answer Position
Station Class-of-Service
Station Extension Numbering
Station Message Detail Recording
Station-to-Station
Calling
Station-to-Station
Class-of-Service
Blocking
SMDR Account Codes
System Site ID
Tl Interface
Tandem Trunking
Tie Trunk Access
Traffic and Feature Usage Measurement
Trunk Group Class-of-Service
Trunk-to-Trunk Connections
Uniform Station Distribution Wiring
Variable Timing Parameters
Voice Mail Interface
Voice Paging Access - Zoned and Area
WATS Trunk Access
Zoned Universal Night Answer
ATTENDANT

FEATURES

Alert Busy Attendant Indication
Attendant Control of Station Dial Restrictions
Attendant Selective Answering Priority
Automatic Recall on Camp-On
Automatic Recall on Hold
Automatic Recall on No Answer
Automatic Recall Redial
Busy Verification of Station Lines
Busy Verification of Trunks
Call Hold

2-l

!3QWRN IIE EPABX
General Description

A@habeticai

Table 2.00 SATURN HE Features
Listing by Major Categories
(Continued)

ATTENDANT

FEATURES

(Continued)

Call Type Display
Call Waiting Indication
Called Extension Status Display
Called Station Number Display
Called Trunk Number Display
Calling Station Number Display
Calling Trunk Number Display
Camp-On
Cfass of Call Exclusion - Key(s)
Cfass of Call Exclusion - Programmed
Conference
Console Operation
Control of Facilities
Control of SMDR Facilities
Digital Clock Display
BZErectTrunk Access
iT%rectTrunk Group Access
Extension of Calls
Flexible Key Assignments
linterGonsole Calling and Transfer
Locked Loop Operation
UR Route Number Display
Minor Alarm Identification
Night Service Control
Numerical Call Waiting Display
Override
Senderized Operation
Serial Calling
Special Account Code Entry - Single-Line Telephone
Special Overflow Answer Position
Switched Loop Operation
Trunk Flash Capability
Trunk Group Alphanumeric Display
Trunk Group Indicators
Volume Control - Audible Alert
Volume Control - Audio
STATION

FEATURES

automatic Call Distribution
Add-On Conference
Attendant Override Security
Automatic Callback on Held Call
Call Forwarding - All Calls
Call Forwarding - Busy Lines
Call Forwarding - Fixed
Call Forwarding - No Answer
Gall Forwarding - Return
Call Forwarding - Secretarial
Call Forwarding to Public Network
Call Hold
Call Hold - Flip Flop (Broker)
(Call Park
Call Pickup - Directed
Call Pickup - Group
Call Tracing
Call Transfer
Call Transfer Security
Call Transfer with Automatic Camp-On
Call Waiting

Indication

Consultation Hold
Data Line Security

Alphabetical

Table 2.00 SATURN IIE Features
Listing by Major Categories
(Continued)
STATION

FEATURES

(Continued)

Dial Access to Attendant
Distinctive Ringing
Do Not Disturb
DTMF Dialing
Executive Override
Executive Override - Automatic
Executive Override Security
Executive Override Without Warning Tone
Hold to Attendant
Hot Line Service
Immediate Ringing
Internal Call Queuing - Callback
Internal Call Queuing - Standby
Last Number Redial
Meet-Me Conference
Message Waiting - Automatic Callback
Message Waiting - Cancellation
Message Waiting Capability
Mobile Authorization Codes
Multiline Pickup
Originate Only Service
Outgoing Call Queuing - Callback
Outgoing Call Queuing - Standby
Pilot Number Access
Rotary Dialing
Single-Line Telephone - Special
Account Code Entry
Speed Calling - Group
Speed Calling - Individual
Station-Controlled Conference
Station Forced Disconnect
Station Hunting - Busy Advance
Station Hunting - Circular
Station Hunting - No Answer Advance
Station Hunting - Secretarial
Station Hunting - Terminal
Stop Hunt
Terminate Only Service
SDT FEATURES

Abbreviated Ringing - Station Busy
Attendant Identification on Display
Automatic Answer
Automatic Intercom
Automatic Line Preference
Bridged Call
Call Forwarding

Display

Call Park Location Number Display
Call Pickup Source Display
Call Privacy
Call Release
Call Transfer to Attendant
Call Waiting Display
Callback Number Display
Common Audible Ringing
Conference Mode Display
Dial Input Verification Display
Direct Station Selection
Direct Trunk Group Selection
Direct Trunk Selection
Duration of Call Display

,<,’

A30808-X5130-AllO-l-B918
Issue 1, May 1986

SATURN IIE EPABX
General Description

Alphabetical

Table 2.00 SATURN IIE Features
Listing by Major Categories (Continued)
SDT FEATURES

(Continued)

Exclusive Hold
Executive Intercom
Feature Buttons
Forced Call Forwarding
Hands-Free Mute
Hands-Free Operation
I-Use indication
Incoming Call Display
Manual Hold
Manual Intercom
Message Waiting - Selective Automatic Callback
Message Waiting - Selective Cancellation
Message Waiting Source Display
Multiline Pickup
On-Hook Dialing
Pickup Buttons
Recall Identification Display
Saved Number Redial
Speed Calling - Individual List Display
Station-Defined
Direct Dial
Station Ringer Cutoff
Station Senderized Operation
SMDR Account Code Display
Time-of-Day Display
Timed-Reminder
Service
Voice Announce
2.03 Hardware Description.
In its basic configuration, the
SATURN IIE System is housed in a single light-weight equipment cabinet, called the basic cabinet (shown in Figure 2.00).
In its expanded configuration, the SATURN IIE System is
housed in a basic cabinet plus an expansion cabinet, as
shown in Figure 2.01. The equipment cabinet(s) contain all
functional units of the system. The system is divided into five
functional blocks of circuits as shown in the block diagram
of Figure 2.02. These functional blocks may be directly related to the system’s hardware groups. The functional blocks
are as follows:
a. Line/Trunk
b. Switching
c. Control
d. Power
e. Ancillary Equipment
The LINE/TRUNK block circuitry is distributed between the
basic shelf and the Line/lirunk Unit (LTU) shelf or shelves. It
contains the interfacing circuitry for trunks, station lines, SDTs,
Dual-Tone Multifrequency
(DTMF) receivers,
and the
Line/Trunk Unit Control (LTUC) circuitry for LTU shelves.
All trunks (incoming and outgoing) are connected to appropriate trunk circuits. (The trunk circuits carry various designations, depending on their type, such as: TMBA, TMBM, TMIE,
etc. These are described in Section 6 of this document.) The
trunk circuits interface two- and four-wire E&M, loop start,
ground start, and DID trunks to the system.
All conventional telephones (rotary dial and DTMF) are connected to a Subscriber Line Module Analog - Station (SLMA-S
or SLA16) or Subscriber Line Module Analog - Off-Premises

Station (SLMA-0). SDTs are connected to the system via Subscriber Line Modules Digital (SLMD). Premium Instrument
Modules - Digital (PIMD) serve as special line interface circuits that connect attendant consoles to the system. The
DTMF receivers are used to detect and validate DTMF tones
and detect dial tone on outgoing trunk calls.
The LTUC multiplexes and demultiplexes both the signal and
the voice highways, and provides the timing signals necessary to address the LTU circuits allocated in an LTU shelf. The
LTUC also provides the necessary interface to the CONTROL
and.SWlTCHlNG
blocks from the LTU shelf LINE/TRUNK
block. The LTUC circuitry is not required in the basic shelf
because the line and trunks circuits there have direct access
to the CONTROL and SWITCHING blocks. Each LTU shelf
may be equipped with a maximum of two LTUCs.
The CONTROL and SWITCHING block circuitry is contained
in the basic shelf. The CONTROL block consists of the Signal Multiplexer/Clock/Tone
Generator (SMXTG);the Signal
Buffer, Controller/Input-Output
Processor (CIOP); the System
Memory (MEM3 and MEM4); the Remote Access Unit/Ports
(RAUP); two 5-l/4 inch Floppy Disk Drives (FDDs); and a TTY
service terminal interface. The CONTROL BLOCK circuitry
receives circuit status signals from the LINE/TRUNK block,
evaluates these signals, and determines what type of action
is required for the proper processing of the call in progress.
This can be one of a number of actions, such as setting up
a dial tone connection or interconnection of two circuits. The
command signals for the required action are sent to the
SWITCHING and LINE/TRUNK blocks for processing.
The SMXTG is divided into three functional parts: a signal
multiplexer, the system clock generator, and the tone generator. The signal multiplexer is a hardware-controlled
scanner/distributor that provides com’munication between the LTU
PCBs (via LTUCs, except for those located on the basic shelf)
and the CIOR The signal multiplexer also handles control and
status signals for the 32 speech highways, each of which has
32 time slots. The clock generator produces the 8.19 MHz,
4.096 MHz, 2.048 MHz, and 250 Hz clocking signals required
to properly operate the SATURN IIE System. The tone generator produces all of the required supervisory tones (e.g., dial,
busy, ringback, etc.), plus DTMF tones for system outdialing,
and provides timing windows for tone and dial pulse
cadencing.
The Controller/Input-Output
Processor (CIOP) consists of the
Signal Buffer (SIB) and the main processor. It provides all of
the processor and input/output functions required of a basic
system. The SIB contains the circuitry that interfaces the signal multiplexer to the CIOP and also provides the interface
for the service terminal. The main processor directly provides
inputs to the FDD controllers and performs all system control functions. It uses Programmable Array Logic (PAL) and
contains Programmable Read-Only Memory (PROM), Random Access Memory (RAM), a microprocessor, and a bus
clock.
The minimum system main Memory (MEM) is 1.25 megabytes,
consisting of one l-megabyte RAM module (MEM4) and one
256K RAM module (MEM3). The memory can be expanded
by using either MEM3 or MEM4 modules, depending on
memory capacity requirements. The memory functions are
controlled via a RAM controller and accessed via a common
bus.

A~0808-X5130-A110-~-8918
Issue 1, May 1986

A30808-X5130-AllO-l-B918
issue 1, May 1986

SATURN IIE EPABX
General Description

SUBSCRIBER

LINE MODULE

LINE/TRUNK
ANCILLARY
EQUIPMENT

r--

----

LTU SHELF

--------)

LINE/TRUNK

I
I
I

SUBSCRIBER

SLMA-0
SLMA-S
1 SLA16

1
,
I

I
TRUNK
MODULE

TMBA 214
TMBM
TMIE

1
SWITCHING
NETWORK

CONFERENCE

;;EDuLE
.

SHELF

I
I
I

BASIC
------------

r---I
I
I

I
I

c
I’

CONTROLLER/INPUT-OUTPUT

I
LSUBSCRIBER
- LINE MODULE
DIGITAL
SLMD

PROCESSOR

MEM4 COMMON
CONTROL

[

--I----J

FOO

-_-------- ,

_-_---------

r---I

’
I

I----y

SOT

.,,Ir,-,

1
POWER

SUPPLIES

A4931.l-4/3/66

LTU CONTROL

1 /
I

ANCILLARY
EQUIPMENT
‘TWO

POWER. RING GEN.
RING SYNC,
AND MP.INTENANCE

PCBs P E R LTU SHELF

(MAXIMUM)

Figure

2.02

SATURN HE System

Block

Diagram

SATURN IIE EPABX
General Description

The system also includes two 5-l/4 inch floppy disk drives
(FDDs) with one megabyte of memory on each disk for generic
and customer data base backup and for CMU procedures.
The Remote Access Unit/Ports (RAUP) module has three (two
external) Electronics Industries Association RS-232-C serial
asynchronous ports. The two external ports are used for Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR), traffic metering,
maintenance, and/or CMU features. The other port is dedicated to the internal RAUP modem (self-setting to either 300
or 1200 baud, depending on the frequency received). Use of
the modem provides access for administration
and maintenance from a remote service terminal.
The SWITCHING block is under the direction of the CONTROL block. It switches digital signaling data between the
LINE/TRUNK block and the CONTROL block and digital voice
message data between the SWITCHING block and the
LINE/TRUNK block. The SWITCHING block also distributes
coded digital control and status data to the CONTROL block
circuitry.
The Parallel/Serial Converter (PSC) converts the serial PCM
voice signals from the LTUs to eight-bit parallel bytes, which
are then multiplexed onto an eight-bit-wide parallel highway
and sent to the Memory Control and Attenuator (MCA) circuitry for further processing. The reverse function is also performed to provide serial voice signals back to the LTUs.
The MCA is divided into two functional parts: a time switch
unit and the memory control. The time switch unit makes all
two-port connections and provides attenuation (as required)
for all calls being processed by the system. The memory control receives control data from the processor and causes the
time switch unit to make the required connections.
Another element of the SWITCHING block is the Conference
(CONF) circuit. The CONF circuit is required for simultaneous connections involving three to seven parties (plus the attendant).
The POWER block of the SATURN IIE System makes use of
distributed power to ensure maximum efficiency and reliability. The main POWER section is located on the bottom shelf
of the basic cabinet, and one LTU Power Supply (LTUPS) is
located next to the left end of each LTU shelf. The main POWER section contains the Power System Unit (PSU) and either
one or two -48 Vdc power supplies (-48PS). One of the -48
Vdc power supplies comes with the basic cabinet of the
SATURN IIE System. The second -48 Vdc power supply is added when the system is expanded to also contain the expansion cabinet. The PSU contains an ac-dc power supply to
provide the +5, -5, +12, and -12 dc voltages used by the basic
shelf, a Ring Generator (RGEN), an optional Memory Support Module (MSM) with battery, a fuse/circuit-breaker
panel,
and maintenance/power
logic circuitry.
The ANCILLARY EQUIPMENT block contains the devices
which are external to the SATURN IIE System, such as a terminal, the attendant console(s), and the individual telephone
sets and SDTs. Additional information regarding the ancillary
equipment is presented in Section 7 of this document.
The SATURN IIE System uses
2.04 Software Description.
software-programmed
switching. The system software is contained in two basic areas: on-line (resident) and off-line (nonresident and stored on two 5-l/4 inch floppy disks). The on-line

A30808-X5130-AllO-l-8918
Issue 1, May 1986

memory is divided into three segments: the generic system
software, the customer memory, and an overlay area. Switching control, performed by the Central Processing Unit (CPU),
uses data which is stored in generic software. The software
that controls the activation of these features resides in the
customer memory area, and is alterable via the CMU procedures. (The generic software may not be altered by the customer.) The overlay
area of memory
contains
the
administrative and maintenance programs, which are read in
from the 5-l/4 inch floppy disks for execution when required
by system craft personnel.
The SATURN IIE software is structured such that maintenance
and feature upgrade can be easily performed. The SATURN
IIE software uses state-event, device-oriented decision tables
with a single clock interrupt, event and common queues, and
multiple processing levels. A clock interrupt occurs every four
milliseconds
in the system. These interrupts activate the
preprocessor software level which, in turn, processes any
change in state condition detected by the peripheral cards.
These changes are then queued for processing at the base
level processor. The queue is subject to the priority and function of the change.
If, for example, an off-hook state is detected by the preprocessor, it is sorted, prioritized, and queued for the base level
processor. After the action request is removed from the queue,
the base level processor verifies line appearance and class
of service. The base level processor then determines, via the
state-event table, the appropriate action required (e.g., to
return dial tone to the off-hook line appearance). The base
level processor then sends appropriate messages to form a
network connection between the line appearance and tone
generator circuit ports.
Note that dial tone is generated by the tone generator circuit.
The idle level processor (the third level) occurs when free (idle)
processing time is used for deferrable maintenance, administrative, and other background testing activities.
Since the features of the SATURN IIE System may be controlled by the customer, an extremely flexible selection and
arrangement of the large number of features is possible. In
most cases, the features are provided and controlled exclusively by the software routines and require no additional hardware. These features may be added, changed, or deleted by
entering the appropriate input commands. In some cases,
hardware modifications may be required. These modifications
require the installation of one or more printed circuit boards
or modification of strapping on existing hardware. Activation
of the feature via software is done after completion of any such
hardware or wiring changes.
Software changes to the system may be made quickly and
with ease. The system accepts simplified, coded instructions
via a data entry terminal. The instructions are entered as alphanumeric keywords in response to plain English prompting by the system.
2.05 System Capacities and Specifications.
This section
of the practice lists the various capacities and specifications
pertaining to the SATURN IIE System. The system capacities are outlined in Table 2.01. This table shows the various
quantities of stations, trunks, attendant consoles and other
related apparatus that are considered maximum for the
SATURN IIE System. Note that all system maximums are not
necessarily simultaneously
available.

2-7

A30808-X5130-AllO-l-B918
Issue 1, May 1986

SATURN IIE EPABX
General Description

The system uses universal card slots to facilitate
system configuration engineering.

telephone network. Table 2.02 lists some of the system transmission characteristics.

individual

The supervisory tones used in the SATURN IIE System (refer
to Table 2.03) conform to the North American Precise Tone
Plan. Certain timing.characteristics
associated with various
tones can be changed by the customer.

The SATURN IIE System is compatible with accepted North
American telephone industry standards. The system is fully
compliant with Federal Communications Commission requirements for connection of terminal equipment to the public

Table 2.01

SATURN

HE System

NOTE: Not all maximums

are applicable

and Specifications
simultaneously.

Pulse Code Modulation
Switching Techniques

TECHNOLOGY
AVAILABLE SWITCHING
Basic Cabinet
Basic Cabinet

Capacities

PORTS

and Expansion

POWER DISSIPATION
Basic Cabinet
Basic plus Expansion

CABINET WEIGHT
Basic Cabinet
Fully Loaded
Floor Loading
Basic & Expansion
Fully Loaded
Floor Loading

Cabinet

CABINET SIZE
Width
Depth
Height
Basic Cabinet
Basic & Expansion

(PCM) and Time Division

224 Ports (Circuits), Basic Shelf
480 Ports (Circuits), Basic Shelf and One LTU Shelf
736 Ports (Circuits), One LTU Shelf in
Expansion Cabinet
992 Ports (Circuits), Two LTU Shelves in
Expansion Cabinet
800 watts nominal
1600 watts nominal
107 cm (42 in.)
68.6 cm (27 in.)

Cabinet

111.7 cm (44 in.)
179 cm (70.5 in.)

200 kg (440 Ibs)
268.5 kglsq m (55 lbslsq ft)
Cabinet
311 kg (685 Ibs)
439 kg/sq m (90 Ibs/sq ft)

CABINET CONTENTS:
Basic Shelf
Line/Trunk Unit Shelf
Floppy Disk Drive

1: Standard
1 to 3: Optional
2: Standard

CABINET INPUT POWER REQUIREMENTS
Basic Cabinet
Basic and Expansion Cabinet

110 Vat, 60 Hz
110 Vat, 60 Hz, 14 Amperes
110 Vat, 60 Hz, 26 Amperes’

TEMPERATURE:
Operating System
Storage

4O to 38O C (40° to 100’ F)
-40° to 66O C (-40° to 151” F)

HUMIDITY:
Operating
Storage

20% to 80% (Noncondensing)“”
0% to 95% (Noncondensing)

System

ALTITUDE ABOVE SEA LEVEL:
Operating System
Storage

Up to 3,048 meters (10,000 ft)
Up to 12,192 meters (40,000 ft)

Uses two ac input power cords
* Above 78 degrees F., humidity must be limited to the equivalent
l

2-8

of 49% relative humidity

at 100 degrees

A30808-X5130-AllO-l-6918
Issue 1, May 1986

SATURN IIE EPABX
General Description

Table 2.01

SATURN

HE System

Capacities

NOTE: Not all maximums

NETWORK

TRAFFIC

30 Available
3: RS-232-C
1: Modem

INTERFACES

8-PORT CONFERENCE

CIRCUITS

4-PORT CONFERENCE

CIRCUITS

SYSTEM

simultaneously.

36 CCS per port or 1 Erlang per port (non-blocking)

CAPACITY

TONE CHANNELS
INPUT/OUTPUT

are applicable

FEATURES

LEAST COST ROUTING
Area/Office Code Combinations
Specialized Common Carriers
Digit Number Analysis
Least Cost Routes
Trunk Group Elements Within a Route
Class-of-Service
Priorities
Quantity of User On-Hook Queuing Callback
Dial Tone Detection Available
Time Bands Available
Time Schedules Available

Attempts

STATION MESSAGE DETAIL RECORDING
Call Buffers
Standard Account Codes - Numbers
Account Codes - Length
NIGHT SERVICE
Zoned Universal Night Answer
l
Number of Zones
l
Trunks per Zone
l
Station Access per Zone
Assigned Night Answer
l
Trunk-to-Station Assignments
l
LDN to ANA Assignments (for DID)
l
Special Night Answer Position

128,000
up to 3
Full
50
8
16
0 to 9
Full
168 (Hour of Day & Day of Week)
8
255
255
1 to 11 Digits per Code

4
100%
100%
255
1 per DID Trunk Group
1 Station or Hunt Group per System

VOICE MAIL INTERFACE

1 per System

CODE CALLING
Calling Channels
Answerback Channels

1
Unlimited

AUTHORIZATION
CODES
Direct Inward System Access/Mobile
Authorization Codes

2000

SHORT ANNOUNCEMENT
Recorded Announcement

SERVICE
Channels

for ACD Groups

DIAL DICTATION
Channels
ATTENDANT
NUMBER

(Continued)

DTMF RECEIVERS
SWITCHING

and Specifications

1
4 (Maximum)

CONSOLE

OF CONSOLES

ATTENDANT KEYS
Loop Keys
Fixed Function Keys
Assignable Function Keys

PER SYSTEM

12 (Maximum)
4
12
18

(Rev. 5115186) 2-9

A30808-X5130-AllO-143918
Issue 1, May 1986

SATURN IIE EPABX
General Description

Table 2.01

SATURN

IIE System

Capacities

NOTE: Not all maximums

and Specifications

are applicable

(Continued)

simultaneously.

ATTENDANT QUEUES
Operator Calls (Shared)
Incoming Calls (Shared)
Recalls (Shared)
Trunk Queuing Callback (Shared)

48
255
48
5 (per Console)

DISPLAYS AND INDICATORS
Number of Display Characters
Indicators per Function Key
Trunk Group Busy Indicators
Miscellaneous
Indicators

40
1
24
6

ATTENDANT OVERFLOW FACILITY
Assigned Positions per System

1 Station or 1 Hunt Group

DISTANCE

610 Cable Meters (2000 Cable Feet)

FROM SYSTEM

TRUNKS
NUMBER

OF TRUNK

GROUPS

PER SYSTEM

NUMBER OF TRUNKS
Total Trunks per System
Total per Trunk Group
Dedicated Incoming Trunks
E&M Type Trunks

255
100
255
255

TRUNK

1 per Trunk Group

GROUP

CLASSES

TRUNK GROUP IDENTITY
Number Available
Characters per Code
ALTERNATE

ROUTES

OF SERVICE
CODES

1 per Trunk Group
8

PER TRUNK

GROUP

3 (Without LCR)
8 Elements per Route with LCR

TRUNK PRIORITY LEVELS
(for Attendant Console Queuing)

DIRECT INWARD DIALING (DID)
DID Trunk Groups
Number of Digit Translation Tables
Digits Expected from Central Office
Digits Absorbed
Digits Prefixed
Digits Translated
Recorded Announcement
Channels for Intercept

32
4
2 to 5
0 to 3
oto2
2 (Maximum)
1

OUTGOING TRUNK QUEUING
Trunk Groups Assigned with Outgoing Trunk Queuing
(Callback and/or Standby)
Simultaneous Station Queuing for a Trunk
(Callback and/or Standby Shared with Station
Automatic Callback)

32
80

STATIONS
CONVENTIONAL
SIEMENS

TELEPHONES

DIGITAL TELEPHONES

* 16 SLMD cards maximum

2-10

per shelf.

992 (Maximum)
‘512 (Maximum)

A30808-X5130-AllO-l-8918
issue 1, May 1986

SATURN IIE EPAEX
General Description

Table 2.01

SATURN

HE System

Capacities

NOTE: Not all maximums

and Specifications

are applicable

(Conticued)

simultaneously.

STATION FEATURES
STATION CLASSES

OF SERVICE

CODE RESTRICTION LISTS
Eight-Digit Lists
Eight-Digit Numbers
Fifteen-Digit Lists
Fifteen-Digit Numbers

32
16
16 per List Average (256 Flexible)
4
8 per List Average (32 Flexible)

HUNTING
Terminal Hunt Groups
Terminal Hunt Group Members
Circular Hunt Groups
Circular Hunt Group Members
Voice/Data Automa?ic Call Distribution
(ACD) Hunt Groups
Voice ACD Hunt Group Members
Data ACD Hunt Group Members
Pilot Number Access Hunt Groups
Pilot Number Access Hunt Group Members

64
96 per Group
96 per Group
Unlimited
30 per Group

CALL PARK
System Park Locations
Station Park Locatiohs (Call Hold)

10
1 per Station

CALL FORWARDING
Call Forwarding
- Variable
l
Availability
l
Simultaneously

Active

100% of Lines
Unlimited

Call Forwarding
- Busy Line
l
Availability
l
Simultaneously

Active

100% of Lines
Unlimited

Call Forwarding
- No Answer
l
Availability
l
Simultaneously

Active

100% of Lines
Unlimited

Call Forwarding
- Secretarial Intercept
l
Availability
l
Simultaneously
Active
l
Answering Positions

100% of Lines
Unlimited
64

Call Forwarding to Public Network
l
Availability
l
Simultaneously
Active
l
Digits per Network Number

100% of Lines
32
18 (Includes Access Code)

Unlimited
30 per Group
Unlimited
30 per Group

CALL PICKUP
Dial Call Pickup Group
Members per Dial Call Pickup Group
Directed Call Pickup Availability

Unlimited
30
100% of Lines

CONSULTATION, TRANSFER, AND
ADD-ON CONFERENCE
Availability
Simultaneous Consultations
Simultaneous Transfers
Simultaneous Add-On Conferences

100% of Lines
Unlimited
Unlimited
24

2-11

A30808-X5130-AllO-l-6918
Issue 1, May 1986

SATURN IIE EPABX
General Description

Tabie 2.01

SATURN IIE System

Capacities

NOTE: Not all maximums
S-i:TION

FEATURES

and Specifications

are applicable

simultaneously.

(Continued)

CALL WAITING
Call Waiting Originating
l
Availability

100% of Lines

Call Waiting Terminating
l
Availability

100% of Lines

Simultaneous Calls Waiting
l
Per System
l
Per Line

100% of Lines
1 station & any number

STATION CAMP-ON AND AUTOMATIC CALLBACK
Availability
Simultaneous Stations Queued for Callback

100% of Lines
80

MESSAGE WAITING
Availability

100% of stations
108
(18- and

SPEED CALLING
Individual
l
Lists per System
0 Numbers per List
l
Digits per Number
l
Availability
Group
* Lists per System
* Numbers per List
* Digits per Number
l
Availability
System

64
10
18
1 Station per List
:4
18
100% per List
(See Speed Calling -

LAST NUMBER REDIAL
Numbers Stored in System
Numbers Stored per Station
Digits per Number
Availability (Stations)

255
1
18
255

NONDIAL LINE SERVICES
Direct Attendant Signaling Lines
Switched Direct Line Service
Nondial Line Destinations

100% of Stations
100% of Stations
32

TEMPORARY CLASS-OFSCRVICE
BY ATTENDANT
Simultaneously
Active
DIGITAL

of trunks

LAMPS ON STATIONS

Simultaneous Messages Waiting
e Number per System
l
Per Conventional Telephone
l
Per Siemens Digital Telephone
26-button)

SIEMENS

(Continued)

Group)

CHANGE
Unlimited

TELEPHONES

Siemens Digital Telephone (SDT)
Distinct Line Appearances
Buttons per Station
Button Appearances per Line
Button Maps per System
Distance from System
+ 16 SLMD cards maximum

per shelf.

“512 (Maximum)
864
16, 18, or 26
8
32
610 Cable Meters (2,000 Cable Feet)

A30808-X5130-AllO-l-8918
Issue 1, May 1986

SATURN IIE EPABX
General Description

Table 2.02

Input/Output

Impedance,

Leak Resistance,

INPUT/OUTPUT
IMPEDANCE
Lines
Trunks (Strappable)

600 ohms, nominal
600 ohms, or Bell City Trunk Termination
(OPS Compromise Network)

LOOP CHARACTERISTICS
Stat;at;l;nterfaced
via SLMA-S or SLA16

Stations

interfaced

and Loop Characteristics

via l SLMA-0

Module

1,200 ohms, maximum
including telephone
15,000 ohms minimum

loop resistance,
leak resistance

1,800 ohms, maximum
30,000 ohms minimum

loop resistance
leak resistance

Central Office Trunks
via TMBM Module

1,200 ohms, maximum loop
resistance, with 48-volt (nominal) battery
30,000 ohms minimum leak resistance

Direct Inward Dial Trunks
via TMIE Module

2,450 ohms, maximum
30,000 ohms minimum

* SLMA-0

module

is registered

loop resistance
leak resistance

with FCC for Class C operation

Table 2.03
Tone Name

SATURN IIE Supervisory

Audible

Tones
Timing

Frequency

Rate

Dial Tone

350 + 440 Hz

Steady tone.

Reorder Tone

480 + 620 Hz

Repetition of tone ON for 0.25 second and tone OFF for
0.25 second.

Busy Tone

480 + 620 Hz

Repetition of tone ON for 0.5 second and tone OFF for
0.5 second.

Audible

440 + 480 Hz

Repetition of tone ON for 0.8 - 1.2 seconds
OFF for 2.7 - 3.3 seconds.

350 + 440 Hz

Three bursts of tone ON for 0.08 - 0.12 second and tone
OFF for 0.08 - 0.12 second, followed by dial tone.

440 + 620 Hz

Repetition of combined tone ON for 0.8 - 1.2 seconds,
followed by 440 Hz tone ON for 0.2 second and tone
OFF for 2.7 - 3.3 seconds.

Intercept Tone

440 + 620 Hz

Repetition of alternating
for 0.16 - 0.3 second,
second.

Call Waiting Tone(s)

440 Hz

One burst of tone ON for 0.1 - 0.3 second for a waiting
station call. Two bursts of tone ON for 0.1 - 0.3
second apart for a waiting attendant or trunk call.

Busy Override Tone
(also, Attendant
Override Tone)

440 Hz

Three bursts of tone ON for 0.25 second and tone OFF
for 1.75 seconds, followed by attendant connection.

440 Hz

One burst of tone ON for 2.0 - 4.0 seconds
overriding station intrudes.

350 + 440 Hz

Three bursts of tone ON for 0.08 - 0.12 second,
0.08 - 0.12 second apart.

480 + 620 Hz

Steady tone.

Ring Tone

Recall Dial Tone
Special Audible

Executive

Ring Tone

Override

Confirmation

Tone

Camp-On Tone (also, Low
Tone or Uninterrupted
BusyTone)

and tone

the two frequencies, each ON
with a total cycle duration of 0.5

before

A30808-X5130-AllO-l-8918
issue 1, May 1986

SATURN IIE EPABX
General Description

Table 2.03

SATURN

IIE Suoervisorv

Audible

Timing

Frequency

Tone Name

Tones (Continued1
Rate

480 + 620 Hz

Repetition of tone ON for 0.125 second
for 0.125 second.

440 Hz

One burst of tone ON for 0.4 - 0.6 second,
conferee connection.

Quiet Tone

0 Hz

Steady tone.

Busy Override Injection
Tone (also, Privacy Tone)

440 Hz

Bursts of tone ON for 0.25 second, 8 - 20 seconds
apart, applied while an overriding party is present
on a connection

Route Advance Tone
(for Least Cost Routing
- LCR)

350 + 440 Hz

One burst of tone ON for 0.08 - 0.12 second.

Warning Tone
(also, Expensive
Facility Tone - LCR)

440 Hz

One burst of tone ON for 0.8 - 0.12 second.

Test Tone

1004 Hz

Steady tone.

Negative
Acknowledgement
(NAK) Tone

480 + 620 Hz

1.5 seconds

Invalid Camp-On
Conference

Tone

and tone OFF
followed

(i.e., three cycles) of reorder tone.

SATURN IIE EPABX
General Description

A30808-X5130-AllO-l-8918
Issue 1, May 1986

SECTION 3.00

SATURN IIE EQUIPMENT

3.01 Cabinet Layout. The SATURN IIE System consists of
either a basic cabinet only (Figure 3.00) or a basic cabinet
plus an expansion cabinet as shown in Figures 3.01 and 3.02.
The basic cabinet contains an LTU shelf, a basic shelf, and
an area at the bottom of the cabinet where the main power
section and floppy disk drives are located.
The basic shelf is always equipped in the system. It contains
all the PCBs that make up the common control and switching circuitry for the SATURN IIE System, plus seven LTU channel groups containing 224 port circuits.
One LTU shelf may optionally be equipped in the basic cabinet. It provides an additional 256 ports in eight channel groups
for a total of 480 ports in the basic cabinet. This LTU shelf
requires an LTU Power Supply (LTUPS).
The expansion cabinet, which mounts on top of the basic cabinet, expands the basic cabinet by either one or two additional LTU shelves (Figures 3.01 and 3.02). Each of these shelves
has its own LTUPS and provides eight channel groups for a
total of 256 ports per shelf. Thus, when the expansion cabinet is added, the expanded system may have a total of either
736 or 992 ports. When the expansion cabinet is added, the
top cover is removed from the basic cabinet and reinstalled
as the top cover of the expansion cabinet.

CABINET

The LTU portion of the system is arranged in channel groups
of 32 channels each, one channel being used for each port.
Each channel group consists of universal card slots. Some
of the channel groups contain four card slots each, and the
others contain two card slots each. Each card in a channel
group contains either two, four, eight, or sixteen circuits, depending on the card type. Each circuit uses one port on the
system (except in the case of the PIMD card, each circuit of
which takes up two ports).
The main power section is located at the bottom of the cabinet. This section contains the Power System Unit (PSU), one
or two -48 Vdc power supplies depending upon whether or
not the expansion cabinet is equipped, and the two FDDs required by the system. The following units are housed within
the PSU:
a.

acldc power supply to supply +5, -5, +12, and -12 Vdc
to the basic shelf.
Ring generator.
Memory Support Module (MSM), optional, with battery.
Fuse/circuit

breaker panel

Control Logic PCB.

A30808-X5130-AllO-l-B918
Issue 1, May 1986

JRN IIE EPABX
val Description

LTU
SHELF

BASIC
SHELF

FDDs
PSU

85171%l-4/17/66

Figure

3.00

SATURN IIE Basic System

-48PS

- Front View

-48PS

(Optional)

A30808-X5130-AllO-l-8918
Issue 1, May 1986

SATURN

IIE

*1m*a*s

/
t
/

P5070.l-3120/86

Figure

3.01

SATURN IIE Expanded

System

- Front View

A30808-X5130-AllO-l-8918
Issue 1, May 1986

SATURN IIE EPABX
General Description

P5070-4-3120186

Figure

3.02

SATURN

HE Expanded

System

- Rear View

SATURN IIE EPABX
General Description

A30808-X5130-AllO-l-8918
Issue 1, May 1986

3.02 Line/Trunk Unit Shelf. The LTU shelf, shown in Figure
3.03, can contain eight channel groups of LTU modules, consisting of the DTMF receiver, line, and trunk PCBs, two
LineiTrunk Unit Control (LTUC) PCBS, and an LTUPS.

The LTU peripheral PCBs provide the interface between the
SATURN IIE System and the external devices, which include
the station lines, trunks, and attendant consoles. All of the
types of LTU PCBs used in the LTU shelf and the LTU portion
of the basic shelf are listed in Table 3.00. The LTUC cards are
assigned to slot 6 and/or 19 of the applicable LTU shelf. Assignment of the other LTU PCBs is as described in the Instailation document in this series of Practices.

The LTUCs interface with the common control area in the basic shelf and communicate with the LTU peripheral PCBs.

ASSEMBLY
SLOTNO.
0

CHANNEL ,--CH GP---,
GROUP
0
0121416
SLOTNO.

CH GP
0

10
2

-CH

10 11 12 13 14

GP+-,
2

Figure

3.03

416

CH GP -CH
3
012

Line/Trunk

15 16

GP-,
4

012

17 16 19 20

,-CH

CH GP
6

5
012

2
5

21 22

GP-

6
0121416

23 24

CH GP
7
012

Unit Shelf

3-5

SATURN IIE EPABX
General Description

A30808-X5130-AllO-l-0918
issue 1, May 1986

Table 3.00

LTU Printed

Circuit

Boards

on LTU Shelf

and Basic Shelf

DESIGNATION

DTMF

DUAL-TONE

MULTIFREQUENCY

LTUC (LTU shelf only)

LINE/TRUNK

UNIT CONTROL

PIMD

PREMIUM

INSTRUMENT

RECEIVER

(Equip per Data Base Preparation

(One per four channel groups)

MODULE

DIGITAL

SUBSCRIBER

LINE MODULE

ANALOG

- 16 LINES

SUBSCRIBER

LINE MODULE

ANALOG

- OFF-PREMISES

1 SLMA-S

SUBSCRIBER

LINE MODULE

ANALOG

- STATION

I SLMD

SUBSCRIBER

LINE MODULE

DIGITAL

TMBA-2

2-WIRE E&M TRUNK

I TMBA-4

4-WIRE E&M TRUNK
CENTRAL

Tables)

STATION

OFFICE TRUNK

DIRECT INWARD DIALING TRUNK

3.03 Basic Shelf. The basic shelf is shown in Figure 3.04.
The basic shelf contains seven channel groups of LTU modules and all the PCBs that make up the common control and
switching circuitry of the SATURN IIE System. Figure 3.04
shows the locations of all the PCBs in the basic shelf. The
common control and switching PCBs are listed in Table 3.01.
Note that two RAM printed circuit boards are provided: one

ASSEMBLY
SLOT NO
II
CHANNEL

/-CHGP-,

CHGP

/-CHGP-,

10 II

1 megabyte PCB (MEM4) and one 256 kilobyte PCB (MEM3).
This is the minimum RAM configuration.
Two additional
memory slots (for a total of 4) are provided for future inclusion of more memory if needed. In case of failure of the commercial power source, the Memory Support Module (MSM)
protects the data stored in memory for 5 minutes (at present,
only three of the memory slots are wired for this protection).

12 13 14 15 16 17

CHGP ,-CHGP-,

Ia; 1 19 ( 20

1 21 ( 22 ( 23 1 24 ( 25 ( 26 27 26 29 30 31

CH-GP CH~GPl IpI

. BASICSHELF

1,. 1

-l-zM+H

I]
.MIN,M”M SYSTEMREOUIREMENT

A4838-l-2/17/86

3-6

Figure

3.04

Basic Shelf

A30808-X5130-AllO-l-8918
Issue 1, May 1986

SATURN IIE EPABX
General Description

rable 3.01

Common

Equipment

Circuit

Boards

on Basic Shelf
ASSIGNED
SLOT NUMBER
(Note 1)

TITLE

DESIGNATION
REMOTE ACCESS
SIGNAL
MEMORY

UNIT/PORTS

MULTIPLEXER/TONE
CONTROL

MEMORY
MEMORY

GENERATOR

AND ATTENUATOR

CONTROLLER/INPUT-OUTPUT

PSC

Printed

21
24

PROCESSOR

(4) 1 megabyte
(3) 256K

PARALLEL-TO-SERIAL

27
28

CONVERTER

20
(No:: 2)

I CONF
NOTES: 1.
2.

CONFERENCE
Slot numbers refer to card slots in basic shelf.
Second PSC required only when system includes

23
expansion

cabinet.

3-7 (3-8 blank)

A30808-X5130-AllO-l-6918
Issue 1, May 1986

SATURN IIE EPABX
General Description

SECTION

4.00 POWER SUPPLIES

4.01 Main Power Section. As noted previously, the SATURN
IIE System makes use of distributed power in the cabinet.
Several power supplies are used within the system, some in
the main power section located at the bottom of the basic cabinet, some on the LTU shelves (see Figure 4.00). These power supplies provide +5 Vdc, -5 Vdc, +12 Vdc, -12 Vdc, -48 Vdc,
and 90 Vat at 20 Hz for ringing voltage. The standard input
power for the system is a 110 Vat, 60 Hz commercial source.
The main power section consists of the Power System Unit
(PSU) and one or two -48 Vdc power supplies: one if there
is only the basic cabinet, two if the expansion cabinet is also
equipped. (In systems where only the basic cabinet is used,
there is a single ac power inlet at the rear of the cabinet; when
the expansion cabinet is also used, a second ac power inlet
at the rear of the basic cabinet is provided. The Installation
practice in this series gives a full description of the steps
necessary when making this change.)
Two floppy-disk drives (FDDO and FDDl) are located on the
same shelf as the main power section.
4.02 Power System Unit. The PSU is an integrated assembly containing the following functional elements (described
in paragraphs 4.03 through 4.07):

a. Basic shelf power supply
b. Memory Support Module (MSM), optional
c. Control logic
d. Ring generator
e. Power supply circuit breakers
4.03 Basic Shelf Power Supply. The basic shelf power supply is an ac-to-dc converter that provides +5, -5, +12, and
-12 Vdc power to the basic shelf.
4.04 Memory Support Module. The Memory Support Module (MSM) assembly is an optional battery backup package
that provides +5 Vdc to the RAM memory when the commercial ac power source fails. In the event of such failure, the
battery maintains the data stored in memory for at least five
minutes. When the ac power source is restored within this
period, the memory does not have to be reloaded from disk;
system operation can begin immediately. The MSM is capable of another 5-minute backup cycle after 30 minutes of
recharging. (The unit includes the battery charging apparatus and is under a “float” charge during normal operation.)
For power failure periods longer than 5 minutes, program
memory is automatically reloaded from floppy disk when power is restored.

A30808-X5130-AllO-l-B918
issue 1, May 1986

SATURN IIE EPABX
General Description

SECTION 4.00 POWER SUPPLIES
4.01 Main Power Section. As noted previously, the SATURN
IIE System makes use of distributed power in the cabinet.
Several power supplies are used within the system, some in
the main power section located at the bottom of the basic cabinet, some on the LTU shelves (see Figure 4.00). These power supplies provide +5 Vdc, -5 Vdc, +12 Vdc, -12 Vdc, -48 Vdc,
and 90 Vat at 20 Hz for ringing voltage. The standard input
power for the system is a 110 Vat, 60 Hz commercial source.
The main power section consists of the Power System Unit
(PSU) and one or two -48 Vdc power supplies: one if there
is only the basic cabinet, two if the expansion cabinet is also
equipped. (In systems where only the basic cabinet is used,
there is a single ac power inlet at the rear of the cabinet; when
the expansion cabinet is also used, a second ac power inlet
at the rear of the basic cabinet is provided. The Installation
practice in this series gives a full description of the steps
necessary when making this change.)
Two floppy-disk drives (FDDO and FDDl) are located on the
same shelf as the main power section.
4.02 Power System Unit. The PSU is an integrated assembly containing the following functional elements (described
in paragraphs 4.03 through 4.07):

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.

Basic shelf power supply
Memory Support Module (MSM), optional
Control logic
Ring generator
Power supply circuit breakers

4.03 Basic Shelf Power Supply. The basic shelf power supply is an ac-to-dc converter that provides +5, -5, +12, and
-12 Vdc power to the basic shelf.
4.04 Memory Support Module. The Memory Support Module (MSM) assembly is an optional battery backup package
that provides +5 Vdc to the RAM memory when the commercial ac power source fails. In the event of such failure, the
battery maintains the data stored in memory for at least five
minutes. When the ac power source is restored within this
period, the memory does not have to be reloaded from disk;
system operation can begin immediately. The MSM is capable of another 5-minute backup cycle after 30 minutes of
recharging. (The unit includes the battery charging apparatus and is under a “float” charge during normal operation.)
For power failure periods longer than 5 minutes, program
memory is automatically reloaded from floppy disk when power is restored.

A30808-X5130-AllO-l-8918
Issue 1, May 1986

SATURN IIE EPABX
General Description

4.05 Control
ing functions:

Logic. The control logic performs the follow-

Power Failure Interrupt (PFI). Generates a nonmaskable interrupt to the CIOP when input power drops to
the brown-out level (95 to 97.5 Vat) and returns to normal when power becomes higher than 100 Vat.

Ring synchronization. Generates the timing signals for
operating and releasing ringing relays.

Ringing/message-waiting
output or message-waiting
ringing bus.

control. Selects either ring
output for connection to the

Fuse alarms. Monitors each fuse z -?d causes an alarm
upon any fuse failure.

4.06 Ring Generator.
The ring generator is a singlefrequency power supply that provides 90 Vat rms at 20 Hz
for station ringing, and 97 Vdc (nominal) for message waiting
indications. It provides sufficient power to ring up to 42 stations simultaneously (21 stations each on two different phases

of ringing) and to provide a message-waiting
108 stations simultaneously.

indication

4.07 Power Supply Circuit Breakers. There are circuit
breakers for each of the ac inputs to the system (e.g., to the
basic shelf power supply, each LTUPS, each -48PS etc).
4.08 Line/Trunk Unit
sembly is an ac-to-dc
and -12 Vdc power to
cated adjacent to the
entire LTU shelf.

Power Supply. The LTUPS module asconverter which provides +5, -5. +12,
its associated LTU shelf. This supply,loleft side of each LTU shelf, powers one

4.09 48-Volt Power Supply. The -48 Volt Power Supply
(-48PSn, where n is designated 0 through 1 in the cabinet)
module assembly is an ac-to-dc converter that provides two
-48 Vdc outputs. One -48 Vdc output is used for talk battery
for analog lines (SLTs), and the other -48 Vdc output is used
for PlMDlSLMD applications (i.e., powering attendant consoles and SDTs, respectively) and power input to the ringing
generator in the PSU. The system cabinet may contain either
one or two -48PS module assemblies: one for the basic cabinet and a second when the expansion cabinet is equipped.

4-3 (4-4 blank)

A30808-X5130-AllO-I-8918
Issue 1, May 1986

SATURN IIE EPABX
General Description

SECTION 5.00

M ISCELLANEOUS

5.01 Floppy Disk Drive. Two FDDs are used as randomaccess storage devices, each using a floppy disk as the backup memory storage medium. The double-sided, quad-density,
5-114 inch, removable disks are capable of storing one megabyte of formatted data each.

MODULE

ASSEMBLIES

A30808-X5130-AllO-l-9918
Issue 1, May 1986

SATURN HE EPABX
General Description

SECTION 6.00

PRINTED

6.01 Dimensions.
The plug-in PCBs are 230 m m (9.02 in.)
high by 280 m m (11.02 in.) deep. A complete list of the PCBs
used in the SATURN IIE System is shown in Table 6.00.
Each PCB has two edge-connector tab areas with 60 terminals each. The PCBs plug into two mating 60-pin connectors
mounted on the backplane of the basic and LTU shelves.
There are two types of PCBs: peripheral and control. The type
of PCB may be readily identified because the peripheral PCBs
Table 6.00

SATURN

CIRCUIT

BOARDS

have a notch separating the edge connector tab areas and
the control PCBs do not. Two extractor levers, mounted on
the front edge of each PCB, allow for easy insertion or removal
from the shelf connectors.
Some PCBs and module assemblies include strapping options. Refer to the SATURN HE EPABX Installation Procedures
practice for detailed information pertaining to these options.

III Printed

Circuit

Boards

DESIGNATION/TITLE

FUNCTION

CONTROLLER/iNPUFOUTPUT

DTMF

DUAL-TONE

MEM3

MEMORY

(256K)

MEM4

MEMORY

(1 MEGABYTE)

MCA

MEMORY

CONTROL

CONF

CONFERENCE

PSCO

PARALLEL/SERIAL

CONVERTER

Provides interface between the switching network and
the speech highways in the basic cabinet.

PSCl’

PARALLEL/SERIAL

CONVERTER

Provides interface between the switching network and
the speech highways in the expansion cabinet.

LTUC

LINE/TRUNK

PIMD

PREMIUM

RAUP

REMOTE ACCESS

SLMA-S

SUBSCRIBER
- DIGITAL

LINE MODULLE

SLA16

SUBSCRIBER

LINE ANALOG

- 16 LINES

Provides 16 interfaces between rotary dial and/or DTMF
station instruments and the svstem.

SLMD

SUBSCRIBER

LINE MODULE

DIGITAL

Provides an interface between eight Siemens
ephones (SDTs) and the system.

* Optional

PCB

PROCESSOR

Main controller and input-output processor. Interfaces
both floppy disk drives, system memory, the RAUP, the
SMXTG, and the MCA. The signal buffer, part of the
CIOP, directly controls the service terminal interface.

CIOP

MULTI-FREQUENCY

RECEIVER

4 receivers

MEM3 and MEM4 together provide 1.25 megabytes of
dynamic RAM for call processing, which is loaded initially from floppy disks. All SATURN IIE systems require
at least 1.25 megabytes of memory.

AND ATTENUATION

CIRCUIT

Provides the time-switching
function and the interface
between the switching network and the speech highways; provides attenuation (as required) for all calls, and
receives control data from the CIOP to make the required two-port connections.
Provides 4 eight-port conference
port conference circuits required
and transfer feature.

UNIT CONTROL

INSTRUMENT

Detects and validates DTMF tone. Contains
per PCB, plus dial tone detector circuitry.

Provides the timing signals
peripheral PCB. Multiplexes
nal and voice highways.

MODULE

DIGITAL

Provides an interface
tendant consoles.

circuits plus 24 fourfor the consultation

necessary to address a
and demultiplexes both sig-

between the system and two at-

Two external and one internal RS-232-C ports allow remote access to the system for maintenance and administrative functions. The internal port is dedicated to a
103 or 212A modem.

UNIT/PORTS

ANALOG

Provides eight interfaces between rotary dial and/or
DTMF station instruments and the system.

Digital Tel-

A30808-X5130-AllO-l-6918
Issue 1, May 1986

SATURN IIE EPABX
General Description

Table 6.00

SATURN HE Printed

DESIGNATION/TITLE

Circuit

Boards

(Continued)
FUNCTION

SLMA-0

SUBSCRIBER
LINE MODULE
OFF-PREMISES
STATION

ANALOG

SMXTG

SIGNAL MULTIPLEXER/TONE
(32 CHANNEL)

GENERATOR

TM BA-2

2-WIRE E&M TRUNK

Provides four trunk circuits, each arranged for either
one-way or two-way direct inward and outward service
with two-wire E&M signaling.

TMBA-4

4-WIRE E&M TRUNK

Provides four trunk circuits, each arranged for either
one-way or two-way direct inward and outward service
with four-wire E&M signaling.

TMBM

CENTRAL

Provides four trunk circuits, each arranged for either
one-way or two-way direct inward and outward service
for CO, FX, and WATS applications.

TMIE

DIRECT INWARD DIALING TRUNK

OFFICE

TRUNK

6.02 Controller/Input-Output
Processor. The CIOP board,
shown in Figure 6.00, contains the main processor (consisting of a microprocessor and related bus circuitry), signal interface circuitry, PROM and RAM. The CIOP board also
contains timing circuitry, maintenance
and reinitialization
switches, status indicators and a Signal Buffer (SIB).
The main processor provides the input/output function for the
floppy-disk-drive controllers. The SIB processor controls the
RS-232-C interface to the service terminal (TTY).
6.03 Signal Multiplexer/Tone
Generator. The SMXTG PCB,
shown in Figure 6.01, contains three circuits. Two of these consist of the signal multiplexer and the clock generator. The signal
multiplexer
circuit
is a hardware-controlled
scanner/distributor that provides communication between the
peripheral PCBs and the CIOP It also handles the control and
status signals for the 32 speech highways, each of which has
32 time slots.
The clock generator portion consists of a crystal-controlled
oscillator and down counter which produces the 8.19 MHz,
4.096 MHz, 2.048 MHz, and 250 Hz clocking signals required
by various elements of the SATURN IIE System.
The tone generator produces all of the required supervisory
tones (e.g., dial tone, ringback tone, busy tone, etc.) and provides software-controlled
timing windows for dial pulse timing and tone cadences.
6.04 Parallel/Serial
Converter. The PSC board, shown in
Figure 6.02, converts the serial PCM voice signals from the
LTUs to eight-bit parallel bytes, which are then multiplexed
onto an eight-bit-wide parallel highway and sent to the MCA
circuitry for further processing. The PSC also provides this
function in reverse to provide a serial voice path back to the

Provides an interface between the system and four Off-Premises Stations (OPS). This module
is resgistered with the FCC for Class C off-premises
operation.
Distributes control signals; receives
status signals from the 992 ports; contains the system
clock source; produces all of the required supervisory
signals (e.g., dial tone, busy tone, ringback tone) and
the DTMF tone pairs required for system outpulsing.

Provides four trunk circuits, each arranged for one-way
direct inward dialing service applications from the CO.

LTUs. One PSC is required for the basic shelf, and another
is added when the expansion cabinet is equipped.
6.05 Memory Control and Attenuation.
The Memory Control and Attenuation (MCA) PCB, shown in Figure 6.03, contains two circuits: the Time Switch Unit (TSU) and the control
memory. The TSU makes all two-port connections and provides attenuation for all calls being processed with the
SATURN IIE System.
The control memory receives control data from the main
processor and causes the PSU and the conference units to
make the required connections.
6.06 Conference. The CONF board, shown in Figure 6.04,
is required for all conference connections involving three to
seven parties. It provides four 8-port conference circuits and
twenty-four 4-port conference circuits required for consultation and transfer features.
6.07 Memory. One 256K PCB (MEM3), shown in Figure 6.05,
and one l-megabyte PCB (MEM4), shown in Figure 6.06, are
supplied with the system to provide the overall minimum required memory of 1.25 megabytes. The memory functions are
controlled via a RAM controller and accessed via a common
bus.
6.08 Dual-Tone Multifrequency
Receiver. The DTMF board,
shown in Figure 6.07, provides the means for detecting and
validating DTMF tones and dial tone. Each DTMF board contains four separate DTMF and dial tone receiver circuits (numbered 0, 2, 4, and 6).
6.09 Remote Access Unit/Ports.
The Remote Access
Unit/Ports (RAUP) PCB, shown in Figure 6.08, has three (two
external) Electronics Industries Association RS-232-C serial

SATURN IIE EPABX
General Description

A30808-X5130-AllO-l-8918
Issue 1, May 1986

asynchronous ports. The two external ports are used for Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR), traffic metering,
maintenance, and/or CMU features. The other port is dedicated to the internal RAUP modem (self-setting to either 300
or 1200 baud, depending on the frequency received). Use of
the ,modem provides access for administration
and maintenance from a remote service terminal.

6.11 Subscriber
Line Module Analog - Station.
The
SLMA-S board, shown in Figure 6.10 provides an interface
between conventional rotary-dial or DTMF-signaling telephone
sets and the SATURN IIE System. The SLMA-S provides eight
ports. Each of the eight circuits (numbered 0 through 7) provides the required supervision and signaling for its associated -peripheral equipment.

6.10 Line/Trunk Unit Control. The LTUC, shown in Figure
6.09, multiplexes and demultiplexes both the signal highway
and the voice highway, and provides the timing signals necessary to address the LTU circuits allocated in an LTU shelf. The
LTUC also provides the necessary interface to the control and
switching blocks from the LTU circuitry. The LTUC is not required in the basic shelf because the line and trunks circuits
there have direct access to the control and switching circuitry.
Each LTU shelf requires one LTUC for every four channel
groups, for a maximum of two LTUCs per LTU shelf.

6.12 Subscriber Line Module Analog - Off-Premises Station. The SLMA-0 board, shown in Figure 6.11, provides an
interface between Off-Premises
Stations (OPS) and the
SATURN IIE System. The Off-Premises Stations can be rotary dial or DTMF signaling telephones. The SLMA-0 provides
four ports. Each of the four circuits (numbered 0, 2, 4 and 6)
provides the required supervision and signaling for its associated peripheral equipment. The OPS stations can operate over a loop of 0 to 1800 ohms.

A30808-X5130-AllO-l-8918
Issue 1, May 1986

SATURN IIE EPABX
General Description

P5070-14.3/20/86

Figure

6.00

Controller/Input-Output

Processor

Printed

Circuit

Board

A30808-X5130-AllO-i-B918
Issue 1, May 1986

SATURN IIE EPABX
General Description

Figure

6.01

Signal

Multiplexer/Tone

Generator

Printed

Circuit

Board

SATURN IIE EPABX
General Description

P5070-15.3/20/86

A30808-X5130-AllO-l-B918
Issue 1, May 1986

Figure

6.02

Parallel/Serial

Converter

Printed

Circuit

Board

A30808-X5130-AllO-l-8918
Issue 1, May 1986

SATURN IIE EPABX
General Description

Figure

6.03

Memory

Control

and Attenuation

Printed

Circuit

Board

6-7

A30808-X5130-AllO-l-8918
issue 1, May 1986

SATURN IIE EPABX
General Description

P5070-Z-3/20/66

Figure

6.04

Conference

Printed

Circuit

Board

A30808-X5130-AllO-l-B918
Issue 1, May 1986

SATURN IIE EPABX
General Description

P5070-17.3/20/86

Figure

6.05

Memory

3 (MEM3)

Printed

Circuit

Board

SATURN IIE EPABX
General Description

P5070.19.3/20/66

6-10

Figure

6.06

Memory

4 (MEM4)

Printed

Circuit

Board

SATURN IIE EPABX
General Description

A30808-X5130-AllO-l-B918
Issue 1, May 1986

Figure 6.07 Dual-Tone Multifrequency

Receiver Printed Circuit Board

6-11

A30808-X5130-AllO-l-B918
Issue 1, May 1986

SATURN IIE EPABX
General Description

P5070-13-3/20/W

6-12

Figure 6.08

Remote Access Unit/Ports Printed Circuit Board

A30808-X5130-AllO-l-B918
Issue 1, May 1986

SATURN IIE EPABX
General Description

Figure

6.09

Line/Trunk

Unit Control

Printed

Circuit

Board

A30808-X5130-AllO-l-8918
Issue 1, May 1986

SATURN IIE EPABX
General Description

Figure

FLIA

6.10

Subscriber

Line Module

Analog

- Station

Printed

Circuit

Board

SATURN IiE EPABX
General Description

A30808X5130-AllO-l-8918
Issue 1, May 1986

6.13 Subscriber
Line Module Analog - 16 Lines. The
SLA16 board, shown in Figure 6-12, provides an interface between conventional rotary dial or DTMF-signaling telephone
sets and the SATURN IIE system. The SLA16 provides 16 circuits, numbered 0 through 15, which, in installed systems, are
renumbered as two sets of 0 through 7 as explained in the
Installation practice. Each circuit provides the required supervision and signaling for its associated peripheral equipment.

either one-way or two-way, direct inward and outward private
line facility service, with E&M signaling. The TMBA-2 contains
four separate trunk circuits (numbered 0, 2, 4, and 6). Each
circuit provides two-wire analog service between the SATURN
IIE System and private line facility equipment. Separate E&M
signaling leads are provided. The trunk circuits translate the
incoming analog signals into PCM signals (and the outgoing
PCM-signals into analog signals).

6.14 Premium Instrument Module Digital. The PIMD board
shown in Figure 6.13, serves as a special line interface circuit connecting attendant consoles to the SATURN IIE System. The PIMD circuitry communicates with the system via
digitally-encoded
messages. (The codecs and filters for the
analog-to-digital conversion are located within the attendant
consoles.) Each PIMD contains two dual-channel circuits, and
is capable of serving two attendant consoles.

6.18 Four-Wire E&M Trunk. The Siemens Four-Wire BothWay Trunk Module (TMBA-4) PCB, shown in Figure 6.16, provides either one-way or two-way, direct inward and outward
private line facility service, with E and M signaling. The
TMBA-4 contains four separate trunk circuits (numbered 0,
2, 4, and 6). Each circuit provides four-wire analog service
between the SATURN IIE System and private line facility
equipment. Separate E & M signaling pairs are provided. The
trunk circuits translate the incoming analog signals into PCM
signals (and the outgoing PCM signals into analog signals).

6.15 Subscriber
Line Module Digital. The SLMD board,
shown in Figure 6.14, serves as a special line interface circuit connecting SDTs to the SATURN IIE System. The SLMD
circuitry communicates with the system via digitally-encoded
messages. (The codecs and filters for the analog-to-digital
conversion are located within the SDT). Each SLMD contains
eight circuits (numbered 0 through 7).
6.16 Trunk Types. The SATURN IIE System can be equipped
with a variety of common trunk types. A list of these trunk types
and the corresponding trunk designations used in the SATURN
IIE System is provided in Table 6.01. Examples of the types
of signaling and supervision available are shown in Table 6.02.
The signaling/supervision options within a particular trunk type
are available on a strappable basis on the individual PCB. Refer
to the Installation Procedures practice for more detailed information regarding the strapping options.
6.17 Two-Wire E&M Trunk. The Siemens Two-Wire Both-Way
Trunk Module (TMBA-2) PCB, shown in Figure 6.15, provides

6.19 Central Office Trunk. The Siemens Both-Way Trunk
Module (TMBM) PCB, shown in Figure 6.17, provides either
one-way or two-way, inward and/or outward trunk service for
Central Office (CO), Foreign Exchange (FX), and Wide Area
Telephone Service (WATS) applications. The TMBM contains
four separate trunk circuits (numbered 0, 2, 4, and 6). Each
circuit provides two-wire analog service between the SATURN
IIE System and a CO loop-start or ground-start trunk. The
trunk circuits translate the incoming analog signals into PCM
signals (and the outgoing PCM signals into analog signals).
6.20 Direct Inward Dialing Trunk. The Siemens Incoming
Trunk Module (TMIE) PCB, shown in Figure 6.18, provides oneway DID service from the CO to the SATURN IIE System. Each
TMIE contains four separate trunk circuits (numbered 0, 2,
4, and 6). The trunk circuits translate the incoming analog
signals into PCM signals (and the outgoing PCM signals into
analog signals).

6-15

A30808-X5130-AllO-l-8918
Issue 1, May 1986

SATURN IIE EPABX
General Description

Figure

6.11

Subscriber

Line Module

Analog

- Off-Premises

Station

Printed

Circuit

Board

A30808-X5130-AllO-l-6918
Issue 1, May 1986

SATURN IIE EPABX
General Description

P5070.22.3/20/86

Figure

6.12

Subscriber

Line Module

Analog

- 16 Lines Printed

Circuit

Board

A30808-X5130-A110-143918
Issue 1, May 1986

SATURN IIE EPABX
General Description

Figure

6.13

Premium

instrument

Module

Digital

Printed

Circuit

Board

A30808-X5130-AllO-l-8918
Issue 1, May 1986

SATURN IIE EPABX
General Description

‘L--r)

Figure

6.14

Subscriber

Line Module

Digital

Printed

Circuit

Board

A30808-X5130-AllO-l-6918
Issue 1, May 1986

SATURN IIE EPABX
General Description

Table 6.01

Trunk Types Used in the SATURN

IIE System

TRUNK PCB
DESIGNATION/TITLE
TMBM

- CENTRAL

OFFICE

- FOREIGN

EXCHANGE

APPLICATION

(CO)

Bothway (Two-Way)
Incoming (One-Way)
Outgoing (One-Way)

(FX)

- WIDE AREA TELEPHONE

SERVICE (WATS)
Direct Inward Dialing Trunks
(One-Way Incoming)

TMIE

- DIRECT INWARD DIALING

(DID)

TMBA-2

- TIE TRUNK
E&M

(2 WIRE)

Bothway (Two-Way)
Incoming (One-Way)
Outgoing (One-Way)

TMBA-4

- TIE TRUNK
E&M

(4 WIRE)

Bothway (Two-Way)
Incoming (One-Way)
Outgoing (One-Way)

Table 6.02

Trunk Signaling

and Supervision
SATURN TRUNK

SIGNALING/SUPERVISION
SUPERVISION (Answer & Disconnect)
Loop
Loop/Reverse Battery
E&M, Type I
E&M, Type II
INCOMING SEIZURE
Loop Closure
Ground Start (Tip Ground)
E-Lead Off-Hook (1)

OUTGOING ADDRESS
Dial Pulse
DTMF
OUTGOING SENDER
Delay Dial
Immediate Dial
Dial Tone Detection
Wink Start
Manual (None)
NOTES: 1.
2.
3.

TMBM
(CO, FX, WATS)

TMIE
(DID)

X
X

I
TMBA-2
TMBA-4
(E&M)

X
X

INCOMING ADDRESS SIGNALING
Dial Pulse
DTMF (2)
Automatic (Ring Down) (3)
INCOMING OR CO SENDER
Delay Dial
Immediate Dial
Wink Start

TYPE

X
X
X

X (DISA)
X

START
X
X
X

X
X
X

NIA
NIA

X
X

N/A
N/A
NIA
NIA
N/A

X
X
X
X
X

SIGNALING

START

Applicable to E&M types I and II.
DTMF address signals are expected on DISA trunks after answer.
Incoming seizure is automatic (ringdown) on TMBM. Incoming address signals are not expected
answer.

prior to

SATURN IIE EPABX
General Description

A30808-X5130-AllO-l-8918
Issue 1, May 1986

Figure

6.15

Two-Wire

E&M Trunk (TMBA-2)

Printed

Circuit

Board

A30808-X5130-AllO-l-B918
issue 1, May 1986

SATURN IIE EPABX
General Description

Figure

6-22

6.16

Four-Wire

E&M Trunk (TMBA-4)

Printed

Circuit

Board

SATURN IIE EPABX
General Description

A30808-X5130-AllO-143918
Issue 1, May 1986

Figure

6.17

Central

Office

Trunk (TMBM)

Printed

Circuit

Board

A30808-X5130-AllO-I-8918
Issue 1, May 1986

SATURN IIE EPABX
General Description

Figure

6.18

Direct

Inward

Dialing

Trunk (TMIE) Printed

Circuit

Board

A30808-X5330-AllO-l-8918
Issue 1, May 1986

SATURN IIE EPABX
General Description

SECTION 7.00

SATURN IIE ANCILLARY

EQUIPMENT

7.01 Service Terminal. A keyboard/printer
data terminal
equipped with an RS-232-C interface may be used to input
maintenance and administrative commands to the system.
The terminal is primarily used to enter data into the system
for processing CMU procedures. The CMU procedures are
used to make changes to the customer memory portion of
the system memory, such as adding a station or trunk, changing a station’s extension number or class of service, or adding features to the system. The system memory contains all
of the data relating to the programmable features and options
the customer can select, arrange, and rearrange.

The SATURN IIE System can also be provided with the Remote Customer Memory Update feature, which permits the updating process to be initiated from a remote (off-premises)
location. This feature utilizes a modem that is built into the Remote Access Unit/Ports (RAUP). Changes to the customer
memory can be completed through either local or long-distance
trunks, tie trunks, or any SATURN IIE station. The requirements
for the remote data terminal are specified in the Siemens practice, SATURN IIE EPABX Customer Memory Update Proced.ures. Information pertaining to the use of such a data terminal
for CMU changes is also included in that practice.

The administrative procedures can be performed during normal system operation with no interference to normal call
processing. The CMU procedures are easy to use and provide plain English prompting for the benefit of the user. The
new data that is entered is then recorded on the floppy disk
(by means of a “save” command) as a permanent record for
system backup purposes. An example of an administrative
CMU procedure is shown in Figure 7.00.

Besides the modem port, the system provides three ports for
data terminals (one on the CIOP, two on the RAUP) In addition to the administrative functions described above, the systern also compiles data pertaining to Station Message Detail
Recording (SMDR) and traffic through the system. The SMDR
and/or traffic data may be outputted via another port(s) to
another printer/terminal or to an independent reporting systern for post-processing.

USER INPUT:
)ADD

COSASSN

User inputs the command

(ADD) and keyword for Class-of-Service

Assignment

(COSASSN)

SYSTEM PROMPT:
CLASS OF SERVICE

NUMBER

(O-31) =

System prompts the user for the class of service (COS) number

to be assigned.

USER INPUT
CLASS OF SERVICE

NUMBER

(O-31) = 5

User inputs “5” to indicate COS 5 is being assigned.
SYSTEM PROMPT
CLASSMARK

ASSIGNMENTS

System prompts the user for the feature classmarks

to be assigned

to COS 5.

USER INPUT:
CLASSMARK

ASSIGNMENTS

= HKFLSH

FWDALL

FWDTONTWK

PARK

User inputs the classmarks to indicate the features to be assigned to COS 5. ‘(In this example, the following features
are assigned: Hookflash, HKFLSH; Call Forwarding - All Calls, FWDALL; Call Forwarding to Public Network,
NVDTONTWK; and Call Park, PARK. Hookflash is required to be assigned for certain features, including Call Park.)
SYSTEM PROMPT:
ALLOWED

TRUNK

GROUPS

(O-31) =

System prompts the user for the trunk group numbers

to which COS 5 is to be allowed access.

USER INPUT:
ALLOWED

TRUNK

GROUPS

(O-31) = 3

User inputs the trunk group number to which COS 5 is to be allowed.
Figure

7.00

Example

pf Administrative

(In this example,
CMU Procedure

only trunk group 3.)

A30808-X5130-AllO-l-8918
issue 1, May 1986

SATURN IIE EPABX
General Description

SYSTEM PROMPT
TOLL CODE REST LIST NUMS (O-19) =

System prompts the user for the toll code restriction

list(s) to apply to COS 5.

USER INPUT:
TOLL CODE REST LIST NUMS (O-19) = 7
User inputs the toll code restriction
restriction list 7.)

list(s) to which COS 5 is to be allowed access. (In this example, only toll code

SYSTEM PROMPT
RESTRICTED

ACD GROUP

NUMS (O-63) =

System prompts the user for the ACD group number(s)

from which COS 5 is restricted

from accessing.

USER INPUT:
RESTRICTED

ACD GROUP

NUMS (O-63) =

User does not wish to assign a restricted ACD group at this time, therefore no entry is made. (“Enter”
to obtain next prompt or response.)

key is depressed

SYSTEM PROMPT:
RESTRICTED

STATION COS’S (O-31) =

System prompts the user for the station class of service number(s)

from which COS 5 is restricted

from accessing.

USER INPUT:
RESTRICTED

STATION COS’S (O-31) =

User does not wish to assign a restricted station COS at this time, therefore no entry is made. (“Enter” key is depressed
to obtain next prompt or response.)
SYSTEM RESPONSE:
ADD STNCOS 83-01-03 11:41:47
CLASS OF SERVICE ADDED
System acknowledges addition of the new class of service, followed
current time (11:41:47).

by the calendar

date (January

3, 1983) and the

USER INPUT
) SAVE CUSTDATA
User inputs the command (SAVE) and the keyword for Customer Data (CUSTDATA) to save the changed data to the
floppy disk. (In the event of a system restart, the system reloads automatically from the floppy disk. Therefore, any
changed data that has not been “saved” must be reentered.)
Figure

7.00

Example

of Administrative

CMU Procedure

(Continued)

A30808-X5130-AllO-l-8918
Issue 1, May 1986

SATURN IIE EPABX
General Description

7.02 Attendant Console. The attendant console, shown in
Figure 7.01, is a desk-top unit with which the attendant
processes calls, using pushbutton keys and an alphanumeric display. It is 46.99 cm (18.5 in.) wide, 13.08 cm (5.15 in.) high,
and 26.47 cm (10.42 in.) deep. A maximum of twelve attendant consoles can be provided in the SATURN IIE System.
A telephone handset is furnished with the console. An optional headset may be substituted for the handset. Both tone
and visual indicators alert the attendant to incoming calls. The
level of the tone signal may be controlled by a volume control located at the front edge of the console.
The attendant console provides switched-loop operation, with
single-loop appearance to simplify call handling. The advantages of stored-program
processing allow the attendant to
have complete information about calls directed to the console. The attendant has complete control over calls directed
to the console and a number of other features by means of
the preset and programmable console keys and the display.
The attendant console is microprocessor-controlled,
and contains a codec/filter for voice analog/digital conversion. The
console receives its required power from the main system,
which can be up to a distance of 610 cable meters (2,000 cable feet).

Figure

7.01

Connections
to the console are made through industrystandard, modular, connector-ended cables that provide voice,
control signals, and power. A standard two-pair cable is used
to make the connection from the SATURN IIE System to a
modular jack located near the console.
The upper portion of the console contains the display section, which gives the attendant the necessary information to
correctly identify the call being serviced. The display section
includes a 40-character, alphanumeric
vacuum-fluorescent
display. The following types of indications are provided by the
display:
a. Time of day
b.

Station numbers

Class of service of calling station

Busy/idle/out-of-service

Intercept

Call queuing lengths (This information is presented to
the attendant automatically between the servicing of
calls.)

SATURN Attendant

of calling and called parties

status

information

Console

A30808-X5130-AllO-l-8918
Issue 1, May 1986

SATURN IIE EPABX
General Description

In addition to the call data information listed above, the display may also be used for both call data display and for displaying system status to the attendant (such as the system’s
failure history) plus major and minor alarm indicators.

TIME

Time display

INC

Incoming

LOOPn

Loop selection (Loop 1 through Loop 4)

The lower portion of the console contains a keyboard assembly that allows the attendant to process the various types of
calls, initiate station and trunk calls, and access special features (such as conferencing, paging, and night service). All
keys are nonlocking and have single built-in Light-Emitting
Diode (LED) indicators that light steadily or flash to indicate
a particular operating condition. A full explanation of the operation of the attendant console is provided in the Siemens practice, SATURN EPABX Attendant Console General Description
and Operating Instructions.

NIGHT

Night operation

OPR

Operator

RCL

Recall queue answer

RLS

Release of individual

SRC

Source party select

Eighteen keys on the attendant console are fully assignable
by the customer to meet customized needs. The remaining
sixteen keys are preset for the functions required in all systems. These keys are labeled and assigned as follows:
ANS

Answer (System selects type of call:
operator, incoming, or recall)

ATT RLS

Attendant

AUD ON/OFF

Audible

BOTH

Both source and destination party select

DEST

call queue answer

party

Calls requiring attendant assistance are directed automatically to one of three call identification keys. Each key has a
corresponding
holding queue that allows the attendant to
select one of the three types of calls: incoming trunk calls;
operator (“dial 0”) calls; or recalls (calls that have already been
serviced by the attendant and for some reason have returned
to the console for additional attendant assistance). By means of an LED indicator, the call identification keys indicate
to the attendant the type of call waiting to be serviced and
thereby permit the attendant to process each call selectively.

release from all parties
signal control - on/off

Destination

party select

In addition to the above three keys, an “answer” key is provided. This key can be used to answer waiting calls on a “firstin, first-out” basis. When the attendant uses the answer key,
the longest waiting call (regardless of whether the call is in
the incoming, operator, or recall queue) is presented to the
console for servicing.

A30808-X5130-AllO-l-B918
Issue 1, May 1986

SATURN IIE EPABX
General Description

SECTION 8.00

STATION MESSAGE

8.01 General. Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) provides detailed records of incoming and outgoing trunk calls.
The SATURN System records all detail information for outgoing CO, WATS, FX and Tie trunk calls and incoming CO, WATS,
FX and Tie trunk calls. Intra-switch, station-to-station, stationto-attendant, and attendant-to-station calls are not recorded.
The SMDR program is resident in the system and can be activated/deactivated
by the attendant on a per-trunk-group basis. When activated, the SMDR program remains on-line and
runs continuously until it is deactivated. While running, it provides chronological reports of calls via one of the output port(s)
of the RAUP or the TTY port on the CIOP
The SMDR output device is assignable from the service terminal and this information is saved such that, if the system
is reloaded, SMDR resumes operation automatically to its assigned output port.
The recording
of calls is customer
selectable
on a
per-incomingtrunk-group
basis and on a per-outgoing-LCRroute-element basis, or on a per-outgoing-trunk-group
basis
if direct trunk group access is used.
When a call detail recording buffer is not available and an
internal or outgoing call is attempted, the call will be either
blocked or allowed to proceed without recording, based on
a system option flag (defined via a CMU procedure). Incoming calls are never blocked.
8.02 Call Record Items. The call data items that are included in the SMDR report are described in below. An example
of an SMDR printout is provided in Figure 8.00.
a.

Record Type. This single-character field precedes the
Source Identity field and does not have a heading. The
character indicates the record type as follows: “T” for
call trace, and blank for voice call.
Source Identity. This field identifies the originating (i.e.,
calling) party of the call on record. It includes the subscriber extension number for an outgoing call or the
trunk group and trunk group member number for an
incoming trunk call.
The source identity is left blank for calls originated
and not extended from, an attendant.

by,

DETAIL RECORDING
Least Cost Route Selection Route Number. This data
identifies the route member used to route the call. This
field is blank for internal and incoming calls and outgoing calls that do not utilize LCR (i.e., Direct Access
trunks).

e. Access Code. This data identifies the routing access
code dialed by the user after going off-hook (and
receiving internal dial tone).
When speed calling is used, this field contains the effective routing access code, rather than the speed calling access code.
f.

Dialed Digits or Called Number. These are the digits
dialed by the user after dialing any routing access
code. The number of digits may vary up to a maximum
of 16. They may include, for example, in chronological
order, either of the following:
l

International Gateway Code, plus country code.
plus remaining digits for International Direct Distance Dialing.
Prefix 0 or 1, plus area code (3 digits), plus Office
Code (3 digits) plus Station Number (4 digits), i.e.,
up to 11 digits for domestic Direct Distance Dialing. Note that either prefix and/or area code may
not be required for many local area calls.

When speed calling is used, this field contains the effective destination address rather than the speed calling access code and member number dialed by the
user.
When Least Cost Routing (LCR) is used, this field contains the effective address dialed by the user rather
than those outpulsed as a result of the LCR outdialing rule.
Authorization Code Index. (See Account Code/Authorization Code for the definition of “authorization code”).
When an authorization code is entered and it is not
“displayable” (i.e., is secret), a two-character index to
the authorization code is listed in this field. A person
with the proper authorization can use this index to obtain the full authorization code, and unauthorized persons are restricted from obtaining it.

Destination Identity. This data identifies the terminating (i.e., answering) party of the call on record. It is the
trunk group and trunk group member number of the
trunk used for the outgoing call or the subscriber extension number in the case of an incoming trunk call.

For some applications, such as for resale of services.
a large number of authorization codes may be required.
In such cases, if the index exceeds 99, the ” ** ” is
printed in this two-character field.

The destination identity is left blank for incoming calls
terminated at, but not extended (or transferred) from,
an attendant, Special Night Answer Position (SNAP),
Zoned Universal Night Answer (ZUNA), Assigned Night
Answer (ANA), or Special Overflow Answering Position (SOAP). If the incoming call is extended (or transferred) by the attendant, SNAP, ZUNA, ANA, or SOAP,
the destination identity identifies the transferred-tosubscriber extension number or, trunk group and trunk
group member number (i.e., trunk-to-trunk connection).

h. Starting Time of Call. This field indicates the time of
day, in hours, minutes and seconds at which recording commenced. For incoming calls, this is the time
at which the call is answered. For outgoing calls over
trunks that return answer supervision, this is the time
at which answer supervision is received. For outgoing
calls over trunks not returning answer supervision, this
is the end of outpulsing time incremented by a customer adjustable filtering time. (If the holding time does
not exceed the filtering time, the call is not recorded.)

.
SATURN IIE EPABX
General Description

A30808-X5130-AllO-l-8918
Issue 1, May 1986

Call Duration. Call duration is the elapsed time from
the starting time of the call until the call is released.
The duration is recorded in hours, minutes and seconds with the leading zeros and colon suppressed
for hours.
If the system time of day is adjusted while recording
is in progress, it will not affect the validity of the reported
call duration.

Special Identity. Whenever an attendant, SNAP, ZUNA,
ANA, or SOAP is involved in answering an incoming
trunk call, or whenever the attendant is involved in placing an outgoing trunk call, or whenever LCR routes a
call over an expensive facility or a specialized common carrier, or whenever a call is forwarded to the public network, a special identity character is recorded.
The following
for this field:

special identity characters

are defined

1-12 - Attendant Console 1-12
S - SNAP
Z L ZUNA
A - ANA
0 - SOAP
E - LCR Expensive Facility
F - Call Forwarding to Public Network
6, C, D - LCR Specialized Common Carrier. Identity of SCCs 0, 1, and 2, respectively.
k.

Account Code/Authorization
Code. This field usually
provides the account code data associated with the call
record. However, if an authorization code is entered,
and it is defined as “displayable” (i.e., the code is not
secret), then this code is printed instead of the account
code.
An authorization code is a special security code (up
to 6 digits) to allow an authorized subscriber to upgrade, for that call only, the class of service giving the
user a special feature or otherwise unauthorized facility. When an authorization code is required, it is
usually entered after the access code and prior to dialing the called number digits. Use of authorization
codes include calls made from a restricted telephone
using the Mobile Authorization Code feature and incoming calls on Direct Inward System Access trunks.
The account code data is either the standard (i.e.,
default) account code assigned for the station or the
special account code entered by the station user or
the attendant, if applicable, for the outgoing call; the
standard account code assigned for the station is used
in the case of an incoming calf.
When a station accesses an LCR route element or a
direct access trunk group not marked for special account codes, the standard account code assigned to
the station is recorded. If no account code is assigned,
the field is left blank.
Authorization codes will be prefixed by “#‘I to distinguish them from account codes.

Pooled Modem Group. Refer to Siemens practice OC
II General Description and Feature Supplement.

The following special considerations
the call data items:

are applicable

Station Call Transfer. A separate call record is
generated each time a call is transferred by a station, except for incoming trunk calls transferred by
a SNAP, ANA, ZUNA, or SOAP station, in which
case the same call record is continued and a special identity character is recorded.
Starting Time of DISA Call. On an incoming DISA
call, an SMDR record shows the start time as the
answer time of the destination, and not as the answer time of the DISA trunk.
Attendant Controlled Conference. The source or
destination identity for a party connected to an
attendant-controlled
conference is ‘ACC X” with
“X” representing the conference circuit (l-8). “ACC
X” appears as the source identity for parties called
by an attendant and added to the conference. “ACC
X” appears as the destination identity for parties
who call into an attendant and are added to the
conference.
Meet-Me Conference. The source or destination
identity for a party connected to a meet-me conference is “MMC X” with “X” representing the conference circuit (l-8). “MMC X” appears as the
source identity for parties called by an attendant
and added to the conference. “MMC X” appears
as the destination identity for parties who dialed
directly into the conference or call into an attendant and are added to the conference. Any account
code applied to a meet-me conference must be entered by an attendant.
Alternate Trunk Groups. If a trunk is accessed via
direct trunk group access, the SMDR option to
record or not record the call is based on the assignment of the primary trunk group, even when
an alternate route is selected. When LCR is used,
the SMDR option is based on the LCR route element used.
Station Hunting. The account code and destination identity is that of the final (i.e., answering)
station.
Call Forwarding (internal). The account code is that
of the forwarded (i.e., dialed) station and the destination identity is that of the forwarded-to (i.e., answering) station.
Call Forwarding to Public Network. When an incoming trunk calls a station which is forwarded to
the public network, two SMDR records are generated: one showing the incoming trunk as the
source ID and the forwarded station as the destination ID; the other showing the forwarded station
as the source ID and the out-going trunk as the
destination ID. An internal station calling the forwarded station generates one SMDR call record
showing the forwarded station as the source ID and
the outgoing trunk as the destination ID. All records
show the account code of the forwarded station.

’

A30808-X5130-AllO-l-8918
Issue 1, May 1986

SATURN IIE EPABX
General Description

8.03 Special SMDR Messages. The list below defines special messages, that is, messages other than call records, that
are printed on the SMDR device.
a.

Page Header. Each new page of SMDR call records
is preceded by the page header. The page header identifies the current date and time (24-hour notation), and
the page number of that date’s report. The page header
also provides the data headings for the call detail
record items.
Daily Trailer. The call record report is concluded for the
current data at midnight with the daily trailer. The daily
trailer identifies the date of the report and the total number of pages printed for that date. The next day’s report
is automatically started at the top of the next page.
Attendant Activated (SMDR) Recording. The following
message is printed when the attendant activates the
SMDR recording for a particular trunk group:
l ** SMDR
ACTIVATED FOR TRUNK
ATTENDANT yy AT zz:zz:zz l **

GROUP

ing message is printed when the attendant deactivates
the SMDR recording for a particular trunk group:
*** SMDR DEACTIVATED FOR TRUNK GROUP xx BY
ATTENDANT yy AT zz:zz:zz ***
(where xx = deactivated trunk group number, yy =
-attendant number, zz:zz:zz = time of deactivation).
e. Annoyance Call Trace. The annoyance call trace feature prints a message formatted identically to a call
record, with the following exceptions:
l

xx BY
l

(where xx = activated trunk group number, yy = attendant number, zz:zz:zz = time of activation).
l

d. Attendant Deactivated

(SMDR) Recording.

The follow-

A “T” is printed in the Record Type field.
The source identity shows the subscriber extension
number of the station activating the annoyance call
trace.
The destination identity shows the subscriber extension number of the trunk group and trunk group
member number of the connected party.
Nothing is shown for RT, ACC. CODE, DIALED
DIGITS, AUTH IDX., CALL DURATION, SPCL ID,
and ACCT CODElAUTH CODE.
The START TIME shows the time at which the annoyance call trace was made.

A30808-X5130-AllO-l-B918
Issue 1, May 1986

SATURN IIE EPABX
General Description

SRCE
ID

MST
ID

-----

7100
7216
22109
1496
7234
71c4
7344
7234
12%
7623
7403
T
7003
7409
7100
7220
22,OI
‘1234
4222
22104
22102
7108
4312
7409
22/09
7235
I1100
7149
7235
400:
7235
22/03
7428
7189
ll/OO
22/03
7344
1231
nrtc
1
7219
7183
03103
7234
7381
22104
*cc
2
7344
1250
7623
22111
7342
7183
22/05
11113
17/05
01100
02/O?

02100
OBlOl
10100
07/01
19/O,
oe/oo
02/02
19/o,
OS/O2
02103
02/04
04/1X
03,OL
02100
IO/O0
718b
19,CZ
11/00
7233
7286
08/O,
03/02
05,OI
7122
OS/02
7420
07/00
owo2
IO/O.
08/02
7380
07102
19101
7410
32*7
02105
02103
03lOO
02,Ol
oe/o1
4320
19,02
02/00
7197
03/02
02/00
07101
02100
*o/o0
oz/qo
OBIOZ
72’32
4444
3312
7250
4352

RT
-ii0
03
12
09
04
09
00
04
09
00
00

ACC
CDDE
__-9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9

13166435943
48392Otl
7520

04
01

9
9

lbD94242400
0112233317826

03
04

9
81
9

10630545
4367
13168435543

15522171

03
03
*2
ii

9
9
9

19047857503
lbLJS077
754,
lS13L658077

09
04

9
9

7417556
14684225302

00
00
02
00
03

9
9
9
9
9

483056
1
9427916
9949950
7511030
17377400

04
00

9
9

1L.094242400
18004320190

81
9
9
9

4320
4SM561
lSl3P573200
3917954
i5St
9735165
17377400

00
03
00
I2
00
03

9
9

8-4 (4 pages)

Figure

A”*”
IDX
--

3ea45.3
17375354
7541
632380
I
Im94242400
5e33487
403056
I
16D94242400
4456234
3689721
4870049

04
00
12

END SPIDR RECORDS
F(R
TOTAL
PAGES
FOR THI8

A3437.l-5120185

DIALED
DIGITS
________L_--__-_

Jute
DATE

12.
2

8.00

START
TIWE
- ---____
13 57 09
13 52 71
13 51 IS
13.57
24
13 97 32
13 57 10
13.5S
09
13 57 54
13-54
01
13 ¶Y 20
13 50 41
13 51 0.
13 58.51
13 5e 37
13 59 14
13 59 24
13 59
II
13 5s 57
13 56 29
14 00 52
40
14
14 01 37
14 00 22
14 02’31
15 02 32
13 02 31
I5 03.01
15 03
15
13 02
5e
15 03 41
15 03 52
15 04 21
I5 03 09
I5 03 20
15 04
13
15 05 02
I5 04 44
I5 05 22
15 04:02
13 OL 20
I5 04 43
I5 04 47
13 02 2b
13 05 47
13 07 02
15 07 17
15 05
95
15 07 39
15 o-a 16
19 08
16
15 08 36
I3 07 51
10 I2
10
19 22
19
21
LB 01
II
39 28

CALL
DURATION
----_-0
4
b
0
0
0
0
0
4
0
8.

0 06
0 29
0 16
@ II
0 32
1 2s
2 22
0 IC
2 -IO
0 23
2 00
0 09
0 30
0 29
0 19
0 12
1-w
0 30
0 21
0 22
I 40
I 33
0 51
0 02
0 37
0 02
I 5,
0 03
1 .I
I 44
4 15
I 26
0 13
0 02
1 .5
0 1s
0 00
0 I4
0 10
L 00
0 40
1 22
2 33
5 II

of SMDR Printout

ACCT CODE I
Y)TH
CODE
-__-----&200
3500

1*
5e
14
16
10
39
01
39
34
31
13

1984

Example

SPCL
ID
____

m
7x0
5320
3230
7300
5320
5730
WOO
0800
sxm
5970
7600
2100
3320
730”
7800
7800
S7439803.7
WOO
5300
MO
woo
5910
no0
2
7300
7710
5210
7800
moo
n10
5230
5910
2
MO
x20
4125~352225
7300
7710
woo
3

s
2
0
A

“!J
__

A30808-X5130-A120-l-8918
Issue 1, May 1986

Siemers Practices
General Series

SATURN” IIE EPABX
ATURE DESCRIPTIONS

Issued by Office Systems Group
5500 Broken Sound Boulevard N.W., Boca Raton, Florida 33431
Siemens

Information

Systeins,

Inc.

(305) 994-8100

Telex: 515052

Printed in U.S.A.

A30808-X5130-A120-l-8918
Issue 1, May 1986

Siemens Practices
General Series

0 Siemens Information
All rights reserved.

Systems, Inc., 1985

trademark

of Siemens

Information

Systems, Inc.

A30808-X5130-AllO-l-8918
Issue 1, May 1986

SATURN IIE EPABX
Feature Descriptions

CONTENTS
PAGE

SECTION
..........................
1.00 INTRODUCTION
Purpose of Document .......................
General Information about Features.

...........

2.00 SYSTEM FEATURES ......................
System Overview. ..........................
General Features ..........................
Administration Features .....................
Flexible Numbering Features .................
Night Answering Features ...................
System Dialing Features. ....................
, .......
System Alarm Features .............
Line Lockout Features ......................
Intercept Features ..........................
Access to Customer-Provided
Equipment Features ......................
Restriction Features ........................
Diagnostic and Maintenance
Testing Features .........................
Trunking Features ..........................
3.00 ATTENDANT FEATURES. ..................
Attendant Console Overview .................
General Features ..........................
Call Handling Features. .....................
Recall Features. ...........................
Display Features ...........................
Direct Access Features. .....................
Control Features ...........................
Volume Control Features ....................
System Status Features .....................
Busy Verification Features ..................
4.00 STATION FEATURES ......................
Station Overview ...........................
General Features ..........................
Hold Features .............................

l-1
l-1.
l-l
2-1
2-l
2-2
2-3
2-4
2-5
2-6
2-6
2-7
2-7
2-7
2-8
2-8
2-9
3-1
3-l
3-l
3-l
3-3
3-3
3-4
3-4
3-8
3-9
3-10
4-1
4-l
4-l
4-l

PAGE

SECTION

4-2
4-2
4-2
4-3
4-5
4-5
4-5
4-7
4-7
4-8
4-8

Transfer Features ................
Conference Features : ............
Queuing Features ................
Call Forwarding Features ..........
Call Pickup Features .............
Speed Calling Features ...........
Station Hunting Features ... : ......
Message Waiting Features .........
Privacy Features .................
Special Station Assignment Features
Additional Features. ..............

. . 5-l

5.00 SIEMENS DIGITAL TELEPHONE FEATURES
Overview ..............................
General Features .......................
Ringing Features. .......................
Direct Access Features. ..................
Hold Features ..........................
intercom Features. ......................
Display Features (18- and 26-Button
SDTs only) ............................
Message Waiting Features. ...............
Privacy Features ........................
Special Station Operation Features .........

5-l
5-l
5-2
5-2
5-3
5-3
5-4
5-5
5-5
5-5

LIST OF TABLES
TABLE
1.00
1.01
2.00
2.01
4.00

SATURN IIE EPABX Features.
.
Mnemonics Used in This Practice.
Station Class-of-Service Features
Traffic and Feature Usage Measurement
Station instrument Codes Used in
This Practice
. .
..
.

PAGE
l-1
l-5
2-5
2-6

Table
.

4-l

SATURN IIE EPABX
Feature Descriptions

A30808-X5130-A120-l-8918
Issue 1, May 1986

SECTION
1.01

Purpose

1.00

INTRODUCTION

of Document

1.02

The purpose of this document is to provide descriptions of
all SATURN IIE (SATURN II - Expanded) Electronic Private
Automatic Branch Exchange (EPABX) features. In this document, these SATURN IIE features are divided into the following four major categories:
-

System Features
Attendant Console Features.
Station Features
Siemens Digital Telephone (SDT) Features.

An alphabetical list of these features, separated by category,
is provided ir. ,Table 1.00. All mnemonics used in this document are listed and defined in Table 1.01.

Table 1.00
SYSTEM

General

Information

about

Features

Features are the characteristics and capabilities of a telephone
switching system. The features provided by the SATURN IIE
EPABX System include the basic calling features such as
Station-to-Station Calling, Call Transfer, and Call Forwarding.
More elaborate features are also included, such as Least-Cost
Routing, Station Message Detail Recording, and 15-Digit Toll
Code Restriction.
The SATURN IIE EPABX features are designed to provide
flexible and powerful telephone switching system that satisfies the user’s communication
requirements.

SATURN IIE EPABX Features
FEATURES

PARAGRAPH

Additional Input/Output Devices .................................................................
.2.02(a)
Alarm Indication - Major ......................................................................
.2.07(a)
Alarm Indication - Minor ................................................
.2.07(b)
Alternate Routing..
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ::.2.13(a)
...................................................
Assigned NightAnswer........................................................................2.05(a
)
Automatic Call Distribution Recorded Announcement
Service ........................................
.2.09(a)
Automatic On-Line Diagnostic Testing and Reporting ...............................................
.2.12(a)
BrownoutProtection...........................................................................2.02(b
)
CentralOffice(City)TrunkAccess
.2.13(b)
.........................................................
CodeCallAccess.....................................................................:::~::..2.lO(a
)
Convection Cooling .........................................................................................................
. .2.02(c)
CustomerMemory
Updating..
::::::::::::::::..2.03(a)
Common Control Switching Arrangement Access (CCSA). ...........................................
.2.13(c)
Daytime Trunk Control ........................................................................
.2.11(c)
Dedicated Incoming Trunks .....................................................................
.2.13(d)
Dictation Access
.2.10(b)
Digital Pad Switching
::.
‘.2,02(d)
Direct Inward Dialing
: : : : .2.06(a)
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................
Direct Inward System Access
.2.06(b)
DirectlnwardSystemAccess-Shared........................................................................................
::::::::::::::::::.2.06(~)
Direct Outward Dialing. .......................................................................
.2.06(d)
Direct Inward Dialing - Flexible Station Numbering
.2.04(a)
................................................
Dual-Tone Multifrequency System Outpulsing ......................................................
.2.02(f)
DTMF-to-Dial Pulse Conversion .................................................................
.2.02(e)
Eight-Digit Toll Code Restriction For Direct Trunk Group Access ......................................
.2.11(a)
End-to-End DTMF Signaling ......................................................
: ............
.2.02(g)
Enhanced Private Switched Communication
Service Access .........................................
.2.13(e)
External Extension Numbering ..................................................................
Fifteen-Digit Toll Code Restriction For Direct Trunk Group Access .....................................
.2.11(b)
Flexible Intercept Facilities ....................................................................
.,2.09(b)
Flexible System Numbering Plan ...............................................................
.2.04(b)
Foreign ExchangeTrunk
Access ...............................................................
..2.13( 9
HighTrafficCapacity .......................................................................
,.,2.02(h)
Incoming Class-of-Service Blocking. ..............................................................
.2.11(d)
LeastCostRouting............................................................................2.13(g
)
LCR with Provisions for Specialized Common Carrier. ..............................................
.2.13(h)
Line Lockout - Attendant Intercept ..............................................................
.2.08(a)
Line Lockout - Automatic .....................................................................
.2.08(b)
Low PowerConsumption
..2.02~)
.....................................................................
Manual On-Line Maintenance Testing. ...........................................................
.2.12(b)
Memory Support..
..2.02~)
..........................................................................
Multiple Listed Directory Numbers ..............................................................
.2.04(c)

A30808-X5130-Al20-l-8918
issue 1, May 1986

SATURN IIE EPABX
Feature Descriptions

Table 1.00
SYSTEM

SATURN IIE EPABX Features
FEATURES

(Continued)

Music on Hold - Line or Trunk Interface .........................................................
Music On Hold - Paging ......................................................................
Music On Hold - System. .....................................................................
: ....................
Night Service Automatic Switching .........................................
Off-Premises Stations............................................~.............................2.02(k
Power Failure Restart - Floppy Disk. ............................................................
...................................................................
Remote Alarm Identification.
Remote Customer Memory Updating ............................................................
Remote On-Line Maintenance and Diagnostic Testing. ..............................................
..................................................
Remote Traffic and Feature Usage Measurement
Special Night Answer Position. .................................................................
.......................................................................
Station Class-of-Service
Stat. ,n Extension Numbering ..................................................................
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) .......................................................
.............................................
Station Message Dstail Recording - AccountCodes
Station-to-Station Calling ......................................................................
Station-to-Station Class-of-Service Blocking .......................................................
System SiteI.D...............................................................................2.02(m
TandemTrunking..............................................................................2.13~
TieTrunkAccess..............................................................................2.13~
.........................................................
Traffic and Feature Usage Measurement.
: ........................
: ...........
.............................
Trunk Group Class-of-Service
Trunk-to-Trunk Connections......................................................................2.13(k
Uniform Station Distribution Wiring. .............................................................
Variable Timing Parameters. ...................................................................
Voice Mail Interface ........................................................................
Wide Area Telephone Service: Trunk Access ......................................................
Zoned Universal Night Answer .................................................................
ATTENDANT

FEATURES

Alert Busy Attendant Indication .................................................................
Attendant Control of Station Dial Restrictions. .....................................................
Attendant Selective Answering Priority ...........................................................
Automatic Recall on Camp-On .................................................................
Automatic Recall on Hold .....................................................................
Automatic Recall on No Answer ................................................................
Automatic Recall Redial ........................................................................
Busy Verification of Station Lines ...............................................................
Busy Verification of Trunks. ....................................................................
CallHold....................................................................................3.03(b
.........................................................................
CallType Display..
Call Waiting Indication ........................................................................
Called Extension Status Display ................................................................
Called Station Number Display .................................................................
Called Trunk Number Display ..................................................................
Calling-Station Number Display. ................................................................
Calling-Trunk Number Display. ..................................................................
Camp-On....................................................................................~O3(c
Class-of-Call Exclusions - Key(s) ...............................................................
Class-of-Call Exclusions - Programmed ...................................................
...............................................................................
Conference
.......................................................................
ConsoleOperation..
Control of Facilities. ..........................................................................
Control of Station Message Detail Recording Facilities ..............................................
Digital Clock Display .........................................................................
DirectTrunkAccess...........................................................................~O6(a
Direct Trunk Group Access ..................................................................
Extension of Calls ..........................................................................
.....................................................................
Flexible Key Assignments
Inter-Console Calling and Transfer ..............................................................
Locked-LoopOperation.........................................................................3.03(i

l-2

PARAGRAPH
.2.10(c)
.2.10(d)
.2.10(e)
.2.05(b)
)
.2,07(d)
.2,07(c)
.2.03(b)
.2,12(c)
.2.03(c)
.2.05(c)
,2.02(l)
.2.04(d)
.2.03(d)
.,.2.03(e)
.2.06(e)
.2.11(e)
)
)
)
.2.03(f)
.2.02(n)
)
.2.02(o)
.2.03(g)
.,.4.14(e)
.2.13(l)
.2.05(d)
PARAGRAPH
.3.09(a)
.3.07(d)
.3.03(a)
.3.04(a)
.3.04(b)
.3.04(c)
.3.10(a)
.3.10(b)
)
..~05(a)
.3.09(b)
.3.05(b)
.3.05(c)
.3.05(d)
.3.05(e)
.3.05(f)
)
.3.03(d)
: ......
.3.03(e)
.,.3.03(f)
.,.3.02(a)
.3.07(b)
.3.07(c)
.3.05(g)
)
.,.3.06(b)
..~03(g)
.3.02(b)
.3.03(h)
)

SATURN IIE EPABX
Feature Descriptions

A30808-X5130-A120-l-8918
Issue 1, May 1986

Table 1.00
ATTENDANT

SATURN IIE EPABX Features
FEATURES

(Continued)

(Continued)
PARAGRAPH

Least Cost Routing - Route Number Display. .
... . .. ..
. ..
.3.05(h)
MinorAlarmldentification
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ::::::::::::::::::::..3.09(c)
Night Service Control . . .
.
. .. .. . . .
. ... .
.3.07(d)
Numerical Call Waiting Display
..
.
.
..
. .‘.‘.‘.1.‘.‘.‘.‘.‘.‘,‘.‘.‘.‘.‘.‘.’.’.’.~.’.’.’.‘.~.~.‘.~.’.’
’ ” ’ ‘. .3.06(i)
Override.............................................~........,......................::::
::..3.03(j)
SenderizedOperation.................................................,...................,..,.3.02(~)
Serial Calling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.3.03(k)
SpecialAccountCodeEntry-Single-Line
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ::::::::::::::::::::::::::..4.14(6)
Special Overflow Answer Position
. .. .. ..,... .....
... .
.3.03(l)
Switched LoopOperation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ::::“““““““““““::3,03(m)
Trunk Flash Capability
... .. . .
. ....
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‘.‘.‘.‘.‘.‘.~.‘,‘.‘.‘.‘.‘.‘.‘.‘.’.’.~.~.’.’.
.3.02(n)
Trunk Group Alphanumeric Display . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
..
.3.05(j)
Trunk Group Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . .
. . ‘. ‘. ‘. ‘. ‘. ‘. ‘. ‘. ‘. ‘. ‘. ‘. ‘. ‘. ‘. .. ‘. ‘. ‘... 3.09(d)
Volum,e Control - Audible Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . : : .3.08(a)
Volume Control - Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.08(b)
STATION FEATURES

PARAGRAPH

Add-On Conference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...4.05(a)
Attendant Override Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . .4.12(a)
.4.03(a)
Automatic Callback on Held Calls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AutomaticCallDistribution
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::.4,lO(h)
Call Forwarding - All Calls
.....
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.07(a)
.4.07(b)
Call Forwarding - Busy Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CarlForwarding-Fixed..................................,..............:::::::::::::::::~::~;.4.07(~)
.4.07(d)
Call Forwarding - No Answer . . . . . .
....
. ... ...... .,.... . ..
CallForwarding-Return
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ::::::::::::::::::::::.4.07(e)
Call Forwarding - Secretarial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . :. . . . . . .4.07(f)
.4*07(g)
Call Forwarding to Public Network . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . .
CallHold...............................................:::::::::::::::::::::~::~~~~~~~::~~;.4.03(c)
Call Hold - Flip-Flop (Broker) . . . . . . . . . .
.. .. ....... ... ... ....
... . .
. . . . . . .4.03(d)
Call Park....................................................................................4.03(d)
Call Pickup - Directed . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.. .. ..
. . . . . . . . , . .4.08(a)
Call Pickup-Group
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...4.08(b)
.4.14(a)
Call Tracing.............................................................
CallTransfer
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I:::::::::::::::::::.4.04(a)
CallTransferSecurity..........................................................................4.04(b)
. .4.04(c)
Call Transfer with Automatic Camp-On
.................... .. ... ... ......
Call Waiting -Originating..
........... . . ..... ....... . ..
. . . . . . .‘.‘.‘.‘...‘.‘.‘...‘.‘.....‘.‘.‘.’.’.
. .4.06(f)
Call Waiting - Terminating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.06(g)
Consultation Hold.............................................................................4.02(e)
Data Line Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.12(b)
.4.12(a)
Dial Access to Attendant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Distinctive Ringing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . : .’.’: : : : .’: : : : : : : : .’: : :.4.02(b)
.4.12(c)
Do-Not-Disturb.............................,.....................
Dual-Tone Multifrequency Dialing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . : : 1 : : : : : : : 1 : : : : : : : : : : 1 : : : 1 : :.4.02(c)
.4.12(d)
Executive Override.............................................................
Executiveoverride-Automatic
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ::::::::::::::.4.12(e)
Executive Override No Tone Security
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.12(g)
.4.12(f)
Executive Override Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Executive Override Without Warning Tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‘.‘.‘.‘.‘.‘.‘.‘.‘.‘.‘.‘.‘.4.12(h)
Holdto Attendant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..4.03(9
. . . . . . . . . . ...4.13(a)
HotLineService...............................................................
Immediate Ringing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .’. . . . . . . . . . . .4.02(d)
. .4.06(b)
internal Call Queuing - Callback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
InternalCallQueuing-Standby
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ::::::::::..4.06(~)
LastNumberRedial..............................................................,............4.09(a)
Meet-Me Conference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.05(b)
Message Waiting - Automatic Callback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‘... .4.11(a)
. .4.11(b)
Message Waiting - Cancellation
... .. .. ... ... .. ... ... .. ... .......
Message Waiting Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ::::::::::::
.,4.11(c)
Mobile Authorization Codes. . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.14(b)

1-3

A30808-X5130-Al20-l-6918
Issue 1, May 1986

SATURN IIE EPABX
Feature Descriptions

Table 1.00

SATURN IIE EPABX Features

STATION FEATURES

(Continued)

Originate-Only Service ........................................................................
Outgoing Call Queuing - Callback ...............................................................
Outgoing Call Queuing - Standby ..............................................................
..~..........I.............................4.lO(a)
Pilot Number Access ...............................
Rotary Dialing................................................................................4.02(e
Single-Line Telephone - Special Account Code Entry ...............................................
Speed Calling-Group
.....................................................................
Speed Calling - Individual. ....................................................................
Station-Controlled
Conference ..................................................................
Station Forced Disconnect.......................................................................4.14(d
Station Hunting - Busy Advance. ...............................................................
Station Hunting - Circular .....................................................................
Station Hunting - No-Answer Advance ...........................................................
Station Hunting - Secretarial. ..................................................................
Station Hunting - Terminal .....................................................................
StopHunt...................................................................................4.lO(g
Terminate-OnlyService.........................................................................4.13(~
Voice Mail Interface ........................................................................
SIEMENS

DIGITAL TELEPHONE

FEATURES

Abbreviated Ringing - Station Busy .............................................................
Attendant Identification on Display ..............................................................
AutomaticAnswer.............................................................................5.06(a
Automatic Intercom. ..........................................................................
Automatic Line Preference. ....................................................................
Bridged Call..................................................................................5.09(a
Call Forwarding Display........................................................................~O7(b)
Call Park Location Number Display. .............................................................
Call Pickup Source Display ....................................................................
Call Privacy..................................................................................5.09(b
CallRelease.............................................~...................................5.02(b
Call Transfer To Attendant .....................................................................
Call Waiting Display ..........................................................................
Callback Number Display ......................................................................
Common Audible Ringing .....................................................................
Conference Mode Display .....................................................................
Dial Input Verification Display ..................................................................
Direct Station Selection .......................................................................
Direct Trunk Group Selection. ..................................................................
DirectTrunkSelection
......................................................................
Duration of Call Display. .......................................................................
. ..........................................
Exclusive Hold .................................
Executivelntercom............................................................................5.06(~
Feature Buttons ...........................................................................
Forced Catl Forwarding .....................................................................
Hands-Free Mute ...........................................................................
Hands-Free Operation ........................................................................
I-Use Indication .............................................................................
..~.....................................5.07~)
Incoming Call Display..
................................
ManualHold.................................................................................5.05(b
Manuallntercom..............................................................................5.06(d
Message Waiting - Selective Automatic Callback ..................................................
Message Waiting - Selective Cancellation ........................................................
Message Waiting - Source Display. .............................................................
MultitinePickup
...........................................................................
On-HookDialing..............................................................................5.10(~
Pickup Buttons...............................................................................5.02(h
Recall Identification Display .....................................................................
Saved Number Redial ......................................................................
Speed Calling - Individual List Display ..........................................................
Station-Defined Direct Dial. ....................................................................

PARAGRAPH
.4.13(b)
.4.06(d)
.4.06(e)
)
.4.14(c)
...4.09(b)
.4.09(c)
.4.05(c)
)
.4.10(b)
.4.10(c)
.4.10(d)
.4.10(e)
.4.10(f)
)
)
...4.14(c)
PARAGRAPH
.503(a)
.507(a)
)
.5.06(b)
.5.02(a)
)
.
.5.07(c)
.5.07(d)
)
)
.5.02(c)
.5.07(e)
.5.07(f)
.5.03(b)
.5.07(g)
.5.07(h)
.5.04(a)
.5.04(b)
.,.5.04(c)
.5.07(i)
...5.05(a)
)
...5.02(d)
...5.02(e)
..5.lO(a)
.5.10(b)
..5.02( 9
)
)
.5.08(a)
.5.08(b)
.5.07(k)
...5.02(g)
)
)
.5.07(l)
.,.5.04(d)
5.07(m)
.504(e)

A30808-X5130-A120-1-6918
Issue 1, May 1986

SATURN IIE EPABX
Feature Descriptions

Table 1.00
SIEMENS

SATURN IIE EPABX Features

DIGITAL TELEPHONE

FEATURES

(Continued)

PARAGRAPH

Station Ringer Cutoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...5.03(c)
Station Senderized Operation.
.
.5.02(i)
Station Message Detail Recording - Account Code Display
.5.07(n)
Time-of-Day Display
.
. .
.507(o)
Timed Reminder..............................................................................5.07(p)
VoiceAnnounce...........................................................................,..5.06(e)
Table 1.01
MNEMONIC
ACD
ANA
ASCII
ATT RLS
ccs
CCSA
CFWD
CIOP
CMU
co
cos
DDD
DID
DISA
DISAS
DIT
DOD
DSS
DTMF
EPABX
EPSCS
FX
I/O
INC
IOP
LCR
LDN
LED
MAJ ALM
MIN ALM
MEM
MDF
OPR
PCB
PCM
PSU
RAM
RAUP
RCL
see
SDT
SET
SLMA
SLMA-S
SLT
SMDR
SNAP
SOAP
WATS
ZUNA

Mnemonics

Used in This Practice
DESCRIPTION

Automatic Call Distribution
Assigned Night Answer
American Standard Code for information Interchange
Attendant Release
Hundred Call-Seconds
Common Control Switching Arrangement
Call Forwarding
Controller/Input-Output
Processor
Customer Memory Updating
Central Office
Class-Of-Service
Direct Distance Dialing
Direct Inward Dialing
Direct Inward Dialing Access
Direct Inward Dialing Access - Shared
Dedicated Incoming Trunks
Direct Outward Dialing
Direct Station Selection
Dual Tone Multifrequency
Electronic Private Automatic Branch Exchange
Enhanced Private Switched Communications
Svc.
Foreign Exchange
Input/Output
Incoming
Input/Output Processor
Least Cost Routing
Listed Directory Number
Light-Emitting Diode
Major Alarm
Minor Alarm
Memory Module
Main Distribution Frame
Operator
Printed Circuit Board
Pulse Code Modulation
Power System Unit
Random Access Memory
Remote Access Unit/RS-232 Ports
Recalls
Specialized Common Carrier
Siemens Digital Telephone
Siemens Electronic Telephone
Subscriber Line Module Analog
Subscriber Line Module Analog - Station
Single Line Telephone
Station Message Detail Recording
Special Night Answer Position
Special Overflow Answer Position
Wide Area Telephone Service
Zoned Universal Night Answer

1-5 (1-6 blank)

SATURN IiE EPABX
Feature Descriptions

A30808-X5130-A120-l-8918
Issue 1. May 1986

SECTION 2.00
2.01

System

Overview

The SATURN IIE System is a stored-program controlled Electronic Private Automatic Branch Exchange (EPABX), which
uses Pulse Code Modulation (PCM)!Time Division switching.
The SATURN IIE EPABX System is capable of switching both
voice and data.
The SATURN IIE System is housed in a light-weight equipment cabinet called the Basic Cabinet. In its expanded configuration, the SATURN IIE System is housed in a Basic
Cabinet plus an Expansion Cabinet. The Equipment Cabinet(s) contain all functional units of the system.
Plug-in printed circuit boards (PCBs) are installed in the cabinet. These PCBs contain the circuits for common control,
switching, and for the peripherals required in system operation. The SATURN IIE EPABX provides from 224 to 480 ports
in the basic cabinet. The expanded cabinet (stacked atop the
basic cabinet) provides an additional 256 to 512 ports (992
ports maximum).

SYSTEM FEATURES
An optional Remote Access Unit board provides two AS-232-C
ports for general use and one modem port for remote access.
A-single RS-232-C port is provided by the CIOP board in the
basic system for system interface.
The SATURN IIE EPABX System can be arranged to accommodate conventional telephones (rotary dialing and dual-tone
multifrequency (DTMF) dialing) as well as Siemens Digital Telephones (SDTs). The SATURN IIE EPABX can be equipped
with a maximum of I2 attendant consoles or it can be operated without any consoles. One cable pair is required to interconnect each SDT to the SATURN IIE EPABX switching
system.
Administrative additions and changes are made by input of
simplified instructions in plain English format via a local or
remote service terminal. These modifications can be made
during system operation without interference to normal call
processing.
The following paragraphs describe the features that are
characteristic for the SATURN IIE EPABX System.

SATURN IIE EPABX
Feature Descrtptions

2.02

General

A30808-X5130-A120-l-B918
Issue 1, May 1986

Features

a. Additional

Input/Output

designed to be non-blocking. This network provides
up to 36 CCS (1 Erlang) per port.
Devices
i.

The SATURN IIE EPABX is capable of connecting input/output devices via three RS-232-C interface 110
ports and one port connected to a modem to allow remote access. All I/O ports can include, but are not limited to, local service terminal, Station Message Detail
Recording (SMDR), automatic traffic measurement
reporting, and on-line maintenance and administrative
access. The RAUP contains an internal modem with
a dedicated RS-232-C interface which provides a remote dial-up maintenance port (line or trunk interface).
b.

Brownout

Protection

The SATURN IIE EPABX power supply is designed to
tolerate frequency deviations of as much as 3 Hz above
or below the normal input frequency (60 Hz) and input voltage variations from 95 to 130 Vat.

Digital Pad Switching
The SATURN IIE EPABX inserts the proper gain or loss
into all connection paths to ensure correct transmission levels.

DTMF-to-Dial

Pulse Conversion

MMF-toDial
Pulse Conversion enables MMF stations
to complete outgoing central office (CO) calls over dial
pulse CO trunks. The SATURN IIE EPABX translates
the MMF station-generated signals and converts them
to dial pulse digits for transmission to the CO.
f.

Dual-Tone Multifrequency

System Outpulsing

DualTone Multi-frequency (MMF) tones are generated as a SATURN IIE EPABX function on outward-dialed
calls over MMF Central Office (CO) trunks. DTMF outpulsing can be provided, regardless of the station dialing type (DTMF, digital, or rotary).
End-to-End

DTMF Signaling

The SATURN IIE EPABX sends DTMF tones through
the public network to the distantbnd.
The transmission of DTMF tones is used for a variety of purposes,
including computer access, control functions, and inward call completion at the distant switching system.
h.

High Traffic Capacity
The switching

2-2 (Rev. 5/l/86)

network of the SATURN IIE EPABX is

Memory

Support

If an ac power failure occurs, the optional memory support battery supplies the necessary power to maintain
the Random Access Memory (RAM) for a minimum of
3 minutes. When power is restored, the internal battery backup, after 30 minutes of charging, is capable
of another 3-minute cycle.

C. Convection Cooling

t0 aovb.

Low Power Consumption
The SATURN IIE EPABX has been designed to provide maximum efficient use and distribution of power
via distributed power supplies. Power consumption depends on the system configuration: the total number
and combination of lines, trunks, SDTs, attendant consoles, and any auxiliary equipment. A fully-equipped
basic cabinet uses a nominal 800 Watts. A fullyequipped system with basic and expansion cabinets
uses a nominal 1600 Watts.

The SATURN IIE EPABX, because of its low power consumption and efficient equipment layout, does not require the use of forced-cooling
fans or similar
equipment. The cabinet is designed to make full use
of convection cooling of all the equipment while maintaining temperature design limits. However, the system
must be located within an ambient environment ranging from 4 degrees C to 38 degrees C (40 degrees F
to 100 degrees F), and a relative humidity range of 20%

:\
.:
2

Off-Premises,

Stations

The SATURN IIE EPABX extends the station line circuits to industry-standard telephones located at a site
remote (off-premises) to the system.
I.

Station Class-of-Service
The SATURN IIE EPABX provides a maximum of 32
station classes-of-service. Each class-of-service can be
arranged in memory to allow or deny access to any
combination of features included in the system. For
each station, class-of-service
codes are stored in
memory. These codes can be changed at any time by
using the Customer
Memory
Updating
(CMU)
procedures.
Table 2.00 lists the features which can be assigned to
individual stations through class-of-service codes.

m. System Site Identification

(ID)

The SATURN IIE EPABX enables the entry of a specific
customer’s site identification into the customer portion
of the system memory: site location, site name, site
number, and/or similar information. These data can
contain up to I6 characters and are printed out, via the
terminal, as a heading at the beginning and end of
each CMU session.
n. Trunk Group Class-of-Service
The SATURN IIE EPABX allows the assignment of a
variety of attributes to each trunk group in the system.
Data established on a per-trunk-group basis include:
applicable toll code restriction lists, restricted station
classesof-service,
alternate trunk groups for routing
purposes, incoming/outgoing control signaling information, incoming/outgoing
call-usage types, attendant
console answering priority, Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
prefixing/deletion/conversion
information, night answering assignments, and assigned trunk group alphanumeric display characters.

‘..

A30808-X5130-A120-l-8918
Issue 1, May 1986

SATURN IIE EPABX
Feature Descriptions

Uniform Station Distribution

Wiring

The SATURN IIE EPABX maintains consistent cabling
requirements regarding size, type, and number of cabling pairs connecting all types of station instruments
such as single-line telephones (SLTs) and Siemens Digital Telephones (SDTs). A maximum of one cable pair
is required between each instrument and the system.
2.03
a.

Administration
Customer

Features

Memory Updating

The CMU feature allows authorized personnel at a
designated service terminal to enter and make changes
to customer memory during normal system operation
with no interference to current call processing.

The monitored data can be recorded on a suitable
printer (via an RS-232-C interface) for hard-copy printout reports. Suitable accounting devices (e.g., SMDR
unit) can also be connected to this interface.

Customer memory, a portion of the complete system
memory, contains the data relating to system configuration, including programmable features and options
which the customer can select and arrange. Changes
to customer memory are made by using plain English
terms rather than numeric codes, thereby simplifying
data base updates.

The SMDR feature allows a service terminal
enable or disable the following:

user to

SMDR call record output for all incoming
outgoing calls over all trunk groups;

and/or

SMDR call record output for all incoming calls over
a particular trunk group;

‘-

SMDR call record output for all outgoing calls over
a particular trunk group.

Remote Customer

Memory Updating

This feature allows authorized personnel at a service
terminal to enter and make changes to customer
memory from a central depot or off-premises location.
Changes can be made during normal system operation with no interference to current call processing. The
service terminal must be equipped with a type 103/113or 212A-compatible modem of the originate-type. The
SATURN IIE EPABX is provided with a compatible modem of the answer-type equipped (internally) in the
RAUP
Access to the SATURN IIE EPABX is gained by dialing a preassigned public or private network number.
Refer to the feature, “Customer Memory Updating.”
C.

Remote Traffic and Feature Usage Measurement
Detailed traffic and feature usage measurement information is obtained from a service terminal that is located remote to the SATURN IIE EPABX. The service
terminal must be equipped with a type 1031113. or 21%
compatible modem of the originate-type.
The SATURN IIE EPABX is provided with a compatible modem of the answer-type equipped (internally) in
the RAUP Access to the SATURN IIE EPABX is gained
by dialing a preassigned public or private network number. Refer to the feature, “Traffic and Feature Usage
Measurement.”

Access Code
Account Code/Authorization
Code
Authorization Code Index
Call Duration
Destination Identity
Dialed Digits or Called Number
LCR Route Selection Number
Record Type
Source Identity
Special Identity
Starting Time of Call.

Station Message

Detail Recording

(SMDR)

The Station Message Detail Recording feature provides
a detailed record of all completed incoming and/or outgoing trunk calls by trunk group. lntraswitch stationto-station, station-to-attendant, and attendantto-station
calls are not-recorded. The following information is
recorded:

Station Message
Codes

Detail Recording

(SMDR) Account

Account codes can be used in conjunction with SMDR
on incoming and outgoing trunk calls for such purposes as cost accounting or client billing. The account
codes can be up to 11 numeric digits in length.
Two types of account codes are used: (i) standard (or
default) account codes and (ii) special account codes.
Default account codes are assigned to stations and are
automatically activated when a station user originates
or receives a call over a trunk. Special account codes
must be entered from the user’s telephone after the
user has dialed a trunk group access code (e.g., “9”
for a CO trunk) or after an LCR access code and
desired destinations number. A station user may also
override a default account code or previously entered
special account code with another special account
code at any time during an established trunk call.
Recall dial tone is heard when a special account code
is required. If a special account code is not entered
when requested by the system, the user is restricted
from making the call. Only the number of account-code
digits is checked by the SATURN IIE EPABX System.
Attendant consoles and SDTs can be assigned an account button, thus obviating the need for the user to
display and change account codes on a per-call basis.
Traffic and Feature Usage Measurement
This feature provides the SATURN IIE EPABX with the
capability of automatically or manually monitoring and
recording various system operations for which traffic
and feature usage information is desirable.

2-3

A30808-X5130-A120-l-8918
Issue 1, May 1986

SATURN IIE EPABX
Feature Descriptions

Two different types of measurements are provided. The
first type is event (peg) counts, which give an actual
count of the number of times a particular operation has
occurred in the system. The second type is usage
counts, which give the approximate total time a particular resource is in use during a certain time interval. This count is given in CCS (hundred call-seconds).
The traffic and feature usage measurement data are
stored in system memory. These data can be transmitted as output to a service terminal at designated intervals (15 minutes to 24 hours, in increments of 1 minute),
or on request. Normally, reporting periods are specified in multiples of 15 minutes.
For a list of the types of event counts and usage counts
that are monitored and recorded in the SATURN IIE
EPABX, refer to Table 2.01, “Traffic and Feature Usage
Measurement.”
g.

Variable Timing

Parameters

This feature provides for authorized personnel to
change the timing parameters of system operating
functions. The timing parameters are changed by using CMU procedures.
2.04
a.

Flexible

Numbering

Features

DID Flexible Station Numbering
Direct Inward Dialing (DID) calls from the CO are routed through the SATURN IIE EPABX to the appropriate
station. The CO, forwards the last 2, 3, 4, or 5 digits
of the directory number as an EPABX station address.
The SATURN IIE EPABX can either absorb or prefix
the leading digit(s) which are forwarded to it.
For example, if the CO forwards 48801 and the station
number plan uses numbers 0 through 999, the Saturn
IIE EPABX System can delete the 48 so that station
801 is rung. On the other hand, if the CO forwards only
01 and the stations are numbered from 800 through
899, then the number “8” is prefixed by the SATURN
IIE EPABX, and station 801 is rung.
The SATURN IIE EPABX System can also translate
numbers into another range. For example, if the CO
forwards the numbers 300 through 399 but the internal station numbering plan starts with 500 (500 through
599), the “3” (the hundreds digit) can be translated
to a “5” by the system. This number translation is also
provided for the tens digit (in a 2-digit numbering plan)
and the thousands digit (in a 4digit numbering plan).
With this DID flexible numbering concept, the external CO numbering plan can be made to agree with the
internal station addresses.

Table 2.00

Station

Class-of-Service

Features

FEATURES
ACD Group Access
Apparatus Test Access
Attendant Call Hold Retrieve
Attendant Override Security
Automatic Answer - Automatic and Executive
Intercom
Automatic Answer - Prime Line
Call Forwarding - All Calls/Busy Lines/No Answer
Call Forwarding - Fixed
Call Forwarding - Secretarial
Call Forwarding to Public Network
Call Hold
Call Hold - Flip-Flop (Broker)
Call Park
Call Pickup - Directed
Call Pickup - Group
Call Tracing
Code Call Access
Data Line Security
Diagnostic Test Access
Dictation Access
Do-Not-Disturb
Eight-Digit Toll Code Restriction Lists
Executive Override
Executive Override - Automatic
Executive Override No Tone Security
Executive Overiide Security
Executive Override Without Warning Tone
Fifteen-Digit Toll Code Restriction Lists
Forced Release
Ignore Flash
Internal Call Queuing - Callback/Standby
Internal Call Queuing - Standby (Originating)
Internal Call Queuing - Standby (Terminating)
Last Number Dialed
Least Cost Routing Access
LCR Alternate Trunk Group Advance
(Immediate, Timed, or No Advance)
LCR User Priority Level
Meet-Me Conference
Message Waiting Activation
Message Waiting - Automatic Callback; and
Message Waiting - Cancellation
Outgoing Call Queuing - Callback
Outgoing Call Queuing - Standby
Ringback
Saved-Number Redial
Speed Calling - Group (1 - 4 Groups)
Speed Calling - Individual
Station Class-of-Service Exclusion
Station-Controlled
Conference
Station-Controlled
Trunk-to-Trunk Connection
Station Hunting - Busy Advance
Station Hunting - No Answer Advance
Stop Hunt
Terminating Trunk Group Call Exclusion
Trunk Group Access
Trunk-to-Trunk Connection
Voice Page Access (Specific Zone or Combination
Zones)
Zoned Universal Night Answer

SATURN IIE EPABX
Feature Descriptions

A30808-X5130-AlZO-l-B918
Issue 1, May 1986

Table 2.01 Traffic and Feature Usage Measurement
EVENT COUNTS

CATEGORY

System
Related

Attendant
Related

Trunk
Related

Station
Related

USAGE COUNTS IN CCS

Conference Circuit Congestion
DTMF Receiver Attempts
DTMF Receiver Congestion
Ineffective Attempts
Number of Connections to Hunt Groups
Number of Connections to Terminal Devices

DTMF Receiver Usage
Hunt Group Queue Usage
Traffic Usage of Conference Devices
Traffic Usage of Terminal Devices

Attendant Extended Calls
Attendant Feature Activation
Attendant Originated Calls
Attendant Overflow
Attendant Queue Abandon
Attendant Queue Answer
Attendant Queue Entries
Attendant Queue Jumped
Call Exclusions
Calls-Waiting Lamps Flashing

Attendant Queue Usage
Attendant Usage
Calls-Waiting Lamp Flashing
Calls-Waiting Lamp On

(Note 3)

Incoming Trunk Attempts
Outgoing Trunk Attempts
Outgoing Trunk Queuing
Trunk Call Busy
Trunk Call Completions
Trunk Group Congestion
Trunk No Answer Count
Dial Tone Delay
Feature Button Activated
Non-Feature Button Activated
internal Attempts
Permanent-Line Lockout Count
Pickup Button Activated
Station Call Busy
Station Call Completions
Station No Answer Count

Incoming Trunk Usage
Outgoing Trunk Queue Usage
Outgoing Trunk Usage
(Note 1)
(Note 1)
(Note 1)
ACD Group Usage
(All Groups)
SDT Group incoming/
Outgoing Call
Usage
Station Usage
(Note 2)
(Note 2)
(Note 2)

NOTES: 1 - Incoming Calls
2 - Internal Calls
3 - Incoming, Operator, and Recalls.

2.04

Flexible Numbering Features (Continued)

b. Flexible System Numbering

Station numbers and access codes are assigned
and/or changed via CMU procedures and can be from
1 to 4 digits in length. Station numbers and access
codes of ‘different lengths are allowed provided that an
assignment of one number is not a partial dial sequence of another number. For example, “214” is not
allowed in the same system with “2141”.
Any first digit, 0 through 9, may be defined as the beginning of a station number. However, digit 0 is normally reserved for the attendant. The first digit for
access codes may be 0 through 9, l , or #.

Listed Directory

Numbers

The SATURN IIE EPABX System can be supplied with
multiple CO- Listed Directory Numbers (LDNs). Each
incoming DID trunk group assigned in the system can
be provided with an LDN.

Plan

The SATURN IIE System allows the assignment of station numbers, trunk access codes, and feature access
codes in accordance with a customer-established numbering plan.

Multiple

Station Extension

Numbering

The SATURN IIE EPABX System allows the assignment
of an additional number to an existing extension (station) number. These additional station numbers are
known as “alias extension numbers” to the primary (existing) station numbers.

2.05

Night Answering Features

a. Assigned

Night Answer (ANA)

When all attendant consoles are unstaffed, incoming
trunk calls normally directed to the attendant are directed to preselected stations. This arrangement is known
as Assigned Night Answer (ANA).

2-5

SATURN IIE EPABX
Feature Descriptions

A30808-X5130-A120-l-8918
Issue 1, May 1986

The night answering station(s) can be an individual station or the pilot number of a hunt group. The assignment of trunks or LDNs to ANA stations (for SATURN
IIE Systems served by DID trunks) is performed via a
CMU procedure.

ber to connect to the SATURN IIE EPABX via a dedicated CO trunk. The user waits for dial tone and then
dials a 2- to 6-digit authorization code. After the code
has been validated by the system, the party then
receives dial tone again and can place a call or use
a feature as if the party were at a SATURN IIE EPABX
station having the class-of-sewice associated with that
authorization code.

The night answering stations can make inside and outside calls and can access system features in the normal manner. When in night service, handling of the
incoming trunk calls is accomplished by use of the station Call Transfer feature.
b.

Night Service Automatic

DISA trunks can be accessed during daytime and
nighttime service. DISA trunks may not be used for outgoing service as part of another trunk group. The station class-ofservice can be arranged in SATURN IIE
memory to include any combination of call privileges.
Two thousand authorization codes (DISA or Mobile) are
provided in the system.

Switching

If an incoming CO call to the attendant console is not
answered within a predetermined period of time (variable via a CMU procedure), this feature automatically
switches the SATURN IIE System into the night service mode.
c.

Each authorization code may be marked as being printable or not printable for SMDR output. If both an account
code and a printable authorization code are used on a
particular call, then the associated SMDR call record will
only contain the authorization code. If a non-printable
authorization code is used, then the authorization code
index and the account code (if any) are printed.

Special Night Answer Position (SNAP)
The Special Night Answer Position is either a single
EPABX station, the pilot number of a hunt group or an
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) group designated to
handle incoming night calls which have not been assigned to any other night answering mode.

The DISA - Shared feature is similar in all respects
to DISA, except that the trunk group, which is serving
this feature, is shared between DISA and normal operation. When the trunk group is marked as DISAS in
the SATURN IIE software, calls to the special DISA
directory number are handled as incoming calls as long
as atJeast one attendant console is in operation. These
calls are routed to an attendant.

The SNAP station can access station-related features
in the normal manner. Handling of incoming trunk calls
is accomplished by use of the Station Call Transfer feature. SNAP stations are also alerted for night answer
Transfer With No Answer or Zoned Universal Night Answer (ZUNA) No Answer conditions.
d. Zoned Universal

Night Answer (ZUNA)

Arrangements can be made for incoming trunk calls,
normally directed to the attendant, to activate a signaling device (bells, gongs, etc.) on the customer’s
premises when the attendant consoles are unstaffed.
This feature is known as Zoned Universal Night Answer (ZUNA).
A maximum of 4 zones, each having an associated signaling device, can be provided in the SATURN IIE System. Incoming calls to a particular zone can be
answered by code. Incoming calls are handled by using the station Call Transfer feature. Sounding of a particular signalling device within a zone is accomplished
on a per-trunk basis. DID trunks are handled on a trunkgroup basis only.
2.06
a.

System

Dialing

This feature allows an incoming call from the CO to
reach a SATURN IIE EPABX station without using attendant assistance. Stations having this feature are assigned Fdigit telephone numbers within the numbering
range of the DID serving CO.
b.

Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
The DISA feature allows an outside party to gain access to its facilities by dialing directly into the SATURN
IIE EPABX, without attendant assistance. To use this
feature, the party dials a non-published directory num-

2-6

If the system is in the night mode of operation (e.g.,
no consoles are active), the call is routed via the DISAS trunk group, as described in the feature, “Direct
Inward System Access.”
d.

Direct Outward Dialing (DOD)
The Direct Outward Dialing feature allows authorized
station users to complete outward calls without attendant assistance.

Station-to-Station

Calling

This feature permits any station user to dial other stations within the SATURN IIE EPABX directly without
attendant assistance. Note that station calling restrictions may prevent stations of one class-of-service from
calling stations of another class-of-service.

Features

Direct Inward Dialing (DID)

Direct Inward System Access - Shared (DISAS)

2.07

System

Alarm

a. Alarm Indication

Features
- Major

A Major Alarm indicator is provided in the Control Logic
Board within the PSU panel. The alarm indicator lights
steadily when the system is in a non-operative state
and system-failure transfer is active.
b. Alarm Indication

- Minor

A Minor Alarm indicator is provided on the maintenance panel and lights steadily when the system is

SATURN IIE EPABX
Feature Descriptions

A30808-X5130-A120-l-8918
Issue 1, May 1986

operative and has detected a minor alarm condition.
A minor alarm can be the result of a system-detected
error, either internal or external, a system event of note,
such as an annoyance call trace record, or a failure
during an on-line diagnostic test. The indicator remains
lit until the alarm is displayed by the system administrator via the appropriate CMU procedure. The system
administrator can control, via CMU procedure, the set
of detectable errors or events that will be reported as
minor alarms.

2.09

If that particular feature option is provided, an announcement advises the caller of a possible delay (e.g.,
a “Please hold” message). After the call has been connected to the announcement, the SATURN IIE EPABX
automatically routes the call to an idle ACD station
when one becomes available.
Only one recorded-announcement
mitted per system.

Line Lockout

For DID and tie trunk calls, the intercept is either to
the attendant, a recorded announcement,
or to a reorder tone if no recorded announcement is available.
For station and attendant calls, the intercept is always
to intercept tone. The only exception occurs when a
station call is intercepted as the result of an attendantimposed dial restriction. In that case the call is routed
to the attendant. Only one recorded announcement per
intercept is permitted per system.
2.10

Equipment

Features

Station users can dial an access code and a l- to 4-digit
called-party code to activate customer-provided
code
call equipment,
which controls signaling devices
throughout the premises. The signaling devices can
be audible and/or visual. The called party can then answer the code call and connect to the calling party by
dialing a code call answerback code from any station
served by the SATURN IIE EPABX.

Intercept

Any station user who remains off-hook without dialing
or remains connected to a busy station for more than
a predetermined time interval, may be automatically
routed to the attendant queue. This feature is provided as an alternative to the normal Line Lockout - Automatic treatment.
b.

Access to Customer-Provided

a. Code Call Access

Features

Line Lockout - Attendant

Flexible Intercept Facilities
Calls that cannot be completed because of class-ofservice restrictions, unassigned station numbers, or access codes are routed to an intercept facility. The intercept assignment is made via a CMU procedure.

Power Failure Restart - Floppy Disk
This feature is used to reload the system memory from
the floppy disks when volatile memory can no longer
be maintained during a commercial power failure.
When commercial power has been restored, the floppy disk drives are automatically activated to reload the
various elements of system memory. After reloading
is completed, the system is capable of full operation.

for intercepts is per-

Remote Alarm Identification
b.

2.08

Recorded-Announcement

The SATURN IIE EPABX is provided with the capability of connecting an incoming trunk call to a recorded
announcement
device when all stations in an ACD
group are busy.

Dry contact closures are used as the interface for identifying both Major and Minor Alarm conditions existing in the SATURN IIE EPABX. The contacts are
located in the Power System Unit (PSU) and can be
wired to the Main Distributing Frame (MDF). The contact closures can be distributed further, via cable pairs,
to a remote location and can be used to activate audible or visual alarms, as needed.
d.

Features

a. Automatic Call Distribution
Service

A Minor Alarm LED (MIN ALM) is also provided on the
attendant console and lights steadily for a selected subset (also controllable by the system administrator) of
system minor alarms. The indicator remains lit until the
alarm is displayed by the system administrator via the
CMU procedures, or until the alarm is displayed by the
attendant on the attendant console.
c.

Intercept

Line Lockout - Automatic

This feature allows station users access to customerprovided dictation equipment in order to record voice
messages or play back previously-recorded messages.
The dictation equipment is seized by dialing the assigned dictation access code.

This feature helps to to prevent a tie-up of the SATURN’
IIE System’s common equipment, such as DTMF
receivers. Whenever a telephone handset is left offhook, listening to dial tone (without dialing), busy tone,
reorder tone, intercept tone, etc., for longer than a
predetermined period of time, the system automatically
releases the station from the SATURN IIE EPABX
switching equipment.
When line lockout occurs, the station is disconnected
from the system and prevented from making or receiving calls. Placing the telephone handset on-hook or
momentarily pressing the hookswitch returns the station to an operable condition.

Dictation Access

Dictation equipment functions such as start, stop, and
playback are controlled by dialing the digits assigned
for the various functions. A maximum of four dictation
channels can be provided in the SATURN IIE EPABX.
c.

Music On Hold - Line or Trunk Interface
The SATURN IIE EPABX is able to interface with
customer-provided audio equipment in order to provide

SATURN IIE EPABX
Feature Descriptions

A30808-X5130-A120-l-6918
issue 1, May 1986

only the attendant has access to these trunk groups.
Station users who attempt calls over trunks under daytime trunk control are routed to the attendant recall
queue. Once answered, the call can be completed at
the attendant’s discretion.

music to “held-call” conditions. The held call can be
the result of Attendant Call Hold, Station Cali Hold, Call
Park, Manual Hold, or Exclusive Hold conditions.
The Music-On-Hold interface may be assigned as an
E&M trunk circuit or as a line circuit (and includes
SLMA-S and SLA-16).
d.

Music-On-Hold

2.11
a.

Restriction

2.12

a. Automatic

On-Line Diagnostic

Blocking

Testing

Features

Testing and Reporting

The SATURN IIE EPABX is provided with software selftest routines which verify that certain software and
hardware operations, initiated by the main controller,
have been successfully completed. If an error occurs,
software records the error(s) in the “Failure History
Memory,” and the minor alarm is activated. Appropriate recovery procedures are executed automatically,
if necessary.

Eight-Digit Toll Code Restriction For Direct Trunk Group
Access

The SATURN IIE EPABX is also provided with a repertoire of audits that test the SATURN IIE EPABX common control equipment. Each audit performs a specific
test and can be individually enabled or disabled by
maintenance personnel via the service terminal.

A total of 256 entries may be assigned to the 16 lists.
Each entry within a restriction list can be from 1 to 8
digits in length. Each list can be either the “allow” or
the “deny” type, and is assigned to stations on a class
of-service basis.

When the audit is run, detected failures are recorded
in the “Failure History Memory,” and the minor alarm
is activated. Appropriate recovery programs are executed automatically on the failing equipment. All audits
do not interfere with normal call-processing activities.

For Direct Trunk
b.

This feature permits SATURN IIE EPABX to allow or
deny stations access to specific CO exchanges, area
codes, service codes, operator, and other services encountered on the Direct Distance Dialing (DDD) network. The SATURN IIE EPABX can provide 4 separate
and different 15-digit toll code restriction lists. One or
more lists may be assigned to each trunk group.
A total of 32 entries may be assigned to the 4 lists. Each
entry within a restriction list can be from 1 to 15 digits
in length. Each list can be either the “allow” or the
“deny” type, and is assigned to stations on a class-ofservice basis.
c.

Class-of-Service

and Maintenance

Features

Fifteen-Digit Toll Code Restriction
Group Access

Station-to-Station

Diagnostic

Class-of Service Blocking

This feature prevents stations assigned to a certain
class-of-service from accessing stations assigned to
another class-of-service. An intercept tone is provided to station users dialing stations that are blocked by
their class-of-service.

- System

The SATURN IIE EPABX is able to interface with
customer-provided audio equipment in order to provide
music to “held call” conditions. The held call can be
the result of Attendant Call Hold, Station Call Hold, Call
Park, Manual Hold, and Exclusive Hold Conditions.

Incoming

This feature prevents an attendant from extending a
call if the station’s class-of-service is blocked for the
classof-service assigned to the trunk.

- Paging

This SATURN IIE EPABX System feature allows the
customerprovided
Music-On-Hold source to be routed to the paging equipment. This arrangement provides music, instead of silence, to the paging zone
whenever the paging equipment is idle.
e.

Daytime Trunk Control
The SATURN IIE EPABX System can be arranged to
restrict specific trunk groups from access by stations
for outgoing calls during daytime operation, and to restore access availability when the system is in night
service mode. While daytime trunk control is in effect,

Manual On-Line Maintenance

Testing

The SATURN IIE EPABX software package includes
test programs that permit test calls to be initiated into
and through the system to verify correct operation of
the peripheral equipment and selected common equipment, such as the tone generator.
Resulting visual and audible responses from these
tests make it possible to verify correct operation or to
detect and isolate a major portion of system malfunctions. These test programs are accessed from a maintenance classmarked telephone.
c.

Remote On-Line Maintenance

and Diagnostic Testing

Maintenance testing can be performed at a location
remote from the SATURN IIE EPABX. Access to the
Maintenance tests is available on a dial-up basis via
local or long-distance trunks by using the DISA facility.
Diagnostic testing can also be performed from a remote service terminal via dial-up access to the modem port on the optional RAUP board.

SATURN IIE EPABX
Feature Descriptions

2.13

Trunking

a. Alternate

Issue 1, May 1986

Features
Routing

The SATURN HE EPABX provides automatic routing
of outgoing calls via alternate trunk groups when all
circuits in the primary trunk group are busy. A maximum of three alternate trunk groups can be assigned
when direct trunk group access is used. Least Cost
Routing (LCR) allows up to seven alternates.
b. Central Office (City) Trunk Access
Access to CO trunks by SATURN IIE EPABX station
users is made by dialing an access code. Digit “9” is
most-commonly
used for such access.
c.

Common
Access

Control

Switching

Arrangement

(CCSA)

This feature allows station users access to a CCSA network by dialing an access code. A network call is
placed by dialing the CCSA number of the desired
party. Features available to service incoming and outgoing calls to and from the CCSA network are similar
to those available to incoming and outgoing CO calls.
d.

Dedicated

Incoming

Trunks

The use of Dedicated Incoming Trunks (DITs) permits
a call to bypass the attendant console and ring at a
preassigned internal station or hunt group. An unanswered call can be sent to a night answering arrangement (e.g., ANA, UNA, etc.). via the DIT when the
following circumstances exist:
a) the system is not equipped with a console
b) the console is in night service or
c) the console is out-of-service.
All call-forwarding functions apply to DITs, including the
transferring of DIT trunk calls to the attendant when
the console is in service. A maximum of 255 DlTs are
provided in the SATURN IIE EPABX.
e.

Enhanced
Access

Private Switched

Communication

Service

SATURN IIE EPABX station users access an Enhanced
Private Switched Communications
Service (EPSCS)
network by dialing a preassigned access code. By using the EPSCS facility, they may either dial the EPSCS
network number of the desired party or an off-network
number.
Features available to service incoming calls from the
network and outgoing calls to the network are similar
to the features available to incoming and outgoing CO
calls.
f.

Foreign Exchange

Trunk Access

An FX trunk is a trunk facility between the EPABX and
a CO located beyond the local service area of the setsing CO. Such facilities permit the SATURN IIE EPABX
System to provide local service to and from the distant service area. Station users gain access to FX
trunks by dialing an access code.

Least Cost Routing (LCR)
The SATURN IIE EPABX routes outgoing calls over the
lowest cost route available at the time of call placement.
A station user accesses the LCR feature on a per-call
basis by dialing the LCR feature access code before
dialing the outside number. The routing of the call is
selected from a predefined list of eligible trunk groups
based on the digits dialed by the user, the user’s classof-service, and the time of day.
Trunk groups are ranked from first to last choice (i.e.,
lowest to highest cost), thus providing the lowest cost
routing for the existing busy/idle condition of the eligible trunks.
The LCR feature provides Outgoing (trunk) Call Queuing Callback and Call Queuing - Standby capabilities.
To activate the Outgoing Call Queuing - Callback feature, the station user dials the LCR access code and the
desired destination number. Assuming all routes are busy,
the station user waits for a steady low tone. Upon receiving the steady low tone, the station user places the handset on-hook in order to be placed on queue.
Once on-queue, the station is called back when a trunk
becomes available. The queue is handled on a firstin, first-out basis. One queue per station is allowed at
any time. If another attempt is made to invoke a callback queue on the same station, the previously queued
call is removed from the queue and replaced with the
latest request.
When the Outgoing Call Queuing - Callback feature
is .active, the activating station user may receive or
originate other calls. The Outgoing Call Queuing Callback feature can be cancelled at any time via a dialed
cancellation code.
The LCR Outgoing Call Queuing - Standby feature is
an extension of the LCR Callback feature described
above. To invoke this feature, the station user waits offhook in a standby queuing mode and listens to silence
or music (if it is provided). The standby queuing mode
eliminates the user going on-hook to be called back
when a trunk becomes available. When a trunk does
become available, the station is connected to the trunk.
The station user may convert from standby queuing
to callback queuing by going on-hook.
The LCR feature is capable of routing calls over trunks
in the public network (i.e., CO, FX, WATS trunks), private network including Common Control Switching Arrangement and tie trunks, as well as over Specialized
Common Carriers (SCCs).
The LCR feature provides the following additional route
selection criteria:
1. LCR User Priority. Each station class-of-service
user is assigned priority codes that indicate eligible routes. access is permitted only to those routes
assigned a priority code which matches one of the
priority codes associated with the user’s COS.
2. Time-of-Day and Day-of-Week. Time bands (e.g.,
1 PM through 6 PM, 6 PM through 12 midnight,

-A30808-X5130-A120-l-8918
Issue 1, May 1986

SATURN IIE EPABX
Feature Descriptions

has advanced to, and is in queue for, a more-costly
route. This “look back” queuing capability allows
a call to be routed over a previously busy but lowercost route, if a trunk within that trunk group becomes available before the more-costly route is
used.

called schedules, are assignable on one-hour
boundaries for each hour of the day and each day
of the week.
A “minutes offset” is provided for each schedule to
accommodate rate changes that do not occur on the
hour. The selection of a route for a given dialing pattern is variable, depending on the current schedule.

3. Alternate Trunk Group Advance. When an alltrunks-busy condition exists, three modes of advancing from first-choice to lesser-choice trunk
groups are provided:

8. The SATURN IIE EPABX also provides the option
to prohibit confirmation tone from being returned
after LCR route-selection is completed.

2-10 (10 pages)

Trunk-to-Trunk Connections

All combinations of these trunks can be connected by
the attendant. The only restriction is that the incoming call must have been completed through a trunk that
provides disconnect supervision (generally ground start
trunks or E&M trunks). If disconnect supervision is not
provided and the attendant attempts to make the connection, a three-minute (variable) timer is started. When
the timer times out, the trunk-to-trunk connection is
recalled to the attendant.

10 Equal Access to Prime Carrier. The LCR feature
is also used to route long-distance calls over all
customer selected carriers without dialing a special access code.

11. The LCR feature also provides a means for
rechecking a lower-cost route even though the call

Tie Trunk Access

This feature allows the attendant to extend an incoming trunk call to an outgoing trunk. Connections can
be made among CO, Foreign Exchange (FX), Wide
Area Telephone Service (WATS), Direct Inward Dialing
(DID), and tie trunks.

9. The LCR feature provides a filtered dial tone detection option to aliow rejection of busy, reorder, and
ringback tones.

For example: The SATURN IIE System user dials
9 + 1 + NAX + NNX + XXXX. If the route list’s
outdial rule for the prime carrier is satisfied, the
system outdials 1 + NAX + NNX + XXXX; if the
route list’s outdial rule for a secondary carrier is
satisfied, the system outdials 10XxX + NAX +
NNX + XXXX.

Tandem Trunking

This feature allows station users dial access to oneway or two-way tie trunk circuits interconnecting the
SATURN IIE EPABX with another switching system.
The trunks can be furnished with E&M signaling, and
configured for automatic or dial repeating operation
with or without second dial tone. Two-wire or four-wire
type E&M trunks are available.

6. In order to speed up cut-through on trunk group
calls, the LCR feature can be used to analyze the
trunk group call digit strings.
7. The SATURN IIE EPABX provides the option of not
providing dial tone after dialing the LCR access
code on LCR calls.

for Specialized

The SATURN IIE EPABX can act as a tandem switch,
routing incoming calls from one switching system to
another, without the need for attendant assistance. The
major use of this feature is in association with dial tandem tie trunk networks to allow tie trunk connections,
and in some cases, to allow incoming tie trunk calls
automatic access to the CO trunk for completion of local CO calls.

4. Wide-band tone detectors used in conjunction with
flexible outpulsing rules with the SATURN IIE System are used to detect special dial tone provided
by several Specialized Common Carriers.
5. The SATURN IIE EPABX may be programmed to
switch from DTMF, detect dial tone, to dial pulse
in order to route calls via LCR through a switched
tandem network. The system is capable of “toggling” from one mode to another, as required for
such operation.

with Provisions

The LCR feature is capable of routing calls via an SCC
through dial or dedicated access. The SCC’s directory number and authorization code may be stored in
SATURN IIE memory for outdialing. Because an SCC
can be accessed over local CO trunks (i.e., dial-up access), the SATURN IIE EPABX provides the capability
to turn such access on or off, from an attendant console and/or from a service terminal. Up to three SCCs
can be accommodated in the SATURN IIE EPABX.

a) Immediate Advance
b) Timer-Controlled
Advance
c) No Advance (i.e., the call is routed over the firstchoice trunk group only).
The option of which method to use is stored as a
classmark in the station’s class-of-service. Attendants are always provided with the Immediate Advance mode.

Least Cost Routing
Common Carrier

._
;.,
/

Wide Area Telephone

Service Trunk Access

This feature allows station users access to WATS by
dialing an access code. WATS enables customers to
make calls over extensive geographic areas at special
billing rates.

‘1\
:-:

SATURN IIE EPABX
Feature Descriptions

A30808-X5130-A120-l-8918
Issue 1, May 1986

SECTION 3.00
3.01

Attendant

Console

ATTENDANT

1. Attendant Conference (up to three keys can be assigned.)
2. Attendant Control of Facilities (one or more keys
can be assigned)
3. Attendant Override
4. Attendant Overflow
5. Call Park
6. Direct Trunk Group Access (one or more keys can
be assigned)
7. Message Waiting - Activate
8. Message Waiting - Cancel
9. Minor Alarm
10. SMDR Account Code Input
11. Trunk Flash
12. Volume Control - Audio (receive only)
13. Class of Call Exclusion Keys (up to three keys can
be assigned).

Overview

The attendant console is a desk-top-position
console from
which the attendant handles calls by using pushbutton keys.
A maximum of 12 attendant consoles can be provided in the
SATURN IIE EPABX.
A telephone handset is furnished with the console. An optional headset may be substituted for the handset. Both tone
and visual indicators alert the attendant to incoming calls. The
tone may be controlled via a volume control located at the
front edge of the console.
The attendant console is provided with a 12-button keypad
(digits 0 - 9, * , #) which allows the attendant to complete
all types of calls. The dialed digits are digitally encoded, and
transmitted to the SATURN IIE EPABX System for processing.
Each attendant console has a 40-character upper- and lowercase alphanumerlc display, which presents call information
to the attendant. This information includes the station number or trunk type, the number of the called and calling parties, and the calling station class-of-service. The alphanumeric
display also allows the attendant to monitor the system alarm
conditions.
Connections to the console are made through a three-pair
modular connector-ended
cable which provides voice, control signals, and power. The cable is installed through the bottom rear of the console via a plug-in jack. Two of the pairs
are used for data transmit and receive, plus SATURN-provided
power. The third pair to the modular jack is a spare pair.
The attendant console(s) can be located up to 2000 cable feet
(610 meters) from the SATURN IIE EPABX.
The following paragraphs describe the features that are related to the attendant console only. Refer to SECTION 4.00: STATION FEATURES, for additional console-related features.
3.02

General

Features

a. Console Operation
Incoming calls are uniformly distributed among the attendant consoles. Any station user can dial-access a
selected
attendant when multiple consoles
are
provided.
The SATURN EPABX can also function without an attendant console. For consoleless operation, assigned
UNA and/or ANA stations can handle incoming calls
by utilization of the Call Transfer and Internal Call Queuing - Standby features.
b.

Flexible Key Assignments
The attendant console is equipped with one digital
12button keypad and 34 non-locking keys, each containing one internal status indicator Light-Emitting Diode (LED). Sixteen keys have fixed assignments, and
provide the basic control functions for the console. The
remaining 18 keys are flexibly assignable by using
CMU procedures. These keys can be programmed to
provide the following functions:

FEATURES

Senderized

Operation

The attendant may dial as many digits as required to
reach a destination. The attendant does not have to
remain on the call once dialing is completed.
3.03

Call Handling

a. Attendant

Features

Selective

Answering

Priority

Three separate call answering keys on the console allow the attendant to manually select among Incoming
(INC), Recalls (RCL), and Operator (OPR) calls.
These calls are answered according to customerestablished priorities. Additionally, each trunk group
can be assigned an answering priority level code that
allows incoming trunk calls in higher-priority
trunk
groups to be connected to the attendant before longerwaiting calls in lower-priority trunk groups.
However, any call waiting in a
for longer than a preset time,
calls waiting in a higher-priority
within the same priority trunk
on a first-in-first-out basis.

lower-priority trunk group
is connected before any
trunk group. Trunk calls
group(s) are connected

b. Call Hold
This feature allows the attendant to place a station or
trunk call on hold so that the attendant can place
another call, or perform other activities such as paging. Four loop keys and associated LEDs are provided on the console to facilitate the hold capability.
A call is placed on hold by depressing an idle loop key
on the console. The loop LED provides supervision
over the call. The loop LED winks when a call is being
held, flashes on recalls, and lights steadily when the
attendant reconnects to the held call.
This feature also allows a held call to be connected
to an incoming call. After answering a call, the attendant can connect the two calls by depressing the Destination (DEST) key, followed by the loop key associated
with the call being held.

3-1

A30808-X5130-A120-l-8918
Issue 1, May 1986

SATURN IIE EPABX
Feature Descriptions

IIE EPABX station, or to another trunk. Incoming station calls (dial “O”, attendant recall, etc.) may be extended to a trunk or to another station.

To retrieve an attendant-held call, a station user having the proper class-of-service goes off-hook, then keys
the Attendant Call Hold Retrieve access code, followed
by a three-digit Attendant Call Hold location number.
The Attendant Call Hold location number consists of
the Attendant number (01 through 12) plus the Hold
Loop Key number (1 through 4) used by the particular
attendant; e.g., the Access Code + 021 (Attendant
number 02, Hold Loop Key number 1).

Inter-Console

This feature allows an attendant at one attendant console to call an attendant, or transfer a call to an attendant, at another attendant console. Each attendant
console must be assigned a unique number.

To retrieve the held call, a station user must go from
an idle on-hook condition to off-hook, and receive regular dial tone. If the call in the accessed call location
is a two-party (Le., locked loop) call, has already been
retrieved, or has already been disconnected by the held
party, the station user receives reorder tone after dialing the complete Attendant Call Hold Retrieve access
code.

Locked Loop Operation
This feature allows the attendant, who normally works
in a switched-loop environment, to retain supervision
or recall capability on any particular call by placing the
call on an attendant loop rather than releasing it. While
the loop is “locked,” its use is dedicated to that call,
and may not be used for processing other calls.

Additionally, the Call Hold feature allows the attendant
to page a party, and request the paged party to retrieve
a held loop call. The paged party can retrieve the held
call by dialing an announced retrieval code from any
SATURN IIE EPABX station having the proper classof-service.
c.

Four loop keys are used for locked-loop operation. The
attendant “locks’ a call on the loop by depressing an
idle loop key. This action simultaneously releases the attendant from the connection. The attendant is then able
to process other calls. The attendant may lock any
twoparty call on a loop, including station-to-station, stationto-trunk, trunk-to-station, and trunk-to-trunk calls.

Camp-On

The attendant may reenter a locked loop connection
by depressing the associated loop key. Before the attendant reenters the connection, conference tone is
provided to the two talking parties. The attendant is
then immediately connected in conference with both
parties on the loop. Once the attendant has reentered
the connection, the attendant may:

This feature allows the attendant to extend a trunk call
to a busy station. When this feature is invoked, the
trunk party is automatically placed in a waiting mode
while a call-waiting tone is directed to the busy station.
The called party, upon hearing the call-waiting tone,
can connect to the waiting call by going on-hook and
being recalled, or by using the Call Hold - Flip-Flop
(Broker) feature. A maximum of two trunk calls can be.
camped-on to a busy station.
d.

Class-of-Call

Exclusions

e. Class-of-Call

Exclusions

- Programmed

The SATURN IIE System can exclude certain types of
traffic from designated attendant consoles via CMU
procedures. Such types of calls may be incoming
(INC), operator (OPR), and/or recalls (RCL).
f.

Extension

Release from the loop with the two other parties
remaining connected on the loop.
Release the locked loop connection (both parties
released) by depressing the Release (RLS) key:
As a customer-definable
system option, the attendants may
be denied the ability to reenter a locked loop connection held
on a console unless specifically recalled by the station user.
Secrecy is implemented by providing automatic splitting of
the trunk party when the attendant enters the connection after being recalled by the station. This action allows the station user to speak privately with the attendant.
j.

Conference
This feature allows the attendant to establish a conference of up to seven parties (assignable via CMU
procedures). The attendant gains access to a conference circuit, and adds members to the conference by
operating a Conference key. Status information is
provided to the attendant by a LED located within the
Conference key. A maximum of three Conference keys
can be provided on the console.

Split one of the parties to talk privately by depressing the Source (SRC) or Destination (DEST) key.

- Key(s)

The SATURN IIE EPABX attendant(s) can control certain types of traffic incoming to the console(s) by operating assignable exclusion keys corresponding to the
type of call (incoming calls (INC), operator calls (OPR),
and or recalls (RCL).

of Calls

The attendant may extend all types of incoming calls.
Incoming trunk calls may be extended to a SATURN

Calling and Transfer

Override
This feature allows the attendant, when connected to
an incoming trunk call, to enter into an existing busy
station-to-station or station-to-trunk connection and inform the station user about the waiting trunk call. The
Override feature is generally used to announce highpriority or emergency calls.
A warning tone is provided to both parties before the
conversation is overridden. The attendant can break
into any established two-party call or three-way call,
provided that no feature restricting attendant override
is active (i.e., Attendant Override Security or Data Line
Security).

A30808-X5130-A120-1-5918
Issue 1, May 1986

SATURN IIE EPABX
Feature Descriptions

Serial Calling

b. Automatic

The attendant is automatically recalled on calls held
by the attendant past a predetermined period of time.
A visual indication appears on the console‘s alphanumeric display to identify each type of recall. The timing period is variable, and is assigned in customer
memory by using a CMU procedure.

This feature allows the attendant to connect an incoming trunk party to a series of stations, without having
the incoming trunk party hang up and redial the attendant for each call.
The attendant initiates a serial call by connecting the
trunk party to the first desired station, and ““locking”
the call on the attendant loop. When station disconnect is detected, the SATURN IIE EPABX System automatically places the trunk in the recall queue.

Special Overflow Answer Positions

When the attendant depresses the overflow key, all calls
presently in, or intended for, the incoming call queue that
exceed a predefined threshold value are routed to the
SOAP Additionally, incoming trunk calls that have waited in the attendant incoming call queue beyond a
predetermined period of time are routed to the SOAP
The SOAP can be a ZUNA facility, SNAP position, ACD
hunt group, pilot number hunt group, or an individual station. The SOAP can access station-related features in
the normal manner. Handling of incoming trunk calls is
accomplished by use of the station Call Transfer feature.
m. Switched

Loop Operation

This feature allows the attendant to extend an EPABX
station or trunk call to another station or trunk by
depressing the Attendant Release (ATT RLS) key.
Depression of the ATT RLS key automatically releases
the loop and allows the attendant to process other calls.

Automatic

Recall on No Answer

In the SATURN IIE EPABX System, the attendant is automatically recalled if a trunk call being processed has
remained unanswered past a predetermined period of
time. A visual indication appears on the console’s alphanumeric display to identify a recall, thus allowing
the attendant to respond appropriately. The timing period is variable, and is assigned in customer memory
by using a CMU procedure.

A unique display of the recall appears on the alphanumeric display. The attendant continues the serial call by
answering the recall, then dialing the next requested station number and locking the call on the attendant loop.

The console attendant can depress a special overflow
key during high traffic conditions, and divert the overflow of incoming calls to a Special Overflow Answer
Position (SOAP).

Recall on Hold

d. Automatic

Recall Redial

When an attendant has been recalled by a station or
trunk call that was originally extended by the attendant,
the original destination of the call appears on the console display. By activation of a single key on the console, the attendant can reextend the call to the same
destination without keying in the entire number.
3.05

Display

Features

a. Call Type Display
The types of calls appearing at the attendant’s position are visually displayed, allowing the attendant
answer each call with an appropriate verbal response.
The display indicates whether the call is an Incoming,
Recall, or Operator call.
b. Called Extension

The alphanumeric display indicates
formation about the called station:

the following

BUSY

- Attendant
station.

extended

to a busy

RINGING

- Attendant
station.

extended

to an idle

CALL PICK-UP

- Attendant extended to a station
that is being picked up
another station.

The attendant console can be provided with a special
key allowing the attendant to simulate a hookswitch flash
to request toll operator assistance on outgoing calls.

CFWD RINGING

- Attendant extended to a call forwarded station; destination idle.

Recall Features

DATA PRIVACY

- Attendant extended to a busy
data-private station.

DONT DISTURB

- Attendant extended to a station
which has activated Do-NotDisturb.

HUNT RINGING

- Attendant extended to a busy
station in a hunt group and the
call hunted to an idle station
that group.

The attendant is allowed to release from the call before
the second party answers, either in the camp-on or in
the ringing state. No call supervision is provided;
however, a means for recalling unanswered calls on a
timed basis is provided.
n. Trunk Flash Capability

3.04

Status Display

a. Automatic

Recall on Camp-On

The attendant is automatically recalled if the attendant
extends an incoming trunk call to a busy station, and
the called party does not answer the waiting call within a preset time. The timing period is variable, and is
assigned in customer memory by using a CMU procedure. A visual indication appears on the alphanumeric display consoles to identify the recall.

A30808-X5130-A120-l-8918
Issue 1, May 1986

SATURN IIE EPABX
Feature Descriptions

LINE LOCKOUT

OUT OF SVC

- Attendant extended to an out-ofservice station.

ACD RINGING

- Attendant
group.

extended

BY-OV

- Attendant
station.

override

CWBY

- Attendant extended to a call forwarded station, destination busy.

CFWD TO NTWK

- Attendant extended to a station
that is call forwarded to the public network.

VACANT NUMBER

- Attendant extended to a vacant
number or code.

Called Station Number

to a ACD

i.
of a busy

d. Called Trunk Number

e. Calling Station Number

Calling Trunk Number

When the attendant receives an incoming call, the
trunk number and trunk group number of the connected trunk are displayed on the alphanumeric display.
Digital Clock Display
The current time-of-day and date are displayed on the
alphanumeric display when the console is idle and between calls. When the console is busy, the attendant
may obtain the time and date by depressing the TIME
key. The time is displayed in hours and minutes in
either a 1Bhour or 24hour format, depending on a
preassigned system option. The attendant can also set
the digital clock time and date from the console.
h.

Least Cost Routing

Route Number

Display

For SATURN IIE EPABX Systems provided with the
LCR feature, a visual display of the route taken by the
attendant completed outgoing calls is provided to the
attendant. The display is provided to the attendant
upon completion of dialing the public network number.
i.

Numerical

Call Waiting

Display

Between calls and during periods when the attendant

3-4

Direct Access

Features

Direct Trunk Access

Direct Trunk Group Access
This feature allows the attendant to access a trunk
group by depressing a key rather than dialing an access code.

3.07

Control

a. Attendant

Display

This feature allows the attendant to select and access
individual trunk circuits. Access to a specific trunk is
made by dialing a unique access code, the trunk group
number, and the trunk member number. After the trunk
is seized, the attendant can place a call over the trunk.

Display

When the attendant receives a station call, the extension number and class of service of the calling station
are displayed on the alphanumeric display.

Display

When the attendant places an outgoing call, the trunk
number and trunk group number of the connected
trunk are displayed on the alphanumeric display.

Trunk Group Alphanumeric

Arrangements can be made in customer memory to
provide a trunk group alphanumeric display as part of
the calling trunk display and called trunk number display featuresThe trunk group alphanumeric display is
customer-defined by the assignment of alphanumeric
characters to represent the trunk type for each trunk
group (i.e., INWATS for an incoming call via an INWATS
trunk, LOCAL for an incoming call via a local CO,
FX555 for an incoming FX trunk from exchange 555,
etc.). Up to eight alphanumeric characters may be assigned by the customer for each trunk group.
3.06

Display

When the attendant places a call to a SATURN IIE
EPABX station, the extension number and class-ofservice of the called station are displayed on the alphanumeric display.

console handset is plugged in but not processing calls
(idle), the actual number of calls waiting to be answered
is displayed on the alphanumeric display. The number of calls waiting is numerically displayed by call type
(i.e., Incoming, Recall, and Operator). The display is
updated approximately every three seconds.

- Attendant extended to a lockedout station.

Features
Control of Station Dial Restrictions

This feature allows the attendant to temporarily change
the class-of-service (COS) of individual stations via the
attendant console. The temporary COS may either restrict or add to existing features established by the original COS.
The attendant activates the feature by keying an access code. The attendant is prompted to key the station extension number and the temporary COS
number. A confirmation tone is returned to the attendant. The attendant releases the call and the console
display and operation return to normal.
The temporary COS can be cancelled and the original COS reinstated by keying a cancellation access
code, and the extension number of the changed Station. When the station extension number is keyed, the
original COS is reinstated and a confirmation tone is
returned to the attendant.
b. Control of Facilities
This feature allows the attendant to gain control of a
system facility in order to regulate when station users
may or may not gain access to that facility. The attendant gains control of a facility by depressing a preas-

\
._
_’

SATURN IIE EPABX
Feature Descriptions

A30808-X5130-A120-l-8918
Issue 1, May 1986

signed key. One or more keys can be assigned on the
attendant console to control each of the following: trunk
groups, voice paging zones, dial dictation equipment,
&port conference circuits (Meet-Me Conference and
Station Controlled Conference), and code calling. When
a station user dials an access code or activates a feature button on an SDT corresponding to a facility that
is under attendant control, the call is routed to the attendant. Once answered, access to the desired facility is provided at the attendant’s discretion.

ing to be answered. The call waiting LED lights steadily when a preset number of calls are waiting to be
answered. The LED flashes when the number of calls
waiting reaches a second preset number; when the
LED is dark, no calls are waiting.
C.

When a minor alarm condition occurs, the MIN ALM
LED lights. Failures causing a system minor alarm condition can be displayed by the attendant depressing
the Minor Alarm (MIN ALM) key. Depression of the MIN
ALM key displays the most recent alarm condition. Additional depressions of the minor alarm key display additional alarm causes, if present. Each minor alarm
display consists of the alarm type (e.g., line/trunk unit
shelf, memory parity, fuse failure, etc.), the failing
equipment location, and the date and time of the
failure.

An LED located within each control key provides the
status of the associated facility. A dark LED indicates
the facility is not under attendant control at this time
and a lighted LED indicates the facility is presently being controlled by the attendant.
Control of Station Message Detail Recording Facilities
The SMDR feature allows trunk group calls to be selectively recorded. This feature is enabled via a CMU
procedures. The recording of calls on these trunk
groups can also be deactivated and reactivated by the
attendant.

d. Trunk Group Indicators
A group of 24 LEDs are provided on the attendant console. The LEDs are assigned to reflect the busy/idle
condition of trunk groups i-24, respectively. The LED
states reflect the following conditions:

Night Service Control

3.08

Placing the SATURN IIE EPABX system in the night
service mode is performed by the attendant depressing the NIGHT key on the console. When multiple consoles are provided, all attendants must depress the
NIGHT key before the SATURN System goes in night
service. Refer to the system features, “Assigned Night
Answer” and “Zoned Universal Night Answer.”

Flashing - The number of busy trunks in the associated trunk group has reached or exceeded a
preset threshold. The threshold limit is assigned
via a CMU procedure.

Volume

Dark-The
number of busy trunks in the associated trunk group has not exceeded the threshold
limit.

Control

1. Steadily lit -All trunks in the associated trunk group
are busy.

Features

a. Volume Control - Audible Alert
The attendant may adjust the volume of the audible
alerting device by using a rotary volume control knob
located on the console. The alerting device is used to
signal the attendant of all incoming calls, recalls, and
the occurrence of minor system alarms.

3.10
a.

This feature allows the attendant, by depressing a console key, to increase the voice level by a fixed gain on
the receive portion of the voice connection. The voice
gain may be cancelled any time during the call by the
attendant depressing the same button a second time;
otherwise the gain is automatically cancelled when the
attendant releases from the call.
System

Status

Features

a. Alert Busy Attendant

Indication

Calls directed to an attendant who is busy handling
another call generate a single burst of tone in the attendant’s headset/handset. This tone alerts the attendant to the other incoming call(s).
b. Call Waiting

Indication

A call waiting LED on the attendant console provides
the attendant with a visual indication that calls are wait-

Busy Verification
Busy Verification

Features
of Station Lines

The attendant may verify whether a station line is busy,
idle, or in an out-of-service (lockout) state by keying in
the station number from the attendant console. The
system responds with ringback tone and a display on
the console that correlates with a console-to-station call
if the station is idle. If the station is busy, the attendant
receives busy tone and the display indicates the station number, class of service, and other call information pertaining to that connection, including the station
or trunk number of the other party. If the station is out
of service (lockout), the display indicates this condition.

b. Volume Control - Audio

3.09

Minor Alarm Identification

Busy Verification

of Trunks

This feature allows the attendant to determine the
busy/idle status of a specific trunk (CO,FX, tie trunk,
etc.) without bridging to the trunk. Busy verification of
a trunk is performed by the attendant dialing a unique
access code and the trunk group number followed by
the trunk group member number. If the trunk is busy,
the attendant hears busy tone and receives a display
identifying the trunk group/number (e.g., 05/03) and the
connected party (e.g., extension 1219). If the trunk is
idle, the attendant hears dial tone and receives a display identifying the connected trunk.

3-5 (3-6 blank)

SATURN IIE EPABX
Feature Descriptions

A30808-X5130-A120-l-8918
Issue 1, May 1986

SECTION 4.00
4.01

Station

Overview

This section of the practice describes those features that are
related to single-line telephones (rotary and DTMF dialing).
Some of these features are also related to the attendant console and the SDT Following the title of each feature description is one or more codes in parentheses which denote the
type of instrument(s) to which the feature applies. Table 4.00
lists these codes and their definitions.
Table 4.00

Station instrument

1 CODE
:. J

SLT

1 Al-l-

SDT

4.02
a.

STATION FEATURES

Codes Used in This Practice

tion rings immediately without the need for waiting
through the silent period of a ringing cycle.
e.

Rotary dialing allows SLTs equipped with a rotary dial
to be used with the SATURN IIE EPABX System.
4.03

Attendant Console.
An asterisk (*) following ATT indicates a
button can be assigned to the console to
simplify feature operation.
Siemens Digital Telephone.
An asterisk (‘) following SDT indicates a
button can be assigned to the SDT to simplify feature operation.

Distinctive

This feature allows a station user to place any call on
hold and hang up without losing the call. After holding the call, the user may originate or receive other
calls on the same line and alternate between the two
calls (holding one call while speaking to the other).

(SLTSDT)

Ringing (SLTSDT)

1. One-burst ringing - Identifies an incoming call from
another station served by the SATURN IIE EPABX
System.
2. Two-burst ringing - Identifies an incoming trunk call
(CO, FX, WATS, DID, Tie trunks) and attendantextended trunk calls.
3. Three-burst ringing - Identifies calls initiated by internal call queuing -callback, outgoing call queuing - callback, station-controlled conference recall
to conference master, call transfer security recall,
automatic callback on held calls, executive intercom calls (SDT only), and automatic intercom calls
(SDT only).

e. Consultation

Ringing (SLTSDT)

Immediate ringing is provided on all calls to stations
within the SATURN IIE EPABX System. The called sta-

Hold (SLTSDT’)

This feature allows a station user to place a call on hold
and consult with another party on the same line. After
consulting with the other party, the user may remain
offhook and be automatically connected to the original party when the consulted party hangs up.

DTMF Dialing (SLT)

Immediate

Call Park (SLT,ATT*,SDT*)
This feature allows a station user to place a station or
trunk call on “system hold” (referred to as “parked”) and
return to the parked party from the same station or from
another SATURN IIE station. A maximum of 10 call park
locations are available in the SATURN IIE EPABX.

DTMF dialing allows SLTs equipped for tone dialing to
be used with the SATURN IIE EPABX System.
d.

Call Hold - Flip - Flop (Broker) (SLTSDT’)
This feature allows a station user receiving a call waiting tone to place the call on hold and immediately establish a connection to the waiting call. When no call
is waiting, this feature allows the user to place any established call on hold and originate another call on the
same line. In either case, the user can return to the
held call or alternate between the two calls (holding
one call while speaking to the other).

Several types of distinctive ringing patterns are provided to allow SATURN IIE EPABX station users to distinguish between the different types of incoming calls.
The ringing patterns are:

on Held Call (SLTSDT)

b. Call Hold (SLTSDT’)

Features

Station users may dial the feature access code assigned for general attendant service or dial a discrete
attendant extension for a specific attendant.
b.

Callback

A trunk call that remains on hold beyond a predefined
period of time is automatically recalled to the station that
held the call or to the attendant (according to a preassigned system option). The predefined period of time
is a nominal five minutes but variable via CMU procedures. The automatic callback applies only to trunk calls
placed on hold via the Call Hold, Call Park, Manual Hold,
and Exclusive Hold features. If the system is optioned
to route the held call to the station instead of to the attendant and the callback goes unanswered for a predefined period of time (18 seconds nominal also variable
via CMU procedures) or the station to be recalled is busy
(possible only for the call hold and call park recalls), the
recall is routed to the attendant recall queue.

Single Line Telephone

Dial Access to Attendant

Hold Features

a. Automatic

INSTRUMENT

General

Rotary Dialing (SLT)

Hold to Attendant

(SLTSDT)

This feature allows trunk calls held for station transfer
security to be routed to the attendant instead of the
transferring station.

SATURN IIE EPABX
Feature Descriptions

4.04
a.

Transfer

A30808-X5130-A120-l-8918
Issue 1, May 1986

Features

conference master can add members, remove members, leave the conference to consult with a conferee
privately, or call the attendant. If the conference master
releases from the conference, the position of conference master can be obtained by any station conference
member.

Call Transfer (SLTSDT’)
This feature allows a station user engaged in a twoparty talking connection to transfer the other party to
another destination. The following types of transfers
are allowed:
.
l

.
l

The maximum number of parties allowed in the conference is seven. However, the attendant can enter the
conference as an eighth party. The number of trunk
parties allowed in the conference is variable (maximum
of three) and set by a CMU procedure.

station-to-station
trunk-to-attendant
station-to-trunk
trunk-to-trunk.
4.06

Trunk-to-trunk transfers are allowed only when the
trunkto-trunk connection option is assigned and call
disconnect supervision is provided on at least one of
the trunks. All transfers are allowed in the ringing-state.
b. Call Transfer Security

(SLTSDT)

Call Transfer with Automatic

Camp-On

Conference

(SLT,SDT*)

Meet-Me Conference

(SLT,AlT,SDT’)

The meet-me conference is prearranged by station
users, who dial an access code to be connected to the
conference circuit. Trunk conferees are connected to
the conference circuit by the attendant. A conference
tone is heard by all connected conferees as each new
conferee enters the conference. A maximum of seven
parties can be connected in the conference at any one
time, plus the attendant. The number of trunk parties
allowed is variable (maximum of three) and set by CMU
procedures.
c.

Station-Controlled

Conference

(SLTSDT)

This feature allows a station user to access a conference circuit and progressively add internal and/or external parties to the conference connection without the
assistance of an attendant. The station user that
originates the conference is the conference master. The

4-2

(SLTSDT)

The call waiting indication is provided upon initial
camp-on of the station. If the called station user does
not answer the waiting call within a predefined time
(nominal 10 seconds), a second tone is directed toward
the called station. The delay interval for the second
tone is variable via a CMU procedure.
b.

This feature allows a station user to add a third party
to an existing two-party connection. The three-party
conference can consist of two stations and one trunk
or two trunks and one station.
b.

Indication

(SLTSDT)

Features

a. Add-On Conference

Call-Waiting

Distinctive call-waiting tone signals are provided to indicate whether the call is from a station or trunk. A single burst of tone represents a waiting-station call and
a double burst of tone represents a waiting-trunk call.
Call waiting is denied and busy tone is returned to the
calling station if the called station is not in a two-party
connection.

This feature, when used in conjunction with the Call
Transfer and Internal Call Queuing-Standby
features,
allows a station user to transfer an outside call to a busy
station. The outside call is camped-on to the busy
station.
4.05

Features

A call-waiting tone is directed toward a busy station
upon activation of the Internal Call Queuing - Standby, Executive Override - Automatic, or Attendant
Camp-On features. The call-waiting tone notifies the
called party that a call is waiting to be answered.

If a trunk call is transferred from one station to another
and the second station does not answer within a
predetermined time interval, the SATURN IIE EPABX
recalls the held party to the station that originally transferred the call or to the attendant recall queue, depending on the pre-assigned system option. This facility also
protects against lost trunk calls due to the improper
utilization of transfer routines by station users.
c.

Queuing

Internal Call Queuing

- Callback

(SLTSDT)

This feature allows a station user, after dialing a busy
station, to wait in a queue and be called back when
the station becomes idle.
A station user that encounters a busy tone after dialing a busy station number can establish an automatic
callback condition by remaining off-hook until the busy
tone changes to low tone. The user can then go onhook. When both the called station and the activating
station become idle, the activating station is rung. Upon
answering, the called station is rung. A talking connection is made when the called station user answers.
While the automatic callback is active, the activating
station user may receive or originate other calls. The
automatic callback can be cancelled at any time by dialing a cancellation code.
The SATURN IIE EPABX System can support up to 80
stations simultaneously while waiting for a callback via
the Internal Call Queuing - Callback and Outgoing Call
Queuing - Callback features. A station may be in only
one callback queue at any one time.
C. Internal Call Queuing

- Standby (SLTSDT)

This feature allows a call to a busy station to be held
waiting in a special standby queuing mode. While in

A30808-X5130-A120-l-8918
issue 1, May 1986

SATURN IIE EPABX
Feature Descriptions

Standby, instead of going on-hook to be called back
when a trunk becomes available, the station user is
allowed to wait off-hook in a standby queuing mode
and listens to silence or music, if provided. When a
trunk becomes available, the station is connected automatically to the trunk. The user may convert from
standby queuing to callback queuing at any time by
going on-hook. Refer to the Outgoing Call Queuing Callback feature.

the standby queuing mode, the calling party is provided with special ringback tone while a call waiting tone
is directed toward the busy station user. The busy station user may connect to the calling party either by going on-hook and being recalled or by using the Call
Hold - Flip - Flop (Broker) feature. This feature is
provided to a station on an automatic originating/terminating or manual originating basis.
1. Automatic Originating -A station assigned this type
of standby queuing is automatically placed in the
standby queuing mode immediately after originating a call to any busy internal station.
2. Automatic Terminating - A station assigned this
type of standby queuing receives a call-waiting signal on any call attempting to terminate on the user’s
station when the user is busy on another call.
3.

The call-waiting indication is provided upon initial campon of the station. If the called-station user does not
answer the waiting call within a preset time interval
(nominal 10 seconds), a second tone is directed toward
the called station. The delay interval for the second
tone is variable via a CMU procedure.
f.

Manual originating - This type of standby queuing
is provided as an additional procedure option for the
Internal Call Queuing - Callback feature. After dialing a busy station and receiving busy tone, the
user can establish a standby queuing condition by
listening to busy tone until busy tone changes to a
steady low tone and then to special ringback tone.
Once the special ringback tone is heard, a callwaiting tone is applied toward the busy station which
notifies the busy party of a waiting call.
The activating station user may convert from a
standby queuing to an automatic-callback condition
at any time by going on-hook. Refer to the Internal
Call Queuing Callback feature for further details.

This feature permits stations having the proper classofservice to have originating call waiting service. When
a station with this feature directs a call to a busy station, the calling party is “camped-on” to the busy station in a call waiting state. This occurs regardless of
whether the called station is classmarked for call waiting or not. A call waiting indication is directed to the
busy station user. If the busy station is a member of
a hunt group, hunting is attempted before camp-on is
applied.
g. Call Waiting - Terminating
Assigned on a per-station basis and working in conjunction with the system’s camp-on facilities, this feature permits a given station to receive any type of call
waiting indication. When a call is directed to a busy
station with this feature, the calling party is “campedon” to the busy station in a call waiting state. A call
waiting indication is directed to the busy station user.
If the busy station is a member of a hunt group, hunting is attempted before camp-on is applied. If the calling party is a station, Direct Inward System Access
(DISA) trunk, or tie trunk, special audible ring tone is
connected to the calling party while the call is in the
waiting mode. If the calling party is a Direct Inward Dialing (DID) trunk, audible ring tone is connected to the
calling party while the call is in the waiting mode. This
feature is allowed only if the called station user is in
a stable two-party talk state. Call Waiting is denied if
the call is in a transient state. If denied call waiting,
the calling party receives busy tone.

d. Outgoing Call Queuing - Callback (SLT,AIT,SDT)
This feature allows a station user, after dialing a busy
outgoing trunk group, to wait in a queue and be called
back when a trunk in the trunk group becomes available. The queue is handled on a first-in first-out basis.
A station user that encounters a busy tone after dialing a trunk group access code can invoke the Outgoing Call Queuing Callback feature by remaining
off-hook until busy tone changes to low tone and then
returning on-hook. When a trunk becomes available
and the user is next in queue, the SATURN IIE EPABX
System automatically calls back the station user. The
station user can complete the calf originally attempted by going off-hook, listening for dial tone, and dialing the desired outside destination number.
While automatic callback is active, the activating station user may receive or originate other calls. The automatic callback can be cancelled at any time by
dialing a cancellation code. This feature provides the
attendant with the additional capability of extending a
callback to an SLT or SDT party connected on the console. Also, when the attendant is in the queue, the attendant is given priority over SLT and SDT calls.
Each SLT and SDT is allowed only one callback queue
request at any one time. Each attendant is allowed up
to five queue requests.
e. Outgoing

Call Queuing

- Standby (SLT,AlT,SDT)

This feature is an extension of the Outgoing Call Queuing - Callback feature. With Outgoing Call Queuing -

Call Waiting - Originating

4.07

Call Forwarding

a. Call-Forwarding

Features
- All Calls (SLTSDT’)

This feature allows a station user to have all incoming
calls terminating at the user’s station, forwarded to
another station or to the attendant console. As a
reminder that call forwarding is activated, the forwarding station hears one short burst of ringing each time
a call is forwarded. The station that originated call forwarding may continue to originate other calls while call
forwarding is in effect.
If a call is forwarded to a member of a hunt group that
is busy, the system hunts for the first idle member in

4-3

A30808-X5130-A120-l-8918
issue 1, May 1986

SATURN IIE EPABX
Feature Descriptions

when a call directed to that station remains unanswered
for a preset time interval (nominal 18 seconds).

that hunt group. If no idle member is found, the CampOn, Call Waiting, or Automatic Callback features may
be applied on the FWD-TO station. A station within the
hunt group that has this feature in effect is skipped during hunting. If the station is called direct (not part of
a hunt sequence) the call is forwarded as described
in the above paragraph.

If a call is forwarded to a member of a hunt group that
is busy, the system hunts for an idle member in that
hunt group. If no member is found, the forwarding station continues to ring for another no-answer time interval. At the end of the time interval, the forwarding
process is attempted again. A station within a hunt
group that has thus feature in effect is skipped during
hunting. If the station is called direct (not part of a hunt
sequence) the call is forwarded, as described in the
above paragraph.

Activation of the Call Forwarding - All Calls feature via
SDTs is performed on a per-line basis.
b. Call Forwarding

- Busy Line (SLTSDT’)

This feature allows a station user to have all incoming
calls terminating at the user’s station, forwarded to
another station or to the attendant when the station is
busy. If the station that has the Call Forwarding Busy
Lines feature in effect is idle, calls to that station are
completed as usual. If the forwarded-to-station is busy,
call forwarding does not occur.
If a call is forwarded to a member of a hunt group that
is busy, the system hunts for the first idle member in
that hunt group. If no idle member is found, the CampOn , Call Waiting or Automatic Callback features may
be applied on the FWD-TO station. A station within a
hunt group that has this feature in effect is skipped during hunting.
If the station is called direct (not part of a hunt sequence) the call is forwarded as described in the above
paragraph. Both the Call Forwarding - Busy Lines feature and the Call Forwarding - No Answer feature can
be active from the same station at the same time;
however, the forwarded-to station must be the same.
Activation of the Call Forwarding - Busy Lines feature
via SDTs is performed on a per-line basis.
c.

Call Forwarding

Both the Call Forwarding - No Answer feature and the
Call Forwarding - Busy Lines feature can be active
from the same station at the same time. However, the
forwarded-to station must be the same. Activation of
the Call Forwarding - Busy Line feature via SDT is performed on a per-line basis.
e. Call Forwarding

This feature allows a station user that has received a
forwarded call to transfer the call to the station from
which call forwarding is active. The operation of this
feature is identical to the feature “Call Transfer” except instead of dialing the forwarding-station
number,
the user dials the Call Forwarding - Return feature access code.
f.

The station user activates Call Forwarding - Secretarial by dialing the Call Forwarding - Fixed access code.
Call Forwarding - Fixed is an option, assignable by
CMU, via STNASSN CMU procedure. Calls to the station are then forwarded to the designated station.
If Call Forwarding - Fixed is assigned and the station
user activates one of the other call forwarding features
(e.g., Call Forwarding -All Calls) the new selected feature will take precedence over Call Forwarding - Fixed.

d. Call Forwarding

(SLTSDT’)

Calls to the station- are then forwarded to the designated station. As a reminder that the Secretarial Intercept feature is activated, the station user hears one
short burst of ringing each time a call is forwarded. Call
Forwarding - Secretarial is canceled by the user dialing a Call Forwarding - Fixed cancellation code or Call
Forward cancel code.
Activation of the Call Forwarding - Secretarial
via SDTs is performed on a per-line basis.
g.

Call Forwarding

feature

to Public Network (SLTSDT)

This feature allows a station user to have all incoming
calls terminating at the user’s station, forwarded to an
“outside” directory number. While call forwarding is activated, the forwarding station receives one short burst
of ringing for each incoming call to remind the user
that forwarding is in effect.

by the user

- No Answer (SLT,SDT’)

This feature allows a station user to have all incoming
calls forwarded to another station or to the attendant

4-4

- Secretarial

A station user activates this feature by dialing the Call
Forwarding - Fixed feature access code.

This feature allows a station user to have incoming calls
forwarded to a fixed location if the called station is busy
or does not answer. When Call Forwarding - Secretarial
is assigned, all calls are forwarded. A station can have
Fixed or Secretarial Call Forwarding, but not both. For
station users allowed to access a Voice Mail System,
it is necessary that this feature be assigned to the
user’s class-of-service.

is cancelled

Call Forwarding

This feature allows’s station user to have all incoming
calls terminating at the user’s station, forwarded to a
pre-assigned station.

- Fixed (SLTSDT)

Call Forwarding - Secretarial
dialing a cancellation code.

- Return (SLTSDT)

The station user that activated call forwarding may continue to originate other calls while call forwarding is
in effect.
Activation of the Call Forwarding to Public Network feature via SDTs is performed on a per-line basis.

A30606X5130-A120-l-B918
Issue 1, May 1986

SATURN IIE EPABX
Feature Descriptions

4.08

Call Pickup

maximum of 128 stations. A maximum of 10 frequentlycalled numbers can be programmed from each station.
Each number can be a maximum of 18 digits long.

Features

a. Call Pickup - Directed (SLTSDT”)
This feature allows a station user to answer any ringing station within the SATURN IIE EPABX System by
dialing an access code and then the station number
of the ringing station. The feature is usually limited by
its nature to areas where the station to be picked up
can be observed either by a positive audible indication or a visual means (a local ringing indicator).
Any number of stations are capable of being provided with
the Call Pickup - Directed feature.

NOTE:

4.10
a.

This’feature allows a station user to answer an incoming call that is ringing at another station within a predefined pickup group by dialing an access code. The
pickup group consists of a group of stations, generally within hearing distance of ringing, for which any ringing station may be answered by any group member.
The SATURN IIE EPABX System is capable of providing any
required number of pickup groups. The maximum number
of stations allowed in a pickup group is 30.

Speed Calling
Last Number

Features

Pilot Number Access (SLTSDT)

b. Station Hunting - Busy Advance

Speed Calling - Group (SLT,An,SDT’)

This feature allows the system to search for an idle station in a hunt group if the station called is busy. The
feature is activated when a call is made to a busy station within a hunt group. If the station is busy, the system only checks the class-of-service of the hunt group
member who was called and proceeds through the
group as if each member in the hunt group had the
same class-of-service as the member to whom the call
was made.

This feature allows station users to reach frequentlycalled numbers normally associated with outgoing
trunk calls by dialing abbreviated dial codes instead
of full numbers.

This feature is selected by setting the Busy Advance
classmark (HUNTBUSY) in the station Class-of-Service
(COS).

Each abbreviated code consists of an access code and
a two digit number associated with the external number. Speed calling codes are established and maintained via CMU procedures. The abbreviated codes
can be dialed from any station assigned the Speed
Calling - Group feature. The SATURN IIE EPABX System has the capability of providing up to four speed
calling groups and storing in memory a maximum of
64 frequently-called
numbers per group. Each number can be a maximum of 18 digits long.
c.

Hunting

Redial (SLT,SDT*)

This feature allows a station user to have the last number dialed from the user’s station automatically redialed, by dialing an access code. This feature is useful
when the user has dialed a busy destination and
desires to make the call at a later time without having
to redial the full number.
b.

Station

This feature allows a station user to dial a pre-assigned
pilot number and automatically be connected to an idle
station within a pre-assigned hunt group. Station hunting occurs only when the hunt group is accessed via
the pilot number. The pilot number is a number that
is not assigned to a station. Pilot number hunting
searches through a prearranged group for an idle station from the first assigned designated station in the
group to the end of the group. The call is completed
to the first idle station encountered. If all stations are
busy, busy tone is heard. Stations within a pilot hunt
group can be called directly by dialing the normal assigned extension number, in which case no hunting
occurs.

b. Call Pickup - Group (SLT,SDT*)

4.09

The Jr. DYAD provides an inherent Speed Dial feature button which stores in its own memory a maximum of 10 frequently-called numbers. Each number
can be a maximum of 25 digits long.

Speed Calling - Individual

(SLTSDT’)

This feature allows a station user to reach frequentlycalled number by dialing abbreviated dial codes instead of full numbers. The station user provided with
the Speed Calling - Individual feature programs the
numbers into system memory from the user’s station
set. The abbreviated codes can be dialed only from
the station set at which they were programmed.
The SATURN IIE EPABX System has the capability of
providing the Speed Calling - Individual feature to a

In a system where neither Busy Advance (HUNTBUSY)
nor No Answer Advance (HUNTNOANS) classmarks
are set, the system performs both functions. If HUNT
BUSY alone is set within COS, the HUNTNOANS function is deleted. If HUNTNOANS alone is set within
COS, the HUNTBUSY function is deleted. If both classmarks are set, both functions will be performed.
C.

Station Hunting - Circular (SLTSDT)
An incoming call to a busy station assigned to a circular hunt group causes the SATURN IIE EPABX System to progressively search for an idle station within
that hunt group. The hunting sequence starts with the
called station and ends after all stations in the hunt
group are checked, thus completing the call to the first
idle station encountered. If all stations are busy, busy
tone is heard.
If a call is forwarded to a member of a circular hunt
group that is busy, the system hunts for the first idle
member in that hunt group. If no idle member is found
and the Call Forwarding - No Answer feature is in

SATURN IIE EPABX
Feature Descriptions

A30808-X5130-A120-l-8918
Issue 1, May 1986

effect, the forwarding station continues to ring for
another no answer interval. At the end of the time interval, the forwarding process is attempted again. If the
Call Forwarding - All Calls or Call Forwarding - Busy
Lines feature is in effect, the forwarding station user
may activate the Internal Call Queuing - Standby or
Internal Call Queuing Callback features. A station within the circular hunt group that has this feature in effect is skipped during hunting. If the station is called
direct (not part of a hunt sequence) the call is forwarded
as described previously.
The hunting sequence can be arranged for either
consecutive
or non-consecutive
numbers.
The
SATURN IIE EPABX System is capable of providing any
required number of circular hunt groups. A maximum
of 30 stations can be assigned to each circular hunt
group.
d.

Station Hunting - No Answer Advance (SLTSDT)
This feature searches for another idle station in a hunt
group if a ringing station is not answered within a
predetermined period of time. The search for call completion advances until the last station is reached, in
which case the last station rings until an automatic
recall is initiated.

e. Station Hunting - Secretarial

Stop Hunt (SLTSDT)
This feature provides the capability for hunt groups to
be temporarily reduced in size. The hunt list is shortened by a station user dialing the stop hunt access
code from the station in which all succeeding stations
are to be excluded from the hunting list.
For example, if the hunt sequence included extensions
234-235-236-237-238 and the stop hunt access code
is dialed at extension 236, the new hunt sequence
would be extensions 234,235,236. The hunt group can
be returned to its full size by a station user dialing the
stop hunt cancellation code from the station at which
the Stop Hunt feature was activated.

h. Automatic
l

If a call is forwarded to a member of a terminal hunt
group that is busy, the system hunts for an idle member in that hunt group.
If no idle member is found and the Call Forwarding No Answer feature is in effect, the forwarding station
continues to ring for another no answer interval. At the
end of the time interval, the forwarding process is
attempted again. If the Call Forwarding - All Calls or
Call Forwarding - Busy Line feature is in effect, the
forwarding station user can activate the Internal Call
Queuing - Standby or Internal Call Queuing Callback
features.
A station within the terminal hunt group that has this
feature in effect is skipped during hunting. If the station is called direct (not part of a hunt sequence) the
call is forwarded as previously described.

(SLT,SDT)’

ACD Incoming Call Completion. When an incom-

FIFO Queue Operation. Answering of all incoming (CO) calls to the same ACD hunt group is performed on a strictly first-in/first-out (FIFO) basis. For
instance, if the oldest call is connected to an announcement and is only part way through it when
a station becomes available, the call is immediately
disconnected from the announcement
and connected to the available station.

Station Hunting - Terminal (SLT, SDT)
An incoming call to a.busy station, assigned to a terminal hunt group, causes the SATURN IIE EPABX
System to progressively search for an idle station within that hunt group. The hunting sequence starts with
the called station and ends with the last station in the
group completing the call to the first idle station encountered. If all stations are busy, busy tone is heard.

Call Distribution

ing (CO) call is directed to an ACD group and no
station within that group is immediately available
for assignment, completion of the call takes place
in the following sequence: ringing is detected and
continues for a timed period. The caller is then connected to the announcement, if provided. After that,
the caller is connected to silence or music, if
provided.

(SLTSDT)

This feature allows calls to a busy hunt group to be
automatically routed to a common station or to a common hunt group. The common station or hunt group
can be assigned to handle overflow calls from one or
several hunt groups. Two circular hunt groups cannot
be combined.
f.

The hunting sequence can be arranged for either consecutive or non-consecutive numbers. The SATURN
IIE EPABX is capable of providing any required number of terminal hunt groups. A maximum of 30 stations
can be assigned to each terminal hunt group.

Timing of CO Ringing. If announcement

capability is used in the ACD hunt group, answer supervision is not returned to the central office until the
station selected actually answers.

If the announcement
capability is used in the
group, ringing continues until either the selected
station answers or the announcement is connected.
When either of these occurs, answer supervision
is returned to the central office.
l

Music-on-Hold (MOH) Delay. When this feature
is implemented,
waiting callers receive MOH,
which continues until a station is assigned to the
call. When a station is assigned, the caller receives
ringback tone until the station answers.

l These
four features are basic SATURN features; additional SATURN ACD features are also available.
“ACD” has been referred to as “UCD” in previous
sales literature.

SATURN IIE EPABX
Feature Descriptions

4.11
a.

Message

A30808-X5130-A120-l-6918
Issue 1, May 1986

Waiting

Features

Message Waiting - Automatic

Callback

(SLTSDT’)

Message

Waiting - Cancellation

(SLTSDT’)

A station user that receives a message from, or sends
a message to another station, may cancel the message
by dialing the appropriate cancellation access code.
When a station user invokes the Message Waiting Automatic Callback feature, the associated message
waiting indication is automatically cancelled as soon
as the station from which the message waiting was
originated is answered.
c.

Message Waiting Capability

(SLT, ATT*,SDT*)

The message Waiting feature can be activated toward
any SATURN IIE EPABX System station as long as the
station has the capability to receive Message Waiting
indications. Activation of the Message Waiting feature
can be performed either immediately after dialing a
busy station number or without first attempting a call
to the destination station.

4.12

Privacy

a. Attendant

Features
Override

Executive Override - Automatic

Executive

Override

Security (SLT, SDT)

Stations assigned this feature may not be overriden
by individuals
employing the Executive Override
Without Warning Tone feature.
Executive

Data Line Security (SLTSDT)
Stations assigned this feature may not be overridden,
camped-on, or receive any other signals (e.g., call waiting tone) when the station is busy.

C. Do-Not-Disturb

(SLTSDT)

Security (SLTSDT)

Stations assigned this feature may not be overridden
by the attendant.
b.

(SLTSDT’)

This feature allows a station user to camp-on to a busy
station and automatically break into the call in progress
if the called party does not answer within a predetermined period of time. Before the call is overridden, a
warning tone is heard by the two conversing parties,
alerting them of the impending override. The override
function does not occur if the called station is not in
a stable two-party talk state, established in a three-way
connection, assigned with Data Line Security, or Executive Override Security, connected to an attendant
or customer-provided
equipment (paging, dictation,
code calling), or no 4 port conference bridge is available. If the called station is in the Do-Not-Disturb mode,
this feature is overridden causing the station to ring
as in a station-to-station call.

This feature allows a station user to send a message
waiting indication to a party at another station. The
message waiting indication consists of a fiashing lamp
and/or a display on the alphanumeric display (SDT 18and 26-button sets only).

Only one message may terminate at an SLT at any one
time. The maximum number of messages that can terminate at an SDT is four.

Override

This feature allows a station user, upon encountering
a busy or special ringback tone on an internal call, to
enter into the existing connection for the intended purpose of announcing a high priority or emergency call.
A.warning tone is provided to both parties before the
conversation is overridden. (This tone may be repeated.) Executive Override cannot be invoked if the called
station is not in a stable two-party state, established
in a three-way connection, assigned with Data Line
Security or Executive Override Security, connected to
an attendant or customer-provided equipment (paging,
dictation, code calling), or no 4 port conference bridge
is available. If the called station is in the Do-Not-Disturb
mode, this feature is overridden causing the station to
ring as in a station-to-station call.

A station user that receives a message waiting indication, can have the SATURN IIE EPABX System automatically attempt a connection to the activating station
by dialing an access code.
b.

Executive

(SLTSDT’)

A station user that wishes not to be disturbed by incoming calls may activate the Do-Not-Disturb feature
and make the user’s station appear busy. When this
feature is active, all calls to the station receive a busy
tone. The user may originate calls in the normal manner. However, each time the user goes off-hook, recall
dial tone is heard as a reminder that the station is in
the Do-Not-Disturb mode. Activation of the Do-NotDisturb feature via SDTS is performed on a per-line basis. Intercom calls and Voice calls are not affected by
activation of the Do-Not-Disturb feature. Message Waiting may be activated to a station that has the Do-NotDisturb feature active.

Override

No Tone Security (SLT, SDT)

Stations assigned this feature may not be overriden
by individuals
employing the Executive Override
Without Warning Tone feature.
h. Executive Override Without Warning Tone (SLT, SDT)
This feature allows station users, upon encountering
busy or special ringback tone on an internal call, to
enter into the existing connection for the purpose of
announcing a high priority or emergency call. No warning tone is provided to the conversing parties. This feature cannot be invoked if the called station is not in
a stable two-party connection, established in a threeway connection classmarked with Data Line Security
or Executive Override Security - No Tone, connected
to an attendant or customer-provided equipment (paging, dictation, code calling), or no 4 port conference
bridge is available. If the called station is in the DoNot-Disturb mode, this feature is overridden causing
the station to ring as in a station-to-station call.
Both features, Executive Override (With Warning Tone)
and Executive Override Without Warning Tone, may

4-7

SATURN IIE EPABX
Feature Descriptions

coexist in the system. Stations may be assigned either,
both, or neither feature, based upon their individual
class-of-service. The type of override performed, when
allowed, is determined by the access code dialed.
While listening to busy or special ringback tone, the
calling party depresses the hookswitch and receives
recall dial tone. The calling party then dials the access
code assigned to Executive Override Without Warn\, rng Tone. After a steady, low tone is received, a third
‘ Dlstrlhu!lon
SYS:;,III
(I?.%.“~ Cn!?lnc’l

304
4.00
4.01
402
4.03
4.04
4.05
4.06

SAlURN IIE EPAT,X
Inst;~llatloli I’roccdllres

CONTENTS
FIGURE

PAGE

5.04 Signal Cablo Dls!ribu!:on Sysic:l:
(Expansion Cabinet)
6.00 MDF Cabling via Top of Cabinet Assembly
(Vie\:; of Tjplcal Cabinei)
6.01 MDF Cablmg via Bottcm of Cabinet Assem!:iy
(View of Typical Cabinet)
6C2 Required MDF Cable Ccnnector
6.03 Overview of MDF Cabie Connec:ors
(Sheet 1 of 2)
6.03 Overview of MDF Cable Ccnnccicrs
(Sheet
2 of 2)

5-7
G-2

6-6

LIST OF TABLES
TABLE

(Continued)

PAGE

1.00 Mnemonics Used ii1 This PI-actice
1-l
1.01 FCC Registration Information - FCS
Registration Number 6:586K-14442~MF-E
l-3
2.00 ldentificatton
and Functional Description
of Equipment Shelves
2-9
2.01 Identification
and Functional Dcccripticn
of Power and Distribuiion
Equipment
2-9
?.C2 Identification,
Location and Funct;onal
Description of Miscellaneous
Equipment
2-9
2.03 Identification,
Location and Functional
Description of Common Equipment PCBs
2-10
2.04 Identificaiion,
Location and Func!ional
Description of Peripheral Interfacing PCBs
2-11
3.00 Equipment Cabinet Temperature/Humidit>j
Ranges
.‘.
.I..
3-l
3.01 Basic and Expansions Cabinets AC
Input Power fiequirements.
3-2
3.02 Ground Conductor Length vs Wire Gauge
3-7
3.03 Cable Running Limitations Wher. Usiilg
Non-Twisted Ivo-Pair Cable
3-3
4.00 SATURN II EPAGX Orderable Items List
4-l
4.01 Basic System
4-6
4.02 Line/Trunk Unit Shelf
.
4-13
4.03 Expansion Cabinet and Cabling
4-20
4.04 Power System Unit Repairable Items
* 23
4.05 Control Logic Board
: : 1 1 : : 1 iI23
4.06 PSU Front Panel Circuit Breakers and Fuses
4-24
4.97 Ring Generator (RGEN) Module
4-28
4.08 Memory Support Module (MSM) PCB
(L30808-X5130-A7- *-B900)
4-30
409 MSM Battery Pack (L30808-X5130-A51- *-8900)
4-31
4.10 -4DVdc Power Supp!y (-48PS) Module,
110 V,?c @ 60Hz (S30050-K566C-X- * -6900)
4-31
4.11 LTU Power Supply (LTUPS) Module.
110 Vat cij: 6Ol-!z (L30803-X5130-A39- * -Boo-i)
4-3 !
4.i2 Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) Module
(L30EO8-A5130-A50- * -13900)
4-36
4.13 Dual-Tone :Jultifrcquency
(DTMF) Receiver
PCf3 (S30810-Q431-X2- * -0900)
4..: 3

4.14 Premium Instrument Module Dlglial [Pl\- * -6900)
4 17 Subscriber Line Module Digi!al (SLMD)
PCB (S308iO-Q1724-X- * -6900)
4.18 Subscriber Line Analog - 1G Line(SLA16)
PCE (S308;0-Qli90-X* -8900)
4.19 Cen:ral Office Trur;k (TMBM) PC6
(S308iO-Q414-X- * -6900)
4.20 Direct Inward Diaiing Trunk (TMIE) PCB
(S30810-Q4i5-X- * -6900)
4.21 T&o-Wire E&M Trunk (TMBA-2) PCB
(S30810-Q429-X- * -69GO)
;‘.22 Four-Wire E&M Trunk (TMBA-4) PCB
(S30810-Q430-X- * -ESOOj
4.23 ParalleliSerial
Converter (PSC) PCB
(S30810-Q419-X- * -E900)
4.24 Signal MultlplexeriCiocklTone
Generator
(SMXTG) PCB (S30810-Q179i-X- * -C9OC)
4.25 Conference (CONF) PCB
(S30810-Q0417-X- * -8900)
‘:.26 Memory Contrcl and Attenuation (MCA)
PC6 (S3C810-QO4i6-X- * -E900) .‘.
‘.
4.27 Remote Access Unit/Ports (RAUFI
PCB (S30810-Q1792-X- * -8600)
.‘.
4.28 Control!er/ Input-Output
Processor (CIOP)
PCB (S30810-Q1789-i* -8900)
‘.
:.
4.29 Memorv i.0 Meoabvte fMEM4) PCBs
(S308ld-Ql775-x’* :B3tiO)
.‘.
4.30 Memory 256 Kilobyte (tiEM3) PCEs
(S3081&31740-X- ;-@OO)
:.
4.31 Line/Trunk Unit Control iLTUC! PCB
(S30810-Q0428-X- * -BSdO)
:.
4.32 Attendant Console (L30808-X5130-A8- * -B900)
5.00 Signal and Power/Ground
Cabling Fiefcrence
List (Basis Cabinet)
5.01 Signal and Power/Ground
Cabling Reference
List (Expansion Cabinet)
6.00 Basic Shelf Channel Group 0
G.Cl Basic Shelf Channel Groups 0 and 1
602 Basic Shelf Channel Group 2
6.03 Basic Shelf Channel Groups 2 and 3 : : :
6.04 Basic Shelf Channel Group 4
:
6.05 Basic Shelf Cha?ncl Groups 4 and 5
6.06 Basiz Shelf Channel Grcup 6
6.07 LTU Shelf Channe! Grocp 0
I
6.08 LTU Shelf Channel Groups 0 23; ;. : : :
6.09 LTU Shelf Channel Group 2
6.10 LTU Shelf Chaqncl Groups 2 and 3
6.11 LTU Shelf Channel Groun 4
6.12 LTU Shelf Charm?! Groups 4 2nd ‘;
6.13 LTU Shelf Channel Group G
6.14 LTU Shelf Channel Groups 6 r:nd 7

4-42
4-49

4-67
4-69
4-71
4-73
4-75
4-7
4-79
5-3
5-3
G-7
6-9
6-11
6-13
6-75
6-17
6-;9
6-21
6-73
6-25
6-27
E-29
6-31
6-Z
6 -.,

A3C9C&X5130-01 iO-1-0171
ISSUO
1. May i9tX

SATURN IIE EPABX
Installation Ptoccdums

SECTION

1.00

1.01 Purpose. Thus practice provides instructlons for craft
personnel lcsponslble for site preparation and installation of
the SATURN IIE (Saturn II- Expandedj System, up to, but not
including, power turn-on.
This practice

is divided

Section
Section
Section
Section
Section

into the fcllowing

sections.

1
2
3
4
5

tntroduction
Equipment Locaiion and Identification
Customer Site Prepara:ion
Equipment Installation Procedures
System Signal and Power/Ground Cabling
and Termil;ation
Section G MEF Cabling and Terminating Arrangements
Table 1.00

MNEMONIC
ALM
CIOP
co
CONF
COT
DCI
DID
DOD
DTMF
EIA
EPABX
FCC
FDD
IOP
KSDA
LED
LTU
LTUC
LTUPS
MCA
MDF
MEM
MRA
MSM
PC6
PCM
PEN
PIMD
PRS
PSC
PSU
RAC
RARI
RAUP
l7EN
RGEN
RMW
ROM
SDT
SLAlG
SLMA-S
SLMA-0
SL.MD
SMDR

Mnemonics

INTRODUCTION
Tablc 1.00 defines
practice.

the conlmon

mnemcn:cs

csccl 1:1 this

1.02 Siemens SATURN HE Practices.
The practices an3
dates for the SATUfiN IIE EPABX arc llsted in ihe Prac?Iccs
Documentation
Index A30508-X5130-AlgO* -BQ87.
NOTE:

Always refer to the laiest issue cf the appiicab!e
dex to obtain the latest issue of a prac!:ce.

I;-

1.03 Siemens
Customer
Support
Services.
Slcinc:?s
maintains a nationwide network cf flcld service off&s. Contact the nearest Siemens regional off~cc fcr any e;iglnec;ing
assistance which may be required.
Used in This Practice
DEFlNlTlON

Alarm
Controller/Input-Ouiput
Processor
Ceniral Office
Conference
Csn:ral Office Trunk
Gata Communication
Interface
Direct Inward Diaiing
Direct Outward Dialing
Dual-Tone Multifrequency
Elecironics Industries Association
Electronic Private Automatic Branch Exchange
Federal Communications
Commission
Floppy Disk Drive
Input/Output
Processoi
Keyset Daughter Board “A”
Light-Emitting
Ciode
Lineflrunk
Unit
Line/Trunk Unit Control
Line/Trunk Unit Power Supp!y
Memory Control and Attenuator
Main Dis!ribuiion Frame
Memory
Material Return Authorization
Memory Support Module
Printed Circuit Board
Pulse Code Modulation
Port Equipment Number
Premium Instrument Module Digiial
Protection Restore Signal
Parallel/Serial Converter
Power System Unit
Ringing AC
Random Access Memory
Remote Access Unit/Ports
Ringer Equivalence rJumber
Ring Generator
Ringing Message VLal(:ng
Read Only Memory’ “’
Siemcns DigItal Tolephonc
SubscrIber Line Analog -- 16 Lmes
SubscrIber Lme Module An,lloq - Sta::cii
Subscriber Line I.lor!u!c An;!!?3 - Off-F’rcTn;;scs
Smmbscriber Lir,c F.dodule Dlg:tnl
St,!tion h:cr;sr?r)c Detntl Recordlncl
-. _--_-__
_---

- -. ..--__~

_-_---

-..

Tabic 1.00

Mnemonics

Used in This Practice

MNEMONIC
S?G
SMXTG
TC
TELCO
TMBA-2
TMBA-4
TMBM
TMIE
TTY

(Continued)

DEFINITION
Single Point Ground
Stgnal Multiplexer/Clock
Tone Generator
Trunk Circuit
Telephone Company
2-Wire E & M Trunk
4-Wire E & M Trunk
Central Office Trunk
Direct Inward Dialing Trunk
Teletypewriter

!he SATURN EPAGX, the fc!!ow:ng extract flcm FCC
Public Notice Number -i718. dated January 9. 1984, IS
provided: “FCC rules prohibit the use of non-hearingaId-compatible
telephones In the fcllcwing locc!io:;;:

1.04 Federal Communications
Commission
(FCC) Rules
and Regulations.
In compliance with FCC’s Part 15 and 68
Rules and Regulations,
the subsequent
statements
are
presented to the user:

il)

Installation of the SATURN IIE EPABX equipment
be performed by authorized personnel only.

This equipment generates and uses radio frequency
energy and if installed properly will not cause interference to radio communications.
It has boen tested and
found to comply with the limits for a class “‘A” computing device pursuant to subpart ‘3” of Part 15, FCC
Rules, which are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference when operated in a
commercial environment.

(2) Elevators, highways and tunnels (autcmobile. sub-

Operation of this equipment in a residential area may
cause interference, in which case the user will be required to take whatever measures may be required to
correct the interference.

(4) Hospital rooms. residential health care facili?ies.
convalescent
homes, and priscns, specifically
are used for signaling
Ilfewhere te!ephones
threatening or emergency situaticns I: alternative
signaling meihods are not available.

must

Any public cr semipublic
locaiicn where coincperaied cr credit card telephone; may be fourid.

way, railroad or pedestrian)
impaired
hearing
might
emergency.

(3) Places where telephones are speci:iccliy instz!ied
to alert emergency authorities such as f:re, pclice
or medical assistance personnel.

lnfcrmation on all devices which are configured for connection to the public telephone network may be requested by the telephone company. Table 1.01 provides
the necessary information that may be requested by
the telephone
company
en the FCC-registered
SATURN devices configured for connection to the public telephone network. In addition, if failure transfer circuitry is to be used, the FCC Registration Number and
Serwce Code of the failure transfer equipment and
failure transfer telephone sets must also be furnished
to the telephcne company.

(5) Work stations

‘

Undrr certain circumstances, the local telephone coinpany may ternporarily discontinue service and make?
changes In facilittes and scrvires which may affect the
opelntion of this equipment. However, the :r:lcphoiic
corny !ny v~i!I give adequate notice in wrltmg to allow
the usor lo mnlntain unintcrruptcd
serb:cc

impaired

personnel.

lobbies; in stores where
telephones are used by patrons to order merc!iandisc; in public :ransporia?ion terminals where !elephones are used to call taxis, or to reserve lodging
or rental automoblles.

(7) Hotel and mo:el rooms. (At le?.si ten perc,znt of the
rooms mus? contain hearing-aid-compatible
tciophones which will be provided to hearing :mpaircd
custcmers upon reques:.)”
NDTE: All telephones and st,?!icn a;?;aratus are to be
customer-provided
and are to bz FCCrcrjstered umts.
h.

Connection of party lines and coin telephones to the
public telephone neiwork is prohIbited by the FCC.

for hearing

(6) Hotel, motel, apartment

Siemcns-supplied
cables and wiring meet the FCC rcquirements for fully protected premises wiring. System
MDF cab!es can be ordered directly from Slemens. If
installation of non-fully-protected
premises wil-ing is to
be performed, such installation must ccnform to Scction 68.215 of the FCC part G8 Rules and Regulations.

where a person with
be isolated
in a!?

If trouble 1s experienced tv:ith this equipmer-,I. the prozedures contained in the SATURN IIE EPABX h?aln!ennncc
and Troubleshooting practice should be performed b!i
qualified mJlntenance personnel to ISOlaiC snd correct
the malfunction. If an FCC-rccls:e:ed dr?v:ce (Icfcr to D
ble 101) is malfunclioning and a spare is not available,
the telephone company must be notified tha? the device
is malfunctioning 2nd s~!ch devfcc must be disconncctcd from t!x? publ~.z telephone nc!work The trlc$!oro
coxpany m~sl nlso be notl!;e:l v:hc,n tllc f~~ult,; drv#:-e
ka.5 been rcpz cd or rrplaci Y! avl su,!i dcv.cr rs rcco;iS”C‘!i’
! 10 11!c3 p14bi:7
:!~!Ppll:,rlt~
nrtv:ork

dcfectwe equlpmpnt for repair. Spxili:
warranty Inform&on is provltied by Siemens to each +7&r null-0
rizod to soli. install nnd maintain SATURN eqwpmcnt

Each sys!cm. ;IS stllppod. is accompanied by a Ivl&rinl
Return Authorizatron (MRA) kit. This kit contnms Instiuctions ,7nd rolatcd documen!ation
fur returnlnc_l

Table 1.01

Interfacing
Device

Sienens
Devicef~lodel
or PartNumber

FCC Fkaistration
FCC ReGistration

PrivateLine Rciliiy
InterfaceCode/
Scrvicc Code

Information
Number 61586K-14442~MF-E

Ringer
Equivalence
No. (REN)

NO.
Of

Leads

usoc

Jack
Comments

NO.

T;.:SA4
js3calo-as3c.x- * .esc?)

CENTRALOFFICE
TRUNKS:
2VL:reLc:p S::::

T:.:EM

%\‘!ire Grc:nd Start (S3lB;O-CGX-x -E5C3)

0.96
0.9

CIREC%IN.DIALING
TRWKS:
2J::i:e(lrmli~g Cnlyl

OFF-PREUISES
STATION:
X’:~e Cl2Sj C

AUXILIARY
DEVICES:
F?.-l::eTrans’erC?!s.
lS?Ekld::‘s FCG)

Sib%0
(53;510.@1:73.X.
* .B9C3)

?J2:X

A30808-X5130-BllO-l-8928
Issue 1. May 1988

SATURN IIE EPABX
Installation Procedures

SECTION 2.00

EQUIPMENT

LOCATION AND IDENTIFICATION
for expansion. The expansion cabinet can contain one
or two LTU shelves.

2.01 General. The SATURN IIE System is housed in a single, lightweight equipment cabinet with expansion capabilities. An LTU shelf can be added within the basic cabinet: in
addition an expansion cabinet which contains one or two LTU
shelves can be mounted on top of the basic cabinet. Figures
2.00 and 2.01 show the basic cabinet and expansion cabinet. The block diagram shown in Figure 2.02 identifies the
functional blocks of circuits into which the system is divided.
These functional blocks are related to the system hardware
groups.

b. Power and Distribution Equipment. The SATURN IIE
System makes use of distributed power in the cabinet.
Several power modules of various sizes are located
alongside and at the bottom of the system cabinet. For
further information, refer to Figure 2.03.
c. Miscellaneous Equipment. Two Floppy Disk Drives
(FDD) provide random data storage, using floppy disks
as the data storage medium. The FDDs are located
at the bottom of the rack (see Figure 2.03).

2.02 SATURN IIE Cabinets. Figures 2.03 through 2.07 show
the basic and expanded configurations for the SATURN HE
System, The identification, location, and functional description of the equipment contained in the system cabinet is
presented below.

d. Printed Circuit Boards. Two types of Printed Circuit
Boards (PC&) are used, common equipment PCBs
and peripheral interfacing PCBs. Refer to Table 2.03
for further information on the common equipment
PCBs, and Table 2.04 for information on the peripherat interfacing PCBs.

a. Equipment Shelves. The basic cabinet can contain one
or two shelves, a reauired basic shelf and an LTU shelf

Figure

2.00 SATUHN Ilt

uaslc

~aumx

(with

Front

Panel)

2-l

A30808-X5130-8110-1-69~8
Issue 1, May 1986
SATURN IIE EPABX
tnstallation Procedures

-9

Figure 2.01 SATURN 1lE Basic and Expansion

2-2

Cabinets

(with Front Panel)

I
SATURN IIE EPABX
Installation Procedures

A30808-X5130-6110-1-8928
Issue 1, May 1986

t
PREMIUM
INSTRUM.
MODULE

DTMF
RECEIVER

PIMD

SUBSCRIBER
- LINE MODULE
DIGITAL

TRUNK
MODULE

DTMF

TMBA 214
TMBM
TMIE

SLMA-0
SLMA-S
SLA16

-1

SLMD

LINE/TRUNK

r
1
LINE/
TRUNK UNIT
CONTROL.

ANCILLARY
EQUIPMENT

LTU SHELF

LTUC

I
- _ -.rI

I
I
I

BASIC

----------------

-v-----------7

LINE/TRUNK
I

-’

p..,.-P,-.m
I..,_
3”“I
lb”lN”
I
NETWORK

-I

AXENUATOR

i I

LINE MODULE

MODEM INTERFACE TO SLMA
OR TRUNK FOR REMOTE
MAINTENANCE

il.
-h
1I
1I
-II- ___-----------

l-l

SDT

I!
I

ANCILLARY
EQUIPMENT
LTU CONTROL

PCBs PER LTV SHELF

FDD

r
I

ATTENDANT
CONSOLE

A&331-I-3/14/66

.-.

CONFERENCE

i
I
!-

‘TWO

SHELF

-.--

------

-------I
I-

1 POWER

SUPPLIES

t-1

POWER, RING GEN.
PlhlC CVhlP
AND MAINTENANCE
llll.Y

“II..,,

(MAXIMUM)

Figure

2.02

SATURN

IIE System

Block

Diagram

2-3

I
A30808-X5130-BllO-l-8928
Issue 1. May 1986

SATURN IIE EPAEX
Installation Procedures

LTU Shelf 3

LTU
PS2

256 Ports

Expansion
Cabinet
E

26.5 Inches
(67.3 CM)

LTU Shelf 2

LTU
PSl

256 Ports

70.5 Inches1
(179CM)
LTU Shelf

256 Ports

---xJl

Basic Shelf
224

Cor-Equi r”‘-“’

Ports

Figure

2-4

2.03 SATURN

HE Equipment

Configuration

Basic
Cabinet

A30808-X5130-BllO-l-B928
Issue 1, May 1986

SATURN IIE EPABX
Installation Procedures

,’

Figure

2.04 SATURN

IIE Basic Cabinet

(Rear View)

2-5

!
I
i
----I
SATURN IIE EPABX
Installation Procedures

A30808-X5130-BllO-l-8928
Issue 1, May 1986

I’
I’

Figure

2-6

2.05

SATURN

IIE Basic

Cabinet

(Front

View)

A30808-X5130-BllO-l-8928
Issue 1. May 1986

SATURN IIE EPABX
Installation Procedures

Figure

2.06

SATURN

IIE Basic

Cabinet

and Expansion

Cabinet

(Rear View)

2-7

A30808-X5130-BllO-143928
Issue 1, May 1986

SATURN HE EPABX
Installation Procedures

Figure

2-8

2.07

SATURN

IIE Basic Cabinet

and Expansion

Cabinet

(Front

View)

A30808-X5130-BllO-l-6928
Issue 1, May 1986

SATURN IIE EPABX
installation Procedures
Table 2.00

Identification

and Functional

Description

of Equipment

Shelves

BASIC

Basic Shelf. The basic shelf has both common equipment and peripheral PCBs which make up the common control and switching network circuitry of the system. In addition, the basic shelf also contains three
4-card Line/Trunk
Unit (LTU) channel
groups, .and four 2-card LTU channel
groups.

LTU ~

Line/Trunk Unit Shelf. One LTU shelf can be installed in the basic cabinet and two can be installed in the
expansion cabinet. Each LTU shelf has peripheral interface PCBs. The peripheral PCBs provide the interface circuitry between the system and external devices.
In addition, each LTU shelf is equipped with a Power Supply (LTUPS) for supplying the logic voltages
of +I- 5 Vdc and +I- 12 Vdc.
NOTE: The guidelines shown in Table 2.04 should be followed when assigning peripheral PCBs to the
basic and LTU shelves.

*’

Table 2.01

PSU

-48PS0

Identification

and Functional

Description

of Power and Distribution

Equipment

The PSU front panel provides the access and control point to various system maintenance functions and
serves as the main AC and DC power distribution point to the following:
a.

AC power, via circuit breakers, to the PSU, LTUPS units, and -48PS0, and -48PSl (see Table 4.06
for detailed information).

Fused -48Vdc outputs for talk battery, signaling battery, SLMD and PIMD applications to all channel groups in the basic and LTU Shelves and the input to the RGEN module ( see Table 4.06 for
detailed information).

Fused 9OVac. 20Hz for Ringing AC (RAC) and Ringing Message Waiting (RMW) to all channel
groups in the basic and LTU shelves (see Table 4.06 for detailed information).

The -48PS is an AC-to-DC converter which provides 48Vdc output voltage. This voltage is used for talk battery, signal battery, SLMD and PIMD applications for station instruments, SDTs, trunks, and attendant consoles, respectively. The -48PS also powers the RGEN modules.
A single -48PS (-48PSO) is adequate for the basic cabinet applications.

-48PSl

A second -48PS (-48PSl) is required when the expansion cabinet is included.
Memory Support Module. The MSM contained within the PSU is an optional battery backup package that
provides +SVdc to the RAM memory when the commercial AC power fails. In the event of such failure, the
battery maintains the data stored in memory for at least five minutes. When the AC source is restored within
this period , the memory does not have to be reloaded from floppy disk: system operation can begin immediately. The MSM is capable of anther 5minute backup cycle after 30 minutes of recharging. The MSM
includes the battery charging circuitry and is under a “float” charge during normal operation. The MSM
is located within the PSU.

Table 2.02

FDDO
FDDl

Identification

and Functional

Description

of Miscellaneous

Equipment

Floppy Disk Drive O/l. The floppy disk drive (FDD) provides the backup memory for the following: system
initialization, system reload, administration, and maintenance testing.

2-9

I
SATURN IIE EPABX
Installation Procedures
Table 2.03
MNEMONIC
SMXTG
.,

A30808-X5130-B110-l-8928
issue 1. May 1986
Identification,

Location

and Functional

Description

of Common

Equipment

PC&

TITLE AND FUNCTION

SLOT NUMBER

Signal Multiplexer/ClocklTone Generator (SMXTG) PCB is divided into three functional parts: the signal multiplexer, the clock generator, and the tone generator.

The SMXTG is a hardware-controlled scanner/distributor, which provides an interface
between the lineftrunk units and CIOI? The SMXTG handles control and status signals for 32 highways.
The clock generator provides the 8.192MHz, 4.048MHz, and 250Hz clocking signals
required to operate the system.

*’

The tone generator provides various tqne outputs from which all the system DTMF
tones and supervisory tones are derived. The tone generator also provides a square
wave timing signal for system generated dial pulses.

MEM4

The MEM4 PCB provides 1 Megabyte of memory and its supporting logic to store
system data. The memory is organized as 512k words X 16 bits/word, with memory
divided into sixteen 64K byte pages, write protection provided in 1K word segments.
MEM4 is arranged for battery backup memory protection to safeguard stored data
during short term power outages. Also, an error-correction code is provided to correct any single-bit error and detect double-bit errors existing in a word.

27-29

MEM3

The MEM3 PCB provides 256k bytes of memory and its supporting logic to store systern data. The memory is organized as 128k words X 16 bits/word, with memory write
protection provided in 1K word segments. MEM3 is arranged for battery backup
memory protection to safeguard stored data during short term power outages. Also,
an error-correction code is provided to correct any single-bit error and detect double.
bit errors existing in a word.

27-29

RAUP

Remote Access Unit/ Ports. The RAUP allows remote access to the system for maintenance and administrative functions. The RAUP is located in slot 25 of the basic
shelf and does not use up any time slots.

CIOP

Controller/Input Output Processor. Contains the Signal Buffer and processor and performs the input/output functions in the system. An RS-232-C connector is provided
for the service terminal.

PSC

Parallel/Serial Converter.Converts serial PCM voice signals to parallel signals, and
then multiplexes them into parallel flow. The parallel data is sent lo the Memory Control and Attenuator (MCA) for further processing; the reverse function is performed
by the PSC to provide serial voice signals back to the LTUs.

20,22

PSC 0 - basic and LTU Shelf 1.
PSC 1 - LTU Shelves 2 & 3.
MCA

Memory Control and Attenuator. The MCA is divided into two functional parts, a Time
Switch Unit and Memory Control. The time switch unit makes ail two party connections and provides attenuation (as required) for all system calls. The memory control
receives data from the processor and causes the time switch to make the required
connections.

CONF

Conference (CONF). The CONF function provides the switching control for conferences involving 3 to 7 parties plus attendant.

2-10

SATURN IIE EPABX
Installation Procedures
Table 2.04
MNEMONIC

A30808-X5130-BllO-l-8928
Issue 1, May 1986
Identification,

Location and Functional

Description

of Peripheral Interfacing

PCBs

TITLE AND FUNCTION

SLOT NUMBER

SLMA-S

Subscriber Line Module Analog - Station. The SLMA-S provides eight peripheral ports
for rotary dial and/or DTMF analog stations.

O-5,7-18,20-25

SLMA-0

Subscriber Line Module Analog - Off-Premises Station. The SLMS-0 provides four
peripheral ports for Off-Premises rotary dial and/or DTMF stations and the system.

O-5,7-18,20-25

SLMD

Subscriber Line Module - Digital. The SLMD provides eight interfacing circuits between the SDTs and the system.

O-5,7-18,20-25

S@6

Subscriber Line Module Analog. The SLA16 PCB provides sixteen interfacing circuits between rotary dial and/or DTMF stations and the system.

0,1,4,5,7,8,11-14,
17,18,20,21,24,25

LTUC

Line/Trunk Unit Control (LTUC). The LTUC buffers the signal between the common
equipment and the peripheral modules in the LTU shelves. It also provides fault
monitoring and reporting of failure associated with the 128 ports it handles. Two are
required on each LTU shelf.

6,19

The LTUC in slot 6 provides exchange of signaling and information between channel
groups 0 through 3 (128 ports) and the common equipment.
The LTUC in slot 19 provides exchange of signaling and information between channel groups 4 through 7 (128 ports) and the common equipment.
DTMF

Dual-Tone Multifrequency Receiver. The DTMF PCB detects and validates DTMF digits
(tone pairs). In addition to dial tone detector circuitry, the DTMF PCB contains four
circuits per PCB. A maximum of three DTMF PCBs are allowed per LTU shelf. The
maximum number of MMF PCBs is eight per system, distributed evenly in the shelves.

O-5,7-18,20-25

PIMD

Premium Instrument Module-Digital. The PIMD provides two peripheral ports between
attendant consoles. The PIMD provides two circuits but requires eight time slots to
operate.

O-5,7-18,20-25

TM BA-2

2-Wire E&M Trunk. The TMBA-2 PCB provides four trunk circuits. Each is arranged
for either one-way or two-way incoming and outgoing service with two-wire voice transmission and E&M signaling.

O-5,7-18,20-25

TMBA-4

4-Wire E&M Trunk. The TMBA-4 PCB provides four trunk circuits. Each is arranged
for either one-way or two-way incoming and outgoing service with two-wire voice transmission and E&M signaling.

O-5,7-18,20-25

TMBM

Central Office Trunk. The TMBM PCB provides four trunk circuits. Each is arranged
for either one-way or two-way incoming and outgoing service for Central Office (CO),
Foreign Exchange (FX), and WATS applications.

O-5,7-18,20-25

TMIE

Direct Inward Dialing Trunk. The TMIE PCB provides four trunk circuitsEach
ranged for one-way direct inward dialing service applications from the CO.

O-5,7-18,20-25

Port Equipment
Numbering.
The SATURN IIE System utilizes a four-digit numbering plan to identify each port
in the system. These four digits are used to identify the actual physical location of the port. Recall that the system cabinets include several shelves, and that each shelf contains a
number of PCBs. Physically, as well as electronically, the system is divided into seven channel groups for the basic shelf
and eight channel groups for each LTU shelf. The PCBs in
each of these channel groups contain two, four, eight, or sixteen circuits each. Using the above data, the four-digit numbering scheme was developed to allow each circuit in the
system to be identified by a unique Port Equipment Number
(PEN). The PEN numbering scheme is shown in Figure 2.08
and explained below.

2.03

is ar-

For convenience, the four digits of the PEN are designated
WXYZ. The “thousands” (W) digit of the PEN identifies the
shelf in which the port is located: “0” for the basic shelf, and
“1,” “2,” or “3,” for the applicable LTU shelf, as shown in
Figure 2.08. The “hundreds” (X) digit of the PEN identifies
the channel group in which the port is located, as shown in
Figure 2.08. There are seven channel groups in the basic
shelf, numbered 0 through 6, and eight channel groups in
each LTU shelf, numbered 0 through 7 (see Figures 2.09 and
2.10). The “tens” (Y) digit of the PEN identifies the channel
group slot number. For the basic shelf, channel groups 0, 2,
and 4 contain four card slots each (numbered 0, 2,4, and 6),
and channel groups 1, 3, 5, and 6 contain two card slots each
(numbered 0 and 2). For each LTU shelf. channel groups 0.

2-11

A30608-X5130-BllO-l-8928
Issue 1, May 1986

SATURN IIE EPABX
Installation Procedures
2, 4, and 6 contain four card slots each (numbered 0, 2, 4,
and 6) and channel groups 1, 3, 5 and 7 contain two card slots
each (numbered 0 and 2). See Figure 2.10. (The LTU card
slots labeled “LTUC” contain no ports and therefore are not
included in the numbering plan).
The SATURN IIE System employs “virtual” slots in addition
to the physical slots in each channel group. Two virtual slots
are added to the four-card channel groups and two virtual slots
are added to the two-card channel groups. The virtual slots
are numbered 1 and 3 and are paired with slots 0 and 2,
respectively. This has the effect of depicting the channel groups
as six-slot and four-slot channel groups, respectively. The virtual slots are used in the numbering scheme only when a
%-circuit card’is installed. For example, when an StA16 is installed in slot 0, its top eight circuits are assigned to slot 0 and
its bottom eight circuits are assigned to virtual slot 1. As each
channel group is allotted only 32 time slots, only two SLA16s
may be placed in any one channel group. In addition, the software interface enforces compliance with the following rules:
a. A sixteen-circuit card (i.e., SLA16) cannot be used in slot
4 or slot 6, regardless of the type of cards used in slots
0 and 2.
b. If an SLA16 is used in slot 0, slot 4 must be left empty.
c. If an SLA16 is used in slot 2, slot 6 must be left empty.
Caution
Insertion of any card in slot 4 with an SLAl6 in slot
0 (or in slot 6 with an SLAl6 in slot 2) will result in
port contention and consequent system malfunction.
The “units” (2) digit of the PEN identifies the circuit on the
PCB that is associated with the port. The circuit numbers for
PCBs are designated as follows:
Two-circuit PCBs (PIMDs): circuits 0 and 2.
Four-circuit PCBs (trunks, MMF receivers, and SLMAOS): circuits 0, 2, 4, and 6.
Eight-circuit PCBs (SLMA-Ss and SLMDs): circuits 0
through 7.
Sixteen-circuit PC& (SLAlGs): two sets of 0 through 7
(see explanation for “tens” above).
As an example of PEN numbering, assume that the circuit in
question is circuit 5 located on the PCB in card slot 4 of channel group 2 of shelf 3. The PEN number of the circuit would
be 3245. That is:
Shelf (W)
Channel Group (X)
Slot (Y)
Circuit (Z)

3
2
4
5

As a second example, assume that the circuit in question is
the second circuit on the bottom half of an SLA16 PCB located in card slot 0 of channel group 1 of the basic shelf. In this
case, the PEN number would be 0111. That is:
Shelf (W)
Channel Group (X)
Slot (Y)
Circuit (Z)

2-12

0
1
1
1

Note, in this example, that the slot number is 1, even though
the physical slot is slot 0, and that the circuit is PEN numbered
1 even though it is the tenth circuit on the PCB. This is because the second eight circuits on the SLAl6 are assigned to
a virtual slot (in this case, slot 1) and numbered 0 to 7 as explained above.
2.04 Allocation of Printed Circuit Boards. The SATURN IIE
System line and trunk PCBs, as noted previously, contain either
two, four, eight or sixteen circuits each. (Each circuit uses one
port on the system.) The system is arranged in channel groups
of 32 channels each; a channel is used for each port. The basic
shelf contains seven channel groups and the LTU shelf contains eight channel groups. Each channel group consists of
universal card slots. Some of the channel groups contain four
card slots each, and the others contain two card slots each.
Allocation of both initially-equipped PCBs and future PCBs
should be carefully planned during the configuration of the initial system site so as assign the ports in the most efficient manner. In a two-card channel-group, the use of anything other than
16-port cards will cause a loss of ports. For instance, the assignment of two four-port PCBs to a two-card channel group
would only use eight ports in that channel group, thus making
the remaining twenty-four portsunavailable for use. In four-card
channel groups, use of cards of less than eight channels each
will also result in the loss of availability of some of the channel
group’s ports.
The card slot position in each LTU shelf universally accepts
any SATURN IIE peripheral interface module; however, certain
limitations exist regarding the placement of these modules due
to the distribution of time slots within a shelf. There are also
guidelines that may be followed to achieve optimum time slot
usage. These limitations and guidelines are based on the number of time slots each peripheral interface module uses, as
follows:
Time Slots Used
Peripheral Interface Module
Subscriber Line Module -Analog-l6 (SLA16)
16
8
Subscriber Line Module -Analog (SLMA-S)
8
Premium Instrument Module - Digital (PIMD)
8
Subscriber Line Module - Digital (SLMD)
4
Central Office Trunk (TMBM)
4
Direct Inward Dialing Trunk (TMIE)
4
a-Wire E/M Tie Trunk (TMBA-2)
4
4-Wire E/M Tie Trunk (TMBA-4)
4
Dual Tone Multifrequency Receiver (DTMF)
Subscriber Line Module - Analog 4
Off-Premise (SLMA-0)
Except as noted above, 4 and 8 time slot peripheral interface
modules can be used in any slot of any LTU. Certain uses of
peripheral interface modules in SATURN IIE results in unusable time slots, as follows:

4 Time Slot Module
0 Time Slot Module
16 Time Slot Module

Unusable Time Slots
2 Card LTU
4 Card LTU
4
12
8
0
0
0

While not prohibited by the hardware/software design, it is
recommended that special consideration be given to the placement of E&M trunk modules in the LTUs so that the E&M leads
do not share any MDF cables with audio pairs. If an E&M trunk
module is placed into any of slots 0, 2, or 4 of a four-slot LTU,

A30608-X5130-8110-l-8928
Issue 1, May 1986

SATURN IIE EPABX
Installation Procedures

none of these slots should be filled with eight- or sixteen-port
modules. If an E&M trunk module is placed into slot 6 of a fourslot LTU or either of slots 0 or 2 of the two-slot LTUs situated
to the immediate riqht of the four-slot LTU. none of these slots
should be filled with eight- or sixteen-port modules.
In addition, the total number per shelf of any one type of module is limited by the power supply feeding that shelf. These
limitations are as follows:

SLMD Modules
DTQF Modules
Trunk Modules (2)

Basic Shelf (1)

LTU Shelf (1)

is
4
20

16
2
16

Notes:

Each power supply (in the basic shelf) can drive
more than the number of modules shown above.
The number shown represents the maximum
guaranteed quantities that can be powered by
each supply, independent of how the rest of the
shelf is populated.

At least 50 per cent of the trunks are assumed
to be TMBMs. As the percentage of TMBMs is
increased, the trunk module drive capability increases.

2-13

SATURN IIE EPABX
,, Installation Procedures

A30808-X5130-BllO-143928
Issue 1, May 1986

*’

EXPANSION
CABINET

-+I-

w=3

LTU
SHELF

w=2

LTU
SHELF

W=l

LTU
SHELF

I I I

[ SHELF

I I I

L
x=0
Y=

0121416

T
U
C

012

O(21416

012

012(416

012

0121416

I I I

x=0

01214(6

012

0)21416

012

O(21416

BASIC SHELF (W=O)
(front view)

Figure

2-14

LTU SHELF (W=l, 2, or 3)
(front view)

I v

2.08

Port Equipment

Numbering

Method

COMMON
EQUIPMENT

01 2

SATURN HE EPABX
Installation Procedures

A30808-X5130-6110-1-8928
Issue 1, May 1986

l. .’

Figure 2.09

11 12

15 16

Basic Shelf Channel

19 20

27 26

29 30

and Slot Number

2-15

SATURN IIE EPABX
Installation Procedures

ASSEMBLY
SLOTNO.

CHANNEL
GROUP
SLOT NO.

2-16 (16 pages)

A30808-X5130-BllO-l-8928
Issue 1, May 1986

-CH

GP--,
0

O(21416

-CH
CH GP
l
2
012

Figure

2.10

GP-,

2
0121416

11 12

CH GP ,-CH
3
012

LTU Shelf Channel

GP-,
4

012

19 20

21 22

CH GP 1
6

5
012

and Slot Number

CJ (-cH6Gpg
01214[6

cH7Gp
012

A30808-X5130-8110-l-8928
Issue 1, May 1986

SATURN IIE EPABX
Installation Procedures

SECTION 3.00

CUSTOMER

SITE PREPARATION

3.01 General. This section specifies the equipment room
preparation and house cabling procedures used to install a
SATURN IIE System. Included is a recommended
MDF layout for the system.

3.02 Equipment Room Preparation. The SATURN IIE System may be located in a dedicated room. This room, designated “equipment
room” in this practice, must meet the
environmental
requirements set forth below. If on-site service equipment and spares are to be provided, adequate
storage facilities should be available. Adequate lighting should
be provided for normal installation and maintenance activities. Walls should be painted or otherwise sealed.’
a.

midity ranges for the system and ancillary equipment. Maximum service performance and reliability
of the system is obtained when the room relative
humidity does not exceed the normal office environment humidity range. Under no circumstances
should the room relative humidity exceed the maximum humidity range. Storage humidity range applies only to non-operating
equipment.
3.

Contaminants. The SATURN IIE System should be
protected from exposure to airborne contaminants
(e.g., corrosive gases, particulate materials, aerosols, etc.) which may affect service performance
and reliability of the system. Avoid exposure to
hydrogen sulfide, sulfur dioxide, nitrogen oxides,
or other gases which are corrosive. Smoky and
dusty environments
should be avoided since the
contact resistance of the connectors may be affected. Aerosols such as oil, solvents and other industrial chemicals should also be avoided as they also
affect contact resistance. Extremely dusty environments may destroy PCBs by damaging their connectors. Such damage may not be repairable and
may cause system failures that are difficult to isolate and correct.

Air Conditioning.
Air conditioning
equipment
provided for the SATURN IIE equipment room must
be capable of maintaining the temperature and humidity ranges specified in Table 3.00. Such equipment should
contain
air filters
to reduce
contaminants
as noted above. The air conditioning equipment should be regularly maintained by
the customer to ensure proper performance, and
to maintain a positive room pressure. It is recommended that the air conditioning
equipment be
powered from an AC branch circuit separate from
that used for oowerina the SATURN IIE Svstem.
The cyclic, inductive-loads
presented by such
equipment may affect service performance
and
reliability of the system.

Environmental Requirements. The following environmental requirements for the equipment room must be
observed to ensure a high grade of service performance and reliability for the SATURN IIE System.
Failure to observe these environmental requirements
may seriously degrade the service, performance and
reliability of the system and may result in the voiding
of its warranty.
1.

Lightning and Surge Arrestor Protection. The interfacing
circuits (e.g., trunk circuits) of the
SATURN IIE System are designed to withstand voltage surges specified in the EIA proposed standard
for Physical Environment for Telephone Terminal
Equipment, and FCC’s Part 68 Rules and Regulations. Lightning can cause high voltage surges on
leads connected to exposed outside plant facilities.
Protection of these outside plant interface leads
(i.e., CO-PBX trunk, tie trunk, and off-premises station interface leads which connect to outside facilities) from foreign potentials and currents must be
provided by installing commercially available protection equipment meeting the above specified
guidelines. The Siemens lightning and surge arrestor equipment can be purchased separately and
used when protection above and beyond the specified requirements is necessary for a given installation.
Temperature and Humidity. The SATURN IIE System is designed to operate in an indoor, controlled
environment.
Extreme low or high temperatures
may degrade the service performance and reliability of the system. Avoid installing the equipment
cabinet in unheated areas or areas which are subject to high temperatures. Table 3.00 lists the operating and storage temperatures for the system and
ancillary equipment.
Maximum service performance and reliability of the system is obtained
when the room temperature does not exceed the
normal office environment temperature range. Under no circumstances
should the room temperature exceed the maximum temperature
range.
Storage temperatures apply only to non-operating
equipment. Extreme low or high humidity may also
degrade service performance and reliability of the
system. Low relative humidity increases the chance
of static electricity discharges; high relative humidity increases the chance of moisture condensation.
Table 3.00 also lists the operating and storage hu-

Table 3.00 Equipment Cabinet
Temperature/Humidity
Ranges
CONDITION

RANGE

Operating

Q to 38.0% (40° to 100°F)
20% to 80% (noncondensing)

Storage

-400 to 66.00 (-400 to 150.8OF)
0% to 950/o (noncondensing)

Floor Insulation. Carpeting is not normally recommended because of its tendency to produce highvoltage electrostatic charges, which can severely
damage electronic components. For installations
where carpeting is required, a specially treated carpeting should be used. An acceptable carpeting
is a carpet that has a rubber backing and a network of metal filaments between the backing and
the pile. The special carpeting should cover the
complete installation area and extend at least three

3-l

‘I
A30808-X5130-8110-l-8928
Issue 1, May 1986

SATURN IIE EPABX
Installation Procedures

tenance activities. Other peripheral equipment (i.e.,
service terminal) may be located near the cabinet
assembly or the MDF. Figure 3.00 illustrates the
recommended space required for the equipment
cabinet of the SATURN IIE System. Figure 3.01 illustrates the physical dimensions of the basic cabinet and Figure 3.02 the expansion cabinet.

feet on all sides of the SATURN IIE System cabinet.
A connection must be made between the metal filaments and earth ground. This ground connection
must not be the SATURN HE System ground.
b. Cabinet Space and Floor Loading Specifications. The
following specifications are presented to aid craft personnel in selecting an adequate equipment room for
the SATURN IIE System:

2. Cabinet Floor Loading Specifications. The basic
cabinet weighs 440 pounds and floor loading is 55
Ib./sq ft. The basic and expansion cabinets together
weighs 685 pounds and floor loading is 90 Ib./sq
ft (equally distributed)

1. Cabinet Space Specifications. The equipment
room should be sized for one cabinet assembly and
adequate space for normal installation and main**

-----

---

11 ,

Top View

36 Inches Minimum
(91.4 CM)

36 inches Minimum

36 Inches Minimum

36 Inches-Minimum
(91.4 CM)

-------

Figure

3-2

3.00

Front

SATURN IIE System

Space

Requirements

A30808-X5130-8110-l-8928
Issue 1, May 1986

SATURN IIE EPABX
Installation Procedures

__r
44 Inches
(111.7CM)
I

142 Inches
\ CM)
(I07

Figure 3.01

Basic Cabinet Physical Dimensions

Table 3.01 Basic and Exoanslon

IlO-Vat

Cabinets AC lnout Power Reouirements

NORMAL

NOMINAL
INPUT

BROWNOUT

MIN

MAX

100

127

60 f 0.1

8 EMERGENCY
FREQUENCY
(Hz)

VOLTAGE

FREQUENCY
0-z)

VOLTAGE

(Rear View)

MIN

MAX

130

6Ok3.0

3-3

A30808-X5130-6110-1-8928
Issue 1, May 1986

SATURN IIE EPABX
Installation Procedures

986.1.‘lWt)6

Figure

3.02

Basic and Expansion

Cabinets

Physical

Dimensions

SATURN IIE EPABX
Installation Procedures
c. Cabinet Input Power and Grounding Requirements.
The following information is presented to aid craft personnel in selecting an adequate AC power source, as
well as a ground source, for powering a SATURN IIE
System cabinet.
t.

A’

AC Input Power Requirements. One AC input source
is required for the basic cabinet. A second AC input source is required when the expansion cabinet
is added, as shown in Figure 3.03. The AC input
power source must meet the parameters specified
in Table 3.01. A 1Bfoot long (3.6 meters) 3-conductor
power cord is supplied with the equipment cabinet.
One end of this power cord is terminated on a terminal box located at the bottom rear of the equipment cabinet. The other end of the power cord is
terminated with a three-prong connector that plugs
into an AC power source outlet (i.e., commercial AC
wall outlet or receptacle). This AC power receptacle should comply with the following recommendations:
a) The AC power receptacle should be located
within the length of the supplied power cord (i.e.,
12 feet) and easily accessible for maintenance
activities.
b) The AC power receptacle must provide fused
11OVac(single-phase) power at 60Hz capable of
delivering 20 Amps.
c) The AC power receptacle should be fused independently from all other AC power receptacles.

A30808-X5130-BllO-1-8928
Issue 1, May 1986

h) A warning tag should be attached to the power

cord connector to prevent accidental removal of
cord. If possible, the power cord should be
clamped near the AC power receptacle to
minimize movement.

Ground Requirements. The cabinet assembly is
grounded via its power cord. In addition to this
ground, an earth ground is required. This earth
ground can be a metallic cold water pipe, ground
field, copper ground rod, etc., and must not exceed
two ohms in resistance. The earth ground conductor is attached to the cabinet frame ground via a lug
which accepts a &gauge conductor, The wire gauge
size used for earth ground is determined by the
ground wire length from the cabinet assembly to the
selected earth ground (refer to Table 3.02). Earth
ground connections for the equipment cabinet are
shown in Figure 3.03.
Note: Change the ground lug if wire gauge is too
large (see Table 3.02).
d. MDF Preparation. In accordance with FCC’s Part 68
Rules and Regulations for “Fullv Protected Premises
Wiring”, the S.&URN IIE equipment registration, the following requirements must be observed:
1. System to MDF Cabling Requirements. Accomplished via double-ended 50conductor (24AWG
twisted 25pair) cable not exceeding 25 feet from
point to point connection.

d) The AC power receptacle must only be controlled from the branch circuit breaker panel and
not by a local light switch.

2. MDF Cable Terminating Block Types. The terminating blocks to be mounted at the MDF for the system cable are dual 50-prong-row prewired,
connector-ended blocks.

e) The AC power cords for the basic and expansion cabinet require separate mounting brackets

3. Suggested MDF Layout. Figure 3.05 illustrates the
suggested MDF layout for the cabinet assembly.

A warning tag should be attached to the circuit
breaker controlling the AC power receptacle to
prevent accidental removal of power.

3.03 House Cabling. Preparation.
To aid craft personnel with
.
house cabling, me rollowlng requirements are presented:

g) The AC power cords for the basic and expansion cabinets require separate mounting
brackets.

a. General House Cabling Requirements. All standard station lines should meet the National Electric Code clearance requirements (this is a standard telephone industry
practice).

3-5

A30808-X5130-BllO-l-6928
Issue 1, May 1986

SATURN IIE EPABX
Installation Procedures

Fuse Box Faci

Fuse Box Facili

A second AC power cord is required if
an Expansion Cabinet is included. also

Figure 3.03

3-6

SATURN IIE System Main Power/Ground Connections

SATURN IIE EPABX
Installation Procedures

A30808-X5130-BllO-l-6928
Issue 1, May 1986

Table 3.02
GAUGE
FEET
METERS
(’ = Recommended

6’

Ground

Conductor

Length

vs. Wire Gauge

126

201

320

404

509

642

123

155

196

first choice)

I-

T/R Leads -

E/M Leads !i
s

I
I

J
4
’

Note: If E/M signaling or
SLA16 PCBs are not
used in the EPA%
MDF cables J27,
J29, J31, J33, J35,
J37,J39, J41, J43
and J45 are not required.

Figure

3.04

Suggested

MDF Layout

for Cabinet

AssemDly

3-7

A30808-X5130-BllO-l-8928
Issue 1, May 1986

SATURN IIE EPABX
Installation Procedures
b. SATURN IIE Console, SDT Cabling Requirements.
When such SATURN ancillary equipment is to be installed, the following requirements must be observed:

dard telephone cable (i.e.; quad cable or non-twisted
cable). Quad cable may be used, but its usage is
limited by the cable length limits listed in Table 3.03.

1. Required House Cabling. The house cabling between the SATURN IIE System and SATURN Ancillary Equipment can be any cable length up to and
including 4000 feet. A four conductor (24AWG twisted two pair) cable should be used to obtain a higher
cable length run than can be attained from a stan-

.’

Table 3.03

Cable Running

TOTAL CABLE
LENGTH RUN
(IN FEET)

500

Limitations

When

TWlSTEil TWO-PAIR
CABLE LENGTH (MAX.)
(IN FEET)

1500

3-8 (8 pages)

500

1
1500

1000
1500

Example:

Two-Pair Cable
NON-TWISTED TWO-PAIR
CABLE LENGTH (MAX.)
(IN FEET)

1000
I

Using Non-Twisted

500

1000

NOTE:

House Cabling Precautions. Consoles and SDT’s
transmit data instead of voice signals; therefore,
point-to-point connection is required (bridge taps on
such cables are not allowed). Failure to observe this
requirement will causes a console or SDT to malfunction.

2000

1200’

2500

900’

3000

700’

3500

500’

4000

200’

= Only run the allowable quad cable length; the remaining cable length must be the 24AWG twisted two-pair
cable type.
Total cable length = 3000 feet: limit of 700 feet of the quad cable type plus 2300 feet of the 24AWG twisted
two-pair cable type.

A30808-X5130-8110-l-8928
Issue 1, May 1986

SATURN IIE EPABX
installation Procedures

SECTION 4.00

EQUIPMENT

INSTALLATldN

PROCEDURES

4.01 General. The SATURN IIE System is shipped in kits
and as individual items according to customer requirements.
This section contains the necessary information to install the
various equipment kits and items listed in Table 4.00.
Table 4.00
AVAILABLE EQUIPMENT,

SATURN IIE EPABX Orderable Items List
PART NO.

Basic-Cabinet (1lOVac 60Hz)

L30808-X5130-Al- * -890

Basic Shelf

Part of basic cabinet

Name Plate Logo

C39324-A9679-B15- * -8900

Expansion Cabinet (Includes 2nd
AC Power Cord)

L30808-X5130-A4- * -8900

LTU expansion shelf
Includes:
LTU Shelf
LTUC
LTUPS
Cable Assembly Power(W21 & W22)
LTUPS-LTU
Cable Assembly Signal
(W14,W15,W16,& W17)basic and LTU
shelves

COMMENTS
Refer to Table 4.01.

Refer to Table 4.03

L30808-X5130-A7- * -8900
S30804-85198-X- * -8900
S30810-Q0428-X- * -8900
L30808-X5130-A39 * -8900
C39195A9679-A5- * -B900
)
C39195-A9679-A3- * -8900

Refer to Table 4.03

Memory Support Module (MSM)

L30808-X5130-A34- * -6900

Refer to Table 4.08

Memory Battery Pack

L30808-X5130-A51- * -8900

Refer to Table 4.09

L30808X5130A39-

* -8900

Refer to Table 4.03

L30808X5050-Al2-

* -8900

POWER AND DISTRIBUTION
EQUIPMENT:

~;~rt-tsion Shelf Power Supply
(+I-SVdc,+I-12Vdc)

’

PSU Fuse Kit (Includes following
Fuses)
Fuse% Amp. 125V
Fuse 5 Amp. 125V
Fuse 10 Amp. 125V
MISCELLANEOUS

L30808-X5131-A5:r* -8900

EQUIPMENT:

Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) Module

L30808-X5130&0-

* -8900

Refer to Table 4.12

PERIPHERAL INTERFACE
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS:
Dual-Tone Multifrequency (DTMF)
Receiver PCB

S30810-Q431-X2- * -8900

Refer to Table 4.13

Premium Instrument Module Digital
(PIMD) PCB

S30810-Q432-X- * -8900

Refer to Table 4.14

Subscriber Line Module Analog
Station (SLMA-S) PCB

S30810-Q1674-X- * -8900

Refer to Table 4.15

4-l

SATURN IIE EPABX
‘nstallation Procedures

A30808X5130-BllO-l-8928
Issue 1, May 1988
Table 4.00 SATURN 11E E P A B X Orderable

AVAILABLE

EQUIPMENT

Item List (Continued)

PART NO.

COMMENTS

Subscriber Line Module Analog Off-Premises Station (SLMA-0) PCB

S30810-Q1739-X- * -8900

Refer to Table 4.18

Subscriber Line Module Digital
(SLMD) PCB

S30810-Q1724-X- + -8900

Refer to Table 4.17

Central Office Trunk (TMBM) PCB

S30810-Q414-X- * -8900

Refer to Table 4.19

Direct Inward Dialing Trunk (TMIE)
PCB
-.

S30810-Q415-X- * -8900

Refer to Table 4.20

Two-Wire E&M Trunk (TMBA-2) PCB

S30810-Q429-X- * -8900

Refer to Table 4.21

Four-Wire E&M Trunk (TMBA-4)
PCB

S30810-Q430-X- * -B900

Refer to Table 4.22

Linenrunk Unit Control (LTUC)

S30810-Q428-X- + -B900

Refer to Table 4.31

Subscriber Line Module Analog 18 Line (SLAl8)

S30810-Q1790-X- i -8900

Refer to Table 4.18

S30810-Q1791-X- * -8900

Refer to Table 4.24

Remote Access Unit/Port (RAUP)

S30810-01792-X- +-8900

Refer to Table 4.27

Memory Control and Attenuator
(MC4

S30810-Q0418-X- * -8900

Refer to Table 4.28

Conference (CONF)

S30810-Q0417-X- * -B900

Refer to Table 4.25

Parallel/Serial Converter (PSC)

S30810-Q0419-XlOO- * -8900

Refer to Table 4.23

System Memory 1 megabyte
(MEM 4)

S30810-Ql775-X- * -8900

Refer to Table 4.29

System Memory 258 Kb (MEM 3)

S30810-Q1740-X- * -8900

Refer to Table 4.30

Controller (CIOP)

S30810-Q1789-X- * -6900

Refer to Table 4.28

Attendant Console

L30808-X5130A8- * -8900

Refer to Table 4.32

COMMON EQUIPMENT PRINTED
CIRCUIT BOARDS:
Signal Multiplexerflone
(SMXTG)

Generator

Basic Cabinet. The SATURN IIE System consists of
an equipment cabinet with expansion capabilities; an expansion shelf (See Paragraph 4.03) and expansion cabinet (See
Paragraph 4.04) can be added to the basic cabinet (See Paragraph 4.03) for detailed information). The basic equipment
cabinet is mounted upright on a wooden pallet and enclosed
in a corrugated sleeve and cap as shown in Figure 4.00. To
uncrate an equipment cabinet, perform the following procedures (refer to Figures 4.01 and 4.02 for details):

4.02

a. Cut the two vertical plastic straps securing the corrugated cap and sleeve onto the wooden pallet.

4-2

-;-;;

b. Remove the corrugated cap and any packaging material from the top of the equipment cabinet. Remove the
corrugated sleeve by cutting open one of its corners
with a cutting knife, or by lifting it over the cabinet assembly if overhead space is sufficient.
c. Cut the two vertical
ment cabinet onto
packaging material
ing the equipment

plastic straps securing the equipthe wooden pallet. Remove any
and the vinyl-plastic shroud covercabinet.

.s;

SATURN

A30808-X5130-BllO-l-8928
Issue 1, May 1986

IIE EPABX

Installation Procedures

.’

Plastic
Straps

A4960-1.4117166

Figure

4.00

Basic

Cabinet

Contalner

4-3

SATURN HE EPABX
hstallation
Procedures

A30808-X5130-BllO-l-B928
issue 1, May 1986

Sleeve

Ramp

Straps

Pallet

A49fwl-4/14/86

4-4

Figure

4.01

Basic

Cabinet

Packaging

Method

A30808-X5130-BilO-l-8928
Issue 1, May 1986

SATURN IIE EPABX
Installation Procedures
d. Remove ramp from its packaged location and place
into position as shown in Figure 4.02. Carefully push
the cabinet out of position and onto the ramp to unload it. Note, unloading of cabinet is a two-man job.

After unloading the cabinet, do not lift it with a fork-lift
or lifting device since structural damage may occur.
Each cabinet contains four 360 degree casters to facilitate its movement. Refer to Table 4.01 for further information on the basic cabinet.

Figure

4.02

Basic Cabinet

Unloading

Method

4-5

ISATURN IIE EPABX
Installation Procedures

A30808-X5130-BllO-l-8928
Issue 1, May 1986
Table 4.01 Basic

QTY.

System

EQUIPMENT

Ref.

PART NO.

Basic Cabinet Assembly

Power Cable Assembly (PSU-basic shelf,LTU,LTUPS,
-48PSO/l,FDD0/1/2 )

C39195A9679Al-

* -8900

Signal Cable Assembly (Basic Shelf - PSU J12)

C39195&679-A2-

* -B900

Signal Cable Assembly (Basic Shelf - LTUO/1/2)

C39195-A9679-A3- * -8900

Signal Cable Assembly (Basic Shelf - FDDO or FDDl)

C39195-A9679-A4- * -8900

Power Cable Assembly (LTUPS Jl) to (LTUO 542, J43,J44)

C39195A9679&-

Power Cable Assembly (2nd AC lnput - PSU J2) Cables A6 &
A7 used for expansion cabinet only.

C39195-A9679-A7- + -8900

Ground Cable Assembly FDDO or FDDl or FDD2 - E8

C39195-A9679-A8- * -8900

Ground Cable Assembly (PSU J14) to E7

C39195-A9679-A9- * -B900

Signal Cable Assembly (Basic Shelf J62) to FDDV2 W14 is
deleted if FDD2 is used.

S30805-G5112-X-

Wll &
w14

C39195-A9679All-

* -8900

Signal Cable Assembly (Basic Shelf J55) to (LTU J45)

W15

C39195-A967%TBA- * -8900

Power Cable Assembly (Basic Shelf - FDDO or FDDl)

w20

C39195-A9679-A8- * -8900

DESCRIPTION:

The basic system consists of a single equipment cabinet equipped with the equipment configuration shown in Figures 4.05 and 4.06. The minimum basic system provides for up to 224 ports and
can be expanded an additional 256 ports for a maximum port capacity of 480 ports. Additional
ports can be added by installing an expansion cabinet.

INSPECTION
PROCEDURES:

After unloading the equipment cabinet, check for obvious physical damage to the cabinet assembly and perform the following:
1. Remove front panel and check that the equipment configuration matches with the equipment
listed in this table. Keys for locking the cabinet are taped to the front panel.
2.

4-6

Remove rear panel and check that the equipment configuration matches the remaining equipment listed in this table. Refer to Section 5.00 of this practice to verify the signal and power/ground termination points.

SATURN IIE EPABX
Installation Procedures

A30808-X5130-BllO-l-8928
Issue 1, May 1986
Table 4.01

Basic System (Continued)

3. Replace front and rear panels, if necessary, and move equipment cabinet to its approximate
final position.
ADDITIONAL
EQUIPMENT
REdUIRED:
OBSERVATIONS:
INSTALLATION
Pf$ICEDURES:

Per installation-site configuration to meet customer requirements.
None: the common equipment PCBs and modules equipped with the basic system are already
in their corresponding positions.
1. Place equipment cabinet in its final position and adjust the four levelers located underneath
the cabinet assembly, shown in Figure 4.06, to prevent movement while performing remaining installation tasks.
2.

After securing equipment cabinet in its final position, remove front and rear panels and any
remaining packaging material or loose objects.

3. At the bottom rear of the eouipment cabinet, locate Lug No. E5 and connect the conductor
from the selected earth ground. Refer to Section 3.00 for details on earth grounding and Section 5.00 for details on power/ground cabling. Also, do not connect the AC power cord at this
time.
4.

Refer to Table 4.02 if the LTU shelf and its power supply module are to be installed.

5. Refer to Tables 4.08 and 4.09 if the optional MSM is to be installed.
6. Refer to Table 4.10 if an additional 48Vdc power supply is to be installed as the 48PSl module.
7. Refer to Table 4.06 for insertion of the PSU grasshopper-type fuses into their corresponding
locations on the PSU fuse/circuit-breaker panel.
8.

insert the peripheral interfacing PCBs into their site-allocated card slots in the basic shelf.
Trunk type PCBs (i.e., TMBA-2, TMBA4, TMBM, and TMIE PCBs) may require strapping
changes to meet the CO or PABX signaling termination. Refer to Tables 4.19 through 4.22
for further information on these peripheral interfacing PCBs.

Recheck that the common equipment PC&r are in their corresponding card slot locations.
The CIOP PCB requires switch settings changes to meet the operating characteristics of the
service terminal to be used, if any. Refer to Tables 4.23 through 4.30 for further information
on these common equipment PC&.

10. Refer to Section 6.00 in this practice to run and connect the required MDF cables. After running and connecting MDF cables, do not cross-connect at this time.
11. Refer to SATURN IIE EPABX Installation Test Procedures practice for further instructions.

4-7

’ I

SATURN IIE EPABX
installation Procedures

A30808-X5130-BllO-l-8928
Issue 1, May 1986

SATURN Ilt
!

P5070.25-worn

4-8

Figure

4.03

Basic Cabinet

(Front

View)

SATURN IIE EPABX
installation Procedures

A30808-X5130-BllO-l-8928
Issue 1, May 1986

P5030.3.3/20/86

Figure

4.04 Basic

Cabinet

(Rear View)

4-9

SATURN

A30808-X5130-BllO-l-8928

IlE EPABX

Issue 1, May 1986

Installation Procedures

.’

C4996-l-4114166

4-10

Figure

4.05

Basic

Cabinet

Connector

Contiguration

i
I

SATURN IIE EPABX
installation Procedures

A30808-X5130-BllO-l-8928
Issue 1, May 1986

r-------Basic
Cabinet
LTU
Shelf
(256 ports)

Basic
Shelf
(224 ports)
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I

Power System Unit

5%”

FD DRIVE

I
I
I
L----,.
t ’
Leveler

NOTE:
Shaded area shows items
equipped in Main Cabinet.
optional equipment
0

A49631-3127166

Figure

4.06

Basic Cabinet

Equipment

Configuration

and Securing

318” Plain Hex Nut

Procedures

4-11

A30808-X5130-8110-l-8928
Issue 1, May 1986

SATURN IIE EPABX
Installation Procedures
4.03 LTU Shelf. The LTU shelf can be installed in the basic
and expansion equipment cabinets. The LTU shelf is unpackaged as shown in Figure 4.07. Refer to Table 4.02 for further
information on the LTU shelf.

8230743-185

4-12

Figure

4.07

LTU Shelf

Unpackagmg

Memoa

I -SATURN IIE EPABX
Installation Procedures

A30808-X5130-8110-l-8928
Issue 1, May 1986
Table 4.02

Line/Trunk

EQUIPMENT

Unit Shelf
Card SLOT

PART NO.

LTU Shelf Assembly

S30804-B5197-X7- * -8900

LTU Power Supply

V30141-ZO113-Al.5 * -8900

Dual-Tone Multifrequency

(DTMF) Receiver PCB

O-517-18,20-25

S30810-Q431-X2- * -8900

Premium Instrument Module Digital (PIMD) PCB

O-5,7-18,20-25

S30810-Q432-X- * -8900

Subscriber Line Module Analog - Station (SLMA-S) PCB

O-5,7-18,20-25

S30810-Q1674-X- * -8900

Subscriber Line Module Analog - Off-Premises Station (SLMA-0)
PCB

O-5,7-18,20-25

S30810-Q1739-X- * -8900

Subscriber Line Module Digital (SLMD) PCB

O-5,7-18,20-25

S30810-Q1724-X- * -8900

Central Office Trunk (TMBM) PCB

O-5,7-18,20-25

S30810-Q414-X- * -8900

Direct Inward Dialing Trunk (TMIE) PCB

O-5,7-18,20-25

S30810-Q415-X- * -B900

Two-Wire E&M Trunk (TMBA-2) PCB

O-5,7-18,20-25

S30810-Q429-X- * -8900

Four-Wire E&M Trunk (TMBA-4) PCB

O-5,7-18,20-25

S30810-Q430-X- * -B900

Subscriber Line Module Analog - 16 Line (SLA16) PCB

014578
.Tl,,l
ll-14,17,18,20,

Line/Trunk Unit Control (LTUC) PCB
NOTE:

21,24,25

S30810-Q1790-X-

6,19

S30810-Q428-X-

* -8900
* -8900

One LTU Shelf and one LTUPS are required for expansion of the basic cabinet. The expansion cabinet can
contain a maximum of two LTUs Shelfs and two LTUPS.

DESCRIF’TION:

Each LTU Shelf provides 256 ports. A total of three LTU shelves can be installed within a SATURN
IIE system: one in the basic cabinet and one or two in the expansion cabinet.

INSPECTION
PROCEDURES:

After unpacking carton, check for obvious physical damage to the shelf assembly. Also check that
the equipment configuration matches this table.

ADDITIONAL
EQUIPMENT
REQUIRED:

Each LTU shelf requires an LTU Power Supply (LTUPS) module.

OBSERVATIONS:

Mounting of the ribbon cable holder supplied with the LTU shelf is not required on the LTU backplane.

INSTALLATION
PROCEDURES:

1. Mount the four U-type metal fasteners supplied in the Mounting Hardware Kit on the corresponding hole openings in the cabinet frame above the basic shelf assembly.
2.

Remove the six backplane screws shown in Figure 4.10.

Insert the LTU shelf assembly into position in the cabinet frame. Once the shelf is in position,
insert the four screws from the Mounting Hardware Kit as shown in Figure 4.11 and secure.

Replace the six backplane screws previously removed in step 2 into their corresponding locations, making sure that the busbar flanges are interconnected with backplane.
Note: Prior to installation of power cables, check that the associated LTUPS circuit breaker
is turned off.

Refer to Table 4.11 to install the configured power supply module (i.e., LTUPS).

6. Connect the power cable assembly supplied in the protective bag as shown in Figure 4.10.
Refer to Section 5.00 in this practice for details on signal and power/ground cabling.
7. After installing the LTU shelf, do not power-up its associated power supply or cross-connect
any associated cables at the MDF. Refer to SATURN II EPABX Installation Test Procedures
practice for further instructions.

4-13

SATURN IIE EPABX
Installation Procedure

P5070-26-3/20/66

P5070.24.3/20/66

4-14

A30808-X5130-BllO-l-8918
Issue 1, May 1986

Figure

4.08

LTU Shelf

Figure

4.09

(Front

LTU Shell

View With

(Rear View)

PCBs)

SATURN IIE E P A B X
installation Procedures

A30808-X5130-BllO-l-8928
Issue 1, May 1986

‘S C W S
Typ. 6 Places
Note:

These screws should first be removed from the
backplane,
then the shelf should be installed by
remserling
the straws through the busbar tabs.

From

(Side View)

Figure

4.10

LTU Shelf Connectors

(Rear View)

4-15

6
-

A30808-X5130-8110-l-8928
Issue 1, May 1986

SATURN HE EPABX
installation Procedures

Side
Mounting
Flanges
I

Screws
Typ. 4 Places

rlgure

4.11

.-..

LI u melt

. .

Mountmg

4.04 Expansion Cabinet. The expansion cabinet is shipped
in a cardboard box as shown in Figures 4.12 and 4.13. To uncrate an equipment cabinet, perform the following procedures:
a. Cut the two vertical plastic straps securing the corrugated cap and sleeve to the wooden pallet.
b. Remove the corrugated cap and any packaging material from the top of the equipment cabinet. Remove the
corrugated sleeve by cutting open one of its corners
with a cutting knife, or by lifting it over the cabinet assembly if overhead space is sufficient.
c. Cut the two vertical plastic straps securing the expansion cabinet to the wooden pallet. Remove any pack-

4-16

Procedures

aging material and the vinyl-plastic shroud covering
the expansion cabinet, and unload the expansion
cabinet.
d. The expansion cabinet is mounted on the top of the
basic cabinet after the basic cabinet top cover is removed. The top cover is then reused on the top of the
expansion cabinet. Refer to Table 4.03 for further information on the LTU equipment cabinet.
Note:

Connector plug J2, located on the rear panel, contains jumpers for AC power when no expansion cabinet is used. If an expansion cabinet is to be used,
remove plug J2 and connect a second AC power
cord.

ISATURN
Installation

A4YL)I.I.J,LO,tm

A30808-X5130-8110-l-8928
Issue
1, May

IIE EPABX
Procedures

Figure

4.12

Expansion

Cabinet

1986

Container

4-17

,I SATURN
installation

HE EPABX
Procedures

A30808-X5130-BllO-l-B928
Issue
1, May

.’

A4962.l-3/26/66

4-18

Figure

4.13

Expansion

Cabinet

Unpackaging

Method

1986

SATURN
Installation

IIE

EPABX
Procedures

A30808-X5130-6110-l-8928
Issue
1, May

1986

LTU
Shelf 3
(256 ports)

LTU
Shelf

(256 ports)

Expansion
j Cabinet
---a---.

1
LTU

Basic
Shelf

(224 port

Ir!

C4866.l-2/11/66

,el L)

ryure

5%” FD DRIVES 1

. --

1 . 1
4.14

I..--.-

oaslc

~~.

ana

txpanslon

-...-.

Cabmets

Equipment

Configuration

4-19

A30808-X5130-BilO-I-8928
Issue 1, May 1986

SATURN IIE EPABX
Installation
Procedures
Table 4.03
‘Y.

Cabinet

and Cabling

EQUIPMENT
Cabinet

Cable

Expansion

Power Cable Assembly
(PSU J5 & J8) (LTUS 1,Ji & J2) (LTU Jl & J2)

Power

Cable

Signal
(BASS
(BASS
(BASS
(BASS

Cable
J60)
J58)
J59)
J57)

Assembly

Assembly
to
to
to
to

PART NO.

No.

S30805-G5113-X04-

Assembly
(LTUS
(LTUS
(LTUS
(LTUS

1, J46)
1, J45)
2, J46)
2 J45)

* -8900

C39195A9679-A6-

* -8900

C39324-A9679-A7-

* -8900

w21
w22
W23
W24

C39195-A9679-A3-

* -8900

w25
w15

C39324-A9679-A5-

* -8900

(2nd AC Input)

Power Cable Assembly
(LTUPS 1 Jl) to (LTUS l,J42, J43,J44)
(LTUPS 2 Jl) to (LTUS 2,J42, J43,J44)

ZSCRIPTION:

The expansion cabinet provides 256 ports per shelf. Two shelves can be installed in the expansion
cabinet. For installation information
pertaining to the expansion shelf, refer to Table 4.02. Information pertaining to the expansion
cabinet is as follows:

SPECTION
3OCEDURES:

After unloading
equipment
and perform the following:
1.

Per installationsite

3SERVATIONS:

All packing
1.

cabinet,

check

for obvious

physical

damage

Remove rear panel and check that the equipment configuration
ment listed in this table. Refer to Section 5.00 of this practice
er/ground termination
points.
. ‘0

IDITIONAL
lUlPMENT
:QUIRED:

STALLATION
3OCEDURES:

4-20

Expansion

configuration

material

Remove

to meet customer

or loose affects should

to the cabinet

assembly

matches the remaining equipto verify the signal and pow-

requirements.

be removed.

the top cover from the basic cabinet

as follows:

If an LTU shelf is equipped in the basic cabinet, remove its LTUPS in order to make the
screw at the left front corner of the cover accessible. Remove the two screws securing
the LTUPS front panel, disconnect the two connectors at the rear, and remove the LTUPS.

Remove the four screws that hold the cover to the basic cabinet. There is a screw near
each rear corner and near the left front corner. The fourth screw is located on the right
side aproximately
half way back from the front to make it accessible
from the rear.

Bolt the expansion

cabinet

to the basic cabinet,

at four locations.

Bolt the top cover removed

Secure the LTU shelves to the two metal strips between
plied with the mounting kit.

Refer to Table 4.11 for information

in step 1 to the expansion

pertaining

cabinet,
busbar,

to installation

Install the busbars.
at four locations.

using four screws each sup-

of the LTUPS.

SATURN
Installation

IIE EPABX
Procedures

A30808-X5130-BliO-l-8928
Issue
1, May

SATURN
.

P5070-l-3120166

1986

IIIE

Figure

4.15

Basic

and

Expansion

Cabinets

(Front

View)

4-21

SATURN
Installation

IIE

A30808-X5130-BllO-l-8928
Issue
1, May

EPABX
Procedures

llllMllllll lllillllllllllllillllllllllllllllllllllllillllll~llllliillill~llllllllllllll~lllllflllllll

P5070-4.3120186

4-22

Figure

4.16

Basic

and

Expansion

Cabinets

(Rear

View)

1986

SATURN IiE EPABX
Installation
Procedures

A30808-X5130-BllO-l-8928
issue 1, May 1986

4.05 Power and Distribution
Equipment.
The SATURN IIE
System contains several power supply modules of various
sizes located within the system. Refer to Tables 4.06 through
4.11 for detailed information
on these power modules.

The PSU has a connector plug (J2) on
tains jumpers for AC power when no
used. If an expansion cabinet is to be
and connect a second AC power cord
net installation
for further information.

its rear panel, J2 conexpansion
cabinet is
used, remove plug J2
(see expansion cabi-

The PSU module contains the modules shown in Figure 4.19.
The Repairable
Items of the PSU are listed in Table 4.04.
Table 4.04
QTY.
-1
1

Power

System

Unit (PSU)

Repairable

REF.

EQUIPMENT
Memory

Support

MSM Battery

Module

Pack
Table 4.05

DESCRIPTION:

Items

Control

Lo&

PART NO.

Table 4.08

L30808-X5130-A34-

* -8900

Table 4.09

L30808-X5130-A51-

* -8900

Board

The Control Logic Board, shown in Figure 4.19, is part of the PSU and is not a repairable
It provides access and control point to various system maintenance
functions and serves
main AC and DC power distribution
point to the following:
a.

AC power, via circuit breakers,
(48PS0 and 48PSl).

Fused -48Vdc outputs for talk battery PlMD,and SLMD applications
to all channel
the basic and LTU shelves, as well as the input to the RGEN module.

Fused 9OVac @ 20Hz for Ringing AC (RAC) and 97Vdc for Ringing
to all channel groups in the basic and LTU shelves.
1.

to the PSU, the LTUPS 0, 1, and 2, the 48Vdc

Message

item.
as the

Power Supplies

Waiting

groups

(RMW)

Indicators. The PSU panel has thirteen grasshopper-type
fuses which provide visual
alarm indications
when blown. These fuses and their designations
are summarized
in Table 4.06. There are four LEDs on the control logic board: their functions are as
follows:
a.

Alarm Indicators. One red LED, designated
MAJ. when steadily lit, indicates a
major alarm condition
exists in the system. One yellow LED, designated
MIN,
when steadily lit, indicates a minor alarm condition exists in the system.

Failure Transfer
lit, indicates the
nated INHIBIT,
is inactive. The

Status Indicators. One red LED, designated ACTIVE, when steadily
failure transfer relay subsystem is active. One yellow LED, desigwhen steadily lit, indicates the failure transfer relay subsystem
failure transfer relay subsystem is customer-provided.

Switches. The PSU
and their PSU panel
switch, designated
provides a selection
lay subsystem.

panel contains six switch/circuit
breakers. These circuit breakers
designations
are summarized
in Table 4.06. Also, a three-position
FAILURE TRANSFER,
is provided on the PSU panel. This switch
of automatic, active, or inhibit operation of the failure transfer re-

Connectors.
One modular jack, designated
MTCE PHONE, is provided on the PSU
panel. This jack is used as a termination
point for the maintenance
test phone.

Strapping Options. If MSMlLCL in the Memory Support
nector J5 on the back of the PSU in MSM receptacle.
connector 55 in LCL.

Module is equipped, insert conIf MSM is not equipped,
insert

EXT FUSE ALM. If no External Fuse Alarm, insert jumper clip in J15 on the back of
the PSU. If there is an External Fuse alarm, remove jumper clip from J15.
OBSERVATIONS:

None.

INSTALLATION
PROCEDURES:

None. The equipment cabinet
shipped from the tactory.

comes equipped

with a PSU containing

a Control

Logic Board when

4-23

SATURN IIE EPABX
Installation
Procedures

A30808-X5130-6110-l-8928
Issue 1, May 1986
Table 4.08

PSU Front

Panel

Breakers

and Fuses

FlO

RAC Basic

(Ringing

AC to Basic Shelf)

1/2A

Fll

RAC LTUO

(Ringing

AC to LTU Shelf)

112A

F12

FtAC LTUl

(Ringing

AC to LTU Shelf)

112A

F13

RAC LTUP

(Ringing

AC to LTU Shelf)

1/2A

Circuit
CB No.

Breakers

DESIGNATION

Functions

Rating

CBl

Basic PS

AC Power to Basic Power

CB2

LTUPSO

AC Power to LTU Power

Supply

CB3

LTUPSl

AC Power to LTU Power

Sumlv

CB4

LTUPS2

AC Power to LTU Power Supply

CB5

48PS0

AC Power to 48V

Power

Suoolv

10A

CB6

48PSl

AC Power to 48V

Power Supply

10A

NOTE: Fuses

4-24

Circuit

Fl through

F13 are “grasshopper”

type fuses in which

SUDDIV

a spring

wire indicates

1OA

when a fuse has blown.

SATURN
Installation

IIE

EPABX
Procedures

A30808-X5130-BllO-l-8928
Issue
1, May

...

.^e.,aM

P5070-6-320186

Figure

4.17

Power

System

Unit

(PSU)

110

Vat

@ 60

Hz (Front

View)

. . .*i:

..,~%,x~”

1986

SATURN
Installation

P5070.5.3!20!86

4-26

IIE

EPABX
Procedures

A30808-X5130-8110-l-6928
Issue
1, May

Figure

4.18

Power

System

Unit

(PSU)

110

Vat

(Rear

View)

1986

-SATURN
Installation

IIE

EPABX
Procedures

A30806-X5130-BllO-l-8928
Issue
1, May

Figure

4.19

Power

System

Unit

(PSU)

(Internal

1986

View)

4-27

SATURN IIE EPABX
Installation
Procedures

A30809X5130-BllO-l-6925
Issue 1, May 1986
Table 4.07

Ring

Generator

(RGEN)

Module

DESCRIPTION:

One RGEN module, shown in Figures 4.19 and 4.20, is part of the PSU and is not a repairable
item. The RGEN module provides 9OVac rms @ 20Hz for Ringing AC (RAC) and 97Vdc for Ringing
Message Waiting (RMW) to the basic and LTU shelves;

OBSERVATIONS:

The RGEN module contains a reset type internal fuse (rated @ 5-A), but the associated 5-A fuse
on the PSU panel is the controlling
fuse for the RGEN module. Refer to Figure 4.20 for location
of this internal fuse.

INSTALLATION
PROCEDURES:

None. The equipment
cabinet comes
when shipped from the factory.

4-28

equipped

with a PSU containing

a Ring Generator

Module

SATURN
Installation

IIE

EPABX
Procedures

A30808-X5130-BllO-l-8928
Issue
1, May

.-.-_----.-

1986

I
z

Figure

4.20

RGEN

Module

(Front

View)

4-29

ISATURN IIE EPABX
Installation
Procedures

A30808-X5130-BllO-l-8928
Issue 1, May 1986
Table 4.08

DESCRIPTION:

Memory

Support

Module

(MSM)

PCB (L30808-X5130-A7-

* -8900)

The optional MSM, shown in Figure 4.19, is contained in a sealed package and is designed to provide +SVdc to the memory modules in the Basic Shelf if the local AC power fails. In the event
of a local power failure, the MSM battery maintains data-stored in memory for at least five minutes.
When the local power is restored, the battery is capable of another 5-minute cycle after 30 minutes
of charging. The charging provision is built into the MSM. Access for the battery test is through
the PSU front panel (labelled BATTERY TEST). See Figure 4.17.
Note: If optional MSM is installed, adjustment
of the PSU 5 Vdc output voltage is required. Connect voltmeter between J16 MSM connector pin and J9 (5V OUTPUT), located on the PSU
rear panel. Adjust the +5V ADJUST potentiometer
located on the PSU front panel. The PSU
+5 Vdc output must be adjusted to 50 millivolts below +5MEM1+5B.
1.

Indicators.

The MSM has a green

The green LED is controlled by the MSM
guished when the test switch is not being
is depressed,
the LED is lit steadily if the
If the battery is below the acceptable voltage

The red LED is normally extinguished.
In the event of an AC power failure and the battery is powering the memory, the LED is steadily lit. When the AC power source is restored, the red LED is extinguished.

Battery Test Switch and is normally extindepressed.
When the Battery Test Switch
battery is within acceptable
voltage limits.
limits, the green LED remains extinguished.

Switches. The MSM contains one switch called the Battery Test Switch, which is a momentary switch. When depressed,it
disconnects
the battery from the charging circuit and connects it to a test load and battery test indicator circuit.

Strapping Options. MSMILCL. If the Memory Support Module is equipped,
remove connector J16 on the back of the PSU from the LCL receptacle, and insert it in the MSM receptacle.

OBSERVATIONS:

None.

INSTALLATION
PROCEDURES:

Note: PSU circuit breaker
PSU.
1.

CBl must be in the off position

before the MSM PCB is installed

The MSM module is installed within the PSU module. No installation
If replacement
is required, perform the following steps:
a.

Remove

the seven screws

Remove two screws installed
base of the PSU chassis.

securing

preparation

is required.

the PSU front panel (refer to Figure

in the vertical

partition

and two screws

in the

4.17).

installed

in the

For installation,locate
the two plastic card guides in the PSU which support the MSM PCB.
Engage the MSM PCB (not the metal backing plate) into the card guides. The MSM PCB
should engage smoothly into the mating connector at the rear of the PSU. If the connector
does not engage, check the connector pins for alignment.
After the MSM PCB is installed,
secure the MSM PCB with the two screws removed in step 1.

Install the battery connector
PCB.

Replace

wire from the Battery pack into the mating connector

on the MSM

the PSU front panel.

Note: The LCUMSM
circuit breaker

4-30

and a red LED:

option strap on the rear of the PSU must be changed
is turned on.

Place PSU circuit

breaker

CBl

Refer to the SATURN IIE EPABX Installation
to test the MSM operation.

before

the PSU

in on position.
Test Procedures

practice

for further

instructions

ISATURN IIE EPABX
Installation Procedures

A30808-X5130-BllO-l-8928
Issue 1, May 1986
Table

NO.

QTY.

MSM Battery

Mounting

4.09

MSM

Battery

Pack

(L30608-A5130A51-

* -8900)

EQUIPMENT

REF.

PART

Pack

NO.

V30141-20049~A5-

Hardware

Kit

* -8900

C39281-A9675-D2-

* -8900

DESCRIPTION:

The MSM Battery Pack, shown in Figure 4.19, is contained within the PSU module and is always
required when an MSM PCB is equipped
in the system. The Battery Pack provides +SVdc to the
system’s memory in the basic shelf for a 5-minute period when local power failure occurs. It is capable
of another Sminute cycle after a 30 minute charge.

OBSERVATIONS:
L

Check

INSTALLATION
PROCEDURES:

for leaky battery.

NOTE: PSU circuit breaker
stalled in the PSU.
1. The MSM Battery
form the following

Pack is installed
steps:

4.10

within the PSU module.

If replacement

Pack, remove

screws securing

Disconnect the Battery Pack connector
remove the faulty Battery Pack.

wire from the MSM PCB mating

Mounting

DESCRIPTION:

OBSERVATIONS:

(110/22OV

option strap on the rear of the PSU must be changed
is turned on.

Refer to the SATURN IIE EPABX Installation
to test the MSM operation.
Power

@ 60Hz)

Hardware

Supply

(-48PS)

Module,

110

Vat

Test Procedures

@ 60Hz)

practice

(S30050-K5668-X-

and

Pack may

before

for further

Module

S30050-K5668-X-

Kit

C39281A9675-D2-

Indicators.

None.

Switches.

None

Strapping

Options.

is sufficient
is equipped.

The PSU and -48PS

for basic cabinet.

module

The additional

come factory-strapped
-48PSl

is required

the PSU

instructions

* -B900)
PART

The -48PS module, shown in Figure 4.21. is an AC-to-DC converter which
puts. One -48Vdc output is used for talk battery and the other -48Vdc output
applications
(i.e., powering attendant consoles, SDTs) and powering the
tem cabinet may contain from one to two -48PS modules. Only one -48PS
only the basic cabinet is equipped. When an expansion cabinet is added,
is required.

-48PS0
cabinet

connector

mounting brackets to the battery. The Battery
or by Gates Energy Products.

EQUIPMENT

-48PS

the PSU front

the PSU front panel.

QTY.
1

per-

Replace

-48Vdc

is required,

Remove the two screws on the base plate. Lift the Battery Pack from the alignment
pin. Remove wire connector going to MSM module and pull out MSM Battery Pack.

the seven

Pack is in-

For installation
attach the battery
be manufactured
by Sonnenschein

the MSM Battery

To access the MSM Battery
panel, refer to Figure 4.17.

before

Note: The LCUMSM
circuit breaker

Table

CBl must be in the off position

NO.

* -8900
* -8900

provides two -48Vdc outis used for PlMDlSLMD
RGEN module. The sysmodule is required when
a second -48PS module

for 11OVac operation.
when for the expansion

4-31

ISATURN
Installation

Table

IIE

EPABX
Procedures

4.10

INSTALLATION
PROCEDURES:

-48Vdc

A30808-X5130-BllO-l-8928
Issue
1, May

Power

Supply

Module,

60Hz)

(S30050-K5668-X-

Mount
flange

Lift and position
Once
in position,
ware Kit through

the -48PS
module
over the mounting
insert
the remaining
four screws
the front and rear hole openings

For connections
on power/ground
cuit breaker

of power
cabling.
the PSU

After
dures
Note:

Figure

the two U-type
hole openings

110 Vat

4-32

(-48PS)

performing
practice

fasteners
contained
in the Mounting
Hardware
where
the -48PS
module
is to be installed.

the above
for further

cable
Before
panel

assemblies,
connecting
is in the

procedures,
instructions

refer to the SATURN
to test the -48PS

cabinet
is equipped,
J2 jumper
plug

4.21

Vat

(110

@ 60Hz)

from

Module

(Continued)

Kit on the

mounting

flange
containing
the U-type
fasteners.
with washers
from the Mounting
Hardand secure
into position.

refer to Section
the power
cables,
OFF
position.

When
the expansion
are required;
remove

-48PS

* -8900)

1986

5.00 in this practice
for
check
that the associated

IIE EPABX
Installation
modules
when
powering

-48PSl
PSU.

module

(Front

View)

and

a second

details
cir-

Test Proceup.

AC power

cord

SATUAN
Installation

IIE EPABX
Procedures

A30606-X5130-BllO-1-8928
Issue
1. May

1986

(Factory-Strapped)

.’

Figure

4.22

-48PS

(110

Vat

@ 60HZ)

Module

(Rear

View)

4-33

A30808-X5130-BllO-l-8928
issue 1, May 1988

SATURN IIE EPABX
Installation
Procedures
Table 4.11

LTU Power

Supply

QTY.
1

Module,

110 Vat Q 60Hz (L30808-X5130639-*-6901)
REF.

EQUIPMENT
LTUPS Module

DESCRIPTION

OBSERVATIONS:
INSTALLATION
PROCEDURES:

4-34

(LTUPS)

PART NO.
V301141-ZOll-A158900

Assembly

The LTUPS module, shown in Figure 4.23, is used to power the LTU shelf. The LTUPS module is
a switching power supply which provides +SVdc, -SVdc, +12Vdc and -12Vdc output power to the
LTU shelf.
1.

Indicators.

None.

Switches.

None.

Strapping Options.
fore installing.

Verify that the LTUPS is internally

When the LTU shelf is equipped,

an LTU Power Supply

strapped

module

for 11OVac input voltage,

is required

for powering

Insert the LTUPS from the front of the cabinet.
plied with the mounting kit.

For connections
of power cable assemblies,
cabling. Before connecting
power cables,
PSU panel is in the OFF position.

After installing the LTUPS module, refer to SATURN IIE EPABX Installation
practice for further instructions
to test the power supply when powering

be-

purposes.

Slide into place and fasten with 2 screws sup-

refer to Section 5.00 for details on power/ground
check that the associated circuit breaker on the
Test Procedures
up.

SATURN IIE EPABX
Installation Procedures

P5070-11.3120166

A30808-X5130-8110-1-8928

Issue 1, May 1986

Figure

4.23

LTU

Power

Supply

(LTUPS)

Module,

110

Vat

@ 60HZ

4-35

A30808-X5130-BllO-l-6928
issue 1. May 1986

SATURN IIE EPABX
Installation Procedures
4.06 Miscellaneous
Equipment.
The Floppy Disk Drives
(FDDs) are data storage modules which use a 5- l/4 inch floppy disk as the data storage medium. The double-sided,
quad
density, removable disk is not shipped with the FDD module
Table 4.12

Floppy

QTY.
1

Disk Drive (FDD)

Module

(L30808-X5130-A50-

FDD Module

INSPECTION
PROCEDURES:
OBSERVATIONS:

INSTALLATION
PROCEDURES:

* -8900)

REF.

EQUIPMENT

DESCRIPTION

4-36

and requires compliance
with certain licensing agreements
prior to its delivery. Refer to Table 4.12 for further details on
the FDD modules.

PART NO.
V30141-ZO121-A6-

Assemblies
The FDD module, shown in Figure 4.24, is a data storage
cluded) as the data storage medium. The double-sided,
of storing a minimum of 1.0 megabyte of formatted data.
system (FDDO and FDDl). The FDDs provide the backup
reload, administration,
and maintenance
testing.

* -N900

device which uses a floppy disk (not inquad density, removable disk is capable
Two FDD modules are equipped
in the
memory for system initialization,
system

Indicators. One red LED located on the front panel which momentarily
function is being executed.

Switches.
disk.

One release

Strapping

Options.

lights when a read/write

switch lever on the front panel used for locking or releasing

the floppy

None.

None.
1. When

handling

the FDD module,

When

handling

the Common

Never

attempt

to close switch

avoid finger contact

Control

Feature

Disk, avoid finger

lever on the front panel

The equipment
cabinet comes equipped
the factory. If replacement
of a defective

with the contact

unless

heads.

contact

with its surface.

a disk is inserted.

with two Floppy Disk Drive Modules when shipped
FDD is required, perform the following steps:

from

Remove the seven screws securing the PSU front paneLand then remove four screws on
the FDD retaining plate, disconnecting
two connector plugs. Slide out the FDD from the mounting bracket and remove ground wire.

To install a new FDD, perform the inspection procedures
in steps a through
the FDD by following in reverse the procedures
described
in step 1.
surface

f; and then install

Place FDD on clean bench
checker.

Manually

Operate front panel release lever. Observe that carrier mechanism opens to insert flexible disk cartridge and that centering cone is released from spindle hub.

Insert disk cartridge fully. Observe that spring-loaded
cartridge is seated properly over drive mechanism.

Rotate spindle

Do not close lever without

rotate motor. Observe

drive mechanism.

For signal and power connections,
and power/ground
cabling.

Refer to the SATURN IIE EPABX
before powering up.

with the PCB on its side and its front panel facing

that the motor rotates

Observe

disk or blank

smooth
cartridge

refer to Section
Installation

freely and smoothly.

latch is enaged
rotation
being

of floppy

disk.

inserted.

5.00 in this practice

Test Procedures

and that disk

practice

for details
for further

on signal
instructions

SATURN IIE EPABX
Installation
Procedures

Table

A30808-X5130-BllO-l-B928
Issue 1, May 1988
4.12

Floppy

Figure

Disk

Drive

(FDD)

Module

(L30808-X5130-A50-*

(Continued)

Place FDD on clean bench
checker.

Manually

Operate front panel release lever. Observe that carrier mechanism opens to insert flexible disk cartridge, and that centering cone is released from spindle hub.

Insert disk cartridge fully. Observe that spring-loaded
cartridge is seated properly over drive mechanism.

Rotate spindle

Do not close lever without

4.24

Floppy

surface

-8900)

rotate motor. Observe

Disk

drive mechanism.

Drive

(FDD)

with the PCB on its side and front panel

that the motor

Observe

rotates freely and smoothly.

smooth

disk or blank cartridge

Typical

Module

facing

latch is enaged
rotation
being

(Front

of floppy

and that disk
disk.

i;serted.

View)

4-37

SATURN
Installation

HE EPABX
Procedures

A30808-X513043110-143928
Issue
1, May

TERMINAL

GROUND WIRE E8

CONNECTOR J2 ,

PCB MOUNTING SURFACE

SIGNAL
CONNECTOR

SIGNAL
CONNECTOR Jl

Figure

4-38

4.25

Floppy

Disk

Drive

(FDD)

Module

(Connector

Locations)

1986

SATURN
Installation

IIE EPABX
Procedures

A30808-X5130-8110-l-8928
Issue
1, May

4.07
Printed
Circuit
Boards.
The plug-in
PCBs
are 230mm
(9.02 in.) high by 280mm
(11.02 in.) deep.
Each
PC6 has two
edge-connector
tab areas
with 60 terminals
each.
The PCBs
plug into mating
60-pin connectors
mounted
on the backplanes
of the basic and LTU shelves.
Two extractor
levers,
mounted
on
the faceplate
of each PCB, allow for easy insertion
or removal
from the shelf connectors.
Each PCB comes
factory-shipped
inside an anti-static
bag to protect
the MOS
integrated
circuits.
Each bag is enclosed
in foam material
inside its carton as shown
in Figure
4.26.
CAUTION

Craft personnel handling PCBs with MOS integrated circuits
must first free themselves
from electrostatic
charge by
touching the frame of an already grounded
system cabinet
or by wearing grounded
wrist straps. Failure to observe this
practice may result in damage to the PCBs due to elecbvstafic discharge.

There
are two types of PCBs:
peripheral
interfacing
PCBs
and
common
equipment
PCBs.
The type of PCB may be readily
identified
because
the peripheral
PCBs
have a notch
separating the two edge connectors
and the common
equipment
PCBs
do not. Refer to the following
tables
for further
information
on
the peripheral
interfacing
PCBs and common
equipment
PCBs.
a.

Peripheral
1. Table

Interfacing
4.13 -

PCBs:
Dual-Tone

Multifrequency

(DTMF)

Receiver

Figure

4.26

PCB

Packaging

4.14

Premium

Instrument

Module

1986

Table
(PIMD)

Table 4.15 - Subscriber
tion (SLMA-S)

Line

Module

Analog

- Sta-

Table 4.16 - Subscriber
Premises
(SLMA-0)

Line

Module

Analog

- Off-

3.
3
4.

Table 4.17 - Subscriber
Table 4.18 -Subscriber
(SLA16)
Table 4.19 - Central

Table

4.20

- Direct

Table

4.21

- Two-Wire

Table

4.22

- Four-Wire

Line Module
Line Module
Office
Inward
E&M
E&M

Trunk
Dialing

(TMBM)
Trunk

(TMIE)

(TMBA-2)

Trunk

(TMsA-4)

Equipment

Table

4.23

2.
3

Table 4.24 - Signal
Multiplexer/Clock/Tone
tor (SMXTG)
Table 4.25 - Conference
(CONF)

4.
5.

Table
Table

4.26
4.27

PCBs:

- Parallel/Serial

- Memory
- Remote

Table

4.28

Table

4.29

Table

4.30

- Memory

Table

4.31

Digital (SLMD)
Analog - 16 Line

Trunk

Common

Digttal

Converter

-LineTTrunk

Processor

1.0 Megabyte
256K

Genera-

& Attenuation
(MCA)
Unit/Ports
(RAUP)

Control
Access

- Controlledlnput-Output
Memory

(PSC)

Kilobyte
Unit

(CIOP)

(MEM4)
(MEMS)
Control

(LTUC)

Method

4-39

A3O808-X5130-B110-1-8928
Issue 1, May 1986

SATURN IIE EPABX
Installation Procedures
Dual-Tone

Table 4.13
DESCRIPTION

Multifrequency

(DTMF)

Receiver

PCB (S30810-(2431-X2-

* -B900)

The DTMF PCB, shown in Figure 4.27, contains four circuits (0, 2, 4, and 6) utilizing four ports. Under
no circumstances should more than three DTMF receiver cards be assigned on one shelf. This requirement is a limitation of the power supply. Each circuit provides the means for dial tone detection and
validation of DTMF tones.
1.

Indicators. There are four red LEDs (TRCO, TRC2, TRC4 and TRCG) on the faceplate of the PCB.
Each LED indicates the following status conditions of one of the four assigned DTMF receiver
Circuits:
a.

LED steadily lit - The associated

LED extinguished
- The associated DTMF receiver circuit is idle and in-service.
always remains extinguished
for unassigned
MMF receiver circuits.

LED flashing

Switches.

None.

Strapping

Options.

- The associated

DTMF receiver

MMF

receiver

circuit is busy.
The LED

circuit is idle and in an out-of-service

state.

None.

OBSERVATIONS:

None.

INSTALLATION
PROCEDURES:

Locate in any channel group in the basic or LTU shelf for optimum
of this practice for details.

port usage. Refer to Section 2.00

SATURN
Installation

IIE EPABX
Procedures

A30808-X5130-8110-1-8928
Issue
1, May

Red LEDs-

Figure

4.27

DTMF

PCB

1986

IA80808-X5180-8110-1-8928
issue 1, May 1986
Table

DESCRIPTION:

4.14

Premium

Instrument

Module

Digital

(PIMD)

PCB

(S30810-Q432-X-

The PIMD PCB serves as a special line interface circuit connecting
The PIMD communicates with the system via digital data messages.
4.28, contains two circuits.
1.

Indicators.

None.

Switches.

None.

Strapping

Options.

None.

INSTALiATdN
PROCEDURES:

Locate in any channel group in the basic or LTU shelf for optimum
of the practice for details.

442

attendant consoles to the system.
Each PIMD PCB, shown in Figure

None.

OBSERVATIONS:

* -8900)

port usage. Refer to Section

2.00

SATURN
Installation

IIE EPABX
Procedures

A30808-X5130-BllO-l-8928
Issue
1. May

1986

Figure

4.28

PIMD

PCB

4-43

A3O808-X5130-f3110-1-B928
Issue 1, May 1986

SATURN HE EPABX
Installation Procedures
Table 4.15
I

DESCRIPTION:

Subscriber

INSTALLATION
PROCEDURES:

Analog

- Station

(SLMA-S)

PCB (S30810-Q1674-X-

* -B900)

The SLMA-S PCB provides an interface between standard telephone sets (rotary dial and pushbutton)
and the system. The SLMA-S PCB, shown in Figure 4.29 , contains eight circuits (0 - 7) and utilizes
eight ports. Each circuit provides the required supervisory signaling plus the analog-toPCM
and PCMto-analog transformation.
1.

OBSERVATIONS:

Line Module

Indicators.

One green

LED which indicates

the following

status conditions:

LED lit steadily - One or more of the line circuits are busy.

LED extinguished

LED flashing - All assigned
out-of-service state.

Switches.

None:

Strapping

Options.

- All assigned

line circuits are idle and in-service.

line circuits are idle and one or more line circuits are in the

None.

The SLMA-S PCB can be used to terminate dial dictation circuits or ZUNA (Zoned Universal
swer) bells zoned for up to four zones, or other special equipment circuits.
Locate in any channel

group per best port capacity

Night An-

SATURN
Installation

IIE EPABX
Procedures

A30808-X5130-BllO-l-8928
Issue
1, May

1986

Gieen LED

Figure

4.29

SLMA-S

PCB

4-45

I
A30808-X5130-8110-l-8928
Issue 1, May 1986
Table 4.16
DESCRIPTION:

Subscriber

Line

Module

- Off-Premises

(SLMA-0)

PCB (S30810-Ql7’39-X-

* -B900)

The SLMA-C PCB provides an interface between standard telephone sets (rotary dial and pushbutton)
which are Off-Premises and the system. The SLMA-CI PCB, shown in Figure 4.30 , contains four circuits
(0, 2, 4, 6) and utilizes four ports. Each circuit provides the required supervisory signaling plus the analog
toPCM and PCM-to-analog
transformation.
The Off-Premises station can operate over a loop of 0 to
1800 Ohms, and is registered with the FCC for class “c” operation.
1.

*’

Indicators.

One green LED which

indicates

the following

status conditions:

LED lit steadily - One or more of the line circuits are busy.

LED extinguished

LED flashing
out-of-service

Switches.

None.

Strapping

Options.

OBSERVATIONS:

None.

INSTALLATION
PROCEDURES:

Locate in any channel

4-46

Analog

- All assigned

- All assigned
state.

line circuits are idle and in-service.

line circuits are idle and one or more line circuits are in the

None.

group per best port capacity.

Refer to Section

2.00 of this practice

for details.

ISATURN
installation

HE EPABX
Procedures

A30808-X5130-8110-l-8928
Issue
1, May

Figure

4.30

SLMA-0

1986

PCB

4-47

- I
SATURN HE EPABX
installation Procedures

A30808-X5130-Bllo-l-8928
Issue 1, May 1986
Table 4.17

DESCRIPTION:

INSTALLATION
PROCEDURES:
-

4-48

Line Module

Digital

(SLMD)

PCB (S30810-Q1724-X-*-8900)

The SLMD PCB provides an interface between standard Siemens digital telephone (SDT) sets and the
system. The SLMD PCB, shown in Figure 4.31 , contains eight circuits (O-7) and utilizes eight ports.
1.

I OBSERVATIONS:

Subscriber

Indicators.

One red LED which

indicates

the following

status conditions:

LED lit steadily - One or more of the line circuits are busy

LED extinguished

LED flashing - All assigned
out-of-service state.

Switches.

None.

Strapping

Options.

- All assigned

line circuits are idle and in-service.

line circuits are idle and one or more line circuits are in the

None.

None.
Locate in any channel group in the basic or LTU shelf for optimum
of this practice for details.

port usage. Refer to Section

2.00

ISATURN
Installation

IIE EPABX
Procedures

A30808-X5130-BllO-l-8928
issue
1, May

Figure

4.31

SLMD

1986

PCB

4-49

SATURN IIE EPABX
Installation Procedures

Table

DESCRIPTION:

Issue

4.18

Subscriber

Line

Analog

- 18 Line(SLA16)

PCB

(S30810-Q1790X

* -8900)

The SlAl6 PCB, shown in Figure 4.32, provides sixteen interfacing circuits (O-7 for upper half and O-7
in virtual slot for lower half) between rotary dial and/or DTMF stations and the system.
1.

Indicators.

One green LED which

indicates

the following

status conditions:

LED lit steadily - One or more of the line circuits are busy.

LED extinguished

LED flashing - All assigned
out-of-service state.

Switches.

None.

Strapping

Options.

- All assigned

line circuits are idle and in-service.

line circuits are idle and one or more line circuits are in the

None.

OBSERVATIONS:

None.

INSTALLATION
PROCEDURES:

Locate in any channel group in the basic or LTU shelf for optimum
of this oractice for details.

4-50

1, May 1986

port usage. Refer to Section 2.00

SATURN
Installation

HE EPABX
Procedures

A30808-X5130-BllO-l-8928
Issue
1, May

1986

.’

P557&22.920186

Figure

4.32

SLA16

PCB

4-51

I
SATURN IlE EPABX
Installation Procedures

A30808X5130-8110-1-8926
Issue 1, May 1986
Table 4.19

DESCRIPTION:

Central

Office

Trunk (TMEM)

PC6 (S30810-Q414-X-*-8900)

Refer to Figure 4.33 for a typical layout of a trunk-type PCB. The TMBM PCB, shown in Figure 4.34,
contains four trunk circuits (0, 2, 4, and 6) utilizing four ports. Each TMBM circuit provides a two-wire
loop interface between the system and a central office (CO) trunk. The trunk circuits send and receive
dc supervisory signals and perform the analog-toPCM
and PCM-to-analog
transformation
into and out
of the System highways. The TMBM’PCB
is also known as the CO Trunk (Car) PCB.
1.

Indicators. There are four red LEDs (TCO, TC2, TC4, and TCS) on the faceplate of the PCB. Each
LED indicates the following status conditions of the for assigned trunk circuits:
a.

LED steadily lit - The associated

LED extinguished
- The associated
remains extinguished
for unassigned

LED flashing

- The associated

trunk circuit is busy.
trunk circuit is idle and inservice.
trunk circuits.

trunk circuit is idle and in the out-ofservice

state.

Switches.

None.

Strapping Options, The TMBM PCB provides strapping options for ground-start or loop-start signaling, as well as return loss termination (600 Ohms or OPS compromise
network) by means
of reversible balance board. Refer to Figure 4.34 for the strapping assignments.

OBSERVATIONS:

When the Code Calling

INSTALLATION
PROCEDURES:

Locate in any channel group in the basic or LTU shelf for optimum
of this practice for details.

4-52

The LED always

feature is used, one TMBM

port can be assigned

for that feature.

port usage. Refer to Section

2.00

SATURN
Installation

IIE EPABX
Procedures

A3o808-x5130-B110-1-8928
Issue
1. May

1986

Red LEDs

Figure

4.33

Typical

Layout

of a Trunk-Type

PCB

4-53

A30808-X513043110-143926
Issue
1, May

Function

Jumper

Pins

GND Start

VlOl-V401

1 to 2

Loop Start’ VlOl-v401

2 to 3

fatidentifie
of ealance
Balance

Balance Board Return Loss
A. With pin one of balance board in pin one
of balance board socket (as shown above)
the return ioss termination is:
600 Ohms t2.16pF.

B%G+585277-55/1/ffi

4-54

5//i%

8. With pin one of balance board in pin
twelve of balance board socket (reverse),
the return loss termination is:
nominal 900 Ohms.
Figure

4.34

TMBM

PCB

F&Jo

1986

IA30808-X5130-BllO-l-6928
Issue 1, May 1986

Table

DESCRIPTION:

4.20

The
Each
cuits
and

Direct

Inward

Dialing

Trunk

(TMIE)

PCB

(S30810-Q415-X-*-B900)

TMIE PCf3, shown in Figure 4.35, contains four trulik circuits (0. 2, 4, and 6) utilizing four ports.
TMIE trunk circuit provides direct inwarddialing
service from a CO to the system . The trunk cirsend and receive dc supervisory signals, provide loop battery, and perform the analog lo PCM
PCM to analog transformation.
The TMIE PCB is also referred to as a DID trunk board.

Indicators. There are four red LEDs (TCO, TC2, TC4, and TC6) on the faceplate of the PCB. Each
LED indicates the following status conditions of one of the four assigned Trunk Circuits:
a.

LED steadily lit - The associated

LED extinguished
- The associated trunk circuit is idle and in-service.
remains extinguished
for unassigned
trunk circuits.

LED flashing

L The associated

trunk circuit is busy.

trunk circuit

The LED always

is idle and in the out-of-service

Switches.

Strapping Options. Balance board options for return loss termination
promise network) are shown on Figure 4.35.

state.

None.

OBSERVATIONS:

None.

INSTALLATION
PROCEDURES:

Locate in any channel group in the basic or LTU shelf for optimum
of this practice for details.

(600 ohms or OPS com-

port usage. Refer to Section 2.00

4-55

SATURN
Installation

IIE

EPABX
Procedures

A30808-X5130-BllO-l-8928

Issue 1, May 1986

DC4 ! identifie. s Pir
04 Balance Boa
Balance

Balance Board Return Loss
A. With pin one of balance board in pin one
of balance board socket (as shown above)
the return loss termination is:
600 Ohms t2.16pF.
B. With pin one of balance board in pin
twelve of balance board socket (reverse),
the return loss termination is:
nominal 900 Ohms.
n5.a
852778511186

4-56

7 7-h

F/7

- C///&z
Figure

4.35

TMIE

PCB

I
SATURN IIE EPABX
Installation Procedures

A30808-X5130-8110-l-8928
Issue 1, May 1986
Table 4.21

DESCRIPTION:

Two-Wire

E&M Trunk

(TM&%2)

PCB (S30810-Q429X

* -8900)

The TMBA-2 (E&M signaling) PCB, shown in Figure 4.36, provides either one-way or two-way incoming
and outgoing trunk service. The TMBA-2 PCB contains four separate two-wire trunk circuits (0, 2, 4,
and 6) utilizing four ports Each trunk circuit provides a 2-wire voice pair and E&M signaling leads between the system and a distant PABX or signaling equipment. The trunk circuits send and receive dc
supervisory signals and perform the analog-to-PCM
and PCM-to-analog
transformation
into and out of
the SATURN System highways.
1.

Indicators. There are four red LEDs (TCO, TC2, TC4, and TC6) on the faceplate of the PCB. Each
LED indicates the following status conditions of one of the four assigned trunk circuits
a.

LED steadily

lit - The associated

LED extinguished
- The associated trunk circuit is idle and in-service.
remains extinguished
for unassigned trunk circuits.

LED flashing

- The associated

trunk circuit is busy.
The LED always

trunk circuit is idle and in the out-of-service

state.

Switches.

None.

Strapping Options. The TMBA2 PCB provides strapping options for E&M signaling (type I, IA,
or II), as well as return loss termination (600 Ohms or OPS compromise
network) via balance
boards. Refer to Flgure 4.36 for the strapping assignments.

OBSERVATIONS:

When the Paging (with A&wetback)
for each page zone.

feature is used, from one to four TMBA-2

INSTALLATION
PROCEDURES:

Locate in any channel group in the basic or LTU shelf for optimum
of this practice for details.

ports can be assigned

port usage. Refer to Section 2.00

4-57

SATURN

A30808-X5130-8110-l-8928
Issue 1,

IIE EPABX

Installation

Procedures

VlOl
v102 v103

v201
V202 V203

v301
V302

V303

v401
V402

V403

.: _.
.__

..
..
..

TMBA2 PCB E&M Signaling Table
Function

Jumper

Pins

v101

Jumper

Pins

Jumper]

Pins

Comments

v102
Provides two ELM MDF signaling
leads: E/M (or WMAL

Type II

&77B527%Fy1186

4-58

VlOl
g;

v401
- Factory-Strapped

2 to 3

v102
“v;;;

to 3

v403
v103
v203
v303

1 to 2

2 to 3

v403
v103
;g

This private line type interface is
similar to above but is onfy used in
Europe; information upon request.

Open

Provides four E&M MDF signaling
leads: E/SG/M/SB
(or EAIEBIMAIMB).

v402
NOTE:

v403
The latest Balance Board is a hybrid ceramic
DIP where pin 1 is identified by a dot.

- s/J/a6
Figure

4.36

TMBA-2

PCB

St+ 5

May 1986

SATURN IIE EPABX
Installation Procedures

A30808-X5130-BllO-l-8928
Issue 1, May 1986
Table

DESCRIF’TION:

4.22

INSTALLATION
PROCEDURES:

E&M

Trunk

(TMBA-4)

PCB

(S30810-Q430-X-

* -BSOO)

The TMBA-4 (E&M type signaling) PCB. shown in Figure -427, provides either one-way or two-way incoming and outgoing service. The TMBA-4 PCB contains four separate four-wire trunk circuits (0, 2,
4, and 6) utilizing four ports. Each trunk circuit provides a voice transmit pair, a voice receive pair and
E&M signaling leads between the system and a remote PABX or signaling equipment . The trunk circuits send and receive dc supervisory signals and perform the analog-toPCM
and PCM-to-analog
transformation into and out of the system highways.
1.

OBSERVATIONS:

Four-Wire

Indicators. There are four red LEDs (TCO, TC2, TC4, and TC6) on the faceplate of the PCB. Each
LED indicates the following status conditions of one of the four assigned trunk circuits:
a.

LED steadily lit - The associated

LED extinguished
- The associated trunk circuit is idle and in-service.
remains extinguished
for unassigned trunk circuits.

LED flashing

- The associated

trunk circuit is busy.
The LED always

trunk circuit is idle and in the out-of-service

Switches.

None.

Strapping

Options.

When the Paging (without Answer back) feature
be assigned for each page zone.

When the Intercept Announcement
that feature.

When the ACD Announcement
feature.

When the Music on Hold feature is used, only one TMBA-4 port can be assigned

state.

None.
is used, from one to four TMBA-4

feature is used, only one TMBA4
feature is used, only one TMBA4

Locate in any channel group in the basic or LTU shelf
of this practice for details.

for

optimum

ports can

port can be assigned

for

for that

for that feature.

port usage. Refer to Section

2.00

4-59

SATURN
Installation

IIE

A30606-x5130-B110-1-8928
Issue
1, May

EPABX
Procedures

VlOl

v102

TWA4
Function
I

Jumper
VlOl

Pins
I

v301 v302

Jumper
v102

1 T

PCS ELM Signaling Strap Table
Pins
I

Jumper
v103

Pins
1

Comments

Pi
1 x
la

Tvml

v403
v103
v203
V: 103
1 v403
,,.A”

12
1 V402

en
,

ialPl*
1 Dial P2

I
(
1

..I”,

Vi
Vl

1
( 11021
1 2 to 3

1 V402
I

1
1

? *.. D
L 'u J
I
/2103

.-".a
1

I
I

This private iine type intertace
is similar to above but is only used
in Europe; iniormation uponrequest.

Prowdes lour E&M MOF signaling
1 Ieey~~~,x~(or
I
Normal pos!tion (do not alter strap).
I
1 Future use (do not use).

("Factory-Strapped)

‘.

wQ77Bwe6

4-60

Figure

4.37

TMBA-4

PCB

)
I

1966

ISATURN IIE EPABX
Installation Procedures

A30808-X5130-BllO-l-8928
Issue 1, May 1986
Table 4.23

DESCRIPTION:

*’
OBSERVATIONS:
INSTALLATION
PROCEDURES:

Parallel/Serial

Converter

(PSC)

PCB

(S30810-Q419-X10-

-B900)

The PSC PCB, shown in Figure 4.38, converts the serial Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) voice signals
to parallel signals and multiplexes these signals onto an eight-bit parallel highway. These parallel signals are then transferred to the MCA board for further processing.
The reverse
function is also performed
forwarding to the peripheral circuits.
1.

Indicators.

None.

Switches.

None.

Strapping

Options.

None.

by the PSC when the signals

are returned

from the MCA for

None.

Locate in basic shelf slots 20 and 22.

4-61

I-

SATURN
Installation

IIE EPABX
Procedures

P5Lliu15-320186

4-62

A30808-X5130-BllO-l-8928
Issue
1, May

Figure

4.38

PSC

PCB

1986

I
-

SATURN IIE EPABX
Installation Procedures

Table

DESCRIPTION:

....

A30808-X5130-8110-l-8928
Issue 1, May 1986

4.24

Signal

Multiplexer/Clock/Tone

Generator

(SMXTG)

The SMXTG PCB, shown in Figure 4.39, is divided
the clock generator, and the tone generator.
The SMXlG is a hardwarecontrolled
units and the ClOP and handles
The clock generator produces
to operate the system.

PCS

(S30810-Ql791-X-

into three functional

* -8900)

parts: the signal multiplexer,

scanner/distributor
which provides an interface between the line/trunk
control and status signals.

the 8192MHz,

4.096MHz,

2.048MHz,

and 250Hz clocking signals required

The tone generator provides various tone outputs from which all the system DTMF tones and supervisory
tones are derived. The tone generator also provides a square wave timing signal for system generated
dial pulses.
1.

Indicators.

None.

Switches.

None.

Strapping

Options.

’

None..

OBSERVATIONS:

None.

INSTALLATION
PROCEDURES:

Locate in the basic shelf slot 21.

4-63

SATURN
Installation

“ - .

4-64

“L_cl~

IIE EPABX
Procedures

A30808-X5130-BllO-l-8928
Issue
1, May

Figure

4.39

SMXTG

PCB

1986

ISATURN
Installation

IIE EPABX
Procedures

A30608-X5130-6110.l-8928
Issue
1, May

Table
DESCRIPTION:

4.25

Conference

(CONF)

PCB

(S30810.Q417-X-

+ -B900)

The CONF
PCB, shown
in Figure
4.40, makes
all connections
involving
three
provides
four, &port
and twenty-four
24, Cport
conference
circuits.
A maximum
CONFO
and CONFI,
can be allocated
in a LTU shelf. CONFO
PCB is standard
is optional.
1.

Indicators.

Switches.

None.

Strapping

Options.

O@SERVATIONS:

None.

INSTALLATION
PROCEDURES:

Locate

in the

1986

to eight ports.
of two conference
with the system,

The

PCB
PCBs,
CONFl

None.

basic

shelf

None.

slot

23.

4-65

I-

I
SATURN
Installation

P5on-z-m6

4-66

iIE

A30808-X5130-BllO-l-8928
Issue
1, May

EPABX
Procedures

Figure

4.40

CONF

PCB

1986

SATURN
Installation

HE EPABX
Procedures

A30808-X5130-BllO-l-8928
Issue
1, May

1986
I

Table
DESCRIPTION:

4.26

Memory

Control

and

Attenuation

(MCA)

PCB

(S30810-Q416X*-8900)

The MCA PCB, shown
in Figure
4.41, is divided
into two functional
parts:
a Time
Switch
Unit (TSU)
and a controller.
The TSU makes
all port connections
and provides
attenuation
for all calls being processed
in the system.
The controller
receives
control
data from the main central
processor
and causes
the TSU
and conference
unit(s)
to make the required
connections.
1.

Indicators.

None.

Switches.

None.

Strapping

Options.

O_BSERVATIONS:

None.

INSTALtATlON
PROCEDURES:

Locate

in the-basic

shelf

None.

slot

24.

4-67

SATURN
Installation

HE EPABX
Procedures

A30808-X5130-BllO-l-B928
Issue
1. May

Figure

4-68

4.41

MCA

PCB

1986

A30808-X5130-BllO-l-6928
Issue 1, May 1986

SATURN IIE EPABX
Installation Procedures
Table 4.27
IESCRIPTION:

Remote

Access

Unit/Ports

(RAUP)

PCB (S30810-Q1792X

* -8900)

The RAUP PCB, shown in Figure 4.42, contains a built in modem and interfaces with the CIOP MCA
and MEM for the transfer of data to and from terminals and the modem port. It supports three serial
ports which can be connected to any device tha! supports serial communication.
Two of the ports are
RS232 type for TTY0 and TTY1 interfaces, the third is a 212A modem port for communications
from
a remote terminal.
Note: The RAUP Module
The 212A modem port
a loop-start trunk circuit
the modem to self-set
is 300. Programmable

is required

in the system.

is answer only; no call origination capabilities exist. The port is equipped with
and can interface with an SLMA or directly to a TELCO trunk. Firmware causes
to 300 or 1200 baud to match the incoming baud rate. The default baud rate
via CMU controlled options are:

Data
Stop
Parity
Parity

(Default
(Default
(Default
(Default

Bits 7 or 8
Bits 1 or 2
or No Parity
Odd or Even

7)
1)
Parity)
Even)

Both RS232 serial ports are configured as Data Communications
Equipment (DCE). The baud rate is
programmable
via CMU for both ports. Any of the following 6 baud rates are available. The default baud
rate is 9600.
116
2400

300
4800

1200
9600

Connections can be made to the FtAUP PCB after insertion in slot 25. Any desired RS-232-C type device(s)
with a DTE interface (25 pin D-type male) can be connected to the RAUP TTY0 or TTY1 ports. llY0
is the upper connector and TTY1 is the lower connector. The desired port configuration
for TTY0 and
llY1 for baud rate, .number of data bits, and parity may have to be adjusted via the system service
terminal to successfully communicate
with the connected device. The modem port is connected upon
card insertion to a tip and ring pair that terminate at the back Saturn IIE common control back plane
at interface plug J44 pins 24 and 49, respectively. From this point the pair can be connection to a patch
block for external connection to a trunk or station line.

OBSERVATION:

Switches.

None.

Strapping

Options.

None.

There is one green LED; when lit indicates

that the modem

port is in use.

WARNING
The RAUP PCS contains CMOS circuitry, which can be damaged by static electricity. Antistatic bags should be used when the RAUP PC6 is shipped or stored . Whenever possib/e, a grounding
strap should be worn by personal
handling
the RAUP PCB.
INSTALLATION
PROCEDURES:

Locate in the basic shelf slot number

25.

4-69

SATURN
Installation

IIE EPABX
Procedures

A30808-X5130-8110-1-8928
Issue
1, May

Figure

4.42

RAUP

PCB

1986

SATURN IIE EPABX
installation Procedures

A30808-X5130-BllO-l-8928
Issue 1, May 1986

Table 4.28
DESCRIPTION:

Controller/Input-Output

Processor

(CIOP) PCB (S30810-Q1789X

-8900)

The CIOP PCB, shown in Figure 4.43, contains the main central processor, which processes incoming
data from the peripheral devices via the SMXTG, makes decisions based on the data received using
instructions stored in memory and, as a result of these decisions, issues commands for call processing.
The Signal Input Buffer (SIB) contains a processor which controls the CIOP TTY port.
Software

controlled

options
Data
Stop
Parity
Parity

for TTY port are as follows:
Bits 7 or 8
Bits 1 or 2
or No Parity
Odd or Even

(Default
(Default
(Default
(Default

Indicator. There is one green LED. When

Switches.

The TIY

port is controlled

Strapping

Options.

None.

OBSERVATIONS:

None.

INSTALLATION
PROCEDURES:

Locate in basic shelf slot number

lit it indicates

by switch settings

7)
1)
Parity)
Even)

that the TTY port is in use.
unless overridden

by software.

4-71

SATURN
Installation

PWiUW3ZTiE6

4-72

IIE EPABX
Procedures

A30808-X5130-8110-1-6928
issue 1. May

Figure

4.43

CIOP

PCB

1986

SATURN IIE EPABX
Installation Procedures

A30808-X5130-6110-1-8928
Issue 1. May 1986
Table 4.29

DESCRIPTION:

Memory

1.0 Megabyte

(MEM4)

PCB (S30819-Ql775-X-*-8900)

The MEM4 PCB, shown in Figure 4.44, provide 1.0 megabyte of dynamic Random Access Memory (RAM)
and its supporting logic to store system data. The memory is organized as 512K words X 16 bits/word,
and divided into 64K byte pages. Memory write protection is provided in 1K word segments. MEM4 is
arranged for battery backup memory protection to safeguard stored data during short term power outages. Also, an Error-Correcting
Code is provided to correct any single-bit errors and detect double-bit
errors existing in a word.
1. Switches.
2.

None,

Strapping Options.
byte of memory:
Vl strapped
V2 strapped

MEM4 PC8 Vl and V2 must be strapped

as follows to provide for 1.0 mega-

between 1 and 2
between’ 2 and 3

OBSERVATIONS:

Check LEDs for normal

indications

OBSERVATIONS:

None.

INSTALLATION
PROCEDURES:

Locate in basic shelf slot number

(Refer to Maintenance

and Troubleshooting

Section)

27.

4-73

SATURN
installation

P5m143120186

4-74

A30808-X5130-BllO-l-B928
Issue
1. May

IIE EPABX
Procedures

Figure

4.44

MEM4

PCB

1986

SATURN IIE EPABX
installation Procedures

A30808-X5130-BllO-l-8928
Issue 1, May 1986
Table 4.30

DESCRIPTION:

Memory

256 Kilobyte

(MEM3)

PCB (S30810-Q174O-X-e-8900)

The MEM3 PCB, shown in Figure 4.45, provide 256 kilobytes of dynamic Random Access Memory (RAM)
and its supporting logic to store system data. The memory is organized as 128K words X 16 bits/ word,
with memory write protection provided in 1K word segments. MEMB is arranged for battery backup memory
protection to safeguard stored data durin short term power outages. Also, an Error-Correcting-Code
is provided to correct any single-bit erro 4 and detect double-bit errors existing in a word.
1.

Indicator. None.

Switches.

None.

Strapping

Options.

None.

OBSERVATIONS:

None.

INSTALLATION
PROCEDURES:

Locate in basic shelf slot number

28.

4-75

SATURN
Installation

P5uiuW320166

4-76

IIE

A30808-X5130-BllO-l-8928
Issue
1, May

EPABX
Procedures

Figure

4.45

MEM3

PCB

1986

A30808-X5130-8110-l-8928
Issue 1, May 1986

SATURN IIE EPAEX
Installation Procedures
Table 4.31 Line/lhmk
DESCRIPTION:

Unit Control

(LTUC) PCB (S30810-Q428-X-

* -8900)

The LTUC PCB. shown in Figure 4.46, provides the tim.ing signals necessary to address a line/trunk
unit. It multiplexes and demultiplexes
both signal and voice highways. It also provides fault monitoring
and reporting of failures associated with the 128.ports it handles.
1.

Indicators. Three red LEDs, designated
isting malfunctions
as follows:
a.

PRS, ALMO, and ALMl,

Protection Restore Signal (PRS), when steadily lit, indicates
functions is present:
1.

No common

+12Vdc

-5Vdc under voltage.

-48Vdc under voltage.

that one of the following

Loss’of CLK-A (2.048MHz

Loss of SYP (4ms time pulse) of common

Loss of SYNR (ring sync) of common
1 (ALMl).

Switches.

None.

Strapping

Options.

mal-

under voltage.

after the occurrence

Alarm 0 (A&IO), when steadily lit, indicates that one of the following

c. Alarm

of ex-

control on line.

Note: The PRS is delayed 40 ms (nominal)
one of the previous conditions:
b.

provide visual indications

ALMl

None.

OBSERVATIONS:

None.

INSTALLATION
PROCEDURES:

Locate in LTU shelf slots 6 and 19.

clock) of common

control
control

control

is not used in the SATURN IIE

0
0

of any

malfunctions

is present:

SATURN
Installation

IIE EPABX
Procedures

A30808X5130-8110-1-8928
Issue
1, May

Red LEDs

Figure

4-78

4.46

LTUC

PCB

1986

ISATURN IIE EPABX
Installation Procedures

A30808-X5130-BllO-l-8928
Issue 1, May 1986

Attendant
Console.
The attendant console is used
primarily to answer external calls (i.e., incoming trunk calls) and
extend such calls to the appropriate internal stations. The console may also be used to assist in placing outgoing calls and
4.08

Table

DESCRIPTION:

*’

OBSERVATIONS:
INSTALLATION
PROCEDURES:

4.32

Attendant

Console

handling special system functions such as paging, message
waiting and conference calling. A maximum of 12 attendant consoles can be interfaced with a particular system. Refer to Table
4.32 for furthei information on the attendant console.
(L30808X5130&%

* -8900)

The attendant console, shown in Section 2.00, is a desk-top unit with which the attendant processes
calls and accesses special system features using pushbutton keys and an alphanumeric
display. It is
46.99 cm (18.5 in.) wide, 13.08 cm (5.15 in.) high, and 26.47 cm (10.42 in.) deep. A telephone handset
is furnished with the console. An optional headset may be substituted for the handset.
1.

Indicators.

None.

Switches.

None.

Strapping

Options.

Connect

the modular

Connect the modular
that the connections

Insert the appropriate
in the console.

After the system has been tested, perform the appropriate
circuit per console. Refer to Section 600 in this practice

None.

None.
coiled cord to the handset

and console.

line cord into rear of console and a standard modular jack receptacle. Check
in the modular jack receptacle coincide with those shown in Figure 4.47.
key labels into the plastic caps and lock into their corresponding
MDF crossconnections
for details.

positions
to one PIMD

4-79

A30808-X5130-BllO-l-8928
issue 1, May 1986

SATURN IIE EPABX
Installation Procedures

Standard

Modular

Jack

Duolex

B-Contact

1
Modular Jack Termmation
in the rear - bottom of
Console

internal Circuilry
Designaflons
,
1

L TRRTL
F XXXXF
-1212+

MDF Assignments
Via House Cabling
-2

bms?-%a386

4-80 (80 pages)

Figure

4.47

Modular

Attendant

Console

Connections

I
\

Lme Cord

/
I

SATURN HE EPABX
Installation
Procedures

SECTION

5.00

A30808-X5130-BllO-l-6928
Issue 1, May 1988

SYSTEM

SIGNAL

AND POWER/GROUND

Figure

5.00

Figure

5.01

Power/Ground
Distribution
System (Basic Cabinet)

for the SATURN

IIE

NOTE:

Figure

5.02

Power/Ground
Distribution
for the SATURN
System (Expansion
Cabinet)

Figure

5.03

Signal Cable Distribution
System (Basic Cabinet)

for the SATURN

IIE

Figure

5.04

Signal Cable Distribution
for the SATURN
System (Expansion
Cabinet)

IIE

Basic shelf connectors
shelf is missing.

J55 and J56, jumpered

if LTUl

Basic shelf connectors
shelf is missing.

J58 and J60 , jumpered

if LTUP

Basic shelf connectors
shelf is missing.

ARRANGEMENTS

5.01 General.
This section provides the signal and power/ground-cabling
arrangements
for the SATURN IIE System.
Tables 5.00 and 5.01 list all the cable reference numbers used
throughout this practice. The tables provide point-to-point
cable terminations
and refer users to the appropriate
cabling
illustration for quick reference. The following illustrations
are
included in this section:
When an LTU shelf is not equipped its corresponding signal cable connector on the basic shelf must
have a Berg jumper inserted across pins 29 and 30
in order to suppress LTU shelf failure alarm. The
connectors
are designated
as follows:
’

CABLING

Backplane

J57 and J59 , jumpered

if LTU3

Connectors

5-1

ISATURN

Installation

IIE

A30808-X5130-BllO-l-8928

EPABX

Procedures

Issue 1, May 1986

BASIC

LTU

Figure

5-2

5.00

SHELF

Backplane

Connectors

ISATURN

HE EPABX

Installation

A30808-X5130-BllO-l-8928
Issue
1, May

Procedures

Table 5.0

Signal

and Power/Ground
CABLE

CABLE
REF.

FIGURE
NO.

REF.

NO.

Reference

List (Basic

POINTS
I

(,
EQUIPMENT

5.01

Cabinet)

TERMINATION

TYPE
POWER/
GROUND

SIGNAL

ciabling

1986

(B)
ZONNECTOR

EQUIPMENT

CONNECTOR

PSU

basic

J61

PSU

basic

J56

LTUl

J63

FDDO

J12

J46

LTUl
2nd

FDDO

GRD

J14

GRD

basic

J55

LTUl

basic

J63

FDDl

PSU
basic

FDD3

w14
W18
w19

5.01

Table 5.01

Signal

CABLE
REF. NO.
W6

FIGURE
REF.

NO.
5.02

5.02

FDD2

GRD

PSU

GRD

and Power/Ground
CABLE

Cabling

TYPE

Reference

List (Expansion

--I-SIGNAL

J45

TERMINATION

(A)

POWER/
GROUND

EQUIPMENT

PSU

Cabinet)
POINTS

CONNECTOR

J5,JB

(B)
EQUIPMENT

CONNECTOR

LTUPSl

Jl,J2

LTUPS2

Jl,J2

LTUPSl

LTUP

J42-J43

5.04

basic

J60

LTU2

J46

5.04

basic

J58

LTU2

J45

5.04

basic

J59

LTU3

J46

basic

J57

LTUB

J45

LTUPS2

LTUB

J42-J43

-2z-p-k

5-3

SATURN
Installation

BSK39.1.41186

5-4

IIE

EPABX
Procedures

A30808-X5130-BllO-l-8928
Issue
1, May

rlgure

---

s.ul

rowemurouna

. -.

Dlstrlbution

(Basic

Cabinet)

1986

I-

SATURN
Installation

IIE

EPABX
Procedures

A30808-X5130-BllO-l-8928
Issue
1, May

EXPANSION

L? I
.'
LTUS

CABINET

1986

REF.

BASIC CABINET

Figure

5.02

Power/Ground

Distribution

REF.

(Expansion

Cabinet)

5-5

ISATURN

installation

IIE

EPABX

A30808-X5130-BllO-l-B928

Procedures

issue 1, May 1986

w3
1

w13

//
LTUS

J47

J45

BASS

/
,

J56

563

J55
J61

w4\
w14

Wll
NV14 4-fTO BE
DELETED
IF
FDD2 IS USED)

-1 ti LII
l.MJ
2

FDD

Figure

5-6

u.l
0
?

5.03

I I

Signal

Cable

Distribution

PSU

(Basic

Cabinet)

I
-

SATURN
Installation

A30808-X5130-BllO-l-8928
Issue
1, May

IIE EPABX
Procedures

EXPANSION

1986

CABINET

L,rJp.

-T-------BASIC

Figure

5.04

Signal

CA&NET

Cable

Distribution

(Expansion

Cabinet)

5-7

(5-8

blank)

SATURN IIE EPABX
installation
Procedures

SECTION

A30808-X5130-8110-l-8928
issue 1, May 1988

6.00

MDF CABLING

AND TERMINATING

ARRANGEMENTS

8.01 General. This section provides the MDF cabling procedures and termination arrangements for the SATURN IIE System.

and their corresponding
card slot allocations on the basic and
LTU shelves. Figure 8.04 provides information
pertaining
to
connector/pin
numbers for tip/ring and E&M leads.

6.02 MDF Cabling.
MDF cabling for the SATURN IIE System can be accomplished
through either the top or bottom
of the cabinet (refer to Figures 6.00 and 8.01). The tie-wrap
holders at the top and bottom of the cabinet provide the means
to easilv form and secure MDF cables into oosition. Each MDF
cable connector
(system side) should contain a 180° hood
(refer to Figure 6.02) to connect into the backplane
connector and secured via two captive-type
screws. Figure 6.03 provides an overview of the backplane
MDF cable connectors

6.03 MDF Terminating
Arrangements.
Tables 6.00 through
6.14 provide the necessary information on the terminating
arrangement at the MDF. Tables 6.00 through 6.06 provides the
MDF designations
for the T&R leads for the basic shelf . Tables 6.07 through 6.14 provides the MDF designations
for the
T&R leads for the expansion shelves. For information on MDF
cross-connections,
refer to SATURN IIE EPABX Installation
Test Procedures
Practice.

6-1

A30808-X5130-BllO-l-8928
Issue 1, May 1986

SATURN IIE EPABX
Installation
Procedures

Rear

14993.1.4ll7166

6-2

Figure

6.00

MDF Cabling

View

via Top of Cabinet

Assembly

(View

of Typical

Cabinet)

I
SATURN
installation

IIE

EPABX
Procedures

A30808-X5130-6110-1-8928
Issue
1, May

I I II O’
Lacil ig

II
II

‘.

1986

Bar
\

Tie-Wrap

Figure

6.01

MDF

Cabling

via

Bottom

Holders

of Cabinet

Assembly

(View

of Typical

Cabinet)

6-3

SATURN
Installation

HE EPABX
Procedures

A30808-X5130-8110-l-8928
Issue
1, May

Caoth re SC

Plug AMP N-o. 229940-l

C.4976.1.Y26/66

6-4

Figure

6.02

Required

MDF

Cable

Connector

1966

SATURN

IIE EPABX

Installation

A30808-X5130-BllO-l-8928

Issue 1. May 1986

Procedures

Channel Channel
Group 0 Group 1
.’

Slot

0245

Basic Shelf Assembly (Front View)
Channel Channel
Channel Channel
Group 2 Group 3
Group 4 Group 5
02

0246

Channel
Group 6

Number

1 Cable
Connector
for T & R
Leads
Cable
pezt;

I
I

J32

J34

J36

J40

J42

J44

;
I

I
I

I
i

J33

J36

J37

J39

J41

J43

J45

or T&R Leads
for SU16
Channel Channel
Group 0 Group 1
slot

Number

Cable
Connector
for T 6 R
Leads
Cable
Connector
for E a M
or T&R Leads
for SW3

0245

LTU Shelf k.semblp(Fmnt View)
Channel Channel
Channel Channel
. Gmup 2 Group 3
Group 4 Group 5
0246

I
J26

J28
I
I
I
529

/
J27

Figure

6.03

Channel
Group 7

0246

J30

532
1
I
I
J33

J34

J36

J36
I

J40

/
J37

f
J39

!
J31

Overview

0246

Channel
Group 6

of MDF Cable

I
J35

Connections

(Sheet

,s-‘

I
I
J41

1 of 2)

6-5

A30808-X5130-BllO-1-0928
issue 1, May 1986

ASSIGNMENT

Shelf (basic
&. Channel

OF PENS

= 0, LTU = 1, 2, 3)

Group

(O-7; see above )

Card Slot (O-6: see below for SLA16)
Circuit

(O-7; see below for StA16)

For SLA16 Boards:
Circuits O-7: Use slot number (Y) as shown
Circuits 8-15: Use slot number +l r/+1)
EXAMPLE:

SLA16

assigned

above.

to LTU Shelf 2, Channel

Group

PENS of first 8 circuits: 2300 through 2307
T/R leads of circuits are located on connector

3, Slot 0
J32

PENS of second 8 circuits: 2310 through 2317
T/R leads of circuits are located on connector
J33

Figure

6-6

6.03

Overview

of MDF Cable

Connections

(Sheet

2 of 2)

Siemens
Installation

A30808-X5130-8120-1-8928
Issue 1, May

Practices
Series

Issued by Office Systems
Group
5500 Broken
Sound
Boulevard
N.W., Boca Raton,
--___________Siemcns
Information
Systems,
Inc.

Florida

33431

-----

(305)

994-8100

Telex:

Printed

1986

515052
- ..- ----in U.S.A.

’

:
1
1
!

SATURN
Installation

IIE EPABX
Test Procedures

A30808X5130-8120-1-8328
Issue
1, May

SECTION
l.CO

2.00

PAGE

; .............
INTRDCUCTlON
............
Purpose
..................................
scope
....................................
Siemens
SATURN
IIE Practices
.................
Siemens
Customer
Support
Services.
...........
PREP/%KGXIY
Cener21.

ACTIVITY

4.00

.1-l
l-l
1-l
l-l
l-l

...................

2-1
2-1
2-l

.................................

Test Equipment
Required.
...................
Handling
Precautions
for PC&
with
MOS
Integrated
Circuiis.
....................
PC6 Removal
and Replacement
Guidelines
..............
Initial Visual
Inspection
Procedures
3.CO

2-l
2-1
2-1

.......

6.03
6.04
6.05
6.06
6.07
6.08
6.09
6.10
6.il

3-l
3-l
3-1
3-1

6.12

POWER-UP
TESTS
........................
Genera
I. .................................
Power-Up/Output
Voltage
Tests.

4-l
4-1
4-l

6.15

...............

OPERATING
PROGRAM
LOAD!NG ............
General.
..................................
Loading
Operafing
Dis!~.
.....................
Inputting
CMU
Data to Floppy
Disk.
............

5-1
5-1
5-l
5-l

&CO

ON-FINE
DlAGrGxTlC
TESTS
...............
General.
..................................
Connection
of Maintenance
Phone
and Modem
..............................
MDF Cross-Connecting
Prccedures.
............
System
Diagnostic
Tests;
....................

6-3
6-l

INSTALLATION
TEST
General
...................................

PRCCEDURES

CHEC#L!ST

Signal
Cab!e
Distribution
for the SATURN
System
(Basic
Cabinet).
................
2.01 Signal
Cable
Distribution
for the SATURN
............
System
(Expansion
Cabinet).
2.02 Power/Ground
Distribution
for the SATURN
System
(Basic
Cabinet).
................
2.03 Power/Ground
Distribution
for the SATURN
System
(Expansion
Cabinet)
.............
3.00 System
Ground
Test Connections
..........
3.01 Shelf Ground
Continuity
Test Connections.
4.00 Location
of Input Voltage
Connectors
on
Basic
Backplane.
.....................
4.01 Location
of Input Voltage
Connectors
on
LTU Backplane
.......................
5.00 Floppy
Disk and Storage
Envelope
.........
...........
5.01 Power
System
Unit (Front
View).
..........
5.02 Floppy
Disk Loading
Procedures.
5.03 CIOP
Printed
Circuit
Board
...............
6.00 Maintenance
Phone
and Maintenance-Related
Cress-Connections
....................
6.01 Modem
Cross-Connections
...............

6.13
6.14

6.16
6.17
6.18
6.49
620
6.21

6-l
6-1
6-12

Single -Line Telephone
Cross-Connections
Using
SLMA
PCB
. .
.
Single -Line Telephone
Cross-Connections
Using
SLAi6
PCB
Siemens
Digital
Teiephone
Cross-Connections
Using
SLMD
PCB.
.
SATURN
Attendant
Console
Cross-Connections
CO and CID Trunk
Cross-Conneciions
.
Two-Wire
(Type
I) E&M Trunk
Cross-Connec?ions
Four-Wire
(T;lce
_. I) E&M Trunk Cross-Connections
Two-Wire
(Type
II) E&M Trunk
Cross-Connections
Four-Wire
(?ype
II) E&M Trunk
Cross-Connections
Recorded
Anncuncement
(DID and Tie Trunk
Vacant
Number
Intercept,
and ACD
Announcement
Service)
Cross-Connections
Code
Ca!ling
(With or Without
Answerback)
Cross-Connections
.
Dial Ciciation
(DTMF)
Cross-Conneciions.
Music-en-Hold
Cross-Connections
Using
TMBA4
PCB
.
. .
Music-on-Ho!d
Cross-Connecticns
Using
SLMAISLA16
PCB
.
.
.
. .
Paging
With Answerback
Cross-Connections
Paging
Without
Answerback
Cross-Connections.
Universal
Night Answer
(UNA)
Cross-Connections
Attendant
Conscie
Keypad
and Fcaturo
Button
Depiassion
Ssquonce
Siemens
DYIiD Te!ephono
Buttcn
Ccpressicn
Sequence
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. .
Siemens
JR-DYAD
Te!ephone
Euitcn
Depression
Sequence
.
.

6-3
6-3
63
G-4
E-5
G-5
G-S
. 6-6
. 6-7

6-7
. 6-8
6-8
.

6-9

6-9
6-10
. 6-10
E-11
G-:3
6-21
6-23

7-l
7-l

l=lGURE
2.00

6.02

GROUND
TESTS
..........................
General.
..................................
System
Ground
Test. ........................
Shelf
Ground
Continuity
Test.
.................

5.00

7.CO

1906

PAGE
IIE

2-4

IIE
2-5
IIE
2-6
IIE
2-7
3-2
3-3

...

4-5

4-6
5-l
5-4
5-5
5-6
6-2
6-z

1.00
2.CO
2.01
3.00
3.01
4.00
5.00
5.01
5.02
6.00
6.01
6.02
6.03
6.04
6.05
6.06
6.07
6.08

Mnemonics
Used
in This Practice
..............
PCB and Powar
Supply
Removal
Guidelines
.....
Visual
Inspeciion
...........................
System
Ground
Test.
........................
Shelf Ground
Continuity
Test ..................
Power-Up/Output
Voitnge
Test .................
Loading
Procedures
fcr Operating
Disk.
.........
CIOP
DIP Swiich
Settings
....................
..........
LED Display
Values
for Leading
Errors
Tone Generator
Test ........................
Tone Genera:or
Test I\!umbers
................
DTMF
Receiver
Test ........................
Station
Line Test.
..........................
DTMF
Pad Test ............................
Console
Test ...............................
Attendant
Console
Displayable
Characters.
......
Siemens
Digital Telephone
- DYAD Button
Test
Siemens
Digital Telephone
- JR-DYAD
Button
Test
.
. .. .
6.09 Siemens
Digiial Telephone
-DYAD
Display
Test
6.10 Siemens
Digital Telephone
Displayable
Characters
.
.
6.11 Outgoing
Trunk
Test
.
6.12 Placing
Circuit(s)
In-Service
6.13 Taking
Circuit(s)
Out-of-Service
7.CO Insta!lation
Test Procedures
Checklist

l-l
2-2
2-3
3-l
3-1
4-l
5-2
5-3
5-4
6-13
G-i3
G-14
6-14
6-15
6-16
6-19
6-20
G-22
6-24
6-25
6-26
6-27
6-27
7-l

SATURN
installation

IIE

A30808-X5130-0120-l-0928
Issue
1, May

EPABX
Test Procedures

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.

1.01
Purpose.
The equipment
comprising
the SATURN
IiE
(SATURN
Ii-Expanded)
System
is compleYely
tested
at the factory prior to shipment.
The inspections
and tests covered
in
this practice
verify
that the EPABX
equipment
has been
properly
installed;
ensure
that no damage
wasIncurred
during transit;
and confirm
that the sysiem
is completely
operational. Table 1.00 defines
the mnemonics
usedthroughout
ihis
practice.
CAUTION
lnstalbtion
test
must
be performed

procedures
only

on the
by Siemer;s

SATL’RN
cetiified

I/E EPABX
personnel.

1.02
Sccpe.
This practice
is divided
into the following
sections which
are presented
in the sequential
order
of per-formance
after initial installation
of a SATURN
IIE System.
When
additional
equipment
is installed
to an existing
and active
SATURN
IIE System,
it is the responsibility
of craft personnel to determine
the sequential
order of the test procedures
contained
in tihese
sections.

TaS!e

1.00

Mnemonics

Section
Section
Section
Section
Section
Section
Section

l.CO
2.00
3.00
4.00
5.00
6.80
7.00

1986

- Introduction
- Preparatory
Activiiy
- Ground
Tests
- Power-Up
Tests
- Operating
Program
Loading
- On-Lina
Diagnostic
Tesis
- lnstallaticn
Test Procedures
Checklist

7.03
Siemens
SATURN
IIE Prac:iccs.
The practices,
issue
numbers
and dates for the SATURN
IIE EPABX
are lists3 in the
Practices
Documentation
Index A.30808~X5130-AlgO* -E987 Always refer to the !aiest
issue
of the application
indcx
to obtain the latest
issue
number
of a practice.
724
Siemens
Cus;oma:
Sqpsrt
Services.
Sicrnons
maintains
a nationwide
network
cf field service
offices.
Contact the Siemens
regional
oifice
for any engineering
essistance
that may be requked.

Used

in This

Practice

DEFiN1TfON
ACD
ALiVl
ASCII
CIOP
CMU
co
CONF
COT
DCI
DID
DIP
DP
DTE
DTMF
EIA
EPABX
FDD
IRAM
LTU
LTUPS
LED
MCA
MDF
MEM3
MEM4
MOS
MRA
MSM
MTCE
00s
ORAM
PABX
PCB
PEN
PIMD
PSC
PSU

Au;omaiic
Cafl Disiribution
Alarm
American
Standard
Code
for Information
lntarchange
Controller/Input-Ouiput
Prccessor
Customer
Memory
Update
Central
Office
Conference
Module
Central
Office
Trunk
Data Communication
Interface
Direct
Inward
Dialing
Dual lnline
Package
Dial Pulse
Da?a Terminal
Equipment
Dual Tone Multifrequency
Electronics
Industries
Association
Electronic
Private
Automatic
Branch
Exchange
Floppy
Disk Drive
Input
Random
Access
Memory
Line/Trunk
Unit
Line/Trunk
Unit Power
Supply
Light-Emitting
Diode
Memory
Control
and Attenuation
Main
Distribution
Frame
25Gkb
Memory
1Mb Memory
Metal
Oxide
Semiconductor
Material
Return
Authorization.
Memory
Support
Module
Maintenance
Out-of-Service
Output
Random
Access
Memory
Private
Automatic
Branch
Exchange
Printed
Circuit
Board
Port Equipment
Number
Premium
Instrument
Module
Digital
Parallel/Serial
Converter
Power
Supply
Unit

i-i

SATURN
Installation

IIE

EPABX
Test Procedures

Table
[\fiNEMDNIC

RAUP
RGEN
S-416
SLMA
SLMA-S
SLMD
SMXTG
SPC
SPG
TMBA-2
TMBA-4
TMBM
TMIE
TMS
TSTAPP
TSTDIAG
TTY
UNA
ZUNA
-48PS

l-2 (2 pages)

1.00

Mnemonics

Used

in This

Practice
DEFINITION

*
Remote
Access
Unit/Ports
Ring Generator
Subscriber
Line Module
Analog
Subscriber
Line Module
Analog
Subscriber
Line Module
Analog
Subscriber
Line Module
Digital
Signal
Multiplexer/Tone
Generator
Stored-Program-Controlled
Single
Point
Ground
Two-Wire
E&M Trunk
Four-Wire
E&M Trunk
Central
Office
Trunk
Direct
Inward
Dialing
Trunk
Transmission
Measuring
Set
Test - Apparatus
Test - Maintenance
Diagnostic
Teletypewriter
Universal
Night
Answer
Zoned
Universal
Night
Answer
-48Vdc
Power
Supply

- 16 lines
- Station

(Continued)

SATURN
Installation

IIE

EPABX
Test Procedures

A30808-X5130-B120-l-8928
Issue
1, May

2.01
General.
This section
describes
the test
quired
to perform
the installation
test procedures,
precautions
for Printed
Circuit
Boards
(PCBs)
ide Semiconductor
(MOS)
integrated
circuits,
removal
and replacement
of PCBs
and powei
initial
visual
inspection
procedures.
2.02
Test Equipment
Required.
The
ment is required
to perform
the procedures
practice:
a.

equipment
rehandling
with Metal Oxguidelines
for
supplies,
and

following
test
contained

equipin this

Digital
Multimeter.
A digital
multimeter
of gocd commercial
quality
with an accuracy
of + 1.0% or better.
The digital
multimeter
is used to perform
the ground
tests and output
voltage
tests.
Maintenance
Test Phone.
For both Dial Pulse (DP) and
Dual Tone Multifrequency
(DTMF)
systems,
a lineman’s
test set or a single
line te!ephone.
A modular
jack
(MTCE
PHONE)
is provided
on the front panal
of the
PSU for conneciing
the maintenance
test phone
when
equipped
with a modular
plug. When
the maintenance
test phone
is not equipped
with a modular
plug, a station appearance
can be used via the Main
Distribution Frame
(MDF).
The mainienance
test phone
is used
to perform
the on-line
diagnostic
tests.
Data
Service
Terminal.
A Keyboard-Send-Receive
(KSR)
daia terminal
equipped
with a standard
ASCII
keyboard
and an EIA RS-232C
interface
(Silent
700
Series
Model
743 KSR - Texas
Instruments,
or
equivalent).
The data service
terminal
is used to input
installation
dependent
data (i.e., system
data base)
into
system
memory
when
the standard
data base format
is supplied
with the SATURN
IIE System.

1986

d. -Transmission
Measuring
Set. A transmission
measuring set (TMS)
used to measure
the transmission
quality of a trunk
or station
(Hewlett
Packard
HP-355iA
or
equivalent).
Refer
to the manual
On-Line
DiagnostiC
Tests,
Outgoing
Trunk
Test and Station
Line Tosl.
2.03
handling
Precautions
for PCBs
wifh MCS Integmted Circuiklt
is important
that craft personnel
handling
FCBs
with MOS integrated
circuits
free themselves
from electrostatic
charge
by touching
a grounded
cabinet
frame
before
handling
such
PCEs,
or by wearing
grounded
wrist
straps.
Failur:,
to
observe
this practice
may result
in damage
to MO3
PCBs
due to electrostatic
discharge.
WARNING
lirazardous
voltages
Be
extremely
incjtroubleshooting
panel(s)
removed.

exist
r&h.%
the eqo&ment
careful
when
perr”orming
procedures
with
the

cabins?.
fcsaoquipmcr;t

2.04
PCB Removal
and P,ep!acemenZ
Guide%%
In many
instances
during
testing,
the corrective
action
for a procedure
in which
the proper
verification
was not obtained
requires
that
a PCB or a power
supply
be removed
and replaced
with a
spare.
Tablo 2.00 provides
the guidelines
that shou!d
be o!)served
when
removing
and rep!acing
PCBs
and powor
SI:;Xplies in an active
sysicm.
2.05
lnifial
Visual
kspactizn
Procedurx.
The visu’al inspection
procedures
contained
in Tab!e 2.01 must be psrfcrmcd
to ensure
that the equipment
comprising
the SATURN
ItE System has been
properly
installed
and configured
to meet the
installation
requirements.
Before proceeding
wiih the visual
inspections,
the front, rear and side panels
of the cabinei
should
be removed
to allcw
thorough
inspection
of the equipment.

2-1

A30808-X5130-8120-l-8928
Issue
1, May

Table
I’AODIJLE
UNIT

depending
Applicable;

PC3

and

Power

CIOP
CONF
DTMF
FDDO,
FDDl
LTUC
LTUPS
MCA
MEM3
MEM4
MSM
MSM
Baitery
PIMD
PSC
PSU
RAUP
SLAl6
SLMA-0
SLMA-S
SLMD
SMXTG
TMBA-2
TMBA-4
TMBM
TMIE
-48PS.l
-48PSt
* Optional
NA = Not

2.00

SERVEC”
STATE

.
f
l

ES
00s
00s
00s
NA
NA

f
customer/system
= Out-of-Service

NA
NA
00s
NA
NA
NA
kz
NA
NA
NA
00s
NA
NA
NA
00s
00s
003
00s

upon
00s

Supply

Remcval

1986

Guidelines
SPECIAL
INSTRUCTKWIS
Notes
Notes
Note
None
Note
Note
Notes
Notes
Notes
Note
Note
Note
Notes
Note
Notes
Note
Note
Note
Note
Notes
Note
Note
No?e
Note
Note
Noie

1 and
1 and

2
2

1 and
1 and
1 and

2
2
2

1 and

3
4
5

1
6
3
7
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
8
3

requirements.

Notes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

2-2

System
outage
(halts
call processing).
Set BASIC
PS circuit
breaker
on PSU to off.
Open
FDD and remove
floppy
disk before
removing
PCB. After new PCB is inserted,
reinsert
floppy
disk,
close
FDD, set BASK
PS circuit
breaker
on PSU to on, and press
reset
switch
on CIOP
VVait for in-process
ca!ls i0 complete.
Removal
places
one-half
of ports
in shelf out-of-service.
Before
removal,
set related
LTUPS
circuit
breaker
on PSU to off. Removal
places
all ports
in shelf out-of-service.
Battery
may be replaced
with power
applied
to system.
System
outage
(halts
call processing).
Before
removal,
set all circuit
breakers
to off, open
FDDs
and remove
floppy disks.
After replacement,
reinsert
floppy
disks,
close
FDDs,
set circuit
breakers
to on, and press
reset
switch
on CIOR
Set related
circuit
breaker
on PSU to off. May halt call processing
depending
upon
system
configuration
and
traffic.
If there
are two -48Vdc
power
supplies
(where
system
includes
an Expansion
Cabinei),
the remaining
supply may have sufficient
capacity
to support
system
operation.

I
SATURN
Installation

IIE

EPABX
Test Procedures

A30808-X5130-B120-l-8928
Issue
1, May

Table
STEP

VISUAL

Check
electrical

that

Check
11OVac

that the -48Vdc
or 22OVac.

power

Check
(PSU)

that all circuit
are in the OFF

breakers
position

If the MSM
connected
check
that

the
outlet.

cabinet

Visual

Check
that each
PCB
backplane
connector.

Check
that the DIP
to meet the operating
service
terminal
to
data(i.e.,data
base)
data base format
is

INSPECTION
power

cord

supply

REFERENCE
is not

connected

is strapped

in the

to an

for

on the Power
System
and fuses
inserted.

system

is withdrawn

Unit

is not
Also

from

Chec!c
that the intercabinet
signal
and power/ground
arrangements
are complete
and all connectors
are
ed according
to the referenced
illustrations
(Figures
through
2.03).

Check
signal

Berg Clips
connectors

are on pins 27 and
on basic
shelf.

set

TMIE,
TMBA-2
to the
of the Central

cabling
firmly
seat2.00

28 of unused

SATURN
Procedures

IIE

SATURN
Procedures

IIE

SATURN
Procedures

IIE

SATURN
Procedures

IIE

SATURN
Procedures

IIE

EPABX
Practice

Installation
(Section

4.00)

EPABX
Practice

Installation
(Section

4.00)

EPABX
Practice

Installation
(Section

4.00)

EPABX
Practice

Installation
(Section

4.00)

EPABX
Practice

Installation
(Section

4.00)

its

switch
settings
for the CIOP
board
are
characteristics
of the particular
data
be used
to input
the installation-dependent
into system
memory
when
the standard
supplied
with the SATURN
IIE System.

Check
that each
trunk-type
PCB (i.e., TMEM,
and/or
TMBA-4)
is properly
strapped
according
operating
characteristics
of the trunk
facility
Office
(CO) or distant
PABX.

that
cable

Inspection

is installed,
check
that the Battery
Packk
but inserted
into corresponding
position.
the PSU is strapped
for MSM
operation.

2.01

1986

Figures

SATURN
Procedures

2.00

through

IIE EPABX
Practice

2.03

Installation
(Section

4.00)

2-3

I
SATURN
,xtallation

IIE

EPABX
Test Procedures

A30808-X5130-B120-l-5928
Issue
1, May

w13

Figure

2.00

Signal

Cable

Distribution

for

the

SATURN

IIE

System

(Basic

Cabinet)

1986

SATURN
Installation

IIE EPABX
Test Procedures

A30808-X5130-B120-l-8928
issue
1, May

EXPANSION

1986

CABINET
\

W22

W23

I --- --: ] FDD 1:
,

i;wi!

LiTJ-. --

i-L--i--

A5040-2.313186

Figure

2.01

Signal

Cable

- _-__

-r-----

BASIC

CA&NET

Distribution

for

the

SATURN

*
IIE

System

(Expansion

Cabinet)

2-5

SATURN
tnstallation

IIE

EPABX
Test Procedures

A30808-X5130-8120-1-8928
Issue
1, May

LTUSO
LINE

TRUNK

UNIT

J42

SHELF

J43

BASS
BASIC

El a---J46

SHELF

J47
E2

05039.1..wmG

2-6

Figure

2.02

Power/Ground

Distribution

for

the

SATURN

IIE System

(Basic

Cabinet)

1986

A30808-X5130-B120-l-8920
Issue
1, May

EXPANSION

CABINET

REF.

----

L --M--e--\

1986

-,-,

------

-----

BASIC‘CABINET

A5U38-1-4:3:86

Figure

2.03

Power/Ground

Distribution

for

the

REF.

SATURN

IIE System

(Expansion

Cabinet)

2-7

(2-8

blank)

SATURN
Installation

IIE

EPABX
Test Procedures

A30808-X5130-B120-l-8928
issue
1. May

3.01
General.
The SATURN
HE System
must be connected
to an earth ground
(i.e., metallic
cold water pipe or master ground
busbar)
in addition
to the safety
ground
in the ac power
cord.
A G-gauge
(twisted
copper
wire) conductor
should
be connected between
the grounding
lug E5 located
on the bottom
of the
cabinet
frame
and the snlccted
earth ground
(refer to Section
3.00 in the SATURN
HE EPABX
Installation
Procedures
practice for details).
The following
tests must be performed
to ensure
that
proper
earth
ground
connections
have
been
accomplished,
and that ground
connections
within the cabinet
assembly
have not been damaged
or loosened
during shipment.

extremely
procedures

voltsgos

txkt

within

the equipment

csbinef.

Table

System

PROCEDURE

t~s%i~g/l’roubiesh~oting
panel(s)
removed.

3.03
Shelf Ground
Continuity
Test. Each LTU shelf assembly within
the cabinet
assembly
is grounded
via two vertical
busbars.
Beiore
proceeding
with the test procedures
indicated in Table 3.01, check
that each shelf backplane
is inierconnetted
with the busbar
flanges
and adequately
secured
into
position.

3.00

when
performing
the equipment

3.02
System
Grcund
Test. Before
proceeding
with the test’
procedures
indicated
in Table
3.00, check
that the earth
ground
connections
are secure
and ground
conductors
are
firmly
positioned
on grounding
lug E5 at ihe bottom
of the
cabinet
frame.

WARNiNG
Hazardous

ca-ej’Ll
with

1986

Ground

Test

VERlFlCATlON

IF VERlFlCATION
IS NOT OBTAINED

If connected,
remove
ac power
from commercial
power
outlet.

Short
together
leads.

Set
digital
multimeter
to lowest
resistance
range
and
connect
its
leads
between
the U-ground
pin of
the ac power
cord and the U-ground
socket
in the
commercial
power
outlet (refer to Figure
3.00 for details).

Resistance
measured
should
be
betweem
0 and 2 ohms
greater
than
the measured
test lead resistance.

If a reading
greater
ihan 2 ohms
is
obtained,
the faulty
ground
connection
must
be isolated
and corrected
befora
continuing
wi?h the
installation
test procedures

Repeat
power
cabinet

Same

digital
and

multimeter
noie resistance

tesi

cord

leads
of test

procedure
with second
ac
cord
if optional
expansion
is incorporated
into system.

Table
STEP

remove
power

Shelf

3 above.

Ground

Continuity

ac power
outlet.

as step

3 above.

Test

VERIFICATION

PROCEDURE

If connected,
from commercial

3.01

as step

IF VERIFICATiON
IS NOT OBTAINED

cord

Set
digital
multimeter
to lowest
resistance
range
and connect
its
leads between
ground
lug E5 located
at the bottom
of the cabinet
frame,
and one of the busbar/backplane
attaching
screws
for each
existing
LTU shelf (refer
to Figure
3.01)

Resistance
measured
between
0 and 1 ohm
the measured
multimeter
resistance.

should
greater
test

be
than
lead

If a reading
greator
than
1 ohm
is
obtained,
the faulty
ground
connection must
be corrected
before
continuing
the
installation
test
procedures.

3-l

SATURN
Installation

IIE

EPABX
Test Procedures

A30808-X5130-B120-l-8928
Issue
1, May

BASIC
GND
LUG
(ES)

Cabinet
Fuse
Power

Box Facility

PSU
llOVAC~$GOi-fZ
Neulral
Ground

f
El
5,
hlatn Cabmel
(Rear View)

El
D

(Ootlonall

Recommended:
B-gauge
(iwtsted
Copper Wire)
conductor
not exceedmg
i26 feet m length.

I.1

Master

Ground

Busbar

Earth

Figure

3-2

3.00

Ground

System

Note:

Ground

Single

Test

Point Ground

Connections

(SPG)

configuration

IS shown

1986

SATURN
Installation

IIE EPABX
Test Procedures

A30808-X5130-8120-1-8928
Issue
1, May

Busbar
Busbar/
Backplane
Attaching
Screws

Grounded

1986

Fuse

GND
Lug
No. E5 ’

-7
I(Rear

View)

I
L ---_

Recommended:
6 Guage
(twisted copper
wire) conductor
not exceeding
126 feet in length.

Box Facility

-I

Power
Cord Plug

7
Earth

Master

Note:

Figure

3.01

Ground

Busbar

Ground

Single

Shelf

Point Ground

Ground

(SPG)

Continuity

configuration

Test

is shown

Connections

3-3

(3-4

blank)

I -_
SATURN
installation

IIE

A30808-X5130-BlZO-l-8928
Issue
1, May

EPABX
Test Procedures

SECTION
4.01
tributed
plies
+5Vdc,
voltage
input
tests
formed
been
cabinet

4.00

POWER-UP

General.
The SATURN
IIE System
makes
use of dispower
in the equipment
cabinet.
Several
power
supare used in the system.
These
power
supplies
provide
-SVdc,
+12Vdc,
-12Vdc,
-48Vdc,
90Vac-20Hz
ringing
and message
waiting
voltage,
from a 11OVac
60Hz
power
source.
After satisfactorily
performing
the ground
indicaied
in Section
3.00, the following
tests
must be perto ensure
that proper
power
cable
connections
have
accomplished
and that the power
supplies
inside
the
assembly
have not been damaged
during
shipment.

Table
YiEP

4.60

TESTS
WARNING

Hazardous
extremely
pmcedures

voltages
exist within
careful
when performing
with the equipment

the

equipment
cabinet.
testin@roubkshootjng’
panel(s)
removed.

4.02
Power-Up/Output
Voltage
Tests.
Before proceeding
with
the test procedures
indicated
in Table 4.00, check
that all power cable assemblies
are properly
secured
into their corresponding locations.
Note that the test procedures
in Table 4.00 include
procedures
for testing
the optional
MSM, when equipped
in the
system.

Power-Up/Output

PROCEDtJRE

1986

Voltage

Test

VERIFICATION

IF VERIFICATION
IS NOT
08TAlNED

f not previously
done,
extract
each
‘CB in the system
from its respecive backplane
connector
in basic
md LTU shelves.
Check
that all circuit
breakers
on the
‘SU are in the off positions
and that
311 fuses
are inserted
in their
cor,esponding
locations.
Jsing
the digital
multimeter
(or an
3c polarity
indicator),
verify
that the
:ommercial
ac power
receptacle
Jsed for powering
the systsm
has the
Iroper
polarity.
Connect
zommercial

the

ac
ac

power
power

?lace
the following
on the PSU to the
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)

indication
3.00 and

must
3.01.

coincide

green

LED

with

if polarity
indication
does
not coincide, correct
before
proceeding
with
the remainder
of test in this lable.

cord(s)
to the
receptacle(s).

circuit
on (up)

breakers
position:

Basic
PS
-48PSO
-48PSl
(if equipped)
LTUPSO
(if equipped)
LTUPSl
(if equipped)
LTUPS2
(if equipped)

If the
equipped
follows:
2)

‘olarity
=igures

optional
in the

MSM
system,

module
proceed

If not previously
done,
and insert
battery
pack
the MSM assembly.

is
2s

connect
into

b)Press
the BATTERY
TEST
switch
on the PSU and
release
after verification
has
been
obtained.

The
light

associated
steadily.

should

If the
green
LED
remains
cxtinguished,
the battery
pack
is below
acceptable
voltage
limits.
Let MSM
charge
battery
pack and retry test after 30 minutes
have elapsed.
If green
LED remains
extinguished,
the battery pack
is defective
and requires
replacement.

‘l-1

SATURN
Installation

IlE EPABX
Test Procedures

A30808-X5130-8120-1-8928
issue
1, May

Table

SE?

Power-Up/Output

PROCEDURE

4.00

VEfiIFICATION

The red LED
TEST.should

d) On the PSU,
place
the circuit
breaker
designated
BASIC
PS
to the on (up) position.

The red BATTERY
be extinguished.

Set digital
dc voltage
tests.

multimeter
scale

To measure
the
input
voltages,

Test (Continued)

Voltage

c) On the PSU, place
the circuit
breaker
designated
BASIC
PS
in the off (down)
position.

for

IF VERIFICATION
IS NOT OBTAINED

designated
be steadily
TEST

BATTERY
lit.
LED

If the red LED remains
replace
the MSM.

should

extinguished,

If the red LED remains
steadily
lit,
either
the cabinet
ac power
cord is
not connected
to the commercial
ac
power
receptacle
or a local ac power failure
has occurred.

to appropriate
the following

unloaded
proceed

1986

NOTE
If further
troubleshooting
information
is required
during
these
testing
procedures,
refer
to SATURN
IIE
EPABX
Maintenance
and
Troubleshooting
Practice.

basic shelf
as follows:

a) On basic
backplane
shown
in
Figure
4.00, take reading
between
terminal
El, E2, E3 or
E4 and ground.

Voltage
tween

measured
+4.5 and

should
read
+5.5 Vdc.

be-

If reading
is not within
tolerance,
adjust +5V ADJUST
potentiometer
on
PSU. If still out-of-tolerance
replace
PSU.

b) On basic
backplane
connector
J46, shown
in Figure
4.00, take
readings
beiween
pins 2 and 3.

Voltage
tween

measured
-43
and

should
-53Vdc.

read

bo-

If reading
is not within
to!erance,
check
the -48P-BASIC
fuse in PSU.
If fuse is good,
replace
-48PSO.

c) Set digital
multimeter
to appropriate
Vat scale
and take
reading
between
pins 1 and
of J46.

Voltage
tween

measured
75 and 100

should
Vat.

be-

If the voltage
is not present,
check
and replace
RGEN
fuse or RAC BASIC fuse on PSU.
If fuses
are good,
replace
RGEN
PCB. If voltage
still not
present,
replace
PSU.

d) Set digital multimeter
to appropriate Vdc scale
and take readings
between
the following
pins on
basic
backplane
connector
J47
(shown
in Figure
4.00):
1) Pins

1 and

Voltage
tween

measured
-4.9
and

should
-5.2Vdc

be-

If reading
is not
replace
the PSU.

within

tolerance,

2) Pins

2 and

Voltage
tween

measured
-43
and

should
-53Vdc

be-

If reading
check
the
If the fuse

Voltage
tween

measured
-11.3
and

should
-12.7Vdc.

read

be-

If reading
is not
replace
the PSU.

within

tolerance,

Voltage
tween

measured
+11.3 and

should
+12.7Vdc.

be-

If reading
is not
replace
the PSU.

within

tolerance,

Voltage
tween

measured
should
4.85 and 5.15Vdc.

be-

If reading
is not within
tolerance,
check
that J16 on the rear panel
of
the PSU is strapped
to the MSM terminal.
If the strap is in place,
replace
the MSM.

is not within
tolerance,
-488 BASIC
fuse on PSU.
is good,
replace
-48PS0.

e) On basic
backplane
connector
J48, shown
in Figure
4.00, take
readings
between
the following
pins:
1) Pins
2) Pin
3) Pins

1 and

2 or 3 and
4 and

SATURN
Installation

A3G808-X5130-B120-1-B928
Issue
1, May

IIE EPABX
Test Procedures

lbb!c

Power-Up/Output

Voltage

FROCEDUEE

STEP

813

4.00

Test

(Continued)

VERIFICATION

Connect
positive
lead
multimeter
to pin 5 of
tor J48 and negative
terminal
El on basic
plane.
(Refer
to Figure

of digital
conneclead to
back4.00.)

Voltage
0.05Vdc.

measured

IF VERIFICATION
IS NOT
OBTAINED
should

1986

read

If reading
ADJUST
adjustment
PSU.

is not 0.05 Vdc, adjust
+5V
potentiometer
on PSU.
If
is not effective,
replace

After
satisfactorily
completing
step
8A, proceed
as follows
to measure
the loaded
basic shelf input voltages.
a) On the PSU, place
the circuit
breaker
designa?ed
BASIC
PS
in the off (down)
position.

The MSM
red LED
TERY
TEST
should

designated
be steadily

BATlit.

c) On the PSU, place
the circuit
breaker
designated
BASIC
PS
in the on (up) position.

The MSM red LED
TERY
TEST should

designated
BATbe extinguished.

d) Repeat
measuring
on basic
backplane
J46, J47, J48 and
El-E4
as indicated

Same
verification
as in steps
through
e), except
that -t-S!/&
minal
El should
read between
and 5.15Vdc
under
load.

b) Plug all previously
extracted
PCBs
on the basic
shelf into
their respective
backplane
connectors.

To measure
input voltages
as follows:

procedures
connectors
terminals
in step 8A.

the unloaded
(if applicable),

8A a)
at ter4.85

LTU shelf
proceed

a) On the LTU backplane
connector
J42,shown
in Figure
4.01,take
a reading
between
the following
pins:
1) Pins

1 and

Voltage
tween

measured
+4.5 and

2) Pins

3 and

Voltages
tween

-4.9

Voltage
tween

measured
-43
and

Voltage
tween

3) Pins

3 and

4) Set digital
multimeter
read Vat and connect
tween
pins 2 and 3.
b) Set digital
propriate
C) On

multimeter
Vdc scale.

LTU backplane
J43,shown
in Figure
a reading
between
ing pins:

to
be-

should
+5.5Vdc.

be-

If reading
is not within to!e:ance,
just +5V ADJUST
potentiometer
LTUPS.
If the adjustment
does
bring
voltage
into tolerance,replace
LTUPS.

should
-5.2Vdc.

be-

If reading
is not
replace
appropriate

should
-53Vdc.

be-

If reading
does
not coincide
with
verification
reading,
check
the -48P
LTU fuse on PSU.
If fuse
is good,
replace
-48PS0.

measured
should
75 and 1OOVac.

be-

If
voltage
is
not
present,
check/replace
RGEN
fuse or RAC
LTUO fuse on PSU. If fuses are good,
replace
PSU.

measured
and

adon
not

within
tolerance,
LTUPS.

to ap-

connector
4.01, take
the follow-

4-3

SATURN
Installation

IIE

EPABX
Test Procedures

A30808-X5130-B120-l-6928
Issue
1, May

Table
STEP

4.00

Power-Up/Output

PROCEDURE

Voliagc?

Test

(Continued)

VEFllFlCATlON

IF VERIFICATION
IS NOT
OBTAINED

1) Pins

1 and

Voltage
tween

measured
+4.5 and

should
+5.5Vdc.

read

be-

If reading
is not within
tolerance,
adjust +5V ADJUST
potentiometer
on
LTUPSO.
If adjustment
does not bring
the voltage
into tolerance,
replace
LTUPSO.

2) Pins

1 and

Voltage
tween

measured
-43
and

should
-53Vdc.

read

be-

If reading
is not within
tolerance,
replace
-48PS0.
If voltage
not
present,
check
-488
LTUO
fuse on
PSU. If fuse is good, replace
48PS0.

3) Pins

1 and

Voltage
tween

measured
+11.3 and

should
+12,7Vdc.

read

be-

If reading
is not
replace
LTUPSO.

within

tolerance,

4) Pins

1 and

Voltage
ttieen

measured
-11.3
and

should
-12.7Vdc.

read

be-

If reading
is not
replace
LTUPSO.

within

tolerance,

Voltage
tween

measured
+4.5 and

should
+55Vdc.

read

be-

If reading
is not within
tolerance,
check
+5V
cabling
between
between
basic
shelf
and LTU

-.
d) On LTU backplane
connector
J44 shown
in Figure
4.01, take
a reading
between
pins 1 and
2 or pins 1 and 3.
98

Repeat
steps 9A a) through
d) for expansion
cabinet
LTU shelf voltages
(if applicable)
substituting
-48PSl
for
48Vdc
power
supply
and appropriate
LTUPS.

After satisfactorily
completing
steps
9A and 96, proceed
2s follows
to
measure
the loaded
LTU shelf input
voltages:
a) On the PSU, place
the circuit
breakers
designated
LTUPSO,LTUPSl,and
LTUPS2
in the off (down)
positions.
b) Plug all previously
extracted
PCBs
on the LTU shelves
their respective
backplane
connectors.
c) On the
breakers
LTUPSl,
on (up)

into

PSU, place
the circuit
designated
LTUPSO,
and LTUPS2
in the
positions.

d) Repeat
measurements
backplane
connectors
J43, and J44 per step

4-4

1986

on LTU
J42,
9A.

Voltages
measured
same
tolerances
ply should
read
5.15 Vdc.

should
be within
except
+5Vdc
supbetween
4.85 and

SATURN
lnstallatlon

IIE

EPABX
Test Proccdurcs

A30808-X5130-8120-1-8928
Issue
I, May

J46/P46

J47/P47

Figure

4.00

Location

of Input

Voltage

Connectors

011 Basic

Bockplnnc

1986

i
SATURN
nstallation

IIE

---I
I

EPABX
Test Procedures

A30808-X5130-8120-1-8928
Issue
1, May

:42/?42

J43/P43

J44lP44

Figure

4.0.1

Location

Input

Voltage

Connectors

LTU

Dackp!ane

1986

SATURN
Installation

IIE

A30808-X5130-B120-l-8928
Issue
1, May

EPABX
Test Procedures

5.01
General.
The SATURN
Controlled
(SPC) system.
The
tical floppy
disks
that contain
installation-dependent
data.
installation-dependent
data,
tem data base,
to complete
the customer.
This information
number
of station
lines and
their operating
characteristics.

IIE EPABX
is a Stored-Programsystem
is shipped
with two identhe basic
operating
and the
The operating
program
uses the
commonly
referred
to as the sysand process
calls as required
by
includes
such
items
as the
trunks
in the system,
as well as

system’s
operating
program,
contained
on the floppy
Uisks,
is loaded
into the FDD modules
for the initial
processor
initialization.
Both floppy
disks
are loaded,
with either
disk
placed
in either drive (FDDO
or FDDI).
Before
proceeding
with
the loading
procedures
indicated
in Table 5.00, the following
precautions
must be observed
when handling
the floppy
disks.
Figure
5.00 illustrates
the floppy
disk and storage
envelope.

The exact
equipment
configuration
of the SATURN
IIE System must be defined
in the data base in order for the system
to operate
properly.
Depending
on how the system
is ordered,
the data base is supplied
in a standard
format
or, on request,
can be supplied
completely
defined
and prepared
by Siemens.
When
the standard
data base
format
is supplied,
via the
SATURN
EPABX
Data Base Preparation
practice,
the equipment configuration
of the particular
installation-site
must be
evaluated
to determine
if additional
information
must be added to the floppy
disks.
The floppy
disks
are updated
via a
service
terminal.
The procedures
for defining
the data base
and inputting
the data
to memory
are described
in the
SATURN
EPABX
Data
Base
Preparation
practice
and
SATURN
EPABX
Customer
Memory
Update
(CMU)
Procedures
practice.
5.02
boadjng
Operating
ing the Power-Up/Output

D&a.
Voltage

After satisfactoriiy
Tests in Section

Centering
Hole

Prior to using
a floppy
disk, leave disk in the same
environment
as the FDD module
for at least 5 minutes.

not

place

not

write

Do not touch
floppy
Damage
to FDD head
ing up dirt.

Always
is not

return
in use.

heavy
on

objects

floppy

complet4.00, the

disk
may

dislc

Index
Hole

Protective
Envelope
I
I

Storage
Envelope

Floppy

floppy

disk.

suriace
while
hand!ing.
occur
due to skin oil pick-

to storage

envelope

when

5.03
Inputting
CMU
Data to F!oppy
Disk.
After
satisfactorily loading
the operating
disks
as indicated
in Table 5.00,
refer to the SATURN
EPABX
Data Base Preparation
practice
which
defines
the particular
system’s
data base,
and SATURN
EPABX
Customer
Memory
Update
(CMU)
Prccsdures
practice to input
the installation-dependent
da?a to memory

Read/W
Window

5.00

disk.

Figure

1986

Disk

and

Storage

Envelope

SATURN IIE EPABX
Installation Test Procedures

A3080&X5130-B120-l-8928
Issue 1, May 1986

WARNING
Hazardous
performing

voltages
exist
testir;g/~roobleshooting

within

the

Table 5.00 Loading
;TEP

equipment
cabinet.
LJ with the
procedur-

Procedures

Be e&e&y
equ&ment

for Operaling

VERIFICATION

PROCEDURE

On the PSU, shown in Figure 5.01,
place the FAtLURE
TRANSFER
switch in the AUTO position,

Insert a floppy disk into slot opening
of each FDD until it stops (Figure 5.02).

careful
panel(s)

when
removed.

Disk
!F VERIFICATION
IS NOT OBTA!NED

NOTE:
Either system disk may be placed
either FDD.

Close FDD latch to secure floppy disk
in place.

Perform the following operations
the CIOP PCB (Figure 5.03).

a) Connect service terminal to
TTY connector on CIOP PCB
(Figure 5.03).

Set CIOP DlP switches (Figure 5.03)
for service terminal in use per Table
5.01.

b) Depress the reset
ed under the CIOP
nectar. Use pencil
nonmetallic
object
the switch.

The following ihree messages should
appear on the service terminal:

switch locatllY conor other
to depress

1) THE SIB SIDE IS READY
USE

FOR

2) READY TO START BOOT
LOADER
3)“* BOOT LOADER

COMPLETE”’

After the last message,
the red
STO-ST3 LEDs perform a cycling sequence and the green ACTV LED remains lit.
When the loading
plete, the red LEDs
one LED remains
conds, then cycling
green LED (ACTV)

process is comstop cycling and
lit for a few sestarts again. The
remains lit.

If no failures occur during processor
initialization, the four red LEDs display
a code indicating that processor initialization has been completed
and
the processor is on-line. Concurrently, the service terminal displays software version, date base version, patch
level of disk software, site information
and the prompt ENTER PASSWORD.
If it is desired to perform CMU procedures or clear the alarm stack, enter
the appropriate
password.
If the
proper password is entered, a dateand-time prompt is displayed. If an incorrect password is entered, INVALID
PASSWORD ENTERED is displayed.

5-2

If a failure occurs during initia!ization,
the LEDs flash a binary value to indicate loading error as described in Table 5.02.
Should any of the failures described
in Table 5.02 occur during processor
initialization,
remove the floppy disks
from FDDs and insert the spare floppy disks into the FDDs. If no failures
cccur, the floppy disks previously removed are defective. If the same
failure
refer to ACTION
cOlumn occurs,
in Table 5,02

SATURN
Installation

A30808-X5130-0120-1-8928
lssuc
1, May

IIE EPABX
Test Procedures

Table
STEP

5.00

Procedures

for

PROCEDURE

Operating

Disk

1936

(Continued)

VERlFlCATlON

IF VERIFlCAT!ON
IS NOT OBTAINED

’

If the operating
disks that were loaded
did
not
contain
a Siemens-.
prepared
data base, refer to SATURN
EPABX
Data Base Preparation
practice to define
the particular
system
data base,
and the SATURN
EPABX
Customer
Memory
Update
Procedures practice
to input the installationdependent
data
to the
system
memory.

Table

5.01

CIOP

DIP

Switch

Settings

CAUTION:
Before
to the
to the

removing
GOP
PCB to set switches,
off (c?own)
position.
After
replacement
on (up) position.

SWITCH
NUMBER

SWITCH

Maintenance/

Not

3&4

NOTE:

One

Stop

Odd

Parity

Seven
following

are

note)

Baud

Bit

Two

Rate
Stop

(see

Disabled

Parity

Enabled

Bits

Eight

Bits

rate

combinations

SW3

SW4

OFF
ON
OFF
ON

OFF
OFF
ON
ON

for

switches

3 and
BAUD

no?e)

Bits

Parity

baud

(OPZX)

Used

Even

the

OFF

Normal
Not

(see

on lhe PSU
breaker
back

SWITCH

Test

Rate

brea!:er
circuit

(CLOSED)

Used

Baud

The

place
BASIC
PS circuit
of ClOP PCB, place

RATE
300
1200
2400
9600

5-3

I’
A30808-X5130-(3120-l-8928
Issue
1, May

Table
ST0
LED

OFF
:z
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON

ST1
LED

ST2
LED

ST3
LED

OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON

OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF

%
ON
ON
ON

%
OFF
OFF
ON

%F
OFF
OFF
OFF

%F
OFF
ON
ON

OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON

5.02

LED

Display

Values

for

1986

Errors

HEX

CCDE

ERRCR

0
1

DETECTED

ACTION
_._________-________
Note 1
Note 1
Notes
1 and 3
Noie 1
Note 1
Note 1
Note 1
NOieS 1 and 3
Note 1
Note 1
Note 1
______-___--___-____-Note ‘1
Note 2
Note 2

Start of self test not halted
Main processor
error
EPROM
checksum
error
MEM
slot 0 low 64k test error
8k by 8 static
RAM test error
IRAM
memory
test error
ORAM
memory
test error
SIB side error
Global
memory
error
Watchdog
iimer
error
SIB serial
loopback
test error
SIB counter
timing
test error
Start boot process
(self test done)
Disk coniroller
error
Drive not ready
error
CRC retry errcrs
exceed
8

2
3
4
5
6
:
D
E
F
8
9
A
I3

Notes:
1.

Upon

Upon
failure,
retry loading
procedure
and then CIOP
PCB, if necessary.

failure,

retry

using

another

If reload
and CIOP
is no longer
present.

(Noie

1) is not

effective,

Po*wr

Sys?em

PCB

procedure.

If failure

replacement

Figure

5.01

persists,

replace
set

CIOP

of floppy

PC3.

disks.
replace

Unit

If failure
memory

(Front

View)

persists,
PCBs

chcc!i/replace
starting

from

disk
sloi

0 until

drives
failure

SATURN
Installation

A30808-X5130-6120-1-8928
Issue
1, May

IIE EPABX
Test Procedures

WRITE
PROTECT
NOTCH

/
/

LATCH
OPEN\
LATCH

FLOPPY

CLoSED
\

Figure

5.02

Floppy

Dish

Proceduics

DiSi’c

1986

SATURN
Installation

IIE EPABX
Test Procedures

A30800-X5130-6120-l-8928
Issue
1, May

LED

(Red)
ST3
LED

ACTW
LED

Connector
Service
Terminal

‘witch

Figure

5-6

(6 pages)

5.03

CIOP

Printed

Circuit

Coard

1986

SATURN
Installation

IIE EPABX
Test Procedures

A30808-X5130-BlZO-l-8920
Issue
1. May

6.01
General.
After satisfactorily
loading
the cperating
disk
and inputting
CMU data to system
memory
via a service
terminal,
the operational
capability
of the system
must be verified
after
the
necessary
MDF
cross-connections
are
performed.
The
SATURN
IIE System
software
contains
a
group
of system
and apparatus
(ancillary
equipment)
diagnostic
test routines
which
are accessed
via the maintenance
phone.
Resulting
visual
and/or
audible
responses
from these
on-line
diagnostic
tests
make
it possible
to verify correct
operation or detect and isolate
system
and apparatus
malfunctions.
If in doubt
about
a SATURN
PCB
or apparatus
maliunctioning,
craft personnel
should
refer to the SATURN
IIE EPABX
Mainionance
and Troubleshooting
praciice
for further details.
If a SATURN
PCB or apparatus
is proven
to be
defective, craft personnel
should
proceed
according
to the
instructions
contained
in the MRA
kit.

desrred
in tho equipment,
it may be installed
neartho
front of the cabinet,
and cross-connected
per Figure
6.02.
6.03
MDF Cross-Connecting
Procedures.
After the maintenance
phone
and modem
connections
have been completed, perform
the necessary
MDF cross-connections
according
to the equipment
configuration
plan.
The following
illusirations are provided
to assist
craft personnel
in the MDF cross
connections
of peripheral
interfacing
devices:
a.

Figures
6.02 and 6.03 - Cross-Connections
for rotary
or pushbutton
Single
Line Telephone
Instruments
interfacing
with SLMA-S
and SLA16
PCBs,
respectively.

Figure
6.04 - Cross-Connections
Telephone
Interfacing
with

SLMD

for Siemens
PCB.

Digital

for

SATURN

Atien-

Central
Trunks.

Office

Figure
6.05 - Cross-Connections
dant Console.

Figure
6.06 - Cross-Connections
(CO)
and Direct
Inward
Dialing

for
(DID)

Figure
6.07 - Cross-Connections
E&M Tie Trunks.

for Two-Wire

Figure
I) E&M

Maintenance
Phone.
At the MDF connecting
block on
which
PSU cable
J13 is terminated,
cross-connect
the
T&R leads
of pair number
1 (W/BLBL/W)
to the T&R
leads
of the subscriber
line circuit
assigned
for maintenance
purposes
(refer to Figure
6.00 for details).
Note
that this subscriber
line circuit
must be classmarked
with the Maintenance
Diagnostic
Test (TESTDIAG)
and
Apparatus
Test (TSTAPP)
features.

Figure
6.09 - Cross-Ccnnections
E&M Tie Trunks.

Figure
6.10 - Cross-Connections
II) E&M Tie Trunks.

Figure
6.11 - Cross-Connections
for Recorded
Announcement
Equipment
(DID and Tie Trunk
Vacant
Number
Intercept,
and ACD Announcement
Service).

Modem.
From the system
T&R connecting
block
that
allocates
system
MDF cable
J44 from the basic shelf,
cross-connect
the T&R of pair number
24 (V/BRBR/V)
to the T&R leads of the subscriber
line circuit
to be used
for modem
application
(refer to Figure
6.01 for details).
The subscriber
line circuit
to be used for modem
application
must
be assigned
to a class
of service
in
which the Data Line Security
(DATASEC)
classmark
has
been
enabled.

Figure
6.12 - Cross-Connections
Equipment
with or without

connections aie as follows:

’

6.02
Connecticn
of Maintenance
Phcne
and
Modem.
Figures
6.00 and 6.01 provide
the details
for the maintenance
phone
and modem
initial MDF cross-connections.
Figure
6.00
also identifies
the leads
used when
interfacing
other
maintenance
related
equipment
such
as a power
failure
transfer
subsystem
and dry contact
closures
for remote
minor
and
major
alarm
indications.
Note
that
such
equipment
is
customer-provided
and craft
personnel
should
follow
the
manufacturer’s
instructions
when
installing
them.
To connect
ihe maintenance
phone
and modem,
the initial
MDF cross-

1986

After the above initial MDF cross-connections
performed,
the DTMF
telephone
set to be
maintenance
phone
can be connected
to
jack designated
MTCE
PHONE
on the PSU
with a standard
modular
plug, or connected
to the T&R leads of the associated
subscriber
cuit. Note that if a permanent
maintenance

have been
used as the
the modular
if equipped
at the MDF
line cirphone
is

6.03 - Cross-Connections
Tie Trunks.

for

(Type

Four-l”dirc

for T;:jo-Wire

for

Four

for
Answerbaclc

Figure
6.13 -Cross-Connections
tion Equipment.

Figures
6.14 and 6.15 - Cross-Connections
on-Hold
Feature
via a Music
Source,
a TMBA4
and an SLMA/SLAlG
PCB,

Figure
6.16 - Cross-Connections
Equipment
With Answerback

Figure
6.17 - Cross-Connections
Equipment
Without
Answerback

Figure
Night

6.18 - Cross-Connections
Answer
(ZUNA
or UNA)

(T]pe

Wire

I!)

(Type

Coda
Calling
Capability.

for DTMF

for
Capability.

Dial

Dicta-

for Musicinterfacing
with
respectively.
Zoned

Paging

for Zoned
Capability.

Paging

for Zoned
Universal
Signaling
Equipment,

6-l

SATURN
lnstallatlon

IIE EPABX
Test Procedures

A30808-X5130-B120-l-B928
Issue
1, May

,-Syslein

MDF Cable

J13

Cross-connect
.to SLMA circuit
for the maintenance
telephone.

PXFER

(No&h

PXFER

(Normally

\$$!
0

Ooen1

6.00

Mainienance

> :tG
>
14
D > FUBL

Phone

System

Cross-connect
to failure transfer
relay(s)
subsystem
(customerprovided).

Closed)

Syslem Maiafcnancc
Figure

designated

and

MDF

TIP
RING
TIP

(Major-NC)
(Major Common)
(Major-NO)

Connecting Blsck

Mainienance-Related

Cable

144

Cross-Conneciions

from

rSystem

T&R

Basic

The cross-connections
RAUP
PCB.

Figure

shown

G.01

Modem

are

used

for

the

Cross-Connections

Shelf

Connecting

Cross-connect
designated

Note:

Dry contact
closures
for remoie
miner and
major alarm indications (customerprovided).

for

Block

to SLMA
Modem

circuit
application.

i
!

1986

SATURN
Installation

A30808-X5130-B120-1-6928
Issue
1, May

IIE EPABX
Test Procedures

SlNGLE
LINE
TELEPHONE

’ HOUSE
! CABLING

/
I
I
I

EQUIPMENT

Inlerfacing

1986

ROOM

Connecting

Block
System

T&R Connecting
Sys:em

Block
MDF Cable

J32, J34. J36. C38. JSO, J42

or J44 from the EZISIC shelf or J26, J28, J30,
J32. J34. J36. J38, or J40 from tile LTU shelf

----------+(-Jo---

-________

[ ---I

Note:

Dashed

lilies

represent

Figure

installation-dependent

6.02

Sing!e

Line

cross-connections.

Telephone

Interfacing

Connecting

Dashed

lines

Figure

represent

6.03

Single

Line

Telephone

SLMA

PC5

Block
System

installation-dependent

Using

ROOM

Notes:

Cross-Connections

EWIPMENT

HOUSE
i CABLING
I

SINGLE
LINE
TELEPHONE

T&R yecling

Block
System MDF Cable J321J33, J34/J35,
J381J39, J401J41, J42/J43. or J441J45
Basic
shelf;
or J26N27,
J28N29,
J32/J33, J34/J35,
J36/J37, J38/J39 or
from Lhe LTU shelf.

J3EN37,
from the
J3O/J31,
J4O/J41

cross-connections

Cross-Connections

Using

SLA16

PCB

6-3

SATURN
Installation

IIE EPABX
Test Procedures

A30808-X5130-B120-l-8928
Issue
1, May

I
I
’

I
SIEMENS
DIGITAL
TELEPHONE

: HOUSE
ICABLING!
I
I
I

EQUlPMENT

.
I
I

Interfacing

Connecting

1986

FiOOM

Block
System

T&R

Connecting

Block

DYAD or Jr-DYAD

System MDF Cable J32, J34, J36. J38, J40. J42 :
or J44 from the Basic shelf or J26, J28, J30, j
J32, J34, J36, J38, or J40 from the LTU shelf

Note:

Dashed

lines

Figure

represent

6.04

installation-dependent

Siemens

SAbRN
ATTENDANT
CONSOLE

Digital

HOUSE
CABLING

cross-connections

Te!cphone

Cross-Connections

i
I

Using

EQUIPMENT
Interfacing

Connecting

SLMD

PC9

ROOM

Block
System

T&R

Connecting

Block

System
MDF Cable J32, J34. J36. J38. J40. J42 i
or J44 from the Basic shelf or J25 J28, J30, ;
J32, J34, J36, J38. or J40 from the LTU shelf j

Note:

Dashed

lines

represent

Figure

6-4

installation-dependent

6.05

SATURN

cross-connections.

Attendant

Console

Cross-Connections

SATURN
Installation

IIE

EPABX
Test
Procedures

A30808-X5130-B120-1-6928
Issue
1, May

CENTRAL
OFFICE

; TRUNK
I FAClLlTY
I
I
I

;
:

CUSTOMER

1986

PREMISES

Local Telephone
Company
Interfacing
Connecting
Bloc!c

System
MDF Cable J32. J34, J35, J38, J40. J42
or J44 from the Basic shelf or J26, J28. J30, J32,
J34. J36, J38. or J40 from the LTU shelf

co QPC3D
Trunk
Circuit

L
NO!% Dashed

lines represcnl

ins!allalion-dependenr

Figure

DISTANT
OFFICE
OR SlGNALING
EQUIPMENT

TRUNK
FACILITV

G.06

System

T&R

Connecting

Dock

cross-CCnnEcfions

and

DID

i
1

Trunk

Cross-Connections

CUSTOMER
Interfacing

Connecting

PREMlSES

Block
System

T&R Connecting

Block

ystem

MDF Cable J32. J34. J36. J33. J40. J42 or
44 from the Dasic shelf or J26. J28. J30. J32, J34,
36. J38, or J40 from the LTU shelf

J39, J41. J43, or
‘3. J31, J33. 335.
if

i
System

Figure

6.07

E&M Connecting

Two-Wire

(Type

Block

I) E&M

Trunk

Cross-Connections

6-5

SATURN
Installation

IIE

EPABX
Test
Procedures

A30808-X5130.B120-l-8928
Issue
1, May

DISTANT

OFFICE
OR SIGNALING
EQUIPMENT

-l-RUN!<

; FACILITY
;

CUSTOMER

Interfacing

Connecilng

PREMISES

Block

I
I
I
I

System

T&R

DISTANT
OFFICE
OFI SIGNALING
EQUIPIMENT

Figure

6.06

I TRUNK
t FACILITY
(

f
:
I

Connecting

Bloc!c

System
MDF Cable J32. J34. J36, J38. J40, J42
or J44 from the Basic shelf or J26. J28, J30, J32,
J34, J36, J38, or J40 from the LTU shelf

A5135-1-4/W3!3

1986

Four-Wire

(Type

;) E&M

System

Trunk

CUSTOMER
Interfacing

E&M

Connecting

6lock

Cross-Connections

PREMISES

Connecting

Block
~System

L System
MDF Cable J33, J35, J37, J39, J41, J43,
or J45 from the Basic sheif; or J27. J29, J31, J33,
J35. J37, J39 or J41 from the LTU she!f

T&R

Connecting

B!ock

System
MDF Cable J32, J34. J36, J38, J40, J42
or J44 from the Basic shelf: or J26. J28. J30, J32,
J34, J36. J38, or J40 from the LTU shelf

I
a

LoSystem

MDF Cable J33, J35, J37. J39. J41, J43,
or J45 from the Baw shelf; or J27, J29, J31, J33,
J35, J37, J39 or J41 from the LTU shelf
I

L-.

Figure

6-6

6.09

Two-Wire

(Type

System

II) E&M

Trunk

E&M. Connecting

Cross-Connections

Elock

I
--

SATURN
Installation

IIE

EPABX
Test Procedures

A3080i3-X5130-B120-1-69.28
Issue
1, May

DISTANT
OFFICE
OR SIGNALING
EQUIPMENT

TRUNK

;

FACiLlTY

PfiErvwzs

CUSTOMER
In:er:ach~g

1986

Conneclmg

Block
System

T&R Connecilng

Block

I
634. J3S. J30. J40. J42 or J44‘
J28.J~O.J32,~34.J3S.J33.

r------

I
I

Four-Wire
Type
II E&M
Trunk
or
Signaling
Circuit

-R
I!
Rl
-E
-SC
-M
-SE

35, J37, J39. J41. JS3. or J45
7. J29, J31. J33,,‘35, J37, J29

System
E!o!e: Dashed

lines

represent

in s:al!ation-dependent

Figure

6.10

E&M

Connecting

crcc;-connections.

Four-Wiro

(Type

ii) E&M

Tiunlc

Cross-ConnecZions

Cable J32. J34, J36. J33. J40, J42
or J44 from the Basic shelf or J26. J28, J30, J32,
J34. J36. J38. or J40 from the LTU shelf

Typical
Announcement
Equipment

Audio
output

G
18

SMl

-------

SM2

-------

SZl

sz2

___---------u

Some ann~uncemenl
Busy (MB) signals

machines send both Start Message (SM) and

over same par (EAIEB).

Figure

6.11

Recorded
AC3

System MDF Cable J33. J35, J37, J39, J4!, J43,
or J45 from the Basic shelf; or J27, J29. J31. J33.
J35, J37, J39 or J41 from the LTU shelf

Make
P

System

A5126-l-4,8/86

Block

Announcement
Announcement

(DID and
Service)

E&M

Connecting

Tie Trunk
Vacant
Cross-Connections

Number

Block

intercept,

and

6-7

SATURN

IIE

Installation

A30808-X5130-B120-l-8928
Issue 1, May

EPABX
Test

Procedures

Connecting

Block
System

No:es:

Dashed

lines

represent

installation-dependent

Ei-drrecticnal
connection
to code
swerback
channels
shown.

device

Maximum
of one code calling equipment
(with
bility) can be interfaced
with the system.

for both

or without

calling

and

answerbaclc

Figure

6.12

Code

Cailing

(With

or Without

Dashed
Bi-directional
Maximum
system.

lines

represent
connecction

of four

DTMF

installation-dependent
to DTMF

Answcrba~h)

Cross-Comedons

dial

cross-connections,

dictation

circuits

equipment
can

shown.

be interfaced

with

the

When maintenance
procedures
are to be performed
to a dial dictation
equipment, the associated
SLMA crrcuit must first be taken out-of-servrce.
Fatlure
to observe
this will cause
users accessing
the dial dictation
equipment
to
hunt to an out-of-service
device
and receive
unanswered
ringback
tone
instead
of being routed
to an in-service
device
or receiving
busy tone.

Figure

6.13

Dial

Dic?ation

(DTMF)

J34,
the
J32,
LTU

equipFailure
unan-

stem
, J42
, J28,
m the

Notes:

Block

System
MDF Cable
J32,
J36, J38, J4.0, J42 or J44 from
Basic shelf or J25, J28, J30,
J34, J36, J38, or J40 from the
sheif

ancapa-

When maintenance
procedures
are to be performed
on code callrng
ment, associated
trunk
circuit
must first be taken out-of-service.
to observe
this will cause
users accessing
code calling
to receive
swered
ringback
tone instead
of busy tone.

~Il”-i-4:oIES

T&R Connecting

cross-connectrons

calling

198G

Cross-Connections

MDF Cable J32, J34, J36, J38,
or J44 from the Basic shelf or
J30, J32, J34, J36, J38, or J40
LTU shelf

SATURN
Installation

IIE

EPABX
Test

A30808-X5130-B120-l-8928
Issue
1, May

Procedures

Interfacing
Connectmg
(Op!lonal)

System

T&R

Connecttng

A----

L
System
Notes:

E&M

Connecting

61ocl(

I
System
MDF Cable J32. J34. J36. .Jm. J40. J42 or J44
r
from the Basic shelf or J26. J28, J33, J32, J34, J3G. J38. j
or J40 from the LTU shelf
I

Block

1988

Block

System
MDF Cable J33: J35, J37, J33. J41, J43. or J45
from the @asic shelf; or J27, J29, J31, J33, J35, J37, J39
or J41 from the LTU shelf

Dashed
lines
represent
installation-dependent
crossconnections.
Broadcast
type connection
from music
source
shown. Two kinds of music source can be cross-connected,
continuous
type and demand
type. For continuous
mustc, the E&M
leads are not used; and for demand
music, the E&M leads are

Figure

6.14

Cross-Connections

Music-cn-Wc!d

Using

EQUIPMENT

Interfacing

Connecting

TMBA4

PC0

ROOM

Sloc!c
System

T&R

Connecting

Block

System
MDF Cable J32, J34. J36, J36, JSO, J42
or J44 from the Basic shelf or J26, J26, J30, J32,
J34, J36, J38, or J40 from the LTU shelf

Music

Source
- - - - - -----

Notes:

Dashed
lines represent
connecttons.
System
SLMA
6.03.

Figure

installation-dependent

MDF Cable connections
PCB. For SLA16 connections,

Only continuous
connected.

6.15

type

music

Music-on-Hold

are

sources

,--\

Station
Circuit
Within
SLMAlSLAlG

Line
an
PCB

cross-

shown for an
refer to Ftgure

may

be cross-

Cross-Connections

Using

SLMAiSLAl6

PCB

6-9

A30808-X5130-0120-1-8928
issue
1, May

System

E&M

Connecting

1986

Block

System MDF Cable J3.2, J34. J36, J36. J40, J42
or J44 from the Basic shelf or J26, J26, J30.
J32, J34, J36. J36, or JSO from the LTU shelf

__----

Trunk

-------

Circuit

-----mm
--------------

System

A5!59-,-4,9:66

Figure

E&M

6.16

Connecting

Paging

Cross-Connections

T&R connecting

Block

Block
System
MDF Cable J32. J34. J36. J36. J40. J42 or
J44 from the Basic shelf or JZG. J28. J30. J32, J34,
J36. J38. or J40 from the LTU shelf

r---m7

-w---1

i 0
0

BSY2 0
PGl

System
MDF Cable J33. J35. J37, J39, J41, J43,
or J45 from the Basic shelf; or J27, J29, J31,
J33, J35, J37, J39 or J41 from the LTU shelf

[IO’
used’pJ k/--j
.,,-I

Typical
Paging

Equipment

BSYl

Answerback

System

Interfacing
Connecting
(Optional)

Audio
Input

With

Block\

---------

--1
7

PG2 0

L---I
I
L--w--

I
I
L---s--

J35, J37, J39. J41. J43, or
or J27, J29. J31. J33. J35.
LTU shelf

Figure

6-10

6.17

Paging

Without

Answerbock

Cross-Connections

/
I

A30808-X5130-6120-1-8928
Issue 1, May 1986

SATURN IIE EPABX
Installation
Test Procedures

System
Interfacing
Connecting
(Optional)
UNA Signaling

T+R Connecting

System MDF Cable J32, J34, J36, J38,
J40, J42 or J44 from the Basic shelf or
J26, J28. J30, J32, J34, J36, J38 or J40
from the LTU shelf

Block
\

Device

With
SLMAISLAlG

------

Dashed

lines

------

-----a-

Notes:

Block

represent

installation-dependent

System MDF Cable connections
are shown
connections,
refer to Figure 6.03.

an
PC13

cross-connections.
for an SLMA

PCS. For SLA16

An AC signaling
device operated
by 20Hz ringing voltage must be connected to an SLMA circuit used for UNA. Each UNA circuit will drive up
to four equivalent
ringer loads. For installations
requiring -48Vdc or a dry
contact
closure
for UNA. appropriate
external
equipment
must be used.
The system will support
up to four UNA signaling
SLMA circuit is assigned
per zone.

Figure

6.18

Universal

zones

Night

(i.e.; ZUNA);

Answer

one

(UNA)

Cross-Connections

6-11

SATURN
Installation

IIE

EPAEX
Test Procedures

A30808-X5130-5120s1-8928
Issue
1. May

6.04
System
Diagnostic
Tests.
After the necessary
MDF
cross-connections
have been completed,
the on-line
diagnostic icsts
and procedures
are performed
to verify
the operatronal
capability
of the system.
Note that the subsequent
on-line
diagnostic
tests and procedures
are presented
in the
sequence
in which
they should
be performed
under
normal
insiallation
conditions.
It is the responsibility
of craft pers,onnel to determine
the sequence
in which
such tests and procedures
should
be performed
when
unusual
installation
conditions
exist. Unless
otherwise
indicated,
these
tests can
be performed
with SDTs and/or
DTMF
SLTs.
a.

Tone Generator
Test. This system
diagnostic
test routine verifies
that each tone provided
by the SMXTG
PCS
is generated
properly.
In addition,
the test also
checks
the connection
path(s)
through
the Memory
Time
Switch
(MTS).
Refer
to Table 6.00 for the necessary
procedures
to perform
the tone generator
test.
DTMF
Receiver
Test. This system
diagnostic
test routine verifies
that a DTMF
receiver
circuit
in a aarticular DTMF
PCB
is operating
properly.
The test also
checks
the connection
path(s)
through
the MTS. Refer
to Table 6.02 for the necessary
procedures
to perform
the applicable
DTMF
receiver
circuit
test(s).
This test
requires
a Type 2500 DTMF
Pushbutton
Telephone
Set.
Station
Line Test. This apparatus
diagnostic
test routine verifies
that the supervisory
and transmission
capabilities
between
an SLMA,
SLA16
or SLMD
circuit and asscciated
staiion
or Siemens
Digital
Telephone
instrument
are operating
properly.
This test is
performedfrom
the station
instrument
under
test and
applies
to both single
line telephones
(rotary
or pushbutton)
and Siemens
Digital
Telephones.
Refer
to Table 6.03 for the necessary
procedures
to perform
the
applicable
station
line test(s).
DTMF
Pad Test. This apparatus
diagnostic
test routine
verifies
that the DTMF
keypad
performance,
including
the transmission
capabilities,
of any DTMF
pushbuttontype station
instrument
is operating
properly.
The test
is performed
from the station
instrument
under
test and
only applies
to single
line telephones
equipped
with
a DTMF
keypad.
Note that a Siemens
Digital Telephone
cannot
be used for this test since data, not tones,
are
transmitted
from the SDTs pushbutton
keypad.
Refer
to Table 6.04 for the necessary
procedures
to perform
the applicable
DTMF
pad test(s).

ating
under
dures

1986

properly.
The test is performed
from the console
test. Refer to Table 6.05 for the necessary
proceto perform
the applicable
console
tes:s.

Siemens
Digital Telephone
Button
Tests. These
apparatus diagnostic
test routines
verify
that the signaling
highways
to and from Siemens
DYAD and JR-DYAD
telephones
are operating
properly.
In addition,
the tests
also verifv
that the LEDs
and the audible
alertinn
devices
of the telephones
are operating
properly.
The
tests are performed
using the DYAD and JR-DYAD
telephones.
Refer
to Tables
6.07 and 6.08 for the necessary
procedures
to perform
the applicable
Siemens
digital
telephone
button
tests.

Siemens
Digital
Telephone
Display
Test. This apparatus diagnostic
test rouiine
verifies
that the signaling
highways
to and from the Siemens
DYAD telephones
are operating
properly.
In addition,
the tests also verify that the alphanumeric
display
unit and the audible
alerting
devices
are operating
prcperly.
The tests are
performed
using
the DYAD
telephones
under
test.
Refer to Table 6.09 for the necessary
procsdurcs
to perform the Siemens
digital
ie!ephone
display
tests.

Trunk
Test. This
supervisory
and
ing (or outgoing
ating
properly.
connec?ion
path(s)
for the necessary
ble trunk
tests.

Placing
Circuit(s)
In-Service.
This system
procedure
allows craft
personnel
to place
an assigned
circuit
in
service
from an out-of-service
state.
This procedure
works
in parallel
with the CMU procedure
that changes
a circuit’s
state.
Refer to Table 6.12 for the necessary
procedures
to perform
the applicable
in-service
placement
of circuits.

Placing
Circuit(s)
Out-of-Service.
This system
procedure allows
craft personnel
to place
an assigned
circuit
out-of
service
from
an in-service
state.
This
procedure
works
in parallel
with the CMU
procedure
that changes
a circuit’s
state.
Fiefer
to Table
6.13 for
the necessary
procedures
to perform
the applicable
out-of-service
placement
of circuits.

system
diagnostic
test verifies
that the
transmission
capabilities
of an outgoportion
of a two-way)
trunk
are operIn addiiion,
the test also verifies
the
through
the MTS. Refer to Tab!o 6.11
procedures
to perform
the epplica-

WARNING
e.

G-l?

Console
Test. This apparatus
diagnostic
test
verifies
that the data and speech
highways
to
an attendant
console
are operating
properly.
also verifies
that the console
LED indicators,
meric
display
unit and audible
alerting
device

routine
and from
The test
alphanuare oper-

Hazardous
voltages
Be
extremely
ing/troubleshooting
panel(s)
removed.

exist
Mhin
the equipmcnr
careful
when
performing
procedures
wiih
Ehe

cebkc?.
testequipment

SATURN
Installation

IIE

A30808-X5130-8120-l-8928
issue
1, May

E?ABX
Test Procedures

iab:a
TEP

6.00

Tone

PCDCECURE

Generator

Test

VERIFICATION

maintenance

Dial

tone

returned.

Place
off-hook.

Dial the Diagncstic

Dial

Dial 00 if all tones are to be tested and
verify
that all tones
returned
are undis!orted.

All tones are returned
in the sequence
shown
in Table 6.01 for two seconds
each:
test repeats
until the maintenance
test phone
is placed
on-hook
or hook flashed.

If any tone(s)
is returned
distortad
retry
test two mere times.
If distortion
continues,
replace
the SMXTG
PCB. Ncto
that the first 16 tones are hardware
interrupted.
if continuous
tones
are
returned,
replace
the SMXTG
PCB.

Dial the individual
test number
shown
in Table 6.01 if a particular
tone is to
be tested.

Chosen
tone
returned
until
maintenance
test phone
is placed
on-hco!c
or hook-flashed.

If chcsen
retry test
continues,

If additional
tE?SiS or procedures
are
to be performed,
hook-flash
the maintenance
test phone
and dial the next
code (Diagnostic
Test Access
Code is
not redialed).

Recall

If no additional
tests
to be performed,
tenance
test phone

Nono.

tone

Test
generator

phone

IF VERIFICATION
IS NOT OBTAINED

1 for

test

1986

Access

Code.

test.

or procedures
placa
the
on-hook.

Recall

dial

tone

returned.

None.

are
main-

Table

6.01

dial

Tone

tone

is returned.

Generator

TEST
NUMBER
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

tono is returned
dictoricd.
two moie times.
If distortion
replace
the SMXTG
PCB

Test

Numbers

TONE
Circular
Sequence
DTMF-1
(697Hz
+ 1209Hz)
DTMF-2
(6Q7Hz
+ 1336Hz)
DTMF-3
(697Hz
+ 1477Hz)
DTMF-4
(77OHz
+ 1209Hz)
DTMF-5
(77OHz
+ 1336Hz)
DTMF-6
(77OHz
+ 14i7Hz)
DTMF-7
(852Hz
+ 1209Hz)
DTMF-8
(852Hz
+ 1336Hz)
DTMF-9
(852Hz
+ 1477H.z)
DTMF-0
(941Hz
+ 133SHz)
DTMF-’
(941Hz
+ 1209Hz)
DTMF-#
(941Hz
+ 14i7Hz)
DTMF-A
(697Hz
+ 1633Hz)
DTMF-B
(770Hz
+ 1633Hz)
DTMF-C
(852Hz
+ 1633Hz)
DTMF-D
(941Hz
-I- 1633Hz)
Dial Tone (35OHz
+ 440Hz)
Busy Tone (480Hz
+620
Hz)
Reorder
Tone (Fast Busy Tone)
Test Tone (1004Hz
@-16dEim)
Low Tone (440Hz)
Audible
Ring (440Hz
+ 480Hz
- uninterrupted)
Intercept
Tone (440Hz
+ 620Hz)
LDN Call Identification
Tone (400 Hz + 480
Called
Party Tone (2100
Hz - uninterrupted)
Remote
Hold Recall
Identification
Tone (400
Quiet
Tone

- interrupted)

Hz)
--_

G-13

SATURN
Installation

A30808-X5130-B120-l-8928
Issue
1, May

IIE EPABX
Test Procedures

Table
STEP

DTMF

PROCECURE

Place
off-hook.

Dial

# for

test

Dial the four-digit
DTMF
receiver

Depress
keypad’s
quence.

Test

DTMF

Receiver

Test

VEFHFICATION

maintenance

Dial the Diagnostic

6.02

phone

Access

receiver
PEN
circuit

Code.

test.

test phone
following
se-

a) For 12-button
phones:
4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 0, *and

Recall

tone

IF VERIFICATION
IS NOT
OBTAINED

is returned.

dial

tone

is returned.

None.

number
of the
to be tested.

the maintenance
buttons
in the

Dial

Dial tone returned
and the associated DTMF
receiver
circuit
LED in the
DTMF
PCB is lit steadily.

If busy
tone is returned,
the DTMF
receiver
circuit
is busy. Retry
later. If
intercept
tone is returned,
the DTMF
receiver
circuit
is not assigned
(check
data base assignment).

Test
tone
returned.

If intercept
tone is returned
at any
time, either the DTMF
receiver
or the
maintenance
phone’s
key-pad
is nc?
operating
properly,
or the buttons
were
depressed
in the wrong
sequence.
Retry test with another
DTMF
phone.
If intercept
tone is returned
again,
replace
the DTMF
receiver
circuit.

(1004Hz

-16dBm)

1, 2, 3,
#.

b) For 16-button
phones:
A, B, C,
D, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 0, * ,
and #.
6A

If additional
tests or procedures
are
to be performed,
hook-flash
maintenance
tes? phone
and dial the next
code (Diagnostic
Test Access
Code is
not redialed).

Recall
dial tone is returned
and the
associaied
DTMF
receiver
circuit
LED
in the DTMF
PCB is extinguished.

If no additional
tests
to be performed,
tenance
test phone

The associated
LED
in the
guished.

or procedures
place
the
on-hook.

are
main-

Table
NOTES:

6.03

DTMF
DTMF

Station

receiver
circuit
PCB
is extin-

Line

Test

1) If the system
option
flag TSTDIAG
has been enabled
in the data base or the station
under
test is c!assmarked
with the TSTAPP
feature,
the maintenance
test phone
is not required
to enable
or disable
the Apparatus
Diagnostic Test routines;
therefore,
perform
only steps
5 through
10.
2) If the system
option
flag TSTDIAG
has been disabled
in the data base or the station
under
test is not classmarked
with the TSTAPP
feature,
the maintenance
test phone
is required
to enable
or disable
the Apparatus
Diagnostic
Test routines;
therefore,
oerform
the entire
procedure
(steps
1 throuqh
11).
.

STEP

PROCEDURE

Place
off-hook.

test

Dial the Diagnostic
Dial

3 to enable

Place
the
on-hook.
Place
;:;ethe

6-14

VERIFICATION

maintenance

the

the station
Test-Station

phone

Dial

tone

Test Access

Code.

Recall

Apparatus

tests.

Confirmation

maintenance
under

test

1986

phone

test

off-hook.

Line

Access

dial

is returned.

tone

is returned.

tone

is returned.

None.

Dial

tone

Confirmation

is returned
tone

is returned.

IF VERIFKATION
IS NOT
OBTAINED

SATURN
Installation

IIE

A30808-X5130-B120-l-8928
Issue
1, May

EPABX
Test Procedures

Tab!c

A.03

Station

FROCEDUZZ

STEP

station

under

Pick

Verify
that the test tone
rect by using
a TMS.

level

Place

on-hoo!(.

If no additional
Test
performed,
proceed

station

under

maintenance

Dial the

Diagnostic

2 to disable

Place

on-hook.

to answer

Place
off-boo!<.

Dial

test

Ringing

Place

up handset

Test

fCnntinc)edl
\-----------I

VERIFICATTION

test

IF VER!FiCATION
IS NOT OBTAINED

returned.

If ringing
is not heard,
switch
the station instrument
to determine
if it is
defective.
If ringing
is still not heard,
replace
the associated
subscriber
line
PCB.

is cor-

Test
tone
returned.

(1004Hz

-lGdBm)

If the returned
test tone level is weak,
swap the instrument
to determine
if it
is defective
If the test tone level increases
considerably,
replace
the s:ation
instrument.
If test
tone
level
remains
weak,
replace
the associated
subscriber
line
PCB
(SLMA,
SLA16
or SLMD).

None.

routines
are to be
as follows:
test

Test
test

maintenance

phone

Access

Code

routine.
phone

Dial

tone

Recall

is returned.

dial

done

is returned,

None.
on-hook.

None.

1) If the system
option
flag TSTDIAG
has
with the TSTAPP
feature,
the maintenance
routines;
therefore,
perform
only sieps

6.04

DTMF

Fad

been

enabled
test phone
5 through
8.

Test

in the data base
is not required

or the station
under
to enable
or disable

2) If the system
option flag TSTDIAG
has been disabled
in the data base or the station
under
with the TSTAPP
feature,
the maintenance
test phone
is required
to enable
or disable
tines;
therefore,
perform
the entire
procedure
(steps
1 through
9).

,STEP

VERIFICATION

PROCEDURE

Place
off-hook.

maintenance

Dial the

Diagnostic

Dial

Place
on-hook.

maintenance

Place
off-hook.

DTMF

Dial the Test DTMF

3 to enable

’

tail.

Tab!e
NOTES:

Line

1986

test

Test Access
the

phone

Code.

Recall

tone

test

under

Pad Access

phone

test

Code.

is classmaiked
Apparatus
Test

test is not classmarked
the Apparatus
Test rou-

IF VERIFICATION
IS NOT OBTAINED

is returned.

dial

Confirmation

tests.

station

Dial

test
the

tone
tone

is returned.
returned.

None.

Dial

Recall

tone

dial

returned.

tone

is returned.

6-15

SATURN
instaliation

A30808-X5130-B120-l-B928
Issue
1, May

IIE EPABX
Test Procedures

Wbtc
STEP

6.04

PWO@EDWE

Depress
the
the following

DTMF

Pad

Test

VERIFICATION

DTMF
keypad
sequence:

For 12-button
phones:
7, 8, 9, 0, 4 and #.

buttons

IF VERIFICATIGN
IS NOT OBTAINED

Recall
dial tone ceases.
After all the
DTMFjteypad
buttons
are depressed
in the sequence
indicated,
test tone
(1004Hz
@ -16dBm)
is returned
for
one minute.

1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6,

For 16-button
phones:
A, B, C, D, 1,
2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 0, * and #.

F;Q;he

level

Place
hook

If no additional
be performed,

of test

DTMF
station
under
to terminate
test.

Place
off-hoo!(.

apparatus
proceed

maintenance

2 to disable

Place
on-hook.

Test Access
the Apparatus

maintenance

To locate failure, retry test to verify that
the
keypad
buttons
were
not
depressed
out
of sequence.
If
problem
persists,
swap the station
instrument
to determine
ii it is defective.
If problem
remains,
replace
the rppropriate
subscriber
line PCB.
If the measured
test tone is correct
but is weak,
replace
the station
set.
If the measured
tone is low, rep!ace
the subscriber
line PCB
SLMA
or
SLA16).

by using

test

on-

None.

test

phone

Dial

Code.

Recall

Tests.

None.

phone

is returned.

dial

tone

is returned.

6.05

Console

been
Test

2) If the system
option
flag TSTDIAG
to enable
and disable
the Apparatus

been disabted
in the
Test routines;
therefore,

has

enabled
routines;

Test

1) If the system
option
flag TSTDIAG
has
to enable
and disable
the Apparatus

STEP

6-16

tone

None.

Table
NOTES:

PROCEDURE

maintenance

Place
off-hook.

Dial the Diagnostic

Dial 3 to enable

Place
on-hook.

At the Console
under
test dial the Attendant
Console
Test access
code
when
the console
is in an idle state.

maintenance

in the data
therefore,

base, the maintenance
perform
only steps

test

phone

Dial

tone

Test Access

Code.

Recall

Apparatus

Tests.

Confirmation

test

phone

dial

test phone
5 through
9.

data base,
the maintenance
perform
the entire
procedure

VERIFICATION

the

If busy tone is returned
at any time,
either the DTMF key pad buttons
were
depressed
in the wrong
sequencethe
DTMF keypad
of the station under test
is defective
or the subscriber
line circuit is defective.

tests are to
as foilows:
test

Dial the Diagnostic
Dial

tone

1986

is not required

test phone
is required
(steps
1 through
10).

IF VERIFICATION
IS NO-i- OBTAINED

is returned.

tone
tone

is returned.
is returned.

None.

Recall
dial tone is returned.
Also the
access
code is displayed
momentarily, then the display
changes
to CONSOLE
TEST and all button
LEDs are
extinguished.

If reorder
tone is returned,
dant Console
Test routine
retry later.

the Attenis in use,

SATURN
Installation

A30808-X5130-B120-l-8928
Issue
1, May

IIE EPABX
Test Procedures

Table
:TE?

6.05

Console

PRCCEDURE

Test

(Continued)

VERIFICATIDN

dialed

are

lF VERlFlCATlON
IS NOT OBTAINED

Depress
the console’s
keypad
buttons
in the following
sequence:
1, 2, 3, 4,
5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 0, * and #.

All digits
cumulate).

Depress
the console’s
in the sequence
shown

feature
buttons
in Figure 6.19.’

Each
button
LED
lights
when
depressed
and extinguishes
when the
next key is depressed.

After the last button
is depressed,
depress
button
to initiate the
display
can
be
depressing
any key
and resumed
in the

in the sequence
any console
display
test. The
suspended
by
on the console
same
manner.

displayed

(ac-

Groups
of eight of each of the displayable characters
are scrolled
in the sequence
shown
in Table 6.06. Ai-ier the
last character
is displayed
(under
score
character),
the display
unit is
cleared
and
the
following
LEDs
momentarily
light then extinguish
in
the following
sequence:
a) TRUNK

GROUP

1986

STATUS

If proper
verification
is not obtained
or
busy tone is returned
at any time, the
keypad
buttons
or console
buttons
were depressed
out of sequence,
the
console
is defective,
or PIMD
circuit
is defective.
To isolate the failure, retry
test to verify that the buttons
were not
depressed
out of sequence.
If proper
verificaiion
is not obtained
or
busy tone is returned
again,
replace
associated
PIMD
PCB
to verify
whether
the PIMD circuit
or the console is defective.
If proper
verificaiion
is obtained,
replace
the associa?ed
PIMD PCB. If proper
verification
is not
obiained
or busy
tone
is returned
again,
replace
the console.

1 -

b)
c)
d)
e)

%“RCE
DESTINATION
ALERT
CW
9 MAJ ALM
g) MIN ALM

After the above
indications
pleted the fo!lowing
indications
Ringbeck

tone

All LEDs
flash..

are

comoccur:

is returned.
the

display

assembly

After the above
indications
are completed the following
indications
occur:
Ringback

tone

All LEDs
flash.

The audible
intervals.

Remove
and reinsert
handset
assembly to terminate
test, or wait 30 seconds
for test timeout.

If no additional
be performed,
Place
off-hook.

apparatus
proceed

maintenance

Dial the Diagnostic
Dial 2 to disable
Place
on-hook.

maintenance

is returned.
the

display

alerting

REMOVE

HANDSET

INSERT
handset
reinserted,
operation.

HANDSET
is removed.
console

device

assembly
sounds

is displayed.
is displayed
while
After handset
is
returns
to normal

tests are to
as follows:
test

Test Access
the Apparatus
test

phone

Dial

Code.

Recall

Tests.

None.

phone

tone
dial

is returned.
tone

is returned.

None.

6-17

ISATURN
installation

IIE

EPABX
Test Procedures

A30808-X5130-8120-143928
Issue
1, May

TRUNK GGOUPSTATUS
nnnnnnnn

k
(ALPHANUMERIC DISPLAY L'NI;)
SOUlxi

00000000
li
18 19

Figure

6.19

Attendant

Console

OESTIXATION

Keypad

ALERT

and

Feature

Button

Depression

Sequence

CL'1

1986

SATURN
Installation

IIE EPABX
Test Procedures

A30808-X5130-B120-l-6926
Issue
1, May

Table
ORDER

6.06

Attendant

CHARACTER
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.

19.
20.
2’:.
23:
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
30.
29.
31.
32.

I I
;;;;,A!,;;;;

$$$$5$$$
o/o o/o 010
&&&&&&&&
I I I
(
( (
)
1 1
*

++++++++
I I
I
- i
i i
00000000
1 1 1
22222222
33333333
44444444
66666666
55555555
77777777
88888888
99999999
: :
:
; ;
;
(((((((C

I
(
1

I
(
1
*

Characters

I
(
1
l

9
-

I
(
1
*

I
-

I
(
1
*

1
-

CHARACTER
33.
34.
ii:
37.

3
-

TPffSf=>S

????????
OQOQ@@@@

o/o o/o o/o o/o %

Displayable
ORDER

Console

:i
40:
41.
42.
43.
44.
45.
46.
47.
48.
49.
50.
51.
52.
54.
53.
55.
56.
2;

:
;

1986

59:
60.
61.
62.
63.

AAAAAAAA
BBBBBBBB
cccccccc
DDDDDDDD
EEEEEEEE
FFFFFFFF
GGGGGGGG
HHHHHHHH
I
I
I I
JJJJJJJJ
K K K K
LLLLLLLL
MMMMMMMM
NNNNNNNN
00000000
PPPPPPPP
QQQQQQQQ
RRRRRRRR
ssssssss
TTTTTTTT
uuuuuuuu
vvvvvvvv
wwwwwwww
xxxxxxxx
YYYYYYYY
zzzzzzzz
[
I [
\\\\)))\

1 1 I

A A
----_---

,I> A

I
K

I
A

6-19

I .

SATURN
Installation

IIE

A30808-X5130-B120-I-6928
Issue
1, May

EPABX
Test Procedures

Table
NOTES:

1) If the system
option
test is classmarked
Apparatus
Diagnostic

6.07

flag
with

Siemcns

Digital

Telephone

PROCEDURE

phone

Iial

Test Access

Code.

qecall

Apparatus

Diag-

>onfirmation

‘lace
the
,ff-hook.

3ial the

Iial 3 to enable
lostic
Tests.

‘lace
x+hook.

maintenance

‘lace
,ff-hook.

Siemens

DYAD

Telephone

Iial

Dial
rest

the Siemens
Access
Code.

Digital

Telephone

secall

Diagnostic
the

test

phone

in the data
maintenance
the entire

tone

Depress
the DYAD feature
buttons
in
the sequence
shown
in Figure
6.20
and according
to the Siemens
DYAD
Telephone
model.

dial

tone

is returned.

tone

is returned.

dial

tone

Button
LEDs
and extinguish
is depressed.

is returned.

light when
when
the

Ringback

tone

All button

LEDs

The audible
intervals.
TEST
DYAD Telephone
to terminate

untest.

Place
off-hook.

maintenance

Dial the

Diagnostic

Place
maintenance
hook.None.

test
Test Access
the Apparatus
test

phone

Dial

code.

Recall

Diag-

None.

on-

None.

tone

dial

device

sounds

is displayed.
Telephone

is returned.

tone

the

flash.

alerting

DYAD
operation.

f reorder
tone is returned,
the Sienens
DYAD Telephone
Button
Test is
n use, try later.

is returned.

COMPLETE

Siemens
normal

disbut-

depressed
next button

is depressed,
occur:

If no additional
Apparatus
Diagnostic
Test routines
are to be performed,
proceed as follows:

Dial 2 to disable
nostic
Test.

6-20

IF VERiFICATlON
IS NOT OBTAINED

is returned.

After the last button
following
indications

base or the Siemens
Digital
Telephone
under
test phone
is required
to enable
or disable
procedure
(steps
1’ through
10).

The access
code is momentarily
3layed,
then the display
unit and
ton LEDs
are extinguished.

Ieoress
the Siemens
DYAD
Telc&ne
keypad
buttons
as, fo!lows:
1,
3, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 0, * , i?.

Place
Siemens
der test on-hook

Digital
Telephone
under
to enable
or disable
the

Uone.

Test

or the Siemcns
is nbt required
9.

VERIFICATION

test

maintenance

Dutton

TSTDIAG
has been enabled
in the data base
TSTAPP
feature,
the maintenance
test phone
routines;
therefore,
perform
only steps
5 through

2) If the system
option
flag TSTDIAG
has been disabled
test is not classmarked
with the TSTAPP
feature.
the
perform
the Apparatus
Diagnostic
routine? s; t herefore,
STEP

- DVAD

1986

is returned.

returns

f proper
verification
is not obtained
cr
xsy
tone is returned
at eny time,
either
the keypad
buttons
cr featuie
buttons
were
depressed
out of sequence,
the DYAD Telephone
is defactive, or the SLMD
circuit
is defective.
To isolate the failure,
retry test to verify that the buttons
were not depressed
Dut of sequence.
If proper
verification
is not obtained
or
busy tone is returned
again,
replace
the Siemens
DYAD Telephone
under
test with a known
good
DYAD Telephone
and retry test. If proper
verification
is not obtained
or busy tone is
returned
again,
replace
the SLMD
PCB.

I
-

SATURN
Installation

HE EPABX
Test Procedures

A30808-X5130-8120-1-8928
Issue
1, May

1986

’

IS BUTTON
DYAD

SEE

NOTE

SEE

NOTE

26 BUTTON
DYAD

NOTE:

These
contain

buttons
LEDs.

Figure

not

6.20

Siemens

DYAD

Telephone

Button

Depression

Sequence

6-21

SATURN
Installation

A30808-X5130-BlZO-l-8928
Issue
1, May

IIE EPABX
Test Procedures

Table
NOTES:

1) If the system
option
test is classmarked
Apparatus
Diagnostic

6.06
flag
with

Siemcns

Digital

Telephone

- JR-DYAD

TSTDIAG
has been enabled
in the data base
TSTAPP
feature,
the maintenance
test phone
routines;
therefore,
perform
only steps‘5
through

2) If the system
option
flag TSTDIAG
has been disabled
test is not classmarked
with the TSTAPP
feature,
the
the Apparatus
Diagnostic
routines;
therefore,
perfcrm
STEP

PROCEDURE

the

Place
off-hook.

maintenance

Dial the Diagncstic

Dial 3 to enable
nostic
Tests,

Place
on-hook.

test

phone

Dial

Test Access

Code.

Recall

Diag-

Confirmation

Place

Dial
Test

Depress
the Siemens
JR-DYAD
Telephone
keypad
buttons
as, follows:
1,
2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 0, * , #.

Depress
the JR-DYAD
in the sequence
shown

the Apparatus

maintenance

the Siemens
Access
Code.

test

phone

Telephone

off-hook.

Digital

Telephone

feature
buttons
in Figure
6.21.

tone
dial

tone

Place
under

If no additional
Apparatus
Diagnostic
Test routines
are to be performed,
proceed
as follows:

Siemens
JR-DYAD
Telephone
test on-hook
to terminate
test.

Dial the Diagnostic
Dial 2 to disable
nostic
Test.
Place
on-hook.

6-22

maintenance

base or the Siemens
Digital Telephone
under
test phone
is required
to enab!e
or disable
procedure
(steps
1 through
i0).
IF VERIFICATION
IS NOT OBTAINED

test

Test Access
the Apparatus

test

phone

is returned.

None.

Dial

tone

Recall

is rereturned.

dial

tone

Button
LEDs
and extinguish
is depressed.

last button
indications
tone

All button

LEDs

Siemens
to normal

Dial

Recall

Diag-

None.

flash.
device

Telephone

is returned.

tone

the

is returned.

JR-DYAD
operation.

dial

depressed
next button

is depressed,
occur:

alerting

tone

If reorder
tone is returned,
mens JR-DYAD
Telephcne
is in use, try later.

is returned.

light when
when the

Ringbac!c

code.

phone

is returned.

tone

The audible
intervals.

Digital
Telephone
under
to enable
or disable
the

is returned.

After the
following

P&tokmaintenance

in the data
maintenance
ihe entire

Test

or the Siemens
is ‘not required
9.

VERIFICATION

JR-DYAD

Button

1986

is reiurned.

sounds

returns

the
Button

SieTest

Ii proper
verification
is net obtainsd
or
busy
tone
is returned
at any iime,
either
the keypad
buttons
or feature
buttons
were
depressed
out of sequence,
the JR-DYAD
Telephone
is
defective,
or the SLMD
circuit
is
defective.
To isolate
the failure,
retry
test to verify that the buttons
were not
depressed
out of sequence.
If proper
verification
is not obtained
or
busy tone is returned
again,
replace
the Siemens
JR-DYAD
Telephone
under test with a known
good JR-DYAD
Telephone
and retry
test.
If proper
verification
is not obtained
or busy
tone is returned
again,
the SLMD
circuit is defective
and the SLMD
PC6
requires
replacement.

SATURN
Installation

A30808-X5130-B120-l-8928
Issue
1, May

IIE EPABX
Test Procedures

NOTES:
* These
Buttons

feature
buttons
are not testable.
9 through
13 do not contain

Figure

6.21

Siemeno

JR-DYAD

1986

LEDs.

Telephone

Button

Depression

Sequence

6-23

SATURN
Installation

IIE

A30808-X5130-B120-l-8928
Issue
1, May

EPABX
Test Procedures

Table
NOTES:

1) If the system
option
test is classmarked
Apparatus
Diagnostic
2)

6.09

Siemens

Digital

Telephone

Place
off-hook.

Dial the Diagnostic

Dial 3 to enable
nostic
test.

maintenance

Place
on-hcok.

Place
under

Dial
test

Depress
Digital
test.

test

phone

Dial

tone

Test Access

Code.

Recall

Apparatus

Diag-

Confirmation

the

maintenance

test

phone

Test
Siemens
required

Digital
Telephone
under
to enable
or disabie
the

IF VERIFICATION
IS NOT OBTAINED

is returned.

dial

tone

./ ;

is returned.

tone

is returned.

None.

Digital

Telephone

Dial

the Siemens
access
code.

Digital

Telephone

Recall
dial tone is returned.
The Access
code is momentarily
displayed,
then the display
unit clears.

If reorder
tone is returned,
the
mens
Digital
Telephone
Display
is being
used,
retry later.

Groups
of 16 of each of the displayable characters
are scrolled
in the sequence
shown
in Table 6.09. After the
last characier
(underscore)
is displayed
the following
occurs:
is returned.

If verification
is not obtained,
either
the Siemens
Digital Telephone
or the
SLMD
circuit
is defective.
Replace
Siemens
Digital
Telephone
with
a
good one and retry test. If verification
is obtained,
replace
the Siemens
Digital Telephone.

flash and the audible
sounds
at intervals.

If verification
replace
the

any button
in the Siemens
Telephone
under
test to initiate

susany
at

tone

returned.

Ringback

tone

All button
LEDs
alerting
device
TEST
8

Place
hook
conds

If no additional
Apparatus
Tests are to be performed,
follows:
Place
off-hook.

is displayed.

Siemens
Digital Telephone
onto terminate
test or wait 30 sefor test timeout.

maintenance

Diagnostic
proceed

test

phone

Dial

Dial the Diagnostic
Recall
dial tone

Test Access
returned.

Code.

Recall

Dial 2 to disable
nostic
Test.

the

Diag-

None.

Place
on-hook.

COMPLETE

maintenance

Apparatus

test

phone

None.

tone

dial

returned.

tone

base or the Siemens
Digital
Telephone
under
test phone
is required
to enable
or disable
procedure
(steps
1 through
10).

the Siemens
test off-hook.

(Note:
The display
test can be
pended
any time by depressing
button.
The test can be resumed
any time in the same
manner.)

G-24

in the data
maintenance
the entire

or the
is not
9.

VERIFICATION

PROCEDURE

Display

flag TSTDIAG
has been
enabled
in the data base
with TSTAPP
feature,
the maintenance
test phone
routines;
therefore,
perform
only steps 5 through

If the system
option
flag TSTDIAG
has been disabled
test is not classmarked
with the TSTAPP
feature,
the
the Apparatus
Diagnostic
routines;
therefore,
perform

XEP

-DYAD

1986

is returned

is still not
SLMD
PCS.

SieTest

obtained,

I
SATURN
Installation

IIE EPABX
Test Procedures

A30808-X5130-B120-l-6928
Issue
1, May

Table
ORDER
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.

6.10

Siemens

Digital

Telephone

CHARACTER

Characters

ORDER

! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
#P It It I, I, ,I 0 0 I, r, 0 I, 0 I, ,I I,
#H#H#####,Y######
$ssssss$s$s$s$s$
o/b 010 vo %%%%
vo vo o/o %% o/o %% o/o
&&&&&&&&&&.&&&&&&
;;;;;;;;;1;;;;;;
))))))))))))))I)
****************
-I-+++++++++++++++
0000000e00.0.0..
--------------GE;;;;;;;;;;;
0000000000000000
1111111111111111
2222222222222222
3333333333333333
4444444444444444
5555555555555555
6666666666666666
7777777777777777
8888888888888888
9999999999999999
. . . .* . .. . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .
~~~~t~~~~i~i~lii
========zz==
ff~~~,,,,,,,,,,,
????????????????
Q@Q@@@@@@@@Q@QOQ

Displayable

. .
. .

.
.

33.
34,
35.
36.
37.
38.
39.
40.
41.
42.
43.
44.
45.
46.
47.
48.
49.
50.
51.
52.
53.
54.
55.
56.
57.
58.
59.
GO.
61.
62.
63.

1986

CHARACTER
AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA
BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB
cccccccccccccccc
DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD
EEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGG
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
JJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJ
KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK
LLLLLLLLLLLLLLLL
MMMMMMMMMMMMMMMM
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
0000000000000000
PPPPPPPPPPPPPPPP
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR
ssssssssssssssss
TTTTTTTTTTTTTTTT
uuuuuuuuuuuuuuuu
vuvvvvuvvvvvuvvv
wwwwwwwwwwwwwwww
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
YYYYYYYYYYYYYYYY
zzzzzzzzzzzzzzzz
11
1 [ I [ [ [ 11
I[
[ [ [ [
\ \ \> \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ :\ \ \

11 1 I II

1111111111

AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA
-

6-25

SATURN
‘nstallation

A30808-X5130-8120-l-8928
Issue
1, May

IIE EPABX
Test Procedures

Table
STEP

Outgoing

?lace
off-hook.

maintenance

Dial the

Diagnos?ic

2 to enable

test

Iial

phone

Test Access
trunk

Trunk

Test

VERlFiCATlCN

PROCEDURE

Dial

6.11

Code.

test.

jecall

tone

IF VERIFICATION
IS NOT OETAINED

is returned.

dial

tone

is returned.

done.

Dial the two-digit
trunk
group number
(00 through
31) coniaining
the trunk
circuit
to be tested.

done.

Dial the two-digit
99) of the trunk

20 or PABX dial tone is returned.
41~0, the associated
irunk circuit
LED
In the trunk
PCB is lit steadily
to inlicate
the trunk
has
been
seized
Iutgoing.

trunk
circuit

1986

number
(00 to be tested.

I j

If reorder
tone is returned,
the selected trunk circuit
is either
an incomingtype, invalid,
or not assigned
(chec!c
data base assignments).
If busy tone is reiurned,
the
trunk
is in use, retry later.

selected

If CO
or PABX
dial tone
is not
returned,
verify
trunk
MDF
crossconnections
and attempt
to access
CO/PABX
trunk using a butt set. If the
trunlc is working
properly
replace
the
trunk
PCB under
test and retry test.
Test

For CO-type
trunks
(i.e., TMBM
PCB),
dial the test tone number
provided
by
the local phone
company.

Verify that the returned
test
el is correct,
using
a TMS.

If additional
tests or procedures
are
to be performed,
hook-flash
the maintenance
test phone
and dial the next
code (Diagnostic
Test Access
Code is
not redialed).

Recall

If no additional
tests
to be performed,
tenance
test phone

None.

tone

or procedures
place
the
on-hook.

tone

(1004Hz)

is returned

If the reiurned
test tone level is weak,
replace
PCB with another
having
the
same characteristics
and retry test. If
returned
test tone level increases
considerably,
trunk
PCB is defective
and
should
be replaced.
If the test tone
level is still weak,
contact
CO repair
service
to verify
trunk
facility.

lev-

are
main-

dial

tone

is returned.

6-26

SATURN
Installation

A30i308-X5130-B120-1-B928
Issue
1, May

IIE EPABX
Test Procedures

Table

6.12

Placing

PROCEDURE

STEP

Circuit(s)

In-Service

VERIF!CATION

maintenance

phone

Dial the Diagnostic

Dial

If a single
circuit
is to be placed
inservice,
dial the four digit PEN numbar of the circuit.

Coniirmation

tone

is returned.

If reorder
tone is returned,
the selecied circuit
is invalid
or unassigned.
Check
data base assignments.

If all the circuits
in a PCB are to be
placed
in-service,
dial the first three
digits of the PEN number
for the PCB
followed
by digit 8. For an SLA16,
dial
the first three digits of the PEN number associated
with the first eight circuits followed
by an 8, then dial the
first three digits of the associated
PEN
number
for the second
eight circuits
(W,X,Y+l)
followed
by an 8.

Confirmation

tone

is returned.

If reorder
tone is returned
the selected PCB
is invalid
or unassigned
Check
data base assignments,

If additional
t&s
or procedures
are
to be performed,
hoolcilash
the maintenance
test phcne
and dial the next
code (Diagnostic
Test Access
Code is
not redialed).

Recall

If no additional
tests
to be performed,
tenance
test phone

None.

a circuit

Code.

is returned.

dial

are
main-

6.73

dial

Taking

Place
off-hook.

maintenance

Dial the Diagnostic

Dial 8 for
service.

placing

is returned.

tcne

is returned.

Ci:cuit(s)

PROCEDURE

tone

None.

Table
STEP

Recall

in-service.

or procedures
place
the
on-hook.

tone

Place
off-hook.

Test Access

Dial

IF VERlFlCATIOfl
IS NOT OBTAiNED

7 for placing

test

1986

Out-et-Service

VERIFICATION

test

phone

Dial

Test Access

Code.

Recall

a circuit

out-of-

None.

If a single
circuit
is to be placed
of-service,
dial the four
digit
number
of the circuit.

outPEN

If all the circuits
in a PCB are to be
placed
out-of-service
dial the first
three digits of the PEN number
for the
PCB followed
by digit 8. For an SL416,
dial the first three
digits
of the PEN
number
associated
with the first eight
circuits
followed
by an 8, then dial the
first three digits of the associated
PEN
number
for the second
eight circuits
(W,X,Y+l)
followed
by an 8.

tone
dial

IF VERlFtCATION
IS NOT OBTAINED

is returned.
tone

is returned.

Confirmation

tone

is returned.

If reorder
tone is returned,
the selected circuit
is invalid
or unassigned.
Check
data base assignments.

Confirmation

tone

is returned.

If reorder
tone is returned
the selected PCB
is invalid
or unassigned.
Check
data base assignments.

6-27

I
A30808-X5130-8120-1-8928
Issue 1, May 1986

SATURN IIE EPABX
installation Test Procedures
Table

STEP

6.13

Takinq

Circuit(s)

PROCEDURE

VERIFICATION

If additional tests or procedures are
to be performed, hook-flash the maintenance test phone and dial the next
code (Diagnostic Test Access Code is
not redialed).

Recall

If no additional tests or procedures are
to be performed
place the maintenance test phone on-hook.

None.

6-28

(28

pages)

. , Out-of-Service

dial tone is returned.

.: j

IContinucdl
IF VERIFICATION
IS NOT OBTAINED

’

I .-SATURN
Installation

IIE EPABX
Test Procedures

SECTKIN
7.01
dures
dure

General.
contained
performed

A30808-X5130-B120-143928
Issue
1, May

7.00

INSTALLATION

After performing
the installation
in this practice,
each installation
should
be recorded
to ensure

Table

7.00

TEST

test procetest procethat all tests

Installation

PROCEDURES

1986

CHECKLlST

have been
completed
satisfactorily.
Use Table 7.00, Installaiion Test. Procedures
Checklist,
for this purpose.
This table
can be used
as a sign-off
sheet,
if required.

Test

Procedures

Checklist

7-l

(7-2

bl!nnL,)

A30808-X5130-DllO-18920
Issue 1, May

Siemens
Pracltces
Maintenance
Series

SATURN”
MAINTENANCE

Issued by Office Systems
Group
5500 Broken
Sound
Boulevard
N.W..
Stemens
lnformatlon
Systems,
Inc.

AND

Boca

1986

IIE EPABX
TWQU

Raton. Florida
.-_ .~__-

33431
-

ESH~O=~I

(305)

994-8100

Telex:

Printed

515052
in U.S.A.

,.’

A30808-X5130-DIIO-l-8920
Issue 1, May

Siemens
Practices
Maintenance
Series

0 Siemens
All rights
This material
reproduction,

Information
reserved.

Systems,

inc.,

-i
I
1986

1985

is proprietary
to Siemens
Information
Systems,
Inc. Any unauthorized
use or disclosure
of this material,
or any part thereof, is strictly prohibited.

Siemens
reserves
the right to make changes
in specifications
at any time and without
notice. The information
furnished
by Siemens
in this material
is believed
to be accurate
and reliable.
However,
no responsibility
is assumed
by Siemens
for its use.
SATURN

is a registered

trademark

of Siemens

Information

Systems,

Inc.

‘I

SAUTRN
Maintenance

IIE

A30808-X5130-DllO-l-8920
Issue
1, May

EPABX
and Troubleshooting

1986

CONTENTS
PAGE

SECTION
.................
.......
l-l
.......................
Purpose..
Scope
...........................
Siemens
SATURN
IIE Practices
......
Siemens
Customer
Support
Services
What
to Do in Case
of Trouble
with
FCC-Registered
Equipment,
.......
2.00

3.00

4.00

2.05
......
......
......
......

................
MAINTENANCE
OVERVIEW
Introduction
...............................
General
..................................
Design
Considerations
......................
Maintenance
Facilities
......................
Power
System
Unit .........................
Maintenance
Phone
........................
...........................
Service
Terminal
Manual
On-Line
Diagnostic
Tests.
.............
....................
System
Diagnostic
Tests.
..................
Apparatus
Diagnostic
Tests
Automatic
On-Line
Diagnostic
Testing
...........................
and Reporting
Self-Test
Routines
..........................
Audit
Routines
............................
...........
Alarm
Indicators
and Classification
Power
Distribution
and Failures
..............
PREVENTIVE
MAINTENANCE
General
..................................
Floppy
Disk Drives
..........................

..............

2.00
2.01
2.02
2.03
2.04

2.07

l-l

2.08

2-l
2-1
2-l
2-2
2-2
2-2
2-4
2-4
2-7
2-7
2-8

2.09

3-l
3-1
3-1
4-1
4-l
4-1
4-l
4-1
4-l
: ‘4-18
4-27
4-28
4-28
4-30
4-30
4-30

OF FlGlJRE!i

FIGURE
1.00
1.01

1-l
l-l
1-l
l-l

2-9
2-9
2-10
2-11
2-11

TROUBLESHOOTING
AND
REPAIR
PROCEDURES
.........................
General
..................................
Test Equipment
............................
PCB and Power
Supply
Removal
and
Replacement
...................
System
Fails to Reload.
............
.........
Alarm
Conditions
and Reporting
.......................
Power
Failures.
Single-Line
Telephone
Related
Failures
.......
..........
Attendant
Console
Related
Failures
Siemens
Digital
Telephone
(SDT)
Related
Failures
.
. . . .
.
.
Manual
On-Line
Diagnostic
Tests
. .
Automatic
On-Line
Audit Tests,
. . . .
Spare
Parts
. . . . . . . . .. . . .
. . . .

LIST

SATURN
IIE System
Basic
Cabinet
. . .
SATURN
IIE System
with Basic
and
Expansion
Cabinets
. . . . . . . .
SATURN
IIE System
Block
Diagram
Power
System
Unit (PSU),
Front
View
Controller/Input-Output
Processor
Printed
Circuit
Board
(CIOP)
.
Remote
Access
Unit/Ports
Printed
Circuit
Board
(RAUP)
.
.
SATURN
IIE EPABX
Basic
Cabinet,
Front
View

FIGURE

PAGE
l-2
1-3
2-l
2-3
. .

2-5
2-6
2-12

2.06

2.10
2.11
2.12
4.00
4.01
4.02
4.03
4.04
4.05
4.06
4.07

PAGE

SATURN
IIE EPABX-Basic
Cabinet,
...............................
Rear-View
SATURN
IIE EPABX
Basic
and Expansion
Cabinets,
Front
View
......................
SATURN
IIE EPABX
Basic
and Expansion
......................
Cabinets,
Rear
View
Block
Diagram
of AC Input
to Power
Supply
. .- ................
Assemblies
and Modules
Layout
of Connectors
and Terminals
on
Power
System
Unit (PSU)
Rear
Panel
........
Fusing
of -48 Volt Outputs
from -48PSO
and -48PSl
..............................
Power
System
Unit (PSU)
Block
Diagram
.....
........................
RAC/RMW
Signals
Power
System
Unit (PSU)
Power
Connections
-48PSO
Module
Power
Connections
..........
....
Basic
Shelf
Backplane
Power
Connections
LTUPS
Module
Power
Connections.
..........
LTU Shelf
Backplane
Power
Connections.
.....
Attendant
Console
Keypad
and Feature
Button
Depression
Sequence.
.....................
Siemens
DYAD Telephone
Button
Depression
Sequence
...............................
Siemens
JR-DYAD
Telephone
Button
......................
Depression
Sequence

LIST

2.01
2.02
3.00
4.00
4.01
4.02
4.03
4.04
4.05
4.06
4.07
4.08
4.09
4.10
4.11
4.12
4.13
4.14
4.15
4.16
4.17
4.18
4.19

2-14
2-15
2-17
2-18
2-19
2-21
2-24
4-21
4-22
4-24
4-25
4-26
4-37
4-42
4-45

OF TABLES

TABLE
1.00
2.00

2-13

PAGE
............

Mnemonics
Used
in This Practice
Functions
of Connectors
and Terminals
on
PSU Rear
Panel
.........................
Pin Functions
at Connector
J13
on the PSU
.............................
Alarm
LEDs
and Output
Status
at
.................
Connector
J13 on the PSU
........
Floppy
Disk Head
Cleaning
Procedure
PCB and Power
Supply
Removal
Guidelines
Failure
Indications
on Controller/input-Output
Processor
Printed
Circuit
Board
(CIOP)
........
Alarm
Reporting
and Processing
.............
Failure
Indications
on LTUC
Printed
Circuit
Board
..................................
Memory
Support
Module
(MSM)
Battery
Test
....................................
Allowable
Voltage
Ranges
..................
......................
Tone Generator
Test
..............
Tone Generator
Test Numbers
Outgoing
Trunk
Test
......................
DTMF
Receiver
Test
......................
................
Placing
Circuit(s)
In-Service
Taking-Circuit(s)
.Out-of-Service
DTMF
Dial Pad Test
Station
Line Test
Attendant
Console
Test
.
.
Attendant
Console
Displayable
Characters
Siemens
DYAD Telephone
Button
Test
.
Siemens
JR-DYAD
Telephone
Button
Test
Siernens
DYAD Telephone
Display
Test
Siemens
DYAD Telephone
Displayable
Characters

l-4
2-20
2-25
2-25
3-l
... 4-2
4-3
4-4
4-17
4-17
4-19
4-31
4-31
4-32
4-33
4-33
4-34
4-35
4-36
4-38
4-39
4-40
4-43
4-46
4-47

--.

SATURN
Maintenance

IlE

EPABX
and Troubleshooting

A30808-X5130-DllO-l-8920
Issue
1, May

SEC?‘lON

1.00

INTRODUCTION

1.01
Purpose.
This maintenance
series
practice
provides
step-by-step
instructions
for troubleshooting
and repairing
a
malfunctioning
SATURN
IIE (SATURN
II - Expanded)
Electronic
Private
Automatic
Branch
Exchange
(EPABX)
System.
The information
contained
in this practice
allows
maintenance
personnel
to locate
and
correct
malfunctions
during
precutover
and postcutover
of the system.
Figures
1.00 and
1.01 illustrate
the two cabinet
configurations
of the SATURN
HE System.
CAUTION
Maintenance
be performed
Table

1.00

1.02
divided

Scope.
into

a.
b.
c.
d.

procedures
on the
only
by Siemens
defines

the

mnemonics

The information
following
four

Introduction
Maintenance
Preventive
Troubleshooting

Overview
Maintenance
and

SATURN
certified
used

IIE EPAEX
personnel.
in this

practice.

in this

practice

contained
sections:

Repair

Procedures

1986

1.03
Siemens
SATURN
numbers,
and dates
for
the Practices
Documentation
NOTE:

Always
refer
dex to obtain

the

HE Practices.
The practices,
SATURN
HE EPABX
are
Index. A.30808X5130-AlgO-

issue
listed
in
* -8987.

to the latest
issue of the applicable
inthe latest issue number
of the practice.

1.04
Siemens
Customer
Support
Services.
Siemens
maintains
a nationwide
network
of field service
offices.
Contact the Siemens
regional
office
for any engineering
assistance
which
may be required.

must

1.05
What
to Do in Case of Trouble
with FCC-Registered
Equipment.
When
trouble
is experienced
with FCC-registered
equipment
of the SATURN
IIE EPABX,
the procedures
contained
in this document
should
be followed,
by qualified
maintenance
personnel,
to isolate
and correct
the malfunction.
If
spare
equipment
is not available,
the telephone
company
must be notified
that the equipment
is faulty
and this equipment
must be disconnected
from the public
telephone
network. The telephone
company
must also be notified
when the
faulty
equipment
has been
repaired.or
replaced
and such
equipment
is reconnected
to the public telephone
network.

l-l

SATURN
Maintenance

IIE

EPABX
and Troubleshooting

A30808-X5130-DllO-l-8920
issue
1, May

Figure

1-2

1.00

SATURN

IIE

System

Basic

Cabinet

1986

A3~~0~-~513O-~i~o-~-8~~~

issue

SATURN
Maintenance

IIE EPABX
and Troubleshooting

IN Ii E

SIEMENS

I, May

19%

SATURN
Maintenance

IiE

EPABX
and Troubleshooting

Table
MNEMONIC
AC6
ANA
ASCII
CE
CIOP
CMU
co
CONF
CRC
CRT
DCI
DID
DIP
DISA
DIT
DP
DTE
DTMF
DTR
DVM
EIA
EPABX
FDD
HZ
IRAM
I/O
LDN
LED
LRU
LSI
LTU
LTUC
LTUPS
MCA
MDF
MEM3
MEM4
MOS
MSI
MSL
MSM
MTCE
MTS
ORAM
PABX
PCB
PEN
P!MD
PRS
PSC
PSU
RAClRMW
RAUP
RGEN
RLT
RMS
RMTE
ACT
SDT
SIB
SLA
SLA16
SLMA-0

1-4

1.00

Mnemonics

Used

in This
DEFINITION

Automatic
Call Distribution
Assigned
Night
Answer
American
Standard
Code
for Information
Interchange
Common
Equipment
Controller/Input-Output
Processor
Customer
Memory
Update
Central
Office
Conference
Cyclic
Redundancy
Check
Cathode
Ray Tube
Data Communications
Interface
Direct
Inward
Dialing
Dual lnline
Package
Direct
Inward
System
Access
Dedicated
Incoming
Trunk
Dial Pulse
Data Terminal
Equipment
Dual-Tone
Multifrequency
Data Terminal
Ready
Digital
Voltmeter
Electronics
Industries
Association
Electronic
Private
Automatic
Branch
Exchange
Floppy
Disk Drive
Hertz
Input
Random
Access
Memory
Input/Output
Listed
Directory
Number
Light-Emitting
Diode
Least
Replaceable
Unit
Large
Scale
Integration
Line/Trunk
Unit
Line/Trunk
Unit Control
Line/Trunk
Unit Power
Supply
Memory
Control
and Attenuator
Main
Distribution
Frame
System
Memory
- 256 kilobyte
System
Memory
- 1 Megabyte
Metal
Oxide
Semiconductor
Medium
Scale
Integration
Main/Satellite
Link
Memory
Support
Module
Maintenance
Memory
Time
Switch
Output
Random
Access
Memory
Private
Automatic
Branch
Exchange
Printed
Circuit
Board
Port Equipment
Number
Premium
Instrument
Module
Digital
Protection
Reload
Signal
Parallel-to-Serial
Converter
Power
System
Unit
Ring AC/Ring
Message
Waiting
Remote
Access
Unit/Ports
Ring Generator
Release
Link Trunk
Root-Mean-Square
Amplitude
Remote
Active
Siemens
Digital
Telephone
Signal
Buffer
Subscriber
Line Analog
Subscriber
Line Module
Analog
- 16 Lines
Subscriber
Line Module
Analog
- Off Premises

Practice

SATURN
Maintenance

IIE

A30808-X5130-DllO-l-8920
Issue
1, May

EPABX
and Troubleshooting

Table
MNEMONIC
SLMA-S
SLMD
SLT
SMDR
SMXTG
T&R
TM BA-2
TMBA-4
TMBM
TMIE
TMS
TTY
-48PS

1.00

Mnemonics

Used

in This

Practice

1986

(Continued)

DEFINITION

I
Subscriber
Line Module
Analog
Subscriber
Line Module
Digital
Single-Line
Telephone
Station
Message
Detail
Recording
Signal
Multiplexer/Tone
Generator
Tip and Ring
2-Wire
E&M Trunk
4-Wire
E&M Trunk
Central
Office
Trunk
Direct
Inward
Dialing
Trunk
Transmission
Measuring
Set
Teletypewriter
-48Vdc
Power
Supply

- Station

l-5

(1-6

blank)

SATURN
Maintenance

IIE

EPABX
and Troubleshooting

A30808-X5130-DllO-l-6920
Issue
1, May

SECTION

2.00

MAINTENANCE

2.01
Introduction.
This section
describes
the design
considerations
and maintenance
facilities
incorporated
in the
SATURN
IIE EPABX.
The maintenance
concept
for the EPABX
is based
on detecting
and isolating
failures
to the Least
Replaceable
Unit (LRU),
replacing
the faulty
LRU, and restoring normal
service
as soon as possible.
The maintenance
concept
does
not include
the replacement
of components
on
Printed
Circuit
Boards
(PCBs).
When
a PCB is found
to be
defective,
the PCB must
be replaced
and the original
sent
to the repair
facility.
2.02
General.
In its basic
configuration,
System
is housed
in a single
light-weight
called the Basic Cabinet
(shown
in Figure

OVERVIEW

configuration,
the SATURN
IIE System
is housed
in a Basic
Cabinet-plus
an Expansion
Cabinet,
which
is mounted
on top
of the Basic
Cabinet
as shown
in.Figure
1.01. The equipment
cabinet(s)
contain
all functional
units of the system.
The system is divided
into five functional
blocks
of circuits
as shown
in the block diagram
of Figure
2.00. These
functional
blocks
may be directly
related
to the system’s
hardware
groups.
The
functional
blocks
are as follows:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.

the SATURN
IIE
equipment
cabinet,
1.00). In its expanded

Line/Trunk
Switching
Control
Power
Ancillary

Equipment

ATTENDANT
ICONSOLE
pF-J
ANCILLARY
EQUIPMENT

r-----1

‘-J-j&

LTU SHELF

BASIC

------__

SHELF
_________

LINE/TRUNK

~
SWITCHING
NETWORK

COW

ORTRUNK
FORREMOTE
MAINTENANCE
I
===-I

ANCILLARY
EQUIPMENT

Figure

2.00

SATURN

1986

IIE System

Block

Diagram

SATURN
Maintenance

IIE

2.03
Design
Considerations.
corporated
in the SATURN
a.

A30808-X5130-DllO-I-8920
Issue
1, May

EPABX
and Troubleshooting

The design
IIE EPABX
are

considerations
discussed

tionally
provided
by the customer),
to the CO side of
the trunk
cable
pairs at the Main Distribution
Frame
(MDF).
This action
allows
the stations
to originate
and
terminate
calls.
Note that a ground
start button
may
be required
on the preselected
failure
transfer
station
instrument(s)
to allow origination
of calls on ground
start CO trunks.
Maintenance-personnel
can select
one
of the three
following
transfer
modes:

inbelow.

Component
Packaging.
The SATURN
IIE EPABX
architecture
is modularly
designed
to allow maintenance
personnel
to quickly
recognize
and isolate
failures.
Modularity
is achieved
primarily
by using
Large
Scale
Integration
(LSI) and Medium
Scale
Integration
(MSI)
techniques.
Extensive
use of these
technrques
allows
greater
circuit
density
on each PCB thereby
reducing
the total number
of PCBs
in the SATURN
IIE EPABX.
Dependability.
Dependability
is the
ability
of the
SATURN
IIE EPABX
to automatically
test system
functions;
detect
and analyze
failures;
reset and/or
clear
detected
failures
by attempting
automatic
recovery;
and
report
reconfigurations
and failures
when
automatic
recovery
is not possible.
The primary
objective
of dependabili?y
is to maintain
the SATURN
IIE EPABX
in
good operating
condition
and, when
failures
occur,
to
locate
and identify
such
failures
as soon as possible
with minimal
service
effect
to the customer.

AUTO. The Automatic

INHIBIT.
The inhibit
(INHIBIT)
mode
prevents
the
failure
transfer
relays
from
connecting
the
preselected
failure
transfer
stations
directly
to the
CO trunks
that bypass
the EPABX
in the event
of
a major
alarm.
Al! the preselected
failure
transfer
stations
remain
connected
to their assigned
station ports unless
a power failure
occurs,
The failure
transfer
relays
are operated
by a power failure (power failure
transfer
takes precedence
over the inhibit
mode).
Note that the associated
INHIBIT
(yellow
LED) indicator
is steadily
lit when
the inhibit
mode
is selected.
Also, when in the inhibit
mode, the system’s optional
remote
major alarm
indicator
is disabled,
except
when
a power
failure
occurs.
The
inhibit
mode
allows
on-site
maintenance
personnel to perform
maintenance
functicns
without
causing a system
failure
transfer
to occur
or to falsely
alert the optional
remote
alarm
location.
It is the
responsibility
of the on-site
maintenance
personnel to monitor
the system’s
grade
of service
in the
inhibit
mode,
to be sure its service
quality
has not
deteriorated
to a point where
system
failure
transfer would
be beneficial.

ACTIVE.
The active
(ACTIVE)
mode
forces
the
failure
transfer
relays
to connect
the preselected
failure
transfer
stations
directly
to the CO trunks
and bypass
the EPABX.
While
in this mode,
no internal
calls can be originated
from the preselected failure
transfer
stations;
however,
the other
stations
are not prevented
from originating
calls,
providing
that the EPABX
is operational.
Note that
the associated
red LED indicator
is steadily
lit when
the active
mode
is selected.
Also, when the active
mode
is selected,
the optional
system’s
remote
alarm
location
is alerted
that the EPABX
was
bypassed
by the system
failure
transfer
circuits.

2.04

Maintenance
Facilities.
Maintenance
facilities
are
equipment
and features
which
allow maintenance
functions
of the SATURN IIE EPABX to be performed.
The maintenance
facilities
are listed
below
and described
in the subsequent
paragraphs.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.

Power
System
Unit (PSU)
Maintenance
Phone
Service
Terminal
Manual
On-Line
Diagnostic
Tests
Automatic
On-Line
Diagnostic
Testing
Alarm
Indicators
and Classification
Alarm
Error
Codes

2.05

and

Reporting

Power System Unit. The Power System
Unit
2.01) provides
maintenance
personnel
central
access
system’s
maintenance
functions.
The items discussed
are contained
on the PSU to centralize
its maintenance
tions. Other
items on the PSU, such as fuses and circuit
ers. are discussed
elsewhere
in this document.

2-Z

(Figure
to the
below
funcbreak-

ALARMS.

FAILURE
TRANSFER.
The FAILURE
TRANSFER
section is a three-position
switch
with two associated
LED
indicators
used to enable
or disable,
either
automatically or manually,
a customer-provided
failure
transfer relay
subsystem.
The failure
transfer
relays
are
external
to the system
and are designed
to connect
Central
Office
(CO) trunks
to preselected
stations
in
the event
of a major
alarm
or power
failure.
During
a
major
alarm
or power
failure,
the Tip and Ring (T&R)
leads of the preselected
failure transfer
stations
are automattcally
switched,
via the failure
transfer
relays
(op-

1986

The ALARMS indicator
section
consists
of
two light-emitting
diode
(LED)
indicators
which,
when
steadily
lit, provide
a visual
status
of alarm
condition(s)
existing
in the system.
The red LED is designated
MAJOR
for a major
alarm
condition
and, when
lit, indicates
that the system
is unable
to process
calls and
failure
transfer
is enabled.
The yellow
LED is designated MINOR
for a minor
alarm condition(s)
and, when
lit indicates
at least one of the automatic
on-line
diagnostic
tests
has detected
a failure
in the system;
however,
the system
is still processing
calls.

(AUTO)
mode,
is the normal
position
for the FAILURE
TRANSFER
switch.
Inthe
event
of major
alarm
or power
failure,
this mode
automatically
enables
the failure
transfer
relays
to
connect
the preselected
failure
transfer
stations
directly
to the CO trunks
and bypass
the EPABX.
Note that, while
in this mode
and in the event
of
a major alarm or power failure,
no internal
calls can
be originated
from the preselected
failure
transfer
stations.

MTCE

PHONE.
The
Maintenance
Phone
(MTCE
section
provides
a modular
jack which
permits connection
of the maintenance
phone
to the maintenance
line circuit
of the EPABX.
The maintenance
line may be assigned
to any Port Equipment
Number
(PEN).
Usually
PEN 0000
is assigned
to the maintenance
phone.
The T&R leads of the modular
jack are
brought
out to the MDF for cross-connection
to the assigned
main!enance
line circuit.

PHONE)

SATURN
Maintenance

IIE

EPABX
and Troubleshooting

A30808-X5130-DllO-l-8920
Issue
1. May

Battery
Fuses
I

Major

LED

Minor

Test

(Gr7en)

LED

Figure

Active
LED
(Red)

2.01

Power

Battery
Power
LED (Red)
I

MTCE

Battery
Test
Switch

1986

+5V Adjust
Potentl]ometer

Phone

System

Switch

(Yellow)

Jack

Unit,

(PSU)

Front

View

2-3

SATURN
Maintenance

2.06
either
station
of the

Maintenance
Phone.
The maintenance
phone
can be
a portable
test phone,
test set, or a standard
two-wire
instrument
used to access
the maintenance
functions
system,
either
locally
or remotely.

Local
Maintenance
Functions.
The maintenance
line
is usually
assigned
as a Dual-Tone
Multifrequency
(DTMF)
station
type;
however,
a Dial Pulse
(DP) or
DTMF
maintenance
phone
may be connected
to it. Local interfacing
of the maintenance
phone with the maintenance
functions
is achieved
via the maintenance
line
circuit
by connecting
its line cord to either
the designated iack (i.e.. MTCE
PHONE)
on the PSU front oanel
or the’ T&R leads
of the PEN
assigned
and drossconnected
at the MDF.
Once
interfaced,
the maintenance
phone
can access
a repertoire
of system
and
apparatus
diagnostic
test programs
by dialing
the
maintenance
diagnostic
test access
code (customer
assignable
via CMU
procedures).
During
at any
releases
phone
dialed.

local maintenance
functions,
a hookswitch
flash
point in a test clears
any diagnostic
conditions,
any resources,
and returns
the maintenance
to the point
where
a test select
code
may be

Remote
Maintenance
Functions.
The maintenance
phone,
when
used for remote
(off-site)
maintenance
functions,
must be assigned
as a DTMF
station
type.
In DP systems,
a DTMF
receiver
must be assigned
so
that the maintenance
phone
can be used to communidate with the system.
Maintenance
personnel
at a remote
area
can gain
access
to the diagnostic
test
programs
by dialing
the directory
number
associated
with the Direct
Inward
System
Access
(DISA)
feature,
an appropriate
two- to four-digit
authorization
code, and
the diagnostic
test access
code;
or an attendant
can
complete
an incoming
call to the test number.
During
remote
maintenance
operations,
the hookswitch
flash signal
cannot
be sent over the public
telephone
network
to the maintenance
port; therefore,
after each
test is completed,
maintenance
personnel
must redial
the DISA trunk
directory
number
in order
to perform
further
tests.

2.07
Service
Terminal.
The service
terminal
is a customerprovided
CRT or keyboard-printer
data terminal.
It provides
further
troubleshooting
capabilities
in addition
to the maintenance
phone
by interfacing,
either
locally
or remotely,
with
the maintenance
functions
of the system
via a dedicated
data
port. Once
interfaced,
the service
terminal
can be used to
gain access
to a repertoire
of auditing
routines
and the failure
history
memory
as well as performing
CMU
procedures.
a.

2-4

A30808-X5130-DllO-l-8920
Issue
1, May

IIE EPABX
and Troubleshootrng

Local
Maintenance
Functions.
The service
terminal,
when
used for local (on-site)
maintenance
functions,
must be equipped
with an EIA RS-232-C
interface.
Local interfacing
of the service
terminal
with the system’s
maintenance
functions
is achieved
via a dedicated
data

1986

port
by connecting
its signal
cable
to the 25-pin
W-232-C
TTY connector
on the front of the CIOP PCB
(Figure
2.02).
DIP switches
on the CIOP
PCB permit
the baud
rate to be set at 300, 1200, 2400,
or 9600
baud.
One or both of the TTY connectors
on the front
of the RAUP
(Figure
2.03) may also be used for local
maintenance
functions.
These
interfaces
(also
RS-232-C
compatible)
are programmable
to any of 15
baud
rates
between
50 and 9600
baud.
The default
baud
rate is 9600.
b.

Remote
Maintenance
Functions..
The
RAUP
PCB
(Figure
2.03)
of the
SATURN
IIE System
has
a
designed-in,
serial
modem
port to facilitate
communication,
via standard
telephone
lines, between
a remote
modem
and terminal
and the main system
processor.
This modem,
which
is answer-only
and does not dial
out, self-sets
to either
300 baud or 1200 baud depending upon the incoming
baud rate. (The modem
port and
either
or both of the two TTY ports
of the RAUP
may
all be used simultaneously
if desired.)
A green
Remote
Active
(RMTE
ACT) LED on the RAUP
lights
steadily
to indicate
when
the carrier
detect
signal
is active
on
the modem
accessed
by the remote
service
terminal.
The
service
terminal
at the remote
site must
be
equipped
with an originating-type
modem
compatible
with modem
type 103 or 212A.
Maintenance
personnel at a remote
area can gain access
to the system’s
maintenance
functions
by:
1.

Dialing
the listed
directory
number
for the system
EPABX
attendant
and requesting
the attendant
(or
ANA station
user, if the system
is in the niqht’mode)
to extend
to a station-number
which-is
cross:
connected
to the SLA port dedicated
to the RAUP
modem.

In systems
equipped
with Direct
Inward
Dialing
(DID),
dialing
the DID extension
number
of a station which
is cross-connected
to the SLA port dedicated
to the RAUP
modem.

Dialing
the listed directory
number
associated
with
the Direct
Inward
System
Access
(DISA)
feature,
a threeor four-digit
authorization
code,
and the
number
assigned
to a station
cross-connected
to
the SLA port dedicated
to the RAUP
modem.

Dialing
the listed directory
loop-start
CO trunk circuit
RAUP
modem.

number
connected

of a dedicated
directly
to the

Once the SLA circuit
associated
with the service
terminal
and
the RAUP
modem
port has been accessed,
the answer
tone
is heard
when
the handset
assembly
is to be placed
in the
data mode (e.g., placed
in an acoustic
coupler).
Refer to the
SATURN
IIE EPABX
Customer
Memory
Update
(CMU)
Procedures
practice
and the service
terminal’s
operating
manual
to coordinate
proper
operating
procedures
before
any command
inputs
are entered.

SATURN
Maintenance

IIE

A30808-X5130-DllO-l-8920
issue
1, May

EPABX
and Troubleshooting

Figure

2.02

Controller/Input-Output

Processor

Printed

Circuit

Board

1986

(CIOP)

2-5

SATURN
Maintenance

IIE

EPABX
and Troubleshooting

RMTE ACT
LED
(Green)

TTY0 Connector

TTY1 Connector

Figure

2.03

Remote

Access

Unit/Ports

Printed

Circuit

Board

(RAUP)

SATURN
Maintenance

IIE EPABX
and Troubleshooting

A30808-X5130-DllO-l-8920
Issue
1, May

Memory
Time
Switch
(MTS).
This test is performed,
either
locally
or remotely,
via the maintenance
phone
by dialing
test select
code H. After the # is dialed,
the
Port Equipment
Number
(PEN)
of the particular
DTMF
:eceiver
circuit
under
test is dialed.
The pushbuttons
on the DTMF
keypad
of the maintenance
phone
are
then depressed
in a fixed sequence.
If the telephone
has a 12-button
keypad,
the buttons
are depressed
in
the following
sequence:
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 0, *,
and #. If the telephone
has a 16-button
keypad,
the
buttons
are depressed
in this sequence:
A, B, C, D,
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 0, 9, Oi *, and #. After depressing
the pushbuttons
in the applicable
fixed sequence,
a
test tone (1004 Hz) is returned
if the DTMF
receiver
circuit under
test recognized
all the tones associated
with
the pushbuttons.
If the pushbuttons
are depressed
in
the wrong
sequence
or the DTMF
receiver
circuit
under test failed to recognize
a particular
tone, intercept
tone is returned.

2.08
Manual
On-Line
Diagnostic
Tests.
The SATURN
IIE
EPABX
software
includes
a group
of system
diagnostic
and
apparatus
diagnostic
test programs
which
are used via the
maintenance
phone.
Resulting
visual
and/or
audible
responses
from these
tests make
it possible
to verify correct
operation
or detect
and isolate
system
and apparatus
malfunctions.
2.09 System
Diagnostic
Tests.
The system
diagnostic
programs
permit
calls and procedures
to be initiated
into and
through
the system
to verify
the correct
operation
of the call
processing
functions
of the system
equipment.
In order
to access
the system
diagnostic
tests,
the maintenance
diagnostic
test access
code (customer
assignable
via a CMU
procedure)
must first be dialed
by using the maintenance
phone.
Once the maintenance
diagnostic
test access
code has been
entered
into the system,
the following
listed
tests and procedures
can be performed:
l

0
l
l

0
a.

Tone Generator
Outgoing
Trunk
DTMF
Receiver
Placing
Circuits
Taking
Circuits

Test (Refer
to Table
4.06)
Test (Refer
to Table
4.08)
Test (Refer
to Table 4.09)
in Service
(Refer
to Table 4.10)
Out of Service
(Refer
to Table 4.11)

Placing
Circuits
In Service.
This
procedure
allows
maintenance
personnel
to place
an assigned
circuit
in service
from an out-of-service
state. This procedure
is performed,
either
locally
or remotely,
via the maintenance
phone
by dialing
test select
code
7. After 7
is dialed,
the PEN of the particular
circuit
to be placed
in service
(in either
an- SLMA-0,
SLMA-S,
SLA16,
SLMD.
PIMD.
DTMF.
TMBM.
TMBA-2.
TMBA-4.
or
TMIE
PCB)
is’dialed.‘Note
that all circuiis
on a pahicular PCB (with exception
of the SL416 PCB) are placed
in service
by entering
the digit 8 as the circuit
location
of the PEN (e.g.,
0028 places
all circuits
in the basic
shelf,
designated
as shelf 0, channel
group
0, slot 2,
in service).
If all 16 circuits
of an SLAl6
PCB are to
be placed
in service,
they are placed
in service
eight
circuits
at a time. The first sight circuits
for an SLA16
(in the same
shelf,
channel
group,
and slot as above)
are placed
in service
as described,
i.e., by entering
0028. The second
eight circuits
are placed
in service
by dialing
0038 (a 1 is added
to the basic
slot number
to designate
the second
eight
circuits
on an SLAl6
PCB).
If the procedure
fails, either
due to entry of an
invalid
circuit
number
or because
the slot number
is
unassigned,
reorder
tone is returned.
Successful
completion
of the procedure
is indicated
by the return
of
confirmation
tone.

Taking
Circuits
Out of Service.
This procedure
allows
maintenance
personnel
to take an assigned
circuit
out
of service
from an in-service
state. This procedure
is
performed,
either
locally
or remotely,
via the maintenance
phone
by dialing
test select
code 8. After the
digit 8 is dialed,
the PEN of the particular
circuit
(in
either
an SLMA-0,
SLMA-S,
SLA16,
SLMD,
PIMD,
DTMF,
TMBM,
TMBA-2,
TMBA-4,
or TMIE
PCB) to be
taken
out of service
is dialed.
Note that all circuits
on
a particular
PCB (with exception
of the SLA16
PCB)
are taken
out of service
by entering
the digit 8 as the
circuit
location
of the PEN (e.g., 0208)
places
all circuits in the basic shelf (0), channel
group
2, slot 0 out
of service).
If all 16 circuits
of an SLA16
PCB are to
be taken
out of service,
the procedure
is performed
eight
circuits
at a time. The first eight
circuits
for an
.%A16
(in the same
shelf, channel
group,
and slot number as above)
are taken
out of service
as described,
i.e., by entering
0208
The second
eight
circuits
are
taken
out of service
by dialing
0218 (a 1 is added
to

Tone
Generator
Test.
This
test
verifies
each
tone
produced
by the tone generator,
located
in the SMXTG
PCB, either
individually
or in a circular
sequence.
This
test is performed,
either
locally
or remotely,
by dialing
test select
code 1 from the maintenance
phone.
After
the digit 1 is dialed, two more digits are dialed to select
the individual
tone to be tested
or to initiate
the automatic
circular
sequencing
of all tones.
If an individual
tone is selected,
the maintenance
phone
is connected to that tone (through
the MTS) as long as it remains
off-hook.
If the automatic
circular
sequence
is initiated, each tone is connected
to the maintenance
phone
(through
the MTS)
for approximately
2 seconds
with
an intertone
silence
period
of 0.25 to 0.5 second.
The
test automatically
advances
to the next tone in a circular sequence
as long as the maintenance
phone
remains
off-hook.
Outgoing
Trunk
Test. This test verifies
the supervisory
and transmission
capabilities
(in the outgoing
direction) of any individually
selected
outgoing
or two-way
trunk
circuit
on either
a TMBM,
TMBA-2,
or TMBA-4
PCB. The test also checks
the connection
path through
the MTS. This test is performed
either
locally or remotely, via the maintenance
phone
by dialing
the test select
code 2. After the digit 2 is dialed,
the trunk group
number (00 to 31) followed
by the trunk
number
within
the
particular
trunk
group
(00 to 99) is dialed.
The maintenance
phone
is then cut-through
to the specific
trunk
circuit
selected,
seizing
it in the outgoing
direction.
Seizure is confirmed
when
dial tone is returned
to the
maintenance
phone.
The transmiss’ion
quality
of the
trunk
can be checked
by dialing
the CO milliwatt
test
tone number
or the test tone access
code of the EPABX
(if provided).
The milliwatt
test tone frequency
and level
(1004
Hz @ OdBm)
may be measured
by means
of a
Transmission
Measuring
Set (TMS).
DTMF
Receiver
Test. This test verifies
any individually selected
DTMF
receiver
circuit
on a DTMF
PCB. The
test
also
checks
the connection
path
through
the

1986

2-7

SATURN
Maintenance

A30808-X5130-DllO-l-8920
Issue
1, May

IIE EPABX
and Troubleshooting

then be verified
by measuring
the test
cy and level by using
a TMS.

the basic slot number
to designate
the second
eight
circuits
on an SLA16
PCB).
When
this procedure
is
enabled,
it allows
existing
calls on the circuits
to be
completed
before
being
taken
out of service.
If the
procedure
fails, because
the selected
circuit
is either
invalid
or unassigned,
reorder
tone is returned.
Successful
completion
of the procedure
is indicated
by the
return
of confirmation
tone after the circuit
is taken
out
of service
(i.e., after calls in progress
are completed).
In addition,
maintenance
personnel
are not required
to wait for confirmation
tone before
placing
the maintenance
phone
on-hook
to take the circuit
out of service. Once
this procedure
is enabled,
it automatically
takes the pariicular
circuit
out of service
as each call
is completed.
2.10
Apparatus
Diagnostic
Tests.
tic tests permit
testing
of the various
consoles
that may be interfaced
with
These
tests verify proper
operation
of
Siemens
Digital
Telephones
(DYADs
tendant
Consoles
connected
to the

The apparatus
diagnostypes
of telephones
and
the SATURN
IIE EPABX.
Single
Line Telephones,
and JR-DYADs),
and AtEPABX.

0
0
0
l

Line Tests.
The following
tests
can be
on a SATURN
EPABX
station
instrument:

per-

Siemens
Digital
Telephone
- DYAD Button
Test. This
test checks
the signaling
highways
to and from a DYAD
Telephone,
its LED indicators,
and audible
alerting
device.
The test can only be enabled
after dialing
the
apparatus
diagnostic
test select
code 3 via the maintenance
phone,
if required,
and the Siemens
Digital
Telephone
button
test access
code (customer
assiqnabte via a CMU procedure)
from theDYAD
Telephole
under
test. After the Siemens
Diaital
Telephone
button test access
code
is dialed,
the DYAD’Telephone
keypad
and feature
buttons
are depressed
in a fixed
sequence.
As each button
is depressed,
data are sent
from the DYAD Telephone
to the test program.
If a data
error or an incorrect
sequence
is detected,
busy tone
is returned
to the DYAD Telephone.
LED indications
are
provided
to verify
correct
operation
of the transmit
and
receive
circuits
of the DYAD
Telephone.
Successful
completion
of the test is indicated
by the returning
of
ringback
tone to the DYAD Telephone
handset
and the
sounding
of an audible
alerting
device
in the telephone.

Siemens
Digital
Telephone
- JR-DYAD
This test checks
the signaling
highways
a JR-DYAD
Telephone,
its LED indicators,
alerting
device.
The test is very similar
DYAD Telephone
described
above
with

Dial Pad Test. This test checks
the transmission
capabilities
and DTMF
keypad
performance
of any
DTMF
instrument.
This test can only be enabled
after dialing
the apparatus
diagnostic
test select
code 3 from the maintenance
phone,
if required,
and the dial pad test access
code (customer
assigned
via a CMU
procedure)
from the station
instrument
under
test. After the dial pad test access
code is dialed,
recall
dial tone is returned
and the
dial pad keys are depressed
in a fixed sequence.
If the telephone
has a 1Bbutton
keypad,
the buttons are depressed
in the following
sequence:
1,
2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 0, *, and #. If the telephone
has a 16-button
keypad,
the buttons
are depressed
in this sequence:
A, B, C, D, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8,
9, 0,. * and ft.
As each key is depressed,
data are sent from the
instrument
to the test program.
If a data error or
an incorrect
sequence
is detected,
busy
tone is
returned.
Successful
completion
of this test is indicated
by the return
of a test tone (1004Hz
@
-16dBm).
The transmission
quality
of the station
can

2-8

Ringback
Test. This test checks
the supervisory
and transmission
capabilities
of any station
instrument (rotary
dial, DTMF
and Siemens
Digital
Telephone).
This test can only be enabled
after dialing
the apparatus
diagnostic
test select
code 3 from
the maintenance
phone,
if required,
and the ringback test access
code (customer
assignable
via a
CMU
procedure)
from the station
instrument
under test. After the ringback
tesi access
code is dialed,
confirmation
tone is returned,
and the user
places
the station
instrument
on-hook.
When
the
station
instrument
rings,
its supervisory
capabilities are verified.
Upon
answering
the ringing
(going off-hook),
a test tone (1004
Hz @ -16dBm)
is
applied
to the station
line. The transmission
quality of the station
can then be verified
by measuring
the test tone frequency
and level by using
a TMS.

Attendant
Console
Test. This test checks
the data and
speech
highways
to and from an attendant
console,
its LED indicators,
display
module,
and audible
alerting device.
The test can only be enabled
after dialing
the apparatus
diagnostic
test select
code
3 via the
maintenance
phone,
if required,
and the attendant
console test access
code (customer
assignable
via CMU
procedure)
from the attendant
console
under
test. After the attendant
console
test access
code
is dialed,
the console
keys are depressed
in a fixed sequence.
As each is depressed,
data are sent from the console
to the test program.
If a data error occurs
or an incorrect sequence
is depressed,
busy tone is returned
to
the console.
Display
module
and LED indications
are
provided
to verify
correct
operation
of the transmit
and
receive
circuits
of the console.
Successful
completion
of this test is indicated
by the returning
of ringback
tone
to the console
handset
or headset
and the sounding
of an audible
alerting
device
in the instrument.

Station
Line Tests (Refer
to Tables
4.12 and 4.13)
Attendant
Console
Test (Refer
to Table 4.14)
Siemens
Digital
Telephone
- DYAD
Button
Test
(Refer
to Table 4.16)
Siemens
Digital
Telephone
- JR-DYAD
Button
Test
(Refer
to Table 4.17)
Siemens
Digital
Tetepnone
- DYAD Display
Test
(Refer
to Table
4.18)

Station
formed

frequen-

In order
to test a SATURN
apparatus,
the craftsperson
must
enable
the apparatus
test
program
via the maintenance
phone,
by dialing
the maintenance
diagnostic
test access
code,
followed
by the test select
code 3. Note that this procedure is not required
if the apparatus
test program
has been
permanently
enabled
as a SATURN
System
option.
Once the
apparatus
test program
is enabled,
the following
listed
apparatus
tests
can be performed:

tone

1986

Button
Test.
to and from
and audible
to that for the
the exception

--.

SATURN
Maintenance

IIE

A30808-X5130-DllO-l-6920
Issue
1, May

EPABX
and Troubleshooting

message
is recorded
in the failure
history
memory
and
the minor
alarm indicators
are lighted.
The trunk is left
in the idle off-hook
state (not disconnected,
i.e., it is
usable).

that the operation
of certain
buttons
(and SuCCeSSful
test completion)
is indicated
at the end of the test by
the return
of ringback
tone and actuation
of the audible alerting
device
in the JR-DYAD
Telephone.
e.

Siemens
Digital
Telephone
- DYAD Display
Test. This
test checks
the signalinghighways
to and from a DYAD
Telephone,
its display
module,
and audible
alerting
device.
The DYAD Telephone
display
test can only be
enabled
after
dialing
the apparatus
diagnostic
test
select
code 3 via the maintenance
phone,
if required,
and the Siemens
Digital Telephone
display
test access
code (customer
assignable
via a CMU procedure)
from
the DYAD Telephone
under test. After the Siemens
Digital Telephone
display
test access
code is dialed,
the
DYAD Telephone
alphanumeric
display
and its address
signaling
scheme
are tested.
These
tests consist
of
shifting
the entire alphanumeric
character
set through
each character
position
on the display
module.
Successful
completion
of the test is indicated
by the returning of ringback
tone to the DYAD Telephone
handset
and the sounding
of an audible
alerting
device
in the
DYAD
Telephone.
The pass/fail
status
of the test is
based
on observation
by maintenance
personnel
of the
characters
displayed.

2.11
Automatic
On-Line
Diagnostic
Testing
and Reporting. The SATURN
EPABX
System
is provided
with software
self-test
routines
and audit
test routines
which
check
for
failures
occurring
in the system.
When
a failure
is detected,
pertinent
data regarding
the failure
is recorded
in an area of
memory
called
“Failure
History”
and the appropriate
major
or minor
alarm
is enabled.
Recovery
programs
are automatically executed
as necessary
on the failing
equipment.
The
failure
history
memory
can record
32 system
failures
(error
messages)
along with the identity
of the failing equipment
and
the date and time of occurrence
for each failure.
When
the
failure
history
memory
is full, new failures
push-off
the oldest
failure
of the failure
history
memory.
The MIN ALM
key on
the attendant
console
is used to display
the failures
recorded in the failure
history
memory.
The failure
history
memory
can also.be
accessed
from a local or remote
service
terminal.
2.12
Self-Test
Routines.
The SATURN
EPABX
is provided
with software
self-test
routines
which
verify
that certain
call
processing
operations,
initiated
by the main controller
have
been
successfully
completed
by the peripheral
circuits.
If a
call processing
error
occurs,
the error(s)
is recorded
in the
failure
history
memory
and the appropriate
major
or. minor
alarm
is enabled.
Recovery
programs
are automatically
executed
as necessary
on the faulty
equipment.
a.

Connect
Test. When
a trunk
is seized
outgoing,
a
3-second
(nominal)
timer
is set. If the CO or distant
equipment
does not acknowledge
the seizure
(e.g.,
ground
return
on tip lead,
loop current,
dial tone detection,
or wink-start
signal)
before
the timer
expires,
a connect
error message
is recorded
in the failure
history memory
and the minor
alarm
indicators
are lighted. An attempt
is made to reroute
the call over another
trunk.
Disconnect
Test. When
a trunk
is released
by the
SATURN
EPABX.
a 20second
(nominal)
timer
is set.
If the CO does not release
the trunk
(e.g., ground
removed
from tip lead, open-loop
condition
on DID trunk
or E lead) before
the timer
expires,
a disconnect
error

1986

Fuse Alarm
Test. W’henever
a fuse on the PSU front
panel
fails, a fuse failure
message
is recorded
in the
failure
history
memory
and the minor
alarm
indicators
are lighted.
The
SATURN
IIE System
continues
to
process
calls
normally
for the circuits
still reporting
events.
If a fuse failure
occurs
affecting
a major
portion of the system
(e.g., common
equipment),
the major
alarm
indicators
are lighted
by virtue
of other
failures
that will result
from the blown
fuse.

Input/Output
Processor
Tests.
The CIOP
and RAUP
provide
return
codes
for each
command
to indicate
whether
or not the requested
operation
was successful. If the return
code indicates
an error or the CIOP
or RAUP
detects
an internal
failure,
an error message
is recorded
in the failure
history
memory
and the minor
alarm
indicators
are lighted.
If the CIOP detects
an error that prevents
the initialization
of the system
when
an initialization
is required,
the major alarm
indicators
are lighted.

LTU Clock
Test. Hardware
monitors
built into the Signal Multiplexernone
Generator
(SMXTG)
PCB are used
to detect
loss of principal
clock,
clock synchronization,
or ring synchronization.
If a failure
is detected,
an LTU
Clock
error message
is recorded
in the failure
history
memory
and the minor
alarm
indicators
are lighted.
The location
of the failure
is indicated’
in the error
message.

Mainbus
Timeout
Test. The system
watchdog
timer
is
set each time the mainbus
receives
a command.
If the
timer
expires
before
an acknowledgement
is returned,
a mainbus
timeout
error
message
is recorded
in the
failure
history
memory
and the minor
alarm
indicators
are lighted.

Memory
incorrect
memory
ity error
memory

Memory
Protect
Test. If a write is attempted
to a word
in write protected
memory,
the write protect
detector
on the addressed
memory
module
generates
an interrupt. A memory
protect
error message
is recorded
in
the failure
history
memory
and the minor
alarm
indicators
are lighted.

Memory
Support
Test. A voltage
level detector
circuit
provides
a software
testable
signal that indicates
when
the memory
support
battery
voltage
is below
an acceptable
voltage
level. This signal
is sampled
once per
hour by software.
If the software
testable
signal
indicates that the battery
is low or disconnected,
a memory
support
failure
message
is recorded
in the failure
history memory
and the minor alarm indicators
are lighted.

PIMD
or SLMD
Synchronization
Test. When
PC6 loses synchronization
with an attendant
or an SLMD
PCB loses synchronization
with

Parity
Test. If a word is addressed
that has
parity,
the parity
detector
on the addressed
module
generates
an interrupt.
A memory
parmessage
is recorded
in the failure
history
and the minor
alarm
indicators
are lighted.

a PIMD
console
an SDT

2-o

SATURN
Maintenance

or DCI,
history
lighted.
k.

A30808-X5130-DllO-l-8920
Issue
1, May

IIE EPABX
and Troubleshooting

a PIMD
memory

error message
is recorded
and the minor
alarm

SMXTG
Clock
Test. When
the SMXTG
1 kHz clock fails,
an SMXTG
clock
failure
message
is recorded
in the
failure
history
memory
and the major alarm
indicators
are lighted.

Software
Loop Test. When
a software
loop error exists,
a software
loop error message
is recorded
in the failure
history
memory
and the minor
alarm
indicators
are
lighted.
If the number
of errors
is excessive,
the major
alarm
indicators
are lighted.

Software
Trap Test. When
an event occurs
for a given
circuit
type, the state/event
table for that circuit
type
is accessed
to determine
what software
action
is to be
taken
in response
to the event.
If the event
is illogical
in regard
to the state of the circuit,
a software
trap error message
is recorded
in the failure
history
memory
and the minor
alarm
indicators
are lighted.

2.13 Audit
Routines.
The SATURN
IIE EPABX
software
includes
a repertoire
of audit routines
which
are executed
dur,
ing processor
idle time.
These
routines
provide
automatic
testing
of system
equipment.
Each audit routine
is designed
to be individually
enabled
(activated)
or disabled
(inactivated) from the automatic
routining
sequence.
This enable/disable capability
is only accessible
by maintenance
personnel
via a service
terminal.
When
an auditing
routine
is enabled,
detected
failures
are recorded
in the failure
history
memory
and the appropriate
major
or minor
alarm
is enabled.
All
failures
are identified
by the AUDIT
error
message
(refer to
Table 4.02).
Recovery
programs
are automatically
executed
as necessary
on faulty
equipment.
Additionally,
each audit
routine
is designed
to be executed
on demand
by maintenance
personnel
via a local or remote
service
terminal.
Immediate
results
(reasonable
execution
time considered)
of
pass or fail conditions
are provided
upon completion
of each
audit routine.
The failure
indication
can be displayed
by accessing
the failure
history
memory.
The following
listed audit
programs
are described
in subsequent
paragraphs.
l
l
l

0
*
l
l
l

2-10

by maintenance
personnel
as a demand-executed
audit routine
only to be run when memory
is first installed
or suspected
faulty.
This routine
should
normally
be
disabled
from automatically
running
on an in-service
system,
since
it may unnecessarily
disrupt
service
if
it detects
ah error in a normally
unused
portion
of the
memory.
The standard
system
data base has this audit routine
disabled.

in the failure
indicators
are

Presence
Alarm
Test. The scan data returned
for each
port circuit
contains
a presence
bit. If the presence
bit
goes inactive
for 3 seconds
or changes
state (active/inactive)
six times
in 3 seconds,
a presence
alarm
message is recorded
in the failure
history
memory
and the
minor
alarm indicators
are lighted.
The presence
alarm
is not generated
for ports
marked
as out-of-service.

Memory
Parity
Audit
Test
Memory
Content
Audit
Test
Input/Output
Loop-Around
Audit
Test
Speech
Highway
Audit
Test
DTMF
Receiver/Tone
Generator
Audit
MTS Memory
Control
Audit Test
Digital
Apparatus
Audit
Test
Trunk
Activity
Audit
Test

Test

Memory
Parity Audit Test. The memory
parity
audit test
checks
each memory
address
for correct
parity
of its
contents.
If a parity
error is detected,
the error is recorded in the failure
history
memory,
the MINOR
alarm
indicator
on the PSU is lit, and recovery
is automatically
attempted.
This audit
routine
is intended
to be used

1986

Memory
Content
Audit Test. Verifies
the check
sum of
control
memory
areas.
If a conflict
of data is detected,
the error is recorded
in the failure
history
memory,
the
MINOR
alarm
indicator
on the PSU is lit, and recovery is automatically
attempted.

Input/Output
Loop-Around
Audit Test. The input/output
loop-around
audit test provides
verification
of the input/output
interface
circuits
for the equipped
CIOP and
RAUP
PCBs.
This audit routine
checks
the comolete
l/O interface
of each PCB. This audit routine
is not intended
to provide
a test of the peripheral
equipment
accessing
the interfaces.
If the loop-around
test fails,
the failure
is recorded
in the failure
history
memory
and
the MINOR
alarm
indicator
on the PSU is lit.

Speech
Highway
Audit Test. The speech
highway
audit test checks
the individual
port’s codec
operation,
speech
highway,
and MTS switching
elements
for correct data/voice
transfer.
This audit routine
transmits
a
DTMF
tone to a selected
idle line or trunk
port in the
loopback
mode.
It then receives
the results
via a DTMF
receiver.
If the DTMF
tone is not properly
received,
the
failure
is recorded
in the failure
history
memory
and
the MINOR
alarm
indicator
on the PSU is lit.

DTMF
Receivernone
Generator
Audit Test. The DTMF
generator/receiver
audit test checks
the tone generator’s DTMF
outputs
and each equipped
DTMF
receiver
in the system
by connecting
each DTMF
tone output
from
the tone
generator
to the input
of the DTMF
receiver.
The DTMF
receiver
is then scanned
for proper
decodinq
of the tones.
Each idle DTMF
receiver
is cv-,
cled through
all DTMF
tones.
Detected
failures
are
recorded
in the failure
history
memory.
If an individual
DTMF
receiver
is faulty,
it is placed
in an out-of-service
state and the MINOR
alarm
indicator
on the PSU is
lit. If the tone generator
is faulty,
the MAJOR
alarm
indicator
on the PSU is lit.
MTS Memory
Control
Audit
Test. The MTS memory
control
audit
test provides
verification
of the MTS
memory
on the MCA printed
circuit
board.
A series
of
values
are written
to and then read from each MTS
memory
location.
If a mismatch
occurs
between
the
data written
and the data read, the failure
is recorded
in the failure
history
memory
and the MINOR
alarm
indicator
on the PSU is lit.
Digital Apparatus
Audit Test. The digital apparatus
audit
test is used
to verify
the operation
of data devices
(DCls)
connected
to the system
and used either as terminal controllers
or for pooled
modems.
When
the test
is initiated,
the
system
maintenance
channel
is
checked
first. If the maintenance
channel
is functional, then
an idle data device
is looped-back
(at the
device)
and a fixed data pattern
is written
to the maintenance
channel.
After a short
delay,
the data is read

I _-.
SATURN
Maintenance

IIE

EPABX
and Troubleshooting

A30808-X5130-DllO-l-6920
Issue
1. May

back
and,
if it matches
the original
data,
the data
device
is considered
to be fully operational
and other
idle data devices
are located
for testing.
If the first loopback
test fails, the associated
SLMD
is looped-back
and the data pattern
test is repeated.
If the second
test
fails, an SLMD
fault is suspected;
if the second
test
passes,
a DCI failure or wiring
fault is suspected.
When
either
or both tests fail, the PEN of the failed device
and the test(s)
failed
is recorded
in the failure
history
and the MINOR
alarm
indicator
on the PSU is lit.
h.

Trunk
Activity
Audit Test. The trunk
activity
audit test
checks
each assigned
trunk in any prerequested
trunk
group
for possible
abnormal
activity.
Activity
is monitored
by maintaining
attempts
event
and occupancy
usage
counts
for each trunk
in the trunk
group.
Signaling
problems
will be indicated
by seizures
of either
excessively
short
or extremely
long duration,
as evidenced
by the events
and usage
counts.
One-way
incoming
trunks
experiencing
signaling
problems
may
remain
idle for long periods
when traffic density
is high.

2.14
Alarm
Indicators
and
Classification.
Major
alarm
(MAJOR)
and Minor
alarm
(MINOR)
indicators
are provided
in the ALARMS
indicator
area of the PSU front panel and attendant
console.
These
alarm
indicators
provide
an indication of one of three
possible
system
alarm
conditions:
a.

No Alarm
(MAJOR
- No detectable

Minor Alarm (MINOR.alarm
indicator
lighted)
one of the automatic
on-line
diagnostic
tests
tected
a failure
in the system
and maintenance
sonnel
attention
is required
when
possible.

At least
has deper-

Major

Alarm

(MAJOR

and MINOR
failures
are

alarm

alarm
present

indicator

indicators
in the

lighted)

dark)
system.

The

system
is in a non-operative
state
failure
transfer
relays
are active,
if
ate maintenance
personnel
attention
that certain
major alarm
conditions
major alarm (MAJ ALM)
indicator
on
sole from being
lighted.
Examples
failure.
console
power
failure,
and
2.15
EPABX
related
2.05):

Power
Distribution
and Failures.
Basic
Cabinet
is provided
with
assemblies
and modules
(refer

Power

System

Circuit

Unit

(PSU)

1986

and the system’s
provided.
Immediis required.
Note
could
prevent
the
the attendant
conare primary
power
-48PS
failure.

Each
SATURN
IIE
the following
powerto Figures
2.04 and

containing:

Breaker
(and Fuse)
Panel Basic
Power SupRina Generator
IRGEN)
Module
Control
Board
Memory
Support
Module
(MSM),
op-

DIV Board

Logic
tional
.

-48

Line/Trunk
Unit
When
the Basic
shelf,
an LTUPS

If an Expansion
following
power
2.07):

Vdc

Power

Cabinet
supplies

Supply

(-48PSO).

Power
Supply
(LTUPS),
optional.
Cabinet
is equipped
with an LTU
is required
in the LTU shelf.
is added
are added

to the
(refer

-48 Vdc Power.Supply
(-48PSl).
Supply
is added
in the space
in the Basic
Cabinet.

Line/Trunk
Unit
LTUPS
is required
sion Cabinet.

Basic
Cabinet,
to Figures
2.06

A -48
adjacent

Power
Supply(s)
in each LTU shelf

the
and

Vdc Power
to -48PS0

(LTUPS).
An
in the Expan-

2-11

SATURN
Maintenance

IIE

A30808-X5130-DllO-1-5920
Issue
1, May

EPABX
and Troubleshooting

LTU
Shelf

LTU
PS 0

:
It.

-00~1~-2-~3~-4---7r5~r6~

-COMMON

EOUIPMENT-

Basic
Shelf

Figure

2.04

SATURN

IIE EPABX

Basic

Cabinet

(Front

View)

1986

SATURN
Maintenance

IIE

A30808-X5130-DllO-1-6920
Issue
1, May

EPABX
and Troubleshooting

LTU
Shelf

1986

Basic
Shelf

A5?56-I-4/21186

Figure

2.05

SATURN

IIE

EPABX

Basic

Cabinet

(Rear

View)

2-13

SATURN
Maintenance

IIE

A30808-X5130-DllO-l-8920
Issue
1, May

EPABX
and Troubleshooting

1986

II F

[df SATIIRN

LTU Shelf

LTU
PS2
0

LTU
PSI

LTU Shelf

Basic

i
Expansion
Cabinet

’
Basic
Cabinet

Shelf

Figure

2.06

SATURN

IIE

EPABX

Basic

and

Expansion
.

Cabinets

(Front

View)

1
-

SATURN
Maintenance

IIE EPABX
and Troubleshooting

A30808-X5130-DllO-l-8920
Issue
1. May

1986

LTU
Shelf 3

LTU
Shelf 2

LTU
Shelf 1

Basic
Shelf

Figure

2.07

SATURN

IIE

EPABX

Basic

and

Expansion

Cabinets

(Rear

View)

2-15

SATURN
Maintenance

IIE EPABX
and Troubleshooting

A30808-X5130-DllO-l-8920
Issue
1, May

Figure
2.08 is a block diagram
which
shows
the ac power
input to the Power
System
Unit and ac power
distribution
to
the various
system
power
supplies
via the PSU circuit
breaker panel.
All circuit
breakers
and fuses
are mounted
on the
PSU front panel.
(Refer
to Figure
2.01.) Figure
2.09 shows
the
layout
of input/output
connectors
and terminals
on the rear
panel
of the PSU. Table 2.00 lists the designations
and functions of these
connectors
and terminals.
Figure
2.10 is a block
diagram
showing
the fusing
of -48 volt
outputs
from the -48PS
module(s).
As shown,
these
-48 volt
outputs
are supplied
to the Basic
and LTU Shelves
and the
Ring Generator
(RGEN)
module.
Also shown
is the fusing
of
the RAClRMW
(ringing
signal)
output
of the Control
Logic
Board
which
is distributed
to the Basic
and LTU Shelves.
The function
and consequences
modules
is described
below:
a.

2-16

Power
System
ber of major

of a failure

Unit (PSU).
The PSU
functions
in the SATURN

of each

of these

performs
a numIIE System.
It

1986

provides
(1) dc voltages
necessary
for operation
of the
Lineflrunk
and Common
Equipment
PCBs
in the Basic
Shelf and Floppy
Disk Drives
FDDO
and FDDl,
(2) ac
distribution-to
and circuit
breaker
protection
on the ac
inputs
of all system
power
supplies,
(3) -48Vdc
distribution
and fuse protection
on the -48PS
outputs
to the
Basic
Shelf and optional
LTU Shelf(s),
(4) it generates
and
provides
synchronization
of the
ringing
(RACIRMW)
signal
and provides
fuse protection
and
distribution
of the ringing
signal
to the Basic
Shelf and
optional
LTU Shelf(s),
(5) it provides-fuse,
voltage,
and
alarm
detection
and monitoring,
and (6) failure
transfer control
and major and minor alarm indications
when
a failure
or alarm
condition
is detected.
In addition
to
the above,
the PSU provides
mounting
facilities
and
power
input to the optional
Memory
Support
Module
(MSM)
when
it is provided
in the system.
The various
circuits
and components
that make up the PSU are listed and described
below. Refer to Figure
2.11 for a block
diagram
of the PSU.

SATURN
Maintenance

IIE

A30808-X5130-DllO-l-8920
Issue
1, May

EPABX
and Troubleshooting

1986

LINE
AC IN
(AC #O
IN
P/O LTU SHELF
(BASIC
CABINET)

,.I

LTUPSl

P/O LTU SHELF
2
(EXPANSION
CABINET)

l
I

LINE
AC IN
(AC #1
W

LTIlPS2

-48PSl

P/O LTU SHELF
3
(EXPANSION
CABINET)

l *

Figure

OPTIONAL
SYSTEM

DEPENDING
REQUIREMENTS.

UPON

Block

Diagram

of AC

WHEN
CABINET

CUSTOMER/

* SECOND
AC INPUT
IS REQUIRED
EXPANSION
CABINET
IS USED.
PLUG
AT J2 IS REMOVED
AND
AC SOURCE
IS WIRED
TO J2.

2.08

(REQUIRED
EXPANSION
IS USED)

Input

WHEN
JUMPER
SECOND

to Power

Supply

Assemblies

and

Modules

2-17

SATURN
Maintenance

IIE

EPABX
and Troubleshooting

Ftgure

.
7-18

A30808-X5130-DllO-l-8920
Issue
1, May

2.09

Layout

of Connectors

and

Terminals

PSU

Rear

Panel

1986

SATURN
Maintenance

IIE

EPABX
and Troubleshooting

A30808-X5130-DllO-l-8920
Issue
1, May

PSU

1986

-mm---rP/O CIRCUIT
I BREAKER

j
,

J&
I

TO BASIC SHELF
(BASIC CABINET)

TO LTU SHELF
1 *
(BASIC CABINET)

TO LTU SHELF
2 *
(EXPANSION
CABINET)
&

TO LTU SHELF
3 *
(EXPANSION
CABINET)

J7
I

TO BASIC SHELF
(BASIC
CABINET)

TO LTU SHELF
1 *
(BASIC
CABINET)

Figure

2.10

Fusing

DEPENDING
RECIUIREMENTS

of -48

Volt

Outputs

UPON

from

;

TO LTU SHELF
3 ’
(EXPANSION
CABINET)

!?+
’

TO BASIC SHELF
(BASIC
CABINET)

TO LTU SHELF
1 *
(BASIC CABINET)

TO LTU SHELF
2 *
(EXPANSION
CABINET)

I
&

* OPTIONAL
SYSTEM

TO LTU SHELF
2 *
(EXPANSION
CABINET)

;

TO LTU SHELF
3 *
(EXPANSION
CABINET)

CUSTOMER/

-48PS0

and

-48PSl

2-19

SATURN
Maintenance

IIE

EPABX
and Troubleshooting

Table

2.00

Functions

of Connectors

and

DESIGNATION

PSU

Rear

Panel

FUNCTION
Note:

2-20

Terminals

Refer

to Figure

2.09.

power
input
(AC#O
and -48PS0
if system

IN) for distribution
consists
of Basic

to PSU
Cabinet

Power
only

power
Cabinets.
Circuit

power

to LTUPSO

power

to -48PS0

and

power

to LTUPSl

(LTU

-488
and
equipped

-488,

-48R

and

RAClRMW

distribution

to Basic

and

-48B,

-48P,

and

RAClRMW

distribution

to LTU

Shelves

+5V

distribution

JlO

-5V,

+5VB,

Jll

+5V

and

J12

SYNR+,
from

FUSA+,
BATPOK-,
Basic
Shelf.

J13

Failure

Transfer

J14

DC.

GND

J15

EXT

FUSE

J16

MSMlLCL

Supply

input
(AC#l
IN) to -48PS0
and -48PSl
in systems
Otherwise,
provides
jumper
plug connection
for
Breaker
Panel
in LTU

Shelf

+12V

lug

ALM

(external

jumper

for

and

(busbar

Major

(LTU

-48PSl;

+5V

supplies,

consisting
of Basic
and Expansion
routing
ac power
to -48PS0
via PSU

and

VFAlLc

and

3) in Expansion

and

+12V

LTU

distribution

1 Shelves
2 and

Cabinet
to FDDP

in Basic

fuse

alarm

memory

input;
power

(not

Cabinet

3 in Expansion

Cabinet

Shelf

FDDl
to Basic

Minor

Shelf

Alarm

Shelf.

Status,

ERING-,

and

MINALM+,

Maintenance

and

Telephone

connections)

+5V

power

connections)

to Basic

to FDDO
and

LTUPS2

lug

distribution

(busbar

2) and

Shelf

+12V

Control,

Shelf

-48PS0

to Basic
and

LTU

-48PSl

-48P inputs
from
at this time)

-12V,

Shelf

Board,

disabled

when

jumper

is installed)

MAJALM+,

to MDF

ISATURN
Maintenance

IIE

A30808-X5130-DllO-l-6920
Issue
1, May

EPABX
and Troubleshooting

Front
Panel
Fuses,
Controls,
and
following
are mounted
on or visible
ings in the PSU front
panel:

Indicators.
through

Fuses
for all -48Vdc
and ringing
voltages
to the Basic
and optional
(part
of Circuit
Breaker
Panel)

Circuit
breakers
for ac inputs
er supplies
(part of Circuit

MAJOR
(ALARMS)
Board)

(red)
and
indicators

MINOR
(part

to all system
powBreaker
Panel)

MTCE
(part

In the
Board,

alarm
Logic
3.

FAILURE
TRANSFER
switch
and
ACTIVE
(red) and INHIBIT
(yellow)
(part of Control
Logic
Board)

respectively.
A failure
in this circuitry
could prevent
switching
of dc to a motor
or cause
dc to be
switched
to a.motor
when
it should
be switched
off.
The inability
to switch
either
motor
on may be due
either
to a disconnected
power
cable
between
the
PSU and the FDD (PSlJ.Jll
and FDD J2) or a disconnected
control
cable-between
the Basic
Shelf
(J63 for FDDO;
J62 for FDDl)
and the FDD signal
connector,
Jl.

The
open-

(RACIRMW)
LTU Shelves

(yellow)
of Control

PHONE
of Control

BATTERY
sociated
tery Test

+5 V ADJUST
Power
Supply

(a)

Fuses.
to the
shown

(maintenance
Logic
Board)

associated
indicators

telephone)

jack

TEST
pushbutton
switch
and asON BATTERY
POWER
(red) and Eat(green)
indicators
(part of MSM)
potentiometer
Board)

All -48 volt inputs
LTU and Basic
in Figure
2.10.

(part

and RAClRMW
Shelves
are

of Basic

Circuit
Breakers.
All system
power
supply
modules, including
the Basic
Power
Supply
Board
in the PSU, are protected
at their input by a circuit breaker
as shown
in Figure
2.08.
The remaining
PSU controls
and
discussed
below
in text covering
al PSU modules.

Failures
in the Basic
Power
Supply
Board could
affect operation
of the complete
system
or, selectively,
certain
types of line/trunk
units or common
equipment
PCBs
in the Basic
Shelf,
voltage
and fuse
alarm
monitoring,
SYNR+
and RAClRMW
generating,
and failure
transfer
circuits
on the Control
Loaic
Board.
the MSM in the PSU. and the FDDs.
Altrhough
the PSU provides
the dc voltages
necessary to operate
the floppy
disk drive
motors,
circuits in the CIOP
control
the voltages.
The floppy
disk drive
select
circuit
in the CIOP
switches
dc
to the motors
of floppy
disk drives
FDDO and FDDl
using
the MOTORONOand MOTORONIsignals,

2-22

in the Basic
be replaced.

Power

Supply

in the Ring
be replaced.

Generator

Mod-

Cbntrol
Logic Board.
The Control
Logic Board
tains circuits
and components
which
perform
following
functions.
.

indicators
are
the individu-

Basic
Power
Supply
Board.
The PSU Basic
Power Supply
Board
(refer to Figure
2.11) is a switching power
supply
which
provides
+SVdc,
-5Vdc,
+12Vdc,
and -12Vdc for operation
of line/trunk
unit
and common
equipment
PCBs
in the Basic
Shelf,
the FDDs,
and the Control
Logic Board
and optional MSM
in the PSU.

of a failure
PSU should

Ring Generator
(RGEN)
Module.
The RGEN
module in the PSU generates
the ringing
ac voltage
(RAC)
used in the SATURN
IIE System.
This voitage has a nominal
20H2,
90 volts RMS sinusoidal waveform.
The
RGEN
module
has a rated
output
power
of 25 Watts
and is powered
from
-48VP
via fuse F5 (RGEN)
on the PSU front panel.
The output
voltage
(RAC)
is routed
to the Control
Logic
Board
where
it is interleaved
with the Ring
Message
Waitinq
signal
(RMW)
to form
the
RAClRMW
signal,
The RA&RMW
signal
is distributed
to the Basic
and LTU Shelves
via RAC
fuses
FlO through
F13 on the PSU front panel.

(b)

event
the

In the event of a failure
ule, the PSU should

inputs
fused
as

Failure
of a fuse to blow under
fusing
current
conditions
is very
unlikely.
To ensure
proper
protection,
always
replace
a blown
fuse with
one of the correct
value
(refer to Figure
2.10).

1986

(a)

Fuse
Alarm
Detection
Ring
Synchronization
(SYNR+)
Generation
Ringing
AC/Ring
Message
(RACIRMW)
Signal
Generation
Voltage
and Alarm
Monitoring
Failure
Transfer
Control
Failure
Transfer
and Alarm
Output
Major
and Minor
Alarm
Indicators
Maintenance
Telephone
Jack

conthe

Signal
Waiting

Relays

Fuse Alarm
Detect
Circuit.
The fuse alarm
detect circuit
monitors
each fuse and, upon sensing a blown fuse condition,
sends
a Fuse Alarm
signal
(FUSA+)
to the Controller/Input-Output
Processor
(CIOP)
PCB. A fuse alarm will cause
a minor alarm condition
in the SATURN
IIE System; however,
the location
of the blown
fuse
must
be determined
by a visual
check
of the
fuses
on the front
panel
of the PSU. These
fuses
are “grasshopper”
type fuses
in which
a spring
wire indicates
by its position
away from
normal
that the fuse has blown.
(The spring
wire also provides
the alarm
contact.)
If used,
a fuse alarm
may also be provided
through
the
external
fuse alarm
connections
(EXT
FUSE
ALM,
J15) on the rear panel
of the PSU. Normally closed
external
relay contacts
are wired
to the terminals
and,
when
these
contacts
open,
a fuse alarm
(FUSA+)
output
will be sent
to the CIOI? The EXT FUSE ALM terminals
are
jumpered
at the factory
to disable
the function.

I -. ,
SATURN
Maintenance

IIE

A30808-X5130-DllO-l-6920
lssue
1, May

EPABX
and Troubleshooting

A failure
in the fuse alarm
detect
circuit
may
cause
spurious
fuse alarm
(FUSA+)
signals
or
prevent
a fuse alarm signal,
depending
on the
nature
of the fault. A spurious
fuse alarm
may
occur
due to a disconnected
cable from J12 of
the PSU module
to the basic
shelf as well as
a fault in the CIOP
PCB.

fails,

If a fuse is blown
but no fuse alarm
is indicated, the fault could
be in the fuse alarm
detect
circuit
in the PSU Control
Logic
Board
or circuits
in the CIOP
PCB.
If the
Logic
(b)

(c)

Fuse Alarm
Detect
Circuit
Board
fails, replace
the

If the Voltage
and Alarm
the Control
Logic Board
(e)

During
the RAC signal
intervals,
telephones
in
the ring mode will ring and the associated
message waiting
lamps will flicker.
During
the RMW
signal
intervals,
telephones
in the message
waiting
mode
will have their message
waiting
lamps
lighted
steadily.
The associated
ringer
will not sound.

Failure
of the
Logic
Board
RMW
signals
signals.
Such
and visually.

RAClRMW
circuit
on the
may result
in improper
and/or
improper
timing
faults
may be detected

on,
wait2 se-

Control
RAC or
of these
audibty

if the
Ringing
AC/Ring
Message
Waiting
(RAC/RMW)
Circuit
on the Control
Logic Board

Voltage
and Alarm
Monitoring
Circuit.
The voltage and alarm
monitoring
circuit
is provided
on the Control
Logic
Board
in the PSU. The
+12Vdc
and and -5Vdc outputs
of the PSU Basic Power
Supply
Board
and the -488 output
voltage from the -48PS
module(s)
are monitored
by the circuit.
A loss of one or more of the three
voltages
causes
a voltage
failure
signal
(VFAIL+)
to be sent to the SMXTG
in the Basic Shelf
and results
in a minor
alarm.

The -12Vdc
is used
on the DTMF
and RAUP
modules.
Therefore,
a loss or low level of this
voltage
on the LTU or Basic
Shelves,
will be
evidenced
by misoperation
of the RAUP
PCB
on the Basic
Shelf
and the DTMF
PCBs
on
other
shelves,
as applicable.

The RAC signal
is nominally
90 Vat RMS 20Hz
and the RMW
signal
is nominally
97 Vdc. The
RAClRMVV
signal
consists
of two interleaved
phases
as shown
in Figure
2.12.

Thus telephones
will ring with a 2 seconds
4 seconds
off cadence
and the message
ing lamps
will light with a 1 second
on,
conds
off cadence.

PSU.

The toss, or low level, of +52Vdc
on the Basic
Shelf
will cause
complete
system
failure.
(However,
if an MSM module
is installed,
the
memory
will be retained
for at least 5 minutes.)

AC/Ring
Message
Waiting
Ringing
(RACIRMW)
Signal
Circuit.
The
RAC signal
from the PSU RGEN
module
and the ERINGsignal
from the CIOP
PCB
are used
in the
generation
of the RAClRMW
signal
in the PSU
Control
Logic
Board.
of 2-second
inwith l-second
transitions
from
to RAC are con-

the

The +5Vdc,
+5.2Vdc,
and -12Vdc voltages
are
not monitored.
The reason
for this is that a loss,
or low level, of the +5Vdc
will affect
operation
of all line/trunk
unit PCBs
on the Basic
Shelf
and will cause
generation
of a PRESENCE
ERROR alarm from all of these
PCBs to be recorded in the system’s
failure
history
memory.

on the Control
PSU.

Ring Synchronization
Signal (SYNR+)
Circuit.
The SYNR+
signal
is used
in the SLMA-0,
SLMA-S.
and .%A16
PCBs to control
the operation
and
release
of the
ring
relays.
The
SYNR+
sianal
is routed
from the PSU to the
SMXTG
PCB in the Basic
Shelf.
It is buffered
in the SMXTG
PCB and then distributed
to
each
line/trunk
group
on the Basic
and LTU
shelves.
Loss of the SYNR+
signal
will generate an alarm
signal
and light the ALMO
LED
on the affected
LTUC PCB. Refer to Table 4.03.

The RAClRMW
signal
consists
tervals
of RAC signal interleaved
intervals
of RMW
signal.
The
RAC to RMW
and from RMW
trolled
by the ERINGsignal.

replace

1986

Circuit
on
the PSU.

Failure
Transfer
Control
Circuit.
With
the
FAILURE
TRANSFER
mode
select
switch
on
the front of the PSU set to the AUTO
position,
an active
MAJALM+
signal from the CIOP PCB
in the Basic
shelf will initiate
a failure
transfer.
With
the FAILURE
switch
in the ACTIVE
is initiated
regardless
tored
voltages
and

TRANSFER
mode
select
position,
failure
transfer
of the status
of the moniMAJALM+
signal.

With
the FAILURE
switch
in the INHIBIT
is inhibited
regardless
tored
voltages
and

TRANSFER
mode
select
position,
failure
transfer
of the status
of the moniMAJALM+
signal.

If the
Control
(f)

Monitoring
fails, replace

Failure
Logic

Transfer
Board

Control
Circuit
fails, replace
the

on the
PSU.

Failure
Transfer
and Alarm
Output
Relays.
Failure
transfer/major
alarm
and minor
alarm
relays
in the PSU Control
Logic Card have contact sets connected
to pins on connector
J13
on the rear panel
of the PSU.
Both relays
are normally
operated.
Contact
sets
of one of the relays
are used to control
remote
failure
transfer
(PXFER)
and provide
major
alarm
(MAJOR)
status.
A contact
set on the
other
relay
provides
minor
alarm
(MINOR)
status.

2-23

SATURN
Maintenance

HE EPABX
and Troubleshooting

RAC/RMW
SIGNAL
90 VOLTS

RMS,

20 HZ

RAC 0

RAC 1
97 VOLTS

RMW.

TIME

Figure

2-24

2.12

SCALE

RAClRMW

IN SECONDS

Signals

SATURN
Maintenance

IIE

EPABX
and Troubleshooting

A30808-X5130-DllO-l-8920
issue
1, May

Both normally
closed
and normally
open contact arrangements
are provided
for failure transfer and .for major
alarm
and
minor
alarm
outputs
to allow
use of external
equipment
responding
to either arrangement.
Connections
are normally
made
to the MDF for distribution
of the failure
transfer,
major alarm,
and minor
alarm
functions.

(g)

Major and Minor
Alarm
Indicators.
The MAJOR
and
MINOR
ALARMS
indicators
are visible
through
openings
in the PSU front panel and light
when
MA.JALM+
and MlNALM+
signals
are
received
from the CIOP
Table 2.02 shows
alarm
indicator
states
for combinations
of MAJALM+
and MINALM+
signals
from
the CIOP
If an
alarm
indicator
is faulty,
replace
the PSU.

The relay contacts
connected
to J13 will give
an output
status
for the various
combinations
of MAJALM+
and MINALM+
signals
as shown
in Table
2.01.

(h)

Maintenance
Telephone
(MTCE
PHONE)
Jack.
A standard
modular
jack is accessible
through
the front of the PSU for plug-in
of a maintenance
telephone.
The jack is connected
to pins on connector
J13 on the PSU rear panel as indicated
in Table 2.01. Connector
J13 is wired to the MDF
If the jack or interconnecting
printed
circuit
or
PSU wiring
is faulty,
replace
the PSU.

513

If a fault is suspected
in the Failure
Transfer
Alarm
Output
Relays
on the Control
Board,
replace
the PSU.

Note:

Table

2.01

LEAD

Pin
AND

J13

1
26

Ring
Tip

(Not
(Not

2
27
3
28

Ring
Tip
Ring
Tip

(Normally
(Common)
(Normally
(Common)

Open)

31
4
29

Tip
Ring
Tip

(Normally
(Common)
(Normally

Closed)

6
5
30

Tip
Ring
Tip

(Normally
(Common)
(Normally

Open)

and
Logic

Functions

at Connector

RELAY

CONTACT

the

PSU

STATUS

FUNCTION

Applicable)
Applicable)

Maintenance

Failure

Phone

Transfer

Closed)

Major

Alarm

Minor

Alarm

Open)

Closed)

The relay contact
status
shown
in this table applies
when
both relays
are not operated
(in accordance
convention).
However,
under
normal
system
operating
conditions,
both relays
are operated.
Therefore,
system
operating
conditions,
the relay contacts
are the reverse
of those
shown
in this table.

Table
ALARM
Neither
MAJALM

1986

2.02

Alarm

LEDs

and

Output

STATUS

MINALM+
+ Active

nor

LED

Status

at Connector

J13

LIT

None

the

OUTPUT

PSU
STATUS

(J13)

Normal

MlNALM+

Only

Active

MINOR

only

Minor

Alarm

Only

MAJALM+

Only

Active

MAJOR

only

Major

Alarm,

Failure

Transfer

and

MAJOR

only

Major

Alarm,

Failure

Transfer

Both MINALM+
MAJALM-t
Active

with standard
under
normal

2-25

SATURN
Maintenance

IIE

A30808-X5130-DllO-l-6920
Issue
1, May

EPABX
and TroubleshootIng

Memory
Support
Module
(MSM).
The MSM
is an
optional
module
which
provides
+SVdc
(+5VB)
with internal
battery
back-up
for the memory
chips
in the memory
(MEMS
and MEM4)
PCBs
in the
common
equipment
section
of the Basic Shelf. The
MSM contains
a linear regulator
and battery
charger, a battery,
and sensing
circuits
to detect
power
failure,
battery
overvoltage,
and battery
failure.
Protection
for output
overvoltage,
whether
due to an
externally
applied
overvoltage
or due to an internal fault,
is provided
by means
of a crowbar
and
output
disconnect
circuit.
If the protection
circuit
is activated,
clear
the fault
condition
and then
switch
the BASIC
PS circuit
breaker
on the PSU
off (down)
and then on (up) again
to restore
the
+5VB
output.
Upon removal
of the fault condition
sive output
current,
normal
output
tomatically
restored.

causing
capability

excesis au-

The battery
contained
in the MSM
is a standard
sealed
plug-in
assembly
which
may be removed
and replaced
from the front of the Basic
Cabinet
by removing
the PSU front
panel.
A BATTERY
TEST switch
and associated
green LED are mounted on the front of the MSM and are visible
through
openings
in the PSU front panel.
A red LED (ON
BATTERY
POWER)
mounted
on the front of the
MSM and also visible
through
the PSU front panel
indicates
whether
the memory
integrated
circuits
(ICs) in the memory
PCBs
are being powered
from
the internal
MSM
battery.
b.

-48Vdc
Power
Supply
(-48PS0,
-48PSl).
The -48PS
module
is a ferroresonant
transformer
power
supply
which
provides
talking
battery
voltage
(-48VB)
and
oremium
-48Vdc
(-48VP)
for the Basic and LTV Shelves.
ihe -48VP outpui
is used for powering
the RGEN
module (in the PSU) and the SDTs and attendant
consoles
via SLMD
and PIMD
PCBs,
respectively.
The -48Vf3
output
is derived
from the -48VP
voltage,
after additional filtering,
and is used for talk battery
to the SLMA0, SLMA-S,
and SLA16
modules.
Because
of its ferroresonant
transformer
design,
the
-48PS
has inherent
output
voltage
limiting
and is capable of supplying
a considerable
output
current
overload without
damage
(although
the output
voltage
will
decrease).
It contains
a thermal
cut-off
switch
to protect against
overheating
due to excessive
output
current overload
or an internal
fault. This thermal
cut-off
switch
will operate
and remove
power
from the power
supply
if the ferroresonant
transformer
overheats.
Shutdown due to an overvoltage
condition
causes
the power
supply
output
to latch off. To unlatch
the power
supply
output
and resume
normal
operation,
clear the fault
condition
and set the associated
input circuit
breaker
(-48PS0
or -48PS1,
located
on the PSU front panel)
to
off (down)
and then on (up) again.
This unlatches
the
protection
mode
and allows
the power
supply
to resume
normal
operation.
One or two -48PS
modules
may be installed,
depending upon system
size and cabinet
configuration.
A system consisting
of only a Basic
Cabinet
requires
only
one -48PS
module;
a system
using
both a Basic
and

2-X

(26

pages)

1986

an Expansion
Cabinet
requires
two. When
two -48PS
modules
are installed,
the -48VB
and -48VP
outputs
of the power
supplies
are paralleled
in the PSU.
Whether
one or two power
supply
modules
are used,
the outpuis
are distributed,
via fuses
on the PSU front
panel, to the Basic and LTU Shelves.
The -48VP
(-48P)
outputs
are distributed
to the shelves
via fuses
Fl
throuah
F4. The RGEN
module
in the PSU is also aowerei
by a -48VP
output
through
fuse F5. The -48’VB
(-488)
outputs
are distributed
to the shelves
via fuses
F6 through
F9.
If a fault condition
be cleared,
replace
c.

Line/Trunk
the standard
It has four
All LTUPS
short-circuit

in a -48Vdc
the power

Power
supply.

Supply

cannot

Unit Power
Supply
(LTUPS).
The LTUPS
is
power
supply
used to power the LTU shelf.
outputs:
+SVdc,
-5Vdc,
+12Vdc,
and -12Vdc.
outputs
have overvoltage,
overcurrent,
and
protection.

An overvoltage
at any output,
whether
due to an internal failure
or an external
bridging
of a high voltage
to
a lower voltage
output,
will result
in shut-down
of the
power
supply
and cause
all outputs
to drop to approximately
zero volts. An overcurrent
or short-circuit
at any
output
will cause
that output
to go into current
limiting. Shut-down
due to an overvoltage
condition
causes
the power
supply
output
to latch off. To unlatch
the power supply
output
and restore
normal
operation,
the associated
input
circuit
breaker
(LTUPSO,
LTUPSl,
or
LTUPS2,
located
on the PSU front panel)
must be set
to off (down)
and then on (up) again.
This unlatches
the protection
mode
and allows
the power
supply
to
resume
normal
operation.
The power supplies
are designed
to
to normal
operation
when an output
circuit
condition
is cleared.
Note
should
not normally
trip an input

automatically
restore
overcurrent
or shortthat an output
fault
circuit
breaker.

The power
supplies
are further
protected
against
internal
faults
by internal
fuses
and a thermal
cut-off
switch.
The internal
fuses,
located
in the input circuitry,
will blow under
certain
internal
fault conditions
to protect against
the propagation
of further
fault conditions.
The thermal
cut-off
switch
will operate
if the internal
fault conditions
cause
overheating
in the power
supply. Operation
of this switch
will cause
the power
supply to go into the same
protective
mode
as an
overvoltage
condition.
Internal
fault conditions
which
cause
an increase
in
the input
current
to the trip point
of the input
circuit
breaker
will normally
trip the circuit
breaker.
However,
if the circuit
breaker
is faulty
and does not trip, the internal
fuses
and thermal
cut-off
switch
will provide
a
degree
of backup
protection.
If an internal
fuse blows,
replacement
of the power
supply
is required.
The -12Vdc
output
of the LTUPS
is used only in DTMF
PCBs.
A loss of this output
or a deviation
below
the
normal
operating
limit will be evidenced
only by improper
operation
of the DTMF
PCBs.
If a fault condition
replace
the power

in an
supply.

LTUPS

cannot

be cleared,

SATURN
Maintenance

IIE

EPAEX
and Troubleshooting

A30808-X5130-DllO-l-6920
Issue
1, May

SECTION

3.00

PREVENTIVE

3.01
General.
The following
general-type
service
routines
are suggested
for proper
upkeep
of the SATURN
IIE EPASX.
The service
routines
should
be performed
on an annual
basis unless
otherwise
specified.
a.

Hardware
and Cabling.
Check
cal integrity,
no loose or broken
Tighten
or repair
as necessary.

for general
mechaniparts and connectors.

Cabinet
Exterior.
cloth dampened
detergent.

of cabinet
of water

Clean
exterior
with a solution

Table
STEP

usina
and-a

3.00

Floppy

MAINTENANCE
c.

Air Vents.
Inspect
net for unrestricted
necessary.

Open

Replace
that disk

Access
(e.g.,

the

doors

one program
drive door

both
disk
(leave

any CMU
procedure
DISPLAY
STNASSN).

air vents
air

at top
passage.

and

bottom
of cabiClear
vents
as

3.02
Floppy
Disk
Drives.
Some
manufacturers
of floppy
disk drives
recommend
periodic
cleaning
of the disk drive
heads.
The schedule
of cleaning
depends
on usage
and the
surrounding
environment
but cleaning
every
3 to 6 months
is normally
suggested.
Use the head cleaning
kit recommended bv the manufacturer
of the disk drives
and follow the orocedureoutlined
in Table
3.00 to clean
the heads.
’

a soft
mild

Disk

Head

Cleaning

Procedure
VERIFICATION

PROCEDURE

1986

floppy

disk

drives.

with the cleaning
other
door open).
from

the

service

disk;

terminal

System
on disk

attempts
to locate
drive
lights.

a CMU

overlay

file;

red

LED

NOTE:
An 110 error
message
appears
at service
is normal.
However,
if the CMU procedure
in system
memory,
repeat
step
3 for
procedure.
4

Repeat
drive.

the

above

procedure

for

the

second

floppy

terminal.
This
already
resides
different
CMU

disk

3-1

(3-2

blank)

I
-

SATURN
Maintenance

IIE

EPABX
and Troubleshooting

SECTION

A30808-X5130-DllO-l-8920
Issue
1, May

4.00

TROUBLESHOOTING

4.01
General.
This section
of the practice
provides
step instructions
for the troubleshooting
and repair
functions
or failures
during
precutover
or postcutover
SATURN
IIE EPABX.
WARNING
Hazardous
Be extremely
troubleshooting
removed.
4.02
quired

voltages
exist
careful
when
procedures

Test Equipment.
to perform
the

wirhin
the
performing
wirh the

equipment
maintenance
equipment

The following
test
procedures
contained

equipment
in this

step-byof malof the

cabinet.
and

AND

REWUR

1986

PROCEDURES
CAUTION

Craft personnel
handling
PCBs
with MOS
integrated
circuirs
must
first
free themselves
from
electrostatic
discharge
by touching
the cabinet
chassis
ground
or wearing
grounded
wrist straps.
Failure
to observe
this practice
will
result
in damage
to such
PCBs
due to electrostatic
discharge.

panel(s)

is repractice.

Digital
Voltmeter.
A digital
voltmeter
of good commercial quality
with an accuracy
of + 0.1%. The digital voltmeter is used to perform
input and output
voltage
tests.

Maintenance
Test Phone.
A test set or a single-line
telephone
may be used as a maintenance
test phone
for
both Dial Pulse
(DP) and Dual Tone Multifrequency
fDTMF1
svstems.
A modular
iack (MTCE
PHONE)
is
brovided
on the front panel ofthe
$SU for connectjng
the maintenance
test phone
when
it is equipped
with
a modular
plug. When
the maintenance
test phone
is
not equipped
with a modular
plug,
a station
appearance at the MDF can be used for test connections.
The
maintenance
test phone
is used to perform
the manual on-line
diagnostic
tests.

Data
Service
Terminal.
A Keyboard-Send-Receive
(KSR)
data terminal
equipped
with a standard
ASCII
keyboard
and an EIA RS-232-C
interface
(Silent
700
Series
- Model
743 KSR - Texas
Instruments,
or
equivalent).
The data service
terminal
is used to access CMU
procedures,
a repertoire
of auditing
routines
and the failure
history
memory.

Transmission
Measuring
Set. A Transmission
Measuring Set (TMS)
is used
to measure
the transmission
quality
of a trunk
or station.
Refer
to the manual
online diagnostic
tests, Outgoing
Trunk
Test and Station
Line Tests.

4.03
PCB and Power
Supply
Removal
and Replacement.
In many
instances
during
troubleshooting,
corrective
actions
may require
that a suspected
faulty
PCB or power
supply
be
removed
and replaced
with a spare.
The following
guidelines
should
be followed
when removing
and replacing
these
items.

Refer
supply.

to Table

4.00

before

removing

a PCB

or power

Before
inserting
a PCB or installing
a power
supply,
verify
(when
applicable)
that correct
strapping
options
are installed.
(Refer
to Siemens
SATURN
IIE Practice
covering
Installation
Procedures.)

4.04
System
Fails to Reload.
During
normal
system
operation,
the upper
four red LEDs
(STO, STl, ST2, and ST3) on
the CIOP PCB (Figure
2.02) provide
a binary
display
that constantly
decrements.
When
processor
initialization
is requested,
either
manually
via depression
of the Reset
switch
on the CIOP
PCB or automatically
via self-test
or audit test routines,
all four indicators
momentarily
light steadily.
As various
initialization
events
are
completed,
the binary
value
of the four
indicators
are
decremented.
If no failures
occur
during
system
initialization,
all four indicators
momentarily
extinguish
then begin
a continuous
decrement
sequence
indicating
normal
system
operation. If a failure is encountered
during
the initialization
period:
the four LED indicators
momentarily
stop decrementing
and
display
a binary
value
that represents
the point at which
the
initialization
failed. The corrective
repair
procedure
for the indicated
binary
value
is provided
in Table 4.01. Note that the
failure
indication
is displayed
only for a short period
of time
(approximately
1 second);
after which
the system
attempts
to
reinitialize.
This cycle is ‘repeated
until the failure
is corrected.
4.05
Alarm
Conditions
and Reporting.
The SATURN
IIE
System
is provided
with software
self-test
routines
and audit
test routines
which
constantly
check
for system
failures.
When
a failure
or failures
occur,
the detected
failure(s)
are recorded as error messages
in the failure
history
memory
and the
appropriate
major
or minor
alarm
indicator
is lighted.
A
description
of each
alarm
type is provided
in Section
2.00,
Maintenance
Overview.
The corrective
action
required
for a
given
alarm
type is provided
in Table 4.02 (Alarm
Reporting
and Processing).

4-l

A30808-X5130-DllO-l-8920
Issue 1, May 1986

SATURN IIE EPABX
Maintenance
and Troubleshooting
Table 4.00
MODULE

OR UNIT

CIOP
CONF
DTMF
FDDO, FDDl
LTUC
LTUPS
MCA
MEM3
MEM4
MSM
MSM Battery
PIMD
PSC
PSU
RAUP
SlAl6
SLMA-0
SLMA-S
SLMD
SMXTG
TM BA-2
TMBA-4
TMBM
TMIE
-48PS0
-48PSl
.
Notes:
1.

2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

4-2

PCB and Power

Supply

SERVICE

.
l

Removal

Guidelines

STATE

SPECIAL

Note
.Note
Note
None
Note
Note
Note
Note
Note
Note
Note
Note
Note
Note
Note
Note
Note
Note
Note
Note
Note
Note
Note
Note
Note
Note

NA
NA
00s
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA

INSTRUCTIONS

K
NA
00s
00s
00s
00s
NA
00s
00s
00s
00s
NA
NA

1
1
2
3
4
1
1
1
1
5
2
1
6
1
2
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
2
7
7

Optional depending
upon customer/system
requirements.
NA = Not Applicable,
00s = Out-of-Service
.
System outage (halts call processing).
Set BASIC PS circuit breaker on PSU to off. Open FDDs and ;‘emove floppy
disks before removing PCB. After new PCB is inserted, reinsert floppy disks, close FDDs, set BASIC PS circuit breaker
on PSU to on, and press reset switch on CIOP
Wait for in-process
calls to complete.
Removal places one-half of ports in shelf out-of-service.
Before removal, set related LTUPS circuit breaker on PSU to off. Removal places all ports in shelf out-of-service.
Battery may be replaced with power applied to system.
System outage (halts call processing).
Before removal, set all circuit breakers to off, open FDDs and remove floppy
disks. After replacement,
reinsert floppy disks, close FDDs, set circuit breakers to on, and press reset switch on CIOF!
Set related circuit breaker on PSU to off. May halt call processing depending
upon system configuration
and traffic.
If system has two -48Vdc power supplies (-48PS0 and -48PSl), the remaining supply may support system operation.

SATURN
Maintenance

IIE

,,-

A30808-X5130-DllO-l-8920
Issue
1, May

EPABX
and Troubleshooting

Table 4.01

ZTO ’ ST1
LED /’ LED
OFF

Failure Indications
on Controller/Input-Output
Processer
Printed
\
HEX
ST2 ’ ST3
ERROR DETECTED
3,LED
LED
CODE
/
OFF
OFF
0
Start of self test noi halted
ON
OFF
ON

1
2
3

Main
processor
error
EPROM
checksum
error
MEMO
slot low 64k test

OFF
09°F
ON

4
5
6
7

8k by 8static
lRAM
memory
ORAM
memory
SIB side error

OFF

Global

ON
ON

OFF
ON

09°F

D
E

Watchdog
SIB serial

SIB

ON
ON
ON
ON

OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF

OFF
OFF
ON
ON

OFF
ON
OFF
ON

8
9
A
B

Start
Disk
Drive
CRC

OFF

OFF
OFF

OFF
OFF
OFF

OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF

ON
ON
ON
ON

OFF
OFF
ON
ON

ON
ON

Board,

None
Note 1
Note 1
Notes
1
and 2
Note 1
Note 1
Note 1
Notes
1
and 3
Notes
1
and 2
Note 1
Notes
1
and 3
Notes
1
and 3
None
Note 1
Note 4
Note 4

error

timer
error
loopback
test
timing

error

test

boot process
(self
controller
error
not ready
errorretry errors
exceed

test

CIOP
ACTION

RAM test error
test error
test error

memory

counter

Circuit

1986

done)

Notes:
1.

Upon

If procedure

failure,

in Note

retry

loading
1 failato

procedure.

If procedure

in Note

1 fails

Upon
failure,
If fault is not

retry loading
procedure
corrected,
replace
CIOP

If failure

persists,

replace

CIOP

correct

fault,

replace

memory

PCBs

to correct

fault,

replace

SMXTG

PCB

using
PCB.

another

set

of floppy

PCB.

starting

disks.

with

If failure

slot

persists,

MEMO.

check/replace

disk

drives.

4-3

SATURN
Maintenance

IIE

A30808-X5130-DllO-l-8920
issue
1. May

EPABX
and Troubleshooting

Table
ALARM
a.

AUDIT
cccc

eeee(pp)
dddd

eeee
(PP)’
aaaa’
bbbb’
cccc*
dddd’
mm/dd
hh:mm
(1) If eeee

=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=

Alarm

Reporting

and

Processing

TYPE

CORRECTIVE

ACTION

aaaa
bbbb
mm/dd
hh:mm
error
ID of
error
error
error
error
date
time

4.02

1986

number
process
information
information
information
information
of error
of error

1428

The
sum

memory
contents
error
in protected

A system

reload

audit routine
memory.

is automatically

has

detected

a check-

initiated.

If the system
appears
to be performing
correctly
with the
exception
of this error,
craft
personnel
can disable
the
memory
contents
audit
routine
until the cause
can be isolated by a systematic
replacement
of memory
PCBs
to isolate the failing
PCB.
If the memory
sonnel
should
this operation
(2) If eeee

1433

DTMF

contents
audit
routine
is disabled,
craft peravoid saving
customer
data to the disk, since
could
corrupt
the disk as well.

receiver

unusable.

The DTMF
receiver
audit routine
has detected
a failing DTMF
receiver.
If no DTMF
receivers
are already
out-of-service,
the
suspected
DTMF
receiver
is placed
in the out-of-service
craft
state.
If one or more
DTMF
receivers
are already
out-ofservice,
the suspected
DTMF
receiver
is left in-service.
NOTE:
Out-of-service
craft state means
that the system
has
automatically
placed
the circuit
in such a state and requires
craft personnel
to manually
return
it to an in-service
state.
If the problem
is repetitive,
replace
the associated
DTMF
PCB during
a low-traffic
period,
taking
care to place
all circuits in the PCB out-of-service
(craft)
before
removing
it.
NOTE:
The PEN
fied as indicated

of the suspected
DTMF
in the error
message

“AUDIT
0000

wxyz
0000
hhldd
hh:mm”

wxyz
(3) If eeee

1438

l/O

1433(18)
0000

receiver
below.

is identi-

= PEN
peripheral

device

or PCB

failure.

The I/O loop around
audit
routine
has detected
a failed
l/O
device
or associated
PCB. If the problem
is repetitive,
repair
or replace
the failing
device
or replace
the associated
I/O
PCB (CIOP
or RAUP).
NOTE:
cated
“AUDIT
0000
* =

For

Siemens

field

service

use

only.

The identity
in the error
1438(18)
0000

of the
message

failing
device
below.

OOaa OObb
mm/dd
hh:mm”

or l/O

PCB

is indi-

SATURN
Maintenance

IIE

EPABX
and Troubleshooting

A30808-X5130-DllO-l-8920
Issue
1, May

Table
ALARM

4.02

Alarm

Reporting

and

Processing

(Continued)

TYPE

CORRECTIVE
aa
bb

=
=
aa

(4) If eeee

1468

ACTION

l/O device
and associated
Device
return
code
I/O

00
01
02
03
04
05
06

1986

Floppy
Floppy
Floppy
Service
RS232C
RS232C
Modem

Maintenance

PCB

number

Device

Disk Drive
1
Disk Drive
2
Disk
Drive 3
Term’l(TTY)
CH 0 (TTYO)
CH 1 (TTYl)

channel

identity

PCB
CIOP
CIOP
CIOP
CIOP
RAUP
RAUP
RAUP

failure.

The data device
audit routine
detected
a failure
of the maintenance
loopback
channel
used
to run loopback
tests on
data devices.
The data device
audit
routine
must be terminated
until the maintenance
loopback
channel
can be restored.
Possible

(5) ff eeee

1469

trouble

(1) Faulty

SMXTG

(2)

Faulty

MCA

SIB

;ead

error

sources:
PCB.
PCB.
during

data

loop

around

test.

_
The SIB (line scanning
to respond
to a read
dit routine.
The data

(6) If eeee

1471

Possible

trouble

(1) Faulty

CIOP

Data

device

audit

trouble

(1) Faulty

SLMD

(2) Faulty

MCA

(3) Faulty

SMXTG

(4)

CIOP

Faulty

NOTE:
indicated

The

‘AUDIT
0000
wxyz
f.

= Applies

to OC

II software

feature

package

error

data
test

(bad

path).

device
failed
the periphera!
run by the data device
audit

interface
routine.

sources:
or PIMD

PCB.

PCB.
PCB.
PCB.

PEN of the failed
in the error
message

1471(18)
0000
=

source:
PCB.

The identified
loopback
(LB5)
Possible

processor)
on the CIOP
PCB failed
command
during
the data device
audevice
audit
routine
is terminated.

wxyz

0000
mm/dd

data device
below.

is identified

hh:mm”

PEN

only.

4-5

SATURN
Maintenance

IIE EPABX
and Troubleshooting

A30808-X5130-DllO-l-8920
Issue
1, May

Table
ALARM
(7) If eeee

1472

4.02

Alarm

Reporting

and

Processing

(Continued)

TYPE

CORRECTIVE

Data

device

audit

error

ACTION

(bad

path).

The identified
data device
passed
loopback
(LB5) test run by the data
failed
the remote
channel
loopback
Possible

CONNECT
eeee(pp)
mm/dd
hh:mm
eeee
(PP)’
wxyz
mm/dd
hh:mm
(1) If eeee

=
=
=
=
=

error
ID of
PEN
date
time

trouble

(1) Faulty

data

(2) Faulty

cabling

NOTE:
indicated

The

“AUDIT
0000

1472(18)
0000

wxyz

the peripheral
interface
device
audit routine,
but
(LB3)
test.

sources:
device

(DCI).

from

SLMD

PEN of the failed
in the error
message
wxyz

to DCI.
data device
below.

is identified

= PEN

PEN=wxyz

number
process
of error
of error
MTS

= 1439

audit

failure.

If the problem
replaced.
The
identified
port
NOTE:
cated
=

2148

0000
mm/dd
hh:mm”

The MTS (time
switch)
audit
routine
has detected
ble port failure
on the MCA PCB when
attempting
nect the specified
device
to a special
test port.

(2) If eeee

1986

is repetitive,
the MCA
PCB
should
failure
of a time switch
port may cause
to experience
intermittent
connections.

The PEN of the affected
device
is identified
in the error
message
on the left.

RLT no answer
unstaffed).

a possito con-

condition

detected

(CAS

attendant

be
the

as indi-

position

This branch
PABX detected
has a no answer
condition
on
the identified
RLT trunk
to the CAS main
PABX. The CAS
attendant
positions
appear
to be unstaffed.
The RLT has
been
placed
out-of-service.
If no other
RLT trunks
remain
in-service,
the branch
PABX will operate
in the night mode
until the RLT trunks
are manually
placed
back
in-service.
Instruct
CAS attendants
to use
to leaving
consoles
unstaffed.

4-6

’ = For Siemens
field service
= Applies
to OC II software
T = Applies
to CAS software
*

use only.
feature
package
feature
package

only.
only.

the

deactivate

feature

prior

SATURN
Maintenance

IIE

EPABX
and Troubleshooting

Table
ALARM
c.

DISCONNECT
PEN
= wxyz
1440

=
=
=
=
=

WY
wxyz
mm/dd
hh:mm

FUSE
mm/dd

FAILURE
hh:mm

(18)’
mm/dd
hh:mm

=
=
=

1440(18)
mm/dd
error
ID of
PEN
date
time

l/O ERROR
a, b, cccc
eeee
(PP)’
a
b
cccc”
mm/dd
hh:mm

* =

For

Siemens

Alarm

Reporting

MTS

failure.

If the problem
replaced.
The
identified
port

of error
of error

NOTE:
cated

The PEN of the affected
device
is identified
in the error
message
on the left.

Fuse

failure.

Locate
the

error

number

for

use

and

or device

equipment

replace

the

test

blown

routines

have

fuse

on the

l/O

operation.

as indi-

detected

PSU

be
the

front

a fuse

panel.

this

A failure

or 1027)

a possito con-

is repetitive,
the MCA
PCB
should
failure
of a time switch
port may cause
to experience
intermittent
connections.

The automatic
failure
alarm.

number
(1026
process
PCB
connector/interface
information
of error
of error

service

audit

ACTION

The MIS (time switch)
audit
routine
has detected
ble port failure
on the MCA
PCB when
attempting
nect the specified
port to quiet
tone.

ID of process
date of error
time of error

field

(Continued)

hh:mm

(18)

error
ID of
ID of
ID of
error
date
time

Processing

CORRECTIVE

eeee(pp)
INFO
=
mm/dd
hh:mm
=
=
=
=
=
=
=

and

TYPE

number
process

NOTE:
For reference
only,
error
message
is 1427.
e.

4.02

occurred

The operation
not complete
If problem
or replace

during

completed
with
in the allocated
is repetitive,
replace
faulty
110 device.

NOTE:
The
tar/ interface,
sage above
message.
If
mit path;
if

identity
of the
l/O device,
or
and indicated
“b” is an even
an odd number,

an unexpected
time period.
indicated

PCB,

suspected
faulty
FDD is provided
in
by the letters
“a”
number,
the fault
the the receive

PCB

Connector/
Interface/Device

0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
2
2
2

0
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
0
1
2

RAUP
RAUP
RAUP
RAUP
RAUP
RAUP
CIOP
CIOP
CIOP
CIOP
CIOP

TTY0
TTY0
n-Y1
TTY1
modem
interface
modem
interface
TTY/Service
Term’1
TTY/Service
Term?
FDDO
FDDl
FDD2
(Not Used)

result

FDD,

or did

or repair

PCB,
connecthe error mesand “b” in the
is in the transpath is faulty.

only.

4-7

Table
ALARM
f.

LTU
aaaa

FAILURE
TO bbbb

(W’
aaaa

=
=

bbbb

mm/dd
hh:mm

=
=

4.02

Alarm

Reporting

and

Processing

(Continued)

TYPE

CORRECTIVE
LTU

(18) PEN’S
mm/dd
hh:mm
ID of process
1st number
in range
by failure
last number
in range
ed by failure
date of error
time of error

NOTE:
For reference
only,
error
message
is 1424.

the

of PENS
of PENS

error

number

(or

Basic

Shelf)

The identified
communication
the following:

affected

(1) Blown

affect-

of this

clock

shelf and
with the

shelf

fuse

(2) A faulty

LTU

(3) A faulty

LTUC

failure

error.

LTUC
(where
applicable)
has lost
CE. The error
may be a result
of

on the

shelf

ACTION

PSU

power

front

supply,

panel.
LTUPS.

PCB.

(4) Loss of critical
signals
(CKA, SYP, or SYNR)
from
as a result
of an SMXTG
PCB or other
failure.

the

NOTE:
The PEN range
in the error message
identifies
the
shelf and PCB experiencing
faults.
The following
table correlates each possible
PEN range
to a specific
shelf and suspected
faulty
PCB. The associated
LTU clock
is indicated
in the fourth
column.
(Refer
also to Table 4.03 for LTUC PCB
alarm
information.)
aaaa
(PEN

bbbb
Range)

SHELF

0000
0300
1000
1400
2000
2400
3000
3400

0267
0637
1337
1737
2337
2737
3337
3737

Basic
Basic
LTU
LTU
LTU
LTU
LTU
LTU

NOTE:
If replacement
the fault condition,
Multibus

MBUS
T/O (pp)
LOC=aaaa:bbbb

(PP)’
aaaa:
bbbb
mm/dd
hh:mm

mm/dd

address
of program
the unsuccessful
date of error
time of error

MEM
PAR
ADDR=bbbb
eeee
(PP)’
aaaa’
bbbb’

4-a

eeee(pp)
MEMc

=
=
=
=
=

mm/dd
hh:mm

=
=

* = For

Siemens

Memory
processor.
service

ID of process

NOTE:
For reference
only,
error
message
is 1402.

the

which
memory

error

number

initiated
request

for

this

STAT=aaaa
mm/dd
hh:mm

error
ID of
error
error
memory
Shelf
date
time

number
process
information
information
PCB
of error
of error

field

service

1
1
2
2
3
3

SMXTG
SMXTG
LTUC
LTUC
LTUC
LTUC
LTUC
LTUC

LTU
CLK
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

0
1
0
1.
0
1

of the indicated
LTUC fails
replace
the SMXTG
PCB.

to correct

error.

hh:mm

=
=

timeout

PCB

slot

use

ID number

only.

in Basic

failed to respond
to a data
If problem
is repetitive,
representative.

request
consult

from the
Siemens

main
field

I
-

SATURN
Maintenance

IIE

EPABX
and Troubleshooting

A30806X5130-DllO-l-8920
Issue
1, May

Table
ALARM
(1) If eeee

4.02

Alarm

Reporting

and

Processing

(Continued)

TYPE

CORRECTIVE
Correctable

= 1405

1986

memory

parity

ACTION
error

on a MEM3

or MEM4

PCB.

A parity
error was detected
and corrected
on the MEM3
or
MEM4
PCB as identified
by the slot number
in this error
message.
If the problem
occurs
more than once in a single
week,
the identified
memory
PCB should
be replaced.
NOTE:
The
is provided

slot number
identity
of the faulty
in the following
error
message:

“MEM
PAR
ADDR=bbbb
c = slot
(2) If eeee

1405(pp)
MEMc

number

PCB

STAT=aaaa
mm/dd
hh:mm”
identity

Uncorrectable
memory
MEM3
or MEM4
PCB.

1410

memory

of of faulty
parity

error

memory
in control

PCB.
memory

on a

An uncorrectable
parity
error
was signaled
by the MEM3
or MEM4
PCB as identified
by the slot number
in this error
message.
If the problem
occurs
more than once in a single
month,
the identified
memory
PCB should
be replaced.
An
automatic
system
reload
is triggered.
NOTE:
The
is provided

slot number
identity
of the faulty
in the following
error
message:

“MEM
PAR
ADDR=bbbb
c
(3)

If eeee

= slot

141O(pp)
MEMc

number

PCB

STAT=aaaa
mm/dd
hh:mm”
identity

of faulty

Uncorrectable
memory
parity
a MEM3
or MEM4
PCB.

1411

memory

error

in dynamic

PCB.
memory

slot number
identity
of the faulty
in the following
error
message:

“MEM
PAR
ADDR=bbbb
c
(4) If eeee

= slot

number

Correctable

= 1414

Immediately

* =

For

Siemens

field

service

use

parity

of of faulty
error

error threshold
for
no further
correctable
replace

The identity
in the error

PCB

STAT=aaaa
mm/dd
hh:mm”
identity

memory

The correctable
been reached,

NOTE:
cated

1411(pp)
MEMc

memory

the

identified

of the memory
message
shown

memory

PCB.

on a memory

PCB.

this memory
PCB has
error will be reported.
memory

PCB.

PCB is provided
for error
number

as indi1405.

only.

4-9

SATURN
Maintenance

IIE EPABX
and Troubleshooting

Table
ALARM
i.

MEM
PROT
(pp)
ADDR=cccc:dddd
=

(PP)’
bbbb’
cccc:
dddd’
mmldd
hh:mm

LOC=aaaa:bbbb
mm/dd

ID of process
aaaa:
error
information

=
=
=

error
date
time

(18)’

=
=
=

PIMD
mmldd
(PP)’
wxyz
mm/dd
hh:mm

hh:mm

the

error

number

for

(pp)

The
main
memory.

processor

If problem
representative.

the

error

number

for

ERR

eeee
(07)’
wxyz
dd/mm
hh:mm
(1) If eeee

eeee(07)

error
ID of
PEN
date
time

=
=
=
=
=
=

consult

write

Siemens

equipment
test routines
system
memory
support
a missing,
battery-in
the

failed
PSU.

4-10

Siemens

PIMD

field

service

have
hardware.

detected

the

error

number

for

MSM

or SLMD

overcurrent

error.

The identified
digital
device
has drawn
too much
from the associated
PIMD
or SLMD
PCB causing
shutdown.
The device
has been
taken
out-of-service
must be manually
placed
back
in-service.
Possible
sources
are:
this

(1) Faulty

console

(2) Faulty
cabling

cabling
between
between
SDT

(3) Faulty

PIMD
short

NOTE:
provided

The

PIMD

or SLMD

(if PIMD);

or SLMD
on

faulty

SDT

or DCI

current
a device
and
trouble

(if SLMD).

console
and PIMD
PCB;
or DCI and SLMD
PCB.

faulty

PCB.

line.

affected
digital
device
is identified
in the error
message
shown
above.

by the

PEN

PEN=wxyz
mm/dd
hh:mm
number
process
of error
of error

1464

field

protected

or discharged

failure.

An excessive
number
of PIMD or SLMD
or SLMD
failure
or loss of synchronization)
on the identified
port. The device
has
service
and must be manually
placed
* = For

into

this

(4) Possible

PIMD

ACTION

attempted

repetitive,

The error
indicates
memory
support

PEN=wxyz

NOTE:
For reference
only,
error
message
is 143.5.

(Continued)

The automatic
failure
of the

(18)

ID of process
PEN
date of error
time of error

=
=
=
=

Processing

this

ID of process
date of error
time of error

OVERCUR
hh:mm

and

CORRECTIVE

FAILURE

NOTE:
For reference
only,
error
message
is 1426.
k.

Reporting

information
of error
of error

MEMORY
SUPPORT
mm/dd
hh:mm

mm/dd
hh:mm

Alarm

TYPE

NOTE:
For reference
only,
error
message
is 1406.
i.

4.02

service

use

only.

error

events
(PIMD
were detected
been
taken
out-ofback
in-service.

SATURN
Maintenance

IIE

EPABX
and Troubleshooting

A30808-X5130-DllO-l-8920
Issue
1, May

Table
ALARM

4.02

Alarm

Reportinq

and

- (Continued)
.

Processinq

TYPE

CORRECTIVE
NOTE:
This
is removed
Possible

(2)

If eeee

1465

or SLMD

PCB

sources:

(1) Faulty

console,

(2) Faulty
PCB.

cabling

(3) Faulty

PIMD

ACTION

error also occurs
when
a PIMD
without
first taking
it out-of-service.

trouble

(4) Faulty
LTUC
dicates

1986

SDT,

or DCI.

between

apparatus

or SLMD

PIMD

or SLMD

PCB.

SMXTG
PCB if PEN
PCB (first),
then faulty
LTU Shelf.

or SLMD

and

response

indicates
SMXTG

Basic
(second)

Shelf;
faulty
if PEN in-

error.

The identified
port has repeatedly
failed to respond
to restart
commands
issued
by the common
control.
The digital device
has been taken out-of-service
and must be manually
placed
back
in-service.
Possible

trouble

(1) Faulty

console,

SDT,

(2) Faulty
PCB.

cabling

between

(3) Faulty

PIMD

(4) Faulty
LTUC
dicates

PRESENCE

(PP)’
wxyz
mmldd
hh:mm

(pp)

=
=
=
=

PEN=wxyz
mm/dd

ID of
PEN
date
time

or SLMD

device

not

error

number

for

this

Siemens

field

service

use

PIMD

or SLMD

PCB.
indicates
SMXTG

A large
number
of unexplained
cate the following:
the

and

Basic
(second)

Shelf:
faulty
if PEN in-

connected.

(1)

A blown
panel.

BASIC

(2)

A faulty

LTUPS

or a fault

(3)

A faulty

LTUC

LTU

(4)

A faulty

SMXTG

PCB

Intermittent
unexplained
of the previous
mentioned
supply
ring synchronization
* = For

apparatus

The central
processor
has detected
scriber
line module
(SLMA-0,
SLMA-S,
defined
line circuit
on the PCB should
error
when
the PCB is removed.

hh:mm

process
number
of error
of error

NOTE:
For reference
only,
error
message
is 1408.

or DCI.

SMXTG
PCB if PEN
PCB (first),
then faulty
LTU Shelf.

(5) Digital
m.

sources:

the removal
or .%A16
generate

presence

shelf

fuse

in the
the

affected

of a subPCB). Each
a presence

errors

may

indj-

the

PSU

front

PSU.
shelf.

PCB.
presence
problems,
circuitry

errors
may
or a failure
contained

indicate
any
of the power
in the PSU.

only.

4-11

SATURN
Maintenance

IIE

EPABX
and Troubleshooting

A30808-X5130-DllO-l-B920
Issue
1, May

Table
ALARM
r1.

RELOAD
mm/dd

: MANUAL
hh:mm
=
=
=

(PP)’
mm/dd
hh:mm
NOTE:
error
C1.

F1.

the

: RECOVERY
mm/dd

the

NOTE:
error

number

for

(Continued)

the

FAILURE

error

number

for

this

error

number

for

this

(pp)

the

error

number

for

via

the

CIOP

Reset

is followed
by a ‘S&V TRAP”
type of recovery
(i.e., a reload).

pushbutton,

message

in-

A hardware
fault on the MEM4
PCB
caused
a loss
memory
refresh.
An automatic
system
reload
has been
itiated
and completed
as a result
of the fault.

of
in-

This message
dicating
the

in-

If the

this

type

problem

is followed
by a “S/W
TRAP”
of recovery
(i.e., a reload).
is repetitive,

replace

the

MEM4

message

PCB.

Software
has
automatically
a RECOVERY

initiated
and completed
a system
reload
either
due to excessive
restarts
or manually
through
CMU
Procedure
(BEG
RECOVERY).

This message
dicating
the

is followed
by a “S/W
TRAP”
type of recovery
(i.e., a reload).

If system
reload
due to excessive
restarts
sult Siemens
field service
representative.
A system
a primary
memory

ID of process
date of error
time of error

For reference
only,
message
is 1489.

reload,-initiated
completed.

ACTION

this

ID of process
date of error
time of error

: POWER
hh:mm
=
=
=

error

ACTION
hh:mm

For reference
only,
message
is 1486.

(PP)’
mm/dd
hh:mm

A system
has been

ID of process
date of error
time of error

For reference
only,
message
is 1485.

RELOAD
mm/dd

Processing

This
message
dicating
the

=
=
=

NOTE:
error

and

CORRECTIVE

ID of process
date of error
time of error

(PP)’
mm/dd
hh:mm

=
=
=

Reporting

(pp)

: MEM4
REFRESH
(pp) mm/dd
hh:mm

(PP)’
mm/dd
hh:mm

C1.

RESET

RELOAD
FAILURE

RELOAD
(PP)

Alarm

TYPE

For reference
only,
message
is 1488.

NOTE:
error

4.02

1986

reload
power
PCBs.

has
loss

been
initiated
and
and loss of +SVdc

message

is repetitive,

in-

con-

completed
due to
power
input to the

(1) In systems
equipped
with an MSM,
the capacity
of the
MSM battery
to provide
power
to the memory
PCBs was exceeded
or an MSM battery
failure
has occurred.
The MSM
battery
will be recharged
to capacity
during
normal
system
operation.
If a battery
failure is suspected,
perform
the MSM
Test provided
in Table 4.04.
(2) In systems
without
an MSM, a primary
power
failure
has
occurred
and resulted
in the loss of +5Vdc
input
to the
memory
PCBs.
Restoration
of primary
power
returns
the system to operation.
The message
shown
message
indicating
If system
reloads
due
tive, consult
Siemens

RELOAD
FAILURE
(PP)’
mm/dd
hh:mm

: WATCHDOG
(pp)
mm/dd
=
=
=

4-12

Siemens

field

service

This
message
dicating
the
the
use

to excessive
field service

CIOP watchdog
timing logic
tern reload
due to excessive
software
failed to acknowledge

ID of process
date of error
time of error

NOTE:
For reference
only,
error message
is 1487.
* = For

TIMING
hh:mm

above
is followed
the type of recovery

error

number

for this

If problem
persists,

by a “S/w
TRAP”
(i.e., a reload).

power
failures
representative.

is repetitive,
replace
consult
Siemens
field

repeti-

has initiated
and completed
a SFwatchdog
timeouts
or because
a watchdog
timeout
interrupt.

is followed
by a “S/W
TRAP”
type of recovery
(i.e., a reload).

only.

are

message

the CIOP
PCB. If problem
service
representative.

in-

SATURN
Maintenance

IIE

EPABX
and Troubleshooting

A30808-X5130-DllO-l-8920
Issue
1, May

Table
ALARM
s.

4.02

Alarm

Reporting

and

Processing

(Continued)

TYPE

CORRECTIVE

RESTART
: POWER
FAILURE
mm/dd
hh:mm
=
ID of process
rn!ZZ
=
date of error
=
time of error
hh:mm
NOTE:
For reference
only,
error
message
is 1470.

(pp)

the

error

In an
itiated
MSM
PCBS.

number

for

this

ACTION

MSM
equipped
system,
a hard restart
has been
inand completed
due to a momentary
power
loss. The
maintained
the +SVdc
power
input
to the memory

This message
dicating
the

type

is followed
by a “S/W
TRAP”
message
of recovery
(i.e., a hard restart).

If problem
is repetitive,
check
lbcal power
sult Siemens
field service
representative.
t.

SMXTG
mmldd

CLOCK
hh:mm

FAILURE

=
=
=

ID of process
date of error
time of error

(PP)’
mm/dd
hh:mm

The automatic
sible failure

(pp)

NOTE:
For reference
only,
error
message
is 1425.

A system

the

error

number

for

this

is automatically

If the master
clock
the failed
common
process
telephone

(PP)’
aaaa:
bbbb”
mmtdd
hh:mm

x (pp)
mm/dd

the

watchdog
identity;
ID of process

=
=
=

error
date
time

S/W
cccc

TRAP
dddd

eeee
(PP)’
aaaa’
bbbb’
cccc*
dddd’
mm/dd
hh:mm
(1) If eeee

eeee

=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=

(pp)

error
ID of
error
error
error
error
date
time
=

SMXTG

(2j

Faulty

clap

NOTE:
The
ing list:

information
of error
of error

NOTE:
For reference
only,
error
message
is 1407.

Faulty

error

number

for

watchdog

system

may

clear

failures)
sources:

the

occurs,

a possible
software
consult
Siemens
field

2 = background

(idle

Service

timeout

(x)

is provided

in the

loop erservice

follow-

watchdog
time)

watchdog

aaaa bbbb
mmldd
hh:mm

number
process
information
information
information
information
of error
of error

1039

field

a hard failure,
be unable
to

this

If the
Siemens

reload

intermittent
trouble

identity

(interrupt)

terminal

A service
terminal
cated
time period.

* = For

a pos-

Pm.

1 = foreground

the

con-

PCB.

A system
watchdog
detected
ror. If problem
is repetitive,
representative.

hh:mm

=
=

(1)

and

detected
clock.

has actually
experienced
control
equipment
will
calls until it is corrected.

is intermittent,
condition.

in-

initiated.

If a hard failure
(or repetitive
the following
are the possible

S/W LOOP
ERROR
LOC=aaaa:bbbb

source

equipment
test routines
have
of the SMXTG
master
system
reload

If problem
intermittent

1986

service

use

only

problem

operation

is repetitive,

error.
did

replace

not

complete

the

CIOP

in the

PCB.

allo-

SATURN
Maintenance

IIE

EPABX
and Troubleshooting

Table
ALARM
(2)

If eeee

1300

4.02

Alarm

Reporting

and

Processing

(Continued)

TYPE

CORRECTIVE
System

restart

ACTION

marker.

This error entry logs the date and time whenkver
the system
goes through
a system
restart
(recovery).
Analyze
the errors
preceding
this error to determine
the cause
of the restart.
NOTE:
The
message:
“SNV
cccc

TRAP
dddd

aaaa

(3) If eeee

1403

type

of restart

1300

= type

(05)

is identified

in the

as follows:

If aaaa

= 0000;

soft

restart

(calls

preserved)

If aaaa

= 0001;

hard

restart

(calls

dropped)

If aaaa

system

Spurious

memory

error

aaaa
bbbb
mmldd
hh:mm”

of restart,

0002;

following

reload

from

disk

(calls

dropped)

interrupt.

A memory
error interrupt
occurred,
but the main processor
could
not identify
the memory
PCB which
signaled
the error. If the error
is repetitive,
systematically
replace
each of
the memory
(MEMS
and MEM4)
PCBs
until the faulty
PCB
is located.
(4)

If eeee

1404

Invalid

memory

interrupt.

A memory
error
interrupt
occurred,
but the memory
PCB
which
generated
the error
cannot
correctly
identify
the error type. If the error is repetitive,
replace
the faulty
memory
(MEMB
or MEM4)
PCB.
NOTE:
Slot identification
of the faulty
memory
PCB
tion (in the COMMON
EQUIPMENT
section
of the
Shelf)
is indicated
in the error
message
below:
“SNV TRAP
0000
0000
aaaa

1404

Memory

(pp)

slot

aaaa
mm/dd

0000
0001
0002
---I-- 0003
Not

currently

System

clock

System
failure,

software
resulting

(5) If eeee

1409

A system

number

SLOT

l
l

NAME
MEMO
MEMl
MEM2
MEM3

used.
failure.

reload

If the master
clock
the failed
common
process
telephone

4-14

0000
hh:mm”

identification

aaaa

locaBasic

has detected
a possible
in a loss of clock
interrupts.
is automatically

master

clock

initiated.

has actually
experienced
control
equipment
will
calls
until it is corrected.

a hard failure,
be unable
to

SATURN
Maintenance

IIE

A30808-X5130-DllO-l-8920
Issue
1, May

EPABX
and Troubleshoohng

Table
rXJ
_____ 4..__

ALARM

Alarm
Reoortino
and
_.._....
.._r
_..... ~ -..-

Processino
-----

(Continued) ---,
..._ ,--

TYPE

CORRECTIVE
If the prpbtem
the intermittent
If a hard
possible

(6)

If eeee

= 1444

1986

is intermittent,
condition.

failure
sources

the

system

reload

(or repet&e
intermittent
of the trouble
are:

(1) Faulty

SMXTG

(2) Faulty

CIOP

PCB.

Disk

error

during

write

ACTION
may

failures)

clear

occurs,

PCB.
.
data

base

save

operation.

A disk error was detected
during
a data base save operation (via CMU
procedure
SAVE CUSTDATA).
The disk save
operation
was aborted
and the contents
of the disk are now
questionable.
This error stack
entry is accompanied
by an
immediate
error message
to craft personnel
who attempted the save operation.
Craft
personnel
should
reattempt
the save operation
successful.
if the problem
is repetitive,
the disk, disk
(FDD)
module,
or the CIOP
PCB may be faulty.

until
drive

NOTE:
The system
should
not be left unattended
with a
questionable
disk in the disk drive (FDD)
module,
since this
could
result
in a lengthy
outage
if a reload
from disk should
become
necessary
for any reason.
(7) if eeee

1445

Disk

PDF Siemens Saturn IIE EPABX General Description

Saturn IIE EPABX General Description Saturn IIE EPABX General Description

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation